Operation Manual
The Steinberg Documentation Team: Cristina Bachmann, Heiko Bischoff, Lillie Harris, Christina Kaboth, Insa Mingers, Matthias Obrecht, Sabine Pfeifer, Benjamin Schütte Translation: Ability InterBusiness Solutions (AIBS), Moon Chen, Jérémie Dal Santo, Rosa Freitag, Josep Llodra Grimalt, Vadim Kupriianov, Filippo Manfredi, Roland Münchow, Boris Rogowski, Sergey Tamarovsky This document provides improved access for people who are blind or have low vision.
Table of Contents 396 396 397 398 399 10 New features 14 14 14 15 17 Introduction Platform-independent documentation Usage of musical terms Conventions How you can reach us 18 18 Dorico concepts Design philosophy and higher-level concepts 27 27 40 49 51 User interface Project window Workspace setup Preferences dialog Key Commands page in the Preferences dialog 57 57 58 60 61 61 63 79 81 Project and file handling Hub Starting new projects Opening projects/files Projects from different versions of D
Table of Contents 759 Bar numbers and repeats 763 763 766 767 768 769 771 773 776 777 778 779 779 781 Beaming Beam groups Beaming notes together manually Changing the direction of partial beams Beam placement relative to the staff Beam slants Centered beams Creating cross-staff beams Beam corners Secondary beams Tuplets within beams Rests within beams Stemlets Fanned beams 784 785 Note and rest grouping Creating custom beat groupings for meters 787 788 Brackets and braces Changing bracket grouping a
Table of Contents 839 915 839 840 Hiding/Showing clefs according to layout transpositions Changing the octave of clefs Clefs with octave indicators 842 843 843 844 845 849 849 851 Octave lines Project-wide engraving options for octave lines Lengthening/Shortening octave lines Changing the angles of octave lines Positions of octave lines Deleting octave lines Octave lines in Engrave mode Tucking index properties 853 854 Cues General placement and notation conventions for cues Project-wide engraving o
Table of Contents 1118 1119 1120 1121 Guitar post-bends Vibrato bar dives and returns Bend intervals Project-wide engraving options for guitar bends, pre-bends, post-bends, and vibrato bar dives and returns Hiding/Showing guitar bend hold lines Changing the direction of guitar pre-bends/ pre-dives Hiding/Showing accidentals on guitar prebends/pre-dives Deleting guitar pre-bends, pre-dives, and postbends Moving guitar bends, pre-bends/pre-dives, post-bends, holds, and vibrato bar dives and returns graphica
Table of Contents 1180 1181 1186 1189 1189 1190 1191 1193 1194 1198 1199 1204 1206 Playing techniques Project-wide engraving options for playing techniques Adding text to playing techniques Erasing the background of text playing techniques Hiding/Showing playing techniques Positions of playing techniques Lengthening/Shortening playing techniques Playing technique continuation lines Groups of playing techniques Custom playing techniques 1214 1216 1217 1217 1224 1227 1228 1229 1229 1237 Lines Line compon
Table of Contents 1360 1361 1367 1368 Hiding/Showing staff labels Hiding/Showing staff labels at system/frame breaks Instrument transpositions in staff labels Hiding/Showing instrument change labels at the start of flows Grouping the staff labels of adjacent identical instruments Changing the staff label numbering style Showing vocal staff labels in uppercase/title case Staff labels for percussion kits Staff labels on condensed staves 1371 1371 1372 1372 1373 1378 1385 1386 1388 Staves Per-layout optio
Table of Contents 1503 1505 1507 1513 1516 1518 1520 1521 1521 1522 1523 Notations on notes in percussion kits Percussion kit presentation types Playing techniques for unpitched percussion instruments Percussion legends Voices in percussion kits Unpitched percussion in Play mode Universal Indian Drum Notation 1527 Voices Per-flow notation options for voices Hiding/Showing voice colors Allowing/Disallowing noteheads in opposing voices to overlap Note positions in multiple-voice contexts Unused voices Not
New features New Features in Version 3.5.10 Tempo track import ● When importing tempo tracks, you can now choose to import into a new flow instead of an existing flow. See Importing tempo tracks. Figured bass improvements ● The figured bass popover now accepts and interprets more entries, including double and triple accidentals and the overall and suspension durations of figured bass figures. See Figured bass popover.
New features ● You can now optionally set a middle thickness for wedge line bodies, for example, to create a single wedge line body that starts thin, gets thicker in the middle, then thin again at the end. See Edit Line Bodies dialog. Rehearsal mark enclosures ● You can now choose rounded rectangle rehearsal mark enclosures, in addition to the existing rectangle and circle enclosures. See Changing the rehearsal mark enclosure type. New Features in Version 3.5.
New features Used chord diagrams grids ● You can now automatically show a grid above the start of each flow that contains all chord diagrams used in the flow, including different voicings of the same chord. See Hiding/ Showing used chord diagrams grids. Figured bass ● Dorico Pro now offers comprehensive support for figured bass, including allowing you to input figures using numbers or chord symbols, from which Dorico Pro calculates the figures required.
New features Slur improvements ● You can now change the placement of individual articulations of duration relative to slur endpoints. See Changing the placement of articulations relative to slurs. ● New options have been added to the Slurs page in Engraving Options that improve the default appearance, position, and shape of slurs in various contexts, such as when they cross system/frame breaks or join notes with different stem directions.
Introduction Thank you very much for purchasing Dorico Pro. We are delighted that you have chosen Steinberg's scoring application and hope that you will enjoy using it for years to come. Dorico is a next-generation application for producing beautiful sheet music, whether you are a composer, arranger, music engraver, publisher, instrumentalist, teacher, or student. Whether you want to print your music or share it in a digital format, Dorico is the most sophisticated program available.
Introduction Conventions American name British name Half note Minim Quarter note Crotchet Eighth note Quaver Sixteenth note Semiquaver Thirty-second note Demisemiquaver Sixty-fourth note Hemidemisemiquaver Hundred twenty-eighth note Semihemidemisemiquaver Two hundred fifty-sixth note Demisemihemidemisemiquaver Half-step Semitone Whole step Whole tone Staff Stave Bar/Measure Bar NOTE This documentation only uses “bar”.
Introduction Conventions Tip Adds further information or useful suggestions. Example Provides you with an example. Result Shows the result of the procedure. After Completing This Task Informs you about actions or tasks that you can perform after completing the procedure. Related Links Lists related topics that you can find in this documentation. Markup Elements of the user interface are highlighted throughout the documentation.
Introduction How you can reach us You can also do one of the following: ● Choose Help > Key Commands to open the Dorico Key Commands window, which provides an overview of all available key commands. ● Search for key commands of specific functions or menu items in the Preferences dialog. In this dialog, you can also assign new key commands or change default key commands.
Dorico concepts Dorico is based on a number of key concepts that come from its design philosophy. We recommend familiarizing yourself with these concepts, as this will greatly enhance your ability to work efficiently with Dorico and to navigate more easily through this documentation. Design philosophy and higher-level concepts Deep design considerations are required to create a notation software like Dorico, which might be of particular interest to users familiar with scoring applications.
Dorico concepts Design philosophy and higher-level concepts smaller number of staves, a full score with each player's music on separate staves, a custom score layout containing just the piano and vocal staves for choral rehearsals, and an instrumental part for each player that only contains the music belonging to them. Projects in Dorico A project is an individual file that you create within Dorico Pro.
Dorico concepts Design philosophy and higher-level concepts adjusting the mix, and changing the sounding duration of notes in playback without affecting their notated duration. Print In Print mode, you can print your layouts or export them as graphics files. When printing layouts, you can specify the paper size and other options, such as duplex or booklet printing.
Dorico concepts Design philosophy and higher-level concepts NOTE Section players cannot double instruments, but they can play divisi. This means that they can be divided into smaller units, which is commonly required for strings. By using the concept of players, Dorico Pro makes it much easier to handle, for example, instrument changes, divisi, and condensing music for multiple players onto a smaller number of staves.
Dorico concepts Design philosophy and higher-level concepts Popovers Popovers allow you to input different notations and perform tasks, such as transposing a selection of notes, using only your computer keyboard. They are temporary value fields that use text entries for different items and tasks, and there are specific popovers for different purposes.
Dorico concepts Design philosophy and higher-level concepts In combination with time signatures and Dorico’s understanding of their corresponding meters, this allows you to input only the notes you want with the duration required. It is not necessary to input rests between notes or input ties for notes that cross the half-bar, for example.
Dorico concepts Design philosophy and higher-level concepts Similarly, you can easily push notes to later rhythmic positions or pull them in to earlier ones using Insert mode without the risk of them being incorrectly notated. It also means you can think of items existing in the music independently of notes, because items exist at a particular rhythmic position, rather than being attached to notes. In Dorico, the rhythmic position of notes and items is separate from their graphical position on the page.
Dorico concepts Design philosophy and higher-level concepts Master pages in Dorico Master pages function like templates in Dorico Pro, allowing the same page formatting to be applied to multiple different pages in different layouts. Master pages contain arrangements of frames. Frames are boxes in which you can display text, music, and graphics.
Dorico concepts Design philosophy and higher-level concepts Options in Engraving Options affect the whole project but do not affect any other projects unless you save your settings as default. Playback Options Contains options that control what you hear in playback and how notation items affect playback, including setting a dynamic curve for how much different dynamics affect the volume, whether repeats are included in playback, and whether you want a gap between flows.
User interface The user interface of Dorico Pro is designed to be as unobtrusive as possible while keeping all of the important tools at your fingertips. This chapter introduces you to key aspects of the user interface. Project window Dorico Pro’s main project window allows you to access all the options and tools you need to work on a project. You can open multiple project windows for the same project or for different projects.
User interface Project window selected layout. In Play mode, this area contains an event display that shows the effects of manipulating the playback of your score. In Print mode, the print preview area shows a preview of how your project will appear when printed onto paper or exported into a graphics file format. 4 Panel Provides notes and notations that you need to create and edit your music. Different panels contain different items and functions according to the mode.
User interface Project window Allow to you quick access to the main transport functions, including Play, Record, and Click. 6 Activate Project Shows which project is activated for playback when you have multiple projects open. RELATED LINKS Modes in Dorico on page 19 Mini transport on page 29 Videos on page 146 Mixer on page 635 Workspace options The workspace options in the middle of the toolbar provide options that allow you to select different layouts and to change the working environment.
User interface Project window Time display showing bars and beats Time display showing elapsed time Time display showing the timecode You can change the content shown in the time display by clicking it. Fixed Tempo Mode Displays the tempo used for both playback and recording. The value changes according to the current position of the playhead and its appearance changes according to its current mode. You can change the tempo mode by clicking the beat unit.
User interface Project window Playing back music on page 620 Moving the playhead on page 619 Changing the tempo mode on page 625 Changing the content shown in the transport display on page 640 Changing the click settings on page 221 MIDI recording on page 218 Mixer on page 635 Tab bar The tab bar in Dorico Pro allows you to display different layouts within the same project window. It is located between the toolbar and the music area. TIP If you cannot see the tab bar, click Show Tabs in the toolbar.
User interface Project window Project start area The project start area is displayed in the middle of the project window in Setup, Write, and Engrave modes when you set up a new empty project. When you add at least one player, the view changes into the music area. Project start area The project start area shows cards that allow you to add your first players. To add players, click one of the cards: Add Solo Player Adds an individual player to whom you can assign one or more instruments.
User interface Project window Music area showing a new choir piece in page view The music area displays layouts in either galley view or page view. In Engrave mode, layouts always appear in page view. The tab bar above the music area allows you to open multiple layouts in the project simultaneously and switch between them. The scroll bars to the right and to the bottom of the music area allow you to scroll within the layout.
User interface Project window Print preview area The print preview area is the central part of the project window in Print mode that shows a preview of what will be printed or exported as a graphic. Print preview area displaying a score set to print 2-up In the print preview area, you can scroll through the pages that are shown, but you cannot edit your layouts. If you want to make changes, you must switch to Setup, Write, or Engrave mode.
User interface Project window Panels The panels in the project window provide the notes, notations, and functions that you need to set up, write, edit, and format your music. They are located on the left, right, and bottom of the project window. Panels in Write mode 1 Left panel. In Write mode, this is the Notes panel. 2 Right panel. In Write mode, this is the Notations panel. 3 Bottom panel. In Write mode and Engrave mode, this is the Properties panel.
User interface Project window Some panels are displayed by default. You can hide/show each panel individually or all of them at the same time. RELATED LINKS Modes in Dorico on page 19 Hiding/Showing panels on page 41 Project window in Setup mode on page 83 Project window in Write mode on page 152 Project window in Engrave mode on page 464 Project window in Play mode on page 572 Project window in Print mode on page 685 Toolboxes Toolboxes are available in Write, Engrave, and Play modes.
User interface Project window 2 Status display Displays information about the current layout and selection, divided in up to three sections, which are, from left to right: 3 ● Transposition of the current layout ● The bar/range of bars of the current selection ● Summary of the selection, for example, the pitch and voice of a single selected note or the implied chord of multiple selected notes Disclosure arrow Allows you to show/hide the bottom panel in Setup, Write, and Engrave modes.
User interface Project window Hand Tool Allows you to move the view within the music area. TIP ● To use the other tool briefly without selecting it, you can press Shift in addition to using the mouse. ● You can change the default selection tool for all future projects on the Note Input and Editing page in Preferences.
User interface Project window RELATED LINKS Preferences dialog on page 49 Switching to galley/page view on page 46 Page formatting on page 393 Condensing on page 437 Players on page 97 Instruments on page 103 Page arrangements for page view You can change the way pages are arranged for display in the music area. Spreads Horizontally Displays pages in pairs as two-page spreads, with each pair laid out from left to right in a row.
User interface Workspace setup Disclosure arrows Disclosure arrows indicate that objects and menus can be expanded/contracted, either vertically or horizontally. In Dorico Pro, disclosure arrows are commonly used to hide/show panels, sections, and advanced options, and to expand/contract cards, such as player cards in the Players panel in Setup mode.
User interface Workspace setup NOTE Implicit rests are not items. ● Select a layout from the layout selector in the toolbar. RESULT The selected layout is opened in the music area. It replaces the layout previously open in the tab. RELATED LINKS Layouts on page 128 Implicit vs. explicit rests on page 1313 Hiding/Showing panels You can hide/show individual or multiple panels. This is useful if you want to see more of the music area, for example.
User interface Workspace setup EXAMPLE Appearance when panels are shown Appearance when all panels were previously shown but are now all hidden Opening new tabs You can open multiple tabs in the same project window, which you can use to display multiple layouts or different views of the same layout. For example, you can show your full score layout in page view in one tab and in galley view in another tab.
User interface Workspace setup 2. Select a layout to open in the new tab in any of the following ways: ● Click one of the icons. ● Select a layout from the list at the bottom. ● Select a layout from the layout selector in the toolbar. RESULT The layout that you choose opens in the active tab. TIP You can also switch between different layouts within the same tab.
User interface Workspace setup ● Press Ctrl-Tab to cycle through all open tabs. ● Press Ctrl-Shift-Tab to cycle through all open tabs in reverse order. ● Click the tab to which you want to switch. Changing the order of tabs You can move tabs to a different position on the tab bar. PROCEDURE ● Click and drag a tab to the new position. The other tabs move to show where the dragged tab will be positioned.
User interface Workspace setup Moving tabs to other windows You can move tabs to another open window of the same project to show the corresponding layouts in a new window. NOTE ● The layouts must belong to the same project. If you attempt to move a tab to a window of a different project, a new window is created for the project to which the layout belongs. ● You can only move tabs to other windows if you have opened at least two tabs.
User interface Workspace setup Within Dorico Pro, you can also hide/show the panels on the right, left, and at the bottom of the window. PROCEDURE ● Choose View > Full Screen. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK To return to the default view, choose View > Full Screen again.
User interface Workspace setup NOTE ● Note spacing is unjustified in galley view and there is no automatic vertical collision avoidance, so notes and items might overlap. You can change the default gaps between staves in galley view on the Vertical Spacing page in Setup > Layout Options. ● You can change the default view type used for all projects in the View section of the General page in Preferences.
User interface Workspace setup Changing the page color You can change the color of pages in each of the different layout types, for example, to help you identify whether you are in a part layout or full score layout, or to make reading the music easier or more comfortable. By default, full score and custom score layouts have white pages, while part layouts have cream pages. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-, to open Preferences. 2. Click General in the category list. 3.
User interface Preferences dialog 4. Change the background color for Write mode and/or Engrave mode in one of the following ways: ● If you chose Gradient and want to use a preset selection of colors, select it from the Preset menu. ● If you chose Gradient and want to use a custom selection of colors, either click each color preview and select a color in the Select Color (Windows)/Colors (macOS) dialog or enter color codes into the value fields.
User interface Preferences dialog The Preferences dialog contains the following: 1 Search categories field Allows you to filter categories and section titles according to your entry. TIP You can set the focus to the Search categories field by pressing Ctrl/Cmd-L . You can set the focus away by pressing Tab . 2 Category list Contains the categories of options that you can view and change in the dialog.
User interface Key Commands page in the Preferences dialog ● Search pages field: Allows you to enter the term you want to search for. You can set the focus to the Search pages field by pressing Ctrl/Cmd-F . ● Previous match: Allows you to navigate to the previous match on the page. You can also navigate to the previous match by pressing Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-G . ● Next match: Allows you to navigate to the next match on the page. You can also navigate to the next match by pressing Ctrl/Cmd-G .
User interface Key Commands page in the Preferences dialog Allows you to search for menu items and functions to view, change, or add key commands. Because there are multiple levels of disclosure arrows before you reach many menu items and functions, this is often the quickest way to find what you are looking for. 2 Menu items and functions Displays the menu items and functions that can be assigned key commands. The list can be filtered using the Search field.
User interface Key Commands page in the Preferences dialog The interactive key commands map as it appears when US English is selected The Dorico Key Commands map opens in a web browser. It allows you to do any of the following: ● To see the available key commands, select a context. The context of a key command is the mode in which it can be used. Key commands that have a global context work in all modes.
User interface Key Commands page in the Preferences dialog For particularly long names, you can hover over them to see a tool tip. RESULT If the function has a key command, it is shown in the list of assigned key commands. TIP You can also search for functions in the interactive key commands map.
User interface Key Commands page in the Preferences dialog 4. Click MIDI Learn . 5. Press the key or button on your MIDI keyboard that you want to assign to the selected parameter. 6. Click Add MIDI Command. 7. Click Apply, then Close. Changing the keyboard layout You can change the keyboard layout in Dorico Pro to that of another language. This allows you to use the predefined key commands for the selected language. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-, to open Preferences. 2.
User interface Key Commands page in the Preferences dialog 4. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT All custom key commands are deleted and the default key commands are reinstated. 56 Dorico Pro 3.5.
Project and file handling In addition to opening and importing/exporting projects and other file formats, project and file handling also includes auto-save and project backups. RELATED LINKS Starting new projects on page 58 File import and export on page 63 Auto-save on page 79 Project backups on page 81 Hub When you start Dorico Pro, the Hub opens. The Hub keeps you up-to-date with the latest Dorico information and tutorials, and assists you with organizing your projects.
Project and file handling Starting new projects Displays either recent projects or project templates, depending on your selection on the left of the dialog. 5 Open Other Allows you to search for and open any other project file in the File Explorer/macOS Finder. 6 New from Template (project template selected) Creates a new project using the selected project template. This option is only available if you have selected a project template.
Project and file handling Starting new projects Starting new projects from project templates Dorico Pro provides multiple project templates that you can use to start a new project, for example, multiple types of orchestras and vocal ensembles. PROCEDURE 1. In the Hub, select one of the following project template categories: ● Orchestral ● Band ● Jazz ● Chamber ● Choral and Vocal ● Solo 2. Select a project template in the list. 3. Click New from Template.
Project and file handling Opening projects/files Jazz Popular ensembles commonly used to perform jazz, such as big band or jazz trio. Chamber Typically small ensembles containing only a few players, such as string quartet. Choral and Vocal Ensembles containing voices, including popular choir arrangements, such as SATB unaccompanied. Solo Ensembles containing only a single player/instrument, such as a solo organ or guitar with tablature.
Project and file handling Projects from different versions of Dorico Opening recent projects from the Hub You can open a project on which you have recently worked from the Steinberg Hub. PROCEDURE 1. In the Hub, click Recent Projects. 2. In the list, select a recent project in any the following ways: ● Press Up Arrow / Down Arrow to navigate to the project file name, then press Return to open it. ● Double-click a project file name. ● Select a project file name and click Open Selected Project.
Project and file handling Missing Fonts dialog The Missing Fonts dialog comprises the following: 1 Missing Family Contains a list of font families included in the project but missing on your computer. 2 Missing Style Contains a list of the specific styles within the corresponding font families that are included in the project but missing on your computer. 3 Used By Contains a list of the places in the project where the corresponding font is used.
Project and file handling File import and export Paragraph Styles dialog on page 543 Text editor options in Write mode on page 329 Text editor options in Engrave mode on page 548 File import and export External files are files in different formats than Dorico projects, such as MIDI, MusicXML, or tempo tracks. It is possible in Dorico Pro both to import and export different types of files.
Project and file handling File import and export RELATED LINKS Opening projects/files on page 60 Flows on page 126 Flow Import Options dialog The Flow Import Options dialog allows you to determine whether players in imported flows are merged with existing players in the project and which flows from within other projects you want to import. ● You can open the Flow Import Options dialog by choosing File > Import > Flows and opening a Dorico project from the File Explorer/macOS Finder.
Project and file handling File import and export 3. In the Select flows to export list, activate the checkbox for each flow you want to export. You can also click Select All or Select None at the bottom of the list. 4. Activate/Deactivate Export layouts as separate files. 5. Optional: If you activated Export layouts as separate files, activate the checkbox for each layout you want to export in the Select layouts to export list. You can also click Select All or Select None at the bottom of the list. 6.
Project and file handling File import and export Allows you to export each flow as a separate file instead of all the selected flows as a single file. 2 Select flows to export Contains a list of all the flows in the project. Flows are included in the export when their checkbox is activated. 3 Export layouts as separate files Allows you to export each layout in the project as a separate file instead of as a single file. 4 Select layouts to export Contains a list of all the layouts in the project.
Project and file handling File import and export ● If you chose Merge with Existing Players Where Possible, any players that the imported MusicXML files and existing project have in common are merged, for example, if you imported a MusicXML file containing a solo piano into a project containing a piano and viola, the imported MusicXML file is added to the existing piano player.
Project and file handling File import and export The Export MusicXML dialog contains the following options and lists: 1 File format options Allows you to choose the MusicXML file format you want to export. Compressed MusicXML files contain the same information as uncompressed MusicXML files but have a smaller file size. 2 Select flows to export Contains a list of all the flows in the project. Flows are included in the export when their checkbox is activated.
Project and file handling File import and export Importing MIDI You can import MIDI files into existing Dorico Pro projects as separate flows, for example, to work on a different version of a section of a piece. PROCEDURE 1. Choose File > Import > MIDI to open the File Explorer/macOS Finder. 2. Locate and select the MIDI files you want to import. 3. Click Open to open the MIDI Import Options dialog for the first selected MIDI file. 4. Change the settings as required. 5.
Project and file handling File import and export MIDI Import Options dialog The MIDI Import Options dialog allows you to customize the settings Dorico Pro uses to translate MIDI data into a Dorico project when importing MIDI files. ● You can open the MIDI Import Options dialog by choosing File > Import > MIDI and opening a MIDI file from the File Explorer/macOS Finder.
Project and file handling File import and export 4 Player handling The options in this section allow you to determine the players and layouts to which instruments in the MIDI file are assigned. For example, if you are importing a MIDI file into an existing project in order to orchestrate, you might want to activate Create player group for new players and deactivate Create part layouts for new players to add a single, independent group of players without creating any extra part layouts for them.
Project and file handling File import and export Fill gaps Allows you to determine whether Dorico Pro fills in gaps between short notes. If you are importing already precisely quantized music, we recommend that you deactivate Fill gaps to ensure that note and rest durations are notated exactly as quantized. RELATED LINKS MIDI recording on page 218 Exporting MIDI You can export flows as separate MIDI files, for example, if you want to edit the audio in further detail in a DAW.
Project and file handling File import and export The Export MIDI dialog comprises the following: 1 Select flows to export Contains a list of all the flows in the project. Flows are included in the export when their checkbox is activated. 2 Selection options Allow you to select/deselect all the flows in the project. For example, you can deselect all flows and then activate the checkbox of a single flow you want to export.
Project and file handling File import and export 4. In the Import into flow list, select the flow into which you want to import the tempo track. 5. In the Import and replace section, activate the checkbox for each tempo track aspect you want to include. 6. Optional: If you activated the checkbox for Markers as, choose one of the following options: ● Markers ● System Text 7. Optional: If you chose System Text for Markers as, activate/deactivate Show border around system text markers. 8.
Project and file handling File import and export Contains a list of all the flows in the project. The currently selected flow is highlighted. NOTE You can only import tempo tracks into a single flow at a time. 2 Import and replace Allows you to control which tempo track aspects you want to include in your import and apply to the selected flow. ● Timecode display offset sets the initial timecode position at the start of the flow.
Project and file handling File import and export The Export Tempo Track dialog comprises the following: 1 Select flows to export Contains a list of all the flows in the project. Flows are included in the export when their checkbox is activated. 2 Selection options Allow you to select/deselect all the flows in the project. For example, you can deselect all flows and then activate the checkbox of a single flow you want to export.
Project and file handling File import and export PROCEDURE 1. Choose File > Export > Audio to open the Export Audio dialog. 2. Choose one of the following file format options: ● Export compressed mp3 (.mp3) ● Export uncompressed WAV (.wav) 3. Activate/Deactivate Export each selected flow as a separate file. 4. In the Select flows to export list, activate the checkbox for each flow you want to export as audio. You can also click Select All or Select None at the bottom of the list. 5.
Project and file handling File import and export The Export Audio dialog contains the following options and lists: 1 File format options Allows you to choose the audio file format you want to export. Compressed MP3 files are smaller than WAV files but this corresponds to a reduced audio quality. 2 Export each selected flow as a separate file Allows you to export each flow in the project as a separate audio file instead of as a single audio file.
Project and file handling Auto-save Auto-save The auto-save function stores a version of the currently active project at regular intervals, including new projects you have not explicitly saved yet. This reduces the chances of losing significant amounts of work if you accidentally close a project without saving or in the unlikely event that Dorico Pro or your computer crashes. Dorico Pro saves auto-saved projects in an AutoSave folder inside the application data folder for your user account.
Project and file handling Auto-save Recover Auto-saved Projects dialog The Recover Auto-saved Projects dialog allows you to recover individual auto-saved projects, for example, after you accidentally closed a project without saving or if Dorico Pro or your computer crashed. The Recover Auto-saved Projects dialog contains the following: Auto-saved projects list Contains all the auto-saved projects that are available for recovery.
Project and file handling Project backups AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can save auto-saved projects permanently in any folder location and with new file names if required. Changing the auto-save frequency You can change how frequently Dorico Pro auto-saves projects. By default, the auto-save interval is five minutes for the currently active project. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-, to open Preferences. 2. Click General in the category list. 3.
Project and file handling Project backups Changing the backup location You can change the folder that Dorico Pro uses to store project backups. By default, Dorico Pro uses the Backup Projects folder inside your Dorico Projects folder, whose default location is in the Documents folder for your user account. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-, to open Preferences. 2. Click General in the category list. 3.
Setup mode Setup mode allows you to set up the fundamental elements of the project: instruments and the players that hold them, flows, layouts, and videos. You can also determine how they interact with each other, for example, by changing the players assigned to layouts. You can view music in the music area and switch between viewing other tabs and layouts, but you cannot select or interact with anything in the music area in Setup mode.
Setup mode Project window in Setup mode 2 Layouts Lists the layouts in your project. A single full score layout and a part layout for each player are created automatically, but you can create and delete layouts as required. By default, layouts contain all flows and full score layouts contain all players. 3 Flows Shows the flows in your project, ordered left to right. By default, flows contain all players and are assigned to all layouts.
Setup mode Project window in Setup mode In the Players panel, each player is shown as a card that contains the instruments held by that player. Each player card shows the following: 1 Disclosure arrow Expands/Collapses the player card. 2 Player type Shows the type of player from the following options: 3 ● Solo player ● Section player Player name Shows the name of the player. Dorico Pro automatically adds the names of the assigned instruments to the player name.
Setup mode Project window in Setup mode further options that allow you to, for example, change the instrument names or move the instrument to another player. The action bar at the bottom of the panel contains the following options: Add Solo Player Adds an individual player to your project. Dorico Pro also automatically adds a part layout for the player to the Layouts panel. Add Section Player Adds a player to your project that represents multiple players who all play the same instrument.
Setup mode Project window in Setup mode ● Add a new player or ensemble. Instrument picker when adding an instrument The instrument picker contains the following sections and options: 1 Search field Allows you to enter the instrument/ensemble you are searching for directly. You can enter only part of the instrument/ensemble name, such as cello for Violoncello. 2 Instrument family column Contains instrument families to help you focus your instrument/ensemble search.
Setup mode Project window in Setup mode You can cycle forwards through the instrument picker by pressing Tab , which navigates in the following order: Search field, Instrument, Instrument type, Instrument family. You can also cycle backwards by pressing Shift-Tab , which navigates in the opposite direction. An enclosure line shows which instrument family, instrument, or ensemble is selected when using the keyboard to navigate.
Setup mode Project window in Setup mode 1 Disclosure arrow Expands/Collapses the layout card. 2 Layout type Shows the type of layout from the following options: 3 ● Full score layout ● Instrumental part layout ● Custom score layout Layout name Shows the name of the layout. Dorico Pro automatically adds default names depending on the name of the instrument that is assigned to a player and on the type of layout that is added.
Setup mode Project window in Setup mode Sort Layouts Sorts all layouts in the Layouts panel according to their type in the following order: full score layouts, instrumental part layouts, custom score layouts. It does not sort part layouts according to orchestral order. Layout Options Opens the Layout Options dialog for one or multiple selected layouts. Delete Layout Deletes selected layouts from the project.
Setup mode Project window in Setup mode 1 Flow name Shows the name of the flow. If you create multiple flows without renaming them, each flow name shows a number that increments with each new flow that you create. The number also indicates the position of the flow in a layout. 2 Film reel icon Indicates the flow has an attached video. 3 Flow timecode Shows the start timecode for the flow. 4 Flow number Shows the number of the flow. The number increments with each new flow that you create.
Setup mode Project Info dialog Project Info dialog The Project Info dialog allows you to specify information about the whole project and each flow within it separately, such as the title, composer, and lyricist, as these might be different for different flows. You can then refer to these entries using tokens in text frames. You can open the Project Info dialog in any mode in any of the following ways: ● Press Ctrl/Cmd-I . ● Choose File > Project Info.
Setup mode Layout Options dialog ● Duplicate Flow : Creates a new flow with all the information of the selected flow. Its default name is Copy of [selected flow]. ● Rename Flow of the flow. : Opens the Rename Flow dialog, which allows you to change the name NOTE If you have already manually changed the flow title, changing the name of the flow does not automatically change the flow title. 2 ● Move Down : Moves the selected flows down the flows list, which changes their order in the project.
Setup mode Layout Options dialog ● If you make changes and close the dialog without clicking Apply, you are prompted to save or discard your changes. You can open Layout Options in any of the following ways: ● Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L in any mode. ● Choose Setup > Layout Options in Setup mode. ● Click Layout Options in the Layouts panel in Setup mode.
Setup mode Layout Options dialog Matches appear highlighted on the page, and the current option appears with a brighter highlight. You can show the Search pages bar by pressing Ctrl/Cmd-F . The bar contains the following options: 6 ● Search pages field: Allows you to enter the term you want to search for. You can set the focus to the Search pages field by pressing Ctrl/Cmd-F . ● Previous match: Allows you to navigate to the previous match on the page.
Setup mode Players, layouts, and flows ● If you have existing saved defaults for the selected layout type, this button is Reset to Saved Defaults, which resets all the options in the dialog back to your saved defaults for the selected layout type. You can access Reset to Factory instead by pressing Ctrl (Windows) or Opt (macOS) .
Setup mode Players A piano player selected in the Players panel with connected flows and layouts highlighted in the Flows and Layouts panels EXAMPLE A work for string quartet and choir is divided into three movements. The string quartet is tacet for the third movement, which the choir sings a cappella. The Dorico project contains three flows (one for each movement), four solo players for the string quartet, four section players for the choir, and another solo player for a piano reduction.
Setup mode Players Solo player Represents a single person who can play one or more instruments. For example, a clarinettist who doubles on alto saxophone or a percussionist who plays bass drum, clash cymbals, and triangle. Instruments belonging to solo players can have extra staves. Section player Represents multiple people who all play the same instrument.
Setup mode Players ● If you have started a new project, click Add Solo Player in the project start area. ● If you have started a new project, click Add Section Player ● In the Players panel action bar, click Add Solo Player ● In the Players panel action bar, click Add Section Player in the project start area. . . The instrument picker opens. TIP You can also open the instrument picker by selecting an existing player in the Players panel and pressing Shift-I . 2.
Setup mode Players Duplicating players You can duplicate existing players. This adds another player of the same type holding the same instruments as the original. PROCEDURE ● In the Players panel, right-click the player you want to duplicate and choose Duplicate Player from the context menu. RESULT A new player is added, with the same instruments as the original player and is named after those instruments. By default, the player appears below the original player in the Players panel.
Setup mode Players 2. In the Layouts list, select the layout in which you want to set a custom player order. NOTE You can only set custom player orders in one layout at a time. By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog. 3. Click Players in the category list. 4. In the Players section, activate Uses custom player order. 5. In the list, select a player whose position you want to change. 6.
Setup mode Ensembles RELATED LINKS Players panel on page 84 Deleting instruments on page 112 Ensembles If you add an ensemble in Dorico Pro, multiple players are added to your project at the same time. Dorico Pro provides a set of predefined ensembles that you can use. Adding an ensemble is one of the ways to achieve building up an instrumentation quickly.
Setup mode Instruments Instruments In Dorico Pro, an instrument is an individual musical instrument, such as a piano, a flute, or a violin. Human voices, such as soprano or tenor, are also considered instruments. In Dorico Pro, instruments are held by players, just as real instruments are held by human players.
Setup mode Instruments Instrument numbering It is customary to number instruments when there is more than one in a piece so that they can be easily identified, such as Horn 1 and Horn 2. Dorico Pro automatically numbers instruments where there are multiple instruments of the same type in the same project. For example, if there is only one flute in a project, it is called Flute, but if there are three flutes, they are automatically called Flute 1, Flute 2, and Flute 3.
Setup mode Instruments Changing instrument names on page 140 Player groups on page 123 Instrument transpositions in staff labels on page 1362 Moving instruments on page 112 Numbering instruments with different transpositions separately/together on page 1364 Instrument names in staff labels on page 1358 Transposing instruments on page 107 Instrument changes Instruments changes are when a player holding multiple instruments switches from playing one instrument to a different instrument.
Setup mode Instruments By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog. You can select other layouts by using the selection options in the action bar, Shift -clicking adjacent layouts, and Ctrl/Cmd -clicking individual layouts. 3. Click Players in the category list. 4. In the Instrument Changes section, activate/deactivate Allow instrument changes. 5. Click Apply, then Close.
Setup mode Instruments RESULT The length of instrument names and prefixes/suffixes in all instrument change labels in the selected layouts is changed.
Setup mode Instruments an octave above written), double bass (sounding an octave below written), and glockenspiel (sounding two octaves above written). Dorico Pro stores all note information in concert pitch and automatically transposes notes as appropriate for the transposition of the instrument. This means notes, key signatures, and chord symbols are automatically changed in transposing layouts compared to non-transposing layouts.
Setup mode Instruments Adding instruments to players You can add instruments to both solo and section players. You can add multiple instruments to solo players but only a single instrument to section players. PREREQUISITE ● You have added a solo or section player. ● If you want to add instruments with names in a different language, you have changed the language for instrument names. PROCEDURE 1. In the Players panel, select the player to which you want to add instruments.
Setup mode Instruments Adding empty percussion kits to players You can add empty percussion kits to players, to which you can then add unpitched percussion instruments. PROCEDURE 1. 2. In the Players panel, open the Edit Percussion Kit dialog in any of the following ways: ● Select a solo or section player, press Shift-I , and click Create Empty Kit in the instrument picker. ● Click the plus symbol to the right of the added empty-handed player and click Create Empty Kit in the instrument picker.
Setup mode Instruments Changing instruments You can change the instruments held by players without affecting any music already entered onto their staves, for example, if your Clarinet part is very low and you want to change it to a Bass Clarinet or you want to change the tuning of a guitar. NOTE ● You cannot change percussion kits into other instruments, you can only change individual unpitched percussion instruments. ● You cannot change a pitched instrument into an unpitched instrument, and vice versa.
Setup mode Instruments Moving instruments You can move individual instruments without affecting any music already input for those instruments. You can move instruments between players or to a different position in the instrument list for a solo player, for example, if you want to change the order of staves in the score. PREREQUISITE You have added the players to which you want to move instruments. PROCEDURE 1. In the Players panel, expand the cards of the players holding the instruments you want to move.
Setup mode Instruments RELATED LINKS Players panel on page 84 Deleting players on page 101 Edit Percussion Kit dialog The Edit Percussion Kit dialog allows you to make changes to percussion kits, including which instruments are included in them and how instruments are arranged in the different available kit presentations. ● The Edit Percussion Kit dialog opens automatically when you create empty kits or combine existing instruments into a kit.
Setup mode Instruments Percussion kits are defined as drum sets when the checkbox is activated. Percussion kits that are defined as drum sets follow your settings for drum sets on the Percussion page in Notation Options, including for voicing and default stem directions. 4 Presentation types Allows you to select a percussion kit presentation type in order to edit how the selected percussion kit appears in that presentation type. 5 ● 5-line Staff: Kit instruments are shown on a five-line staff.
Setup mode Instruments RELATED LINKS Percussion kits and drum sets on page 1501 Staff labels for percussion kits on page 1367 Percussion kit presentation types on page 1505 Changing the percussion kit presentation type on page 1506 Percussion Instrument Playing Techniques dialog on page 1508 Playing techniques for unpitched percussion instruments on page 1507 Adding instruments to percussion kits You can add new instruments to percussion kits within the Edit Percussion Kit dialog.
Setup mode Instruments 5. Select the percussion instrument you want in the instrument picker. 6. Press Return to change to the selected instrument. 7. Click Close. RESULT The instrument is changed to the one selected in the instrument picker. Any music input for the previous instrument is retained. NOTE Playing techniques expressed using playing technique-specific noteheads are not retained. Defining percussion kits as drum sets You can define individual percussion kits as drum sets.
Setup mode Instruments PROCEDURE 1. In the Players panel, expand the card of the player holding the kit in which you want to create groups in the grid presentation. 2. Click the arrow that appears in the kit instrument label when you hover over it and choose Edit Percussion Kit to open the Edit Percussion Kit dialog. 3. Click Grid at the top of the dialog. 4. Click the first instrument you want to include in the group. 5. Shift -click the last instrument you want to include in the group.
Setup mode Instruments NOTE Staff labels for groups in grid presentation percussion kits use a different paragraph style to the staff labels for non-grouped instruments in grid presentation percussion kits.
Setup mode Instruments 2. Click the arrow that appears in the kit instrument label when you hover over it and choose Edit Percussion Kit to open the Edit Percussion Kit dialog. 3. Click the kit presentation type in which you want to change the order of instruments. For example, click Grid to change the order of instruments when the kit uses the grid presentation type. 4. Click the percussion instruments and/or slash voices whose position you want to change.
Setup mode Instruments Removing individual instruments from percussion kits You can remove individual instruments from percussion kits, for example, if you want to move an instrument from one percussion kit to another player. PROCEDURE 1. In the Players panel, expand the card of the player holding the kit from which you want to remove instruments. 2. Click the arrow that appears in the kit instrument label when you hover over it and choose Edit Percussion Kit to open the Edit Percussion Kit dialog. 3.
Setup mode Instruments 2 String editor Allows you to select and edit individual or all strings of the fretted instrument. The arrangement of strings in the editor matches that of the real instrument. The pitch and total number of frets of each string is shown to the left of the vertical line that represents the nut. 3 Controls Allow you to edit individual or multiple strings.
Setup mode Instruments Fretted instrument tuning on page 108 Changing the open pitches of fretted instrument strings You can change the open pitch of each fretted instrument string independently, for example, if your project requires an unconventional tuning that is not available as an instrument type in the instrument picker. PROCEDURE 1. In the Players panel, expand the card of the player holding the fretted instrument whose open pitches you want to change. 2.
Setup mode Player groups Exporting fretted instrument tunings You can export fretted instrument tunings so you can reuse them for other instruments and in other projects. Fretted instrument tunings are exported as .doricotuning library files. PROCEDURE 1. In the Players panel, expand the card of the player holding the fretted instrument whose tuning you want to export. 2.
Setup mode Player groups Adding player groups You can organize players into groups, for example, if you want to bracket them together. Players in different groups are also numbered separately. PROCEDURE 1. Optional: If you want to add a group that includes existing players, select those players in the Players panel. 2. In the Players panel action bar, click Add Group . RESULT A new player group is added to the Players panel. If you selected players, those players are added to the group.
Setup mode Player groups Adding players to groups You can add existing or new players to player groups. PREREQUISITE You have added at least one player, one ensemble, or one group. PROCEDURE ● In the Players panel, do one of the following: ● Select one or more players and click Add Group. ● Select a group, and click Add Solo Player, Add Section Player, or Add Ensemble. RESULT If you clicked Add Group, a new group is added for the selected players.
Setup mode Flows Flows Flows are separate spans of music that are completely independent in musical content, meaning they can contain completely different players from each other and have different time signatures and key signatures. A single project can contain any number of flows.
Setup mode Flows RESULT A new flow is added to your project each time you click Add Flow. All existing players are assigned to new flows, and new flows are automatically assigned to all existing full score and part layouts. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can double-click the flow card to rename the flow. You can also change the players assigned to the flow and the layouts to which the flow is assigned.
Setup mode Layouts 3. Optional: Repeat steps 1 and 2 for other flows whose assigned players you want to change. RESULT Players are assigned to the selected flow when the checkbox in their player card is activated, and removed from the flow when the checkbox is deactivated. RELATED LINKS Flows panel on page 90 Tacets on page 434 Assigning flows to layouts on page 130 Assigning players to layouts on page 130 Deleting flows You can delete flows that you no longer need.
Setup mode Layouts TIP You can combine players, layouts, and flows together in any combination. For example, you might add all percussion players to a single part layout so that the performers can manage instrument changes themselves. In a large-scale work, you might also create a piano reduction for choir rehearsals, but only assign that piano player to the vocal score, meaning it does not appear in the orchestral full score at all. You can also create as many layouts as required.
Setup mode Layouts Switching between layouts on page 40 Opening new tabs on page 42 Layouts with clef/transposition overrides on page 133 Assigning players to layouts By default, all players are included in full score layouts and each player is automatically assigned its own part layout. You can assign players to and exclude players from layouts manually, for example, if you want to remove unnecessary players from the full score, or you want to add the soloists’ music to the part for the accompanist.
Setup mode Layouts TIP You can Shift -click to activate/deactivate the checkboxes in multiple flow cards at once. 3. Optional: Repeat steps 1 and 2 for other layouts whose assigned flows you want to change. RESULT Flows are assigned to the selected layout when the checkbox in their flow card is activated, and removed from the layout when the checkbox is deactivated.
Setup mode Layouts TIP You can also make layouts transposing by choosing Edit > Transposed Pitch, and concert pitch by choosing Edit > Concert Pitch. This automatically updates the layout option but only for the layout currently open in the music area. RELATED LINKS Transposing instruments on page 107 Transposing selections on page 216 Setting different clefs for concert/transposed pitch on page 838 Hiding/Showing clefs according to layout transpositions on page 839 Concert vs.
Setup mode Layouts Renumbering layouts You can renumber all the layouts in their project according to their current position in the Layouts panel in Setup mode, for example, after you have dragged layouts to different positions. PROCEDURE ● In the Layouts panel, right-click any layout card and choose Renumber Layouts from the context menu. RESULT All layouts are renumbered according to their current position in the panel.
Setup mode Layouts NOTE It is not necessary to specify clef and/or transposition overrides for single transposing instruments. Dorico Pro automatically transposes notes as appropriate for the instrument transposition, and you can select instruments with different transpositions and clefs by default in the instrument picker.
Setup mode Layouts The Clef and Transposition Overrides dialog contains the following: 1 Clef/Transposition overrides table Displays each instrument in the layout in its own row. The first column displays the instrument name. The other columns indicate whether or not each instrument has the corresponding type of override. Remove Overrides in the action bar at the bottom of the table allows you to remove all overrides from the selected instrument.
Setup mode Layouts PROCEDURE 1. In the Layouts panel, right-click the layout whose default clef you want to override and choose Clef and Transposition Overrides from the context menu to open the Clef and Transposition Overrides dialog. 2. In the table, select the instrument whose default clef you want to override. 3. In the Transposed pitch section, activate each staff whose default clef you want to override. 4. Select the clef you want from each menu. 5.
Setup mode Player, layout, and instrument names NOTE For Transposed pitch, you can specify any pitch. For Concert pitch, you can only specify the sounding octave of middle C. 5. Optional: Repeat steps 2 to 4 for other instruments in the layout whose transposition you want to override. 6. Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. RESULT The transposition for the selected instruments is changed in the selected layout.
Setup mode Player, layout, and instrument names Player name The name of each player in the Players panel. Player names do not appear in any layouts by default. Instead, you can use the player name as part of your own workflow, independently of what instruments and players are called in staff labels and layout names. You can refer to the player name in text frames using the {@playernames@} token. Player names are automatically generated when you add instruments.
Setup mode Player, layout, and instrument names Renaming players You can change the player names of players, and reset renamed players to their default name. Player names do not appear in any layouts by default, but are used to generate layout names and appear in guide instrument labels in galley view for players holding multiple instruments. PROCEDURE 1. In the Players panel, select player you want to rename. 2. Press Return to open the player name text field. 3.
Setup mode Player, layout, and instrument names NOTE This does not affect staff labels. You can change the instrument names used in staff labels in the Edit Instrument Names dialog.
Setup mode Player, layout, and instrument names Edit Instrument Names dialog The Edit Instrument Names dialog allows you to change the content and formatting of each instrument’s names, which are used in staff labels and instrument change labels shown above the staff. You can edit both singular/plural full instrument names and singular/plural short instrument names.
Setup mode Player, layout, and instrument names NOTE The horizontal alignment of staff labels always uses the alignment of the paragraph style, not the alignment set in the Edit Instrument Names dialog. 5 Full name text editing area Shows the current long name for the selected instrument, as it appears in Full staff labels. You can select any part of the instrument name and edit it independently of other parts, for example, if you want to add additional information on a new line and in italics.
Setup mode Player, layout, and instrument names ● Never: Instrument transpositions are never shown, even if you have chosen to show them in Layout Options. 10 Save as default for instrument Activating the checkbox saves your changes in the dialog as the default. This affects all new instruments of that type that you add to the project and all future projects. It does not affect any existing instruments of that type unless you reset their names.
Setup mode Flow names and flow titles Resetting instrument names You can reset all your changes to the names of individual instruments and revert them to the current default settings for their instrument type. NOTE Resetting instrument names does not change the name shown at the top of part layouts. If you want to change the name used at the top of part layouts, rename the layout. PROCEDURE 1.
Setup mode Flow names and flow titles TIP You can change both flow names and flow titles in the Project Info dialog, and you can also change flow names in the Flows panel in Setup mode. RELATED LINKS Text tokens on page 520 Project Info dialog on page 92 Flows panel on page 90 Renaming flows You can change the names of flows in Setup mode. This automatically updates the title of the corresponding flow until you change the title in the Project Info dialog. PROCEDURE 1.
Setup mode Videos NOTE This breaks the link between flow names and the title shown in the music area. RELATED LINKS Project Info dialog on page 92 Videos Dorico Pro supports the use of videos within the program as well as the associated notations, such as markers and timecodes, and allows you to find appropriate tempos based on where important markers occur. Videos are a fast sequence of images that create the impression of a moving image.
Setup mode Videos RELATED LINKS Frame rates on page 151 Video Properties dialog The Video Properties dialog allows you to change video-related settings, including their frame rate and start position. ● You can open the Video Properties dialog in Setup mode by right-clicking a flow in the Flows panel and choosing Video > Properties from the context menu. It also opens automatically when you add a new video.
Setup mode Videos example, if the initial timecode of the video is 02:00:00:00 but the video does not start until the start of the third bar in 4/4, the initial timecode of the flow is eight beats of time less than 02:00:00:00; if the tempo is 60 bpm, this makes the initial flow timecode 01:59:52:00. NOTE Flow timecodes are shown in their flow cards in the Flows panel. RELATED LINKS Timecodes on page 1270 Flows panel on page 90 Adding videos You can add a video to each flow in your project.
Setup mode Videos Changing the start position of videos You can change both the rhythmic position in the music at which videos start, and the position in the video that coincides with that rhythmic position, for example, if you want the fifth second of a video to sync with the start of the third bar of music. PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. In Setup mode, open the Video Properties dialog in one of the following ways: ● Add a video to a flow.
Setup mode Videos RELATED LINKS Toolbar on page 28 Changing the size of the Video window You can change the size of the Video window at any time. PREREQUISITE The Video window is shown. PROCEDURE ● Change the size of the Video window in any of the following ways: ● Click and drag the corners/edges in any direction. ● Shift -click and drag a corner/edge to change the size without changing the shape. RESULT The size of the Video window is changed.
Setup mode Videos RESULT The volume of audio from videos in your project is changed. If you clicked Mute, no audio from videos sounds in playback. RELATED LINKS Hiding/Showing the Mixer window on page 638 Frame rates The frame rate of a video is the number of still images that are used per unit of time in order to create the impression of a moving image, commonly measured in frames per second, or “fps”.
Write mode Write mode allows you to input and edit your music, including changing the rhythmic positions of items, changing the pitch of notes, and deleting notes and items. The available toolboxes and panels allow you to input all the notes and notation items that are most commonly used. By design, you cannot move notes and items graphically in Write mode. Graphical adjustments are only possible in Engrave mode.
Write mode Project window in Write mode Contains the note durations, accidentals, and articulations that are most commonly used during note input. 3 Notations panel Contains notation items that you can add to your music, such as dynamics and playing techniques, divided into separate categories. Your current selection in the Notations toolbox determines which notation items are shown.
Write mode Project window in Write mode Chords When this option is activated, you add multiple notes at the same rhythmic position in order to build a chord. This function prevents the caret from advancing automatically after inputting a note. It also allows you to copy notes and items without overwriting any existing notes or items. You can also start/stop chord input by pressing Q .
Write mode Project window in Write mode Rests When this option is activated, you input rests of the currently selected duration instead of notes. You can also start/stop rest input by pressing , . Tuplets Clicking this option inputs a triplet bracket and the respective number of rests at the specified rhythmic position. If the notes are beamed, no brackets are used. You can input other types of tuplet, such as quintuplets, by using the tuplets popover.
Write mode Project window in Write mode ● Press Ctrl/Cmd-7 . ● Click the disclosure arrow on the left edge of the main window. ● Choose Window > Show Left Panel. The upper part of the Notes panel contains note durations that you can select for input or to change the duration of existing notes. By default, only the most common note durations are shown. You can see all note durations by clicking the Show/Hide All Notes disclosure arrows at the top and bottom of the section.
Write mode Project window in Write mode ● Choose Window > Show Bottom Panel. The Properties panel contains a group of properties for each notation item. When you select a note or item in the music area, the Properties panel displays the groups and options that you might require to edit the selected note or item. If there are more available groups than can fit in the panel simultaneously, you can scroll to the right/left along the displayed groups.
Write mode Project window in Write mode RELATED LINKS Project window in Write mode on page 152 Changing the property scope on page 158 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 462 Changing your preferred unit of measurement on page 49 Changing values in numeric value fields on page 159 Resetting the appearance of items on page 372 Resetting the position of items on page 373 Local vs.
Write mode Project window in Write mode ● Globally RESULT The property scope is changed. All subsequent local properties you change take effect only in the current layout and frame chain if you chose Locally, or in all layouts and frame chains if you chose Globally. NOTE ● The property scope includes local properties that control the graphical position of items.
Write mode Project window in Write mode NOTE You must replace the existing value with your calculation entry. RELATED LINKS Properties panel (Write mode) on page 156 Options dialogs in Dorico Pro on page 25 Changing your preferred unit of measurement on page 49 Notations toolbox The options in the Notations toolbox allow you to determine what notation items are available in the Notations panel. The Notations toolbox is located on the right of the window in Write mode.
Write mode Project window in Write mode Repeat Structures Hides/Shows the Repeat Structures panel, which contains sections for the different types of repeat structures, including repeat endings and segments, repeat markers, single-note and multi-note tremolos, bar repeats, and slash regions. Bars and Barlines Hides/Shows the Bars and Barlines panel, which allows you to insert bars and to input the different types of barlines.
Write mode Project window in Write mode Opens the lyrics popover above the selected note on the staff, which allows you to input lyrics. Chord Symbols Opens the chord symbols popover above the selected note on the staff, which allows you to input chord symbols. Fingering Opens the fingerings popover above the selected note on the staff, which allows you to input fingerings.
Write mode Notation Options dialog Notation Options dialog The Notation Options dialog allows you to change how music is notated by default in each flow independently. For example, there are options for beam, note, and rest grouping, voices, accidentals, and condensing. Options in Notation Options affect only the selected flows but apply to all layouts in which those flows appear. TIP If you want to change notes and notations individually, you can use properties in the Properties panel.
Write mode Notation Options dialog 3 Section titles Shows the titles of any sections on the selected category’s page. You can click these section titles to navigate directly to that section of the page. 4 Section Pages are divided into sections, which can contain multiple options. Sections that contain many options are divided into subsections. For options that have multiple possible settings, the current setting is highlighted.
Write mode Note Input Options dialog RELATED LINKS Flows on page 126 Options dialogs in Dorico Pro on page 25 Changing your preferred unit of measurement on page 49 Changing values in numeric value fields on page 159 Note Input Options dialog The Note Input Options dialog provides multiple options that allow you to determine how Dorico Pro interprets the data and MIDI you input by default.
Write mode Note Input Options dialog Pages are divided into sections, which can contain multiple options. Sections that contain many options are divided into subsections. For options that have multiple possible settings, the current setting is highlighted. 4 Search pages bar Allows you to search section titles and options on the currently selected page according to your entry and navigate through matches. The number of matches is displayed in the bar.
Write mode Inputting vs. editing Inputting vs. editing Dorico Pro distinguishes the processes for inputting and editing music. Inputting If you can see the caret, you are inputting new music. The caret must be activated in order to input notes and notations. If the caret is activated, selecting tools or items in the Notes toolbox and the Notes panel affects the note or chord that you are about to input, as you can specify the duration, rhythm dot, accidentals, and articulations.
Write mode Inputting vs. editing You can choose between the following options for mouse input: ● Create item at selection: Items are input at the position of selected items or notes in the music area. ● Load pointer with item: Items are loaded onto the mouse pointer so you can click in the music area where you want to input the item. You can also activate/deactivate Allow multiple items to be created with the mouse.
Write mode Rhythmic grid Rhythmic grid The rhythmic grid is a unit of rhythmic duration whose value affects certain aspects of inputting and editing, such as the amount by which items move. However, it does not control the duration of notes and items that you input. Rhythmic grid set to eighth notes (quavers) shown above the staff The current rhythmic grid resolution is shown by the note value in the status bar, and by ruler markings above the staff on which the caret is active.
Write mode Note input ● Select a value from the Rhythmic Grid selector in the status bar. RESULT Decreasing the rhythmic grid resolution makes it finer by making the note value shorter. Increasing the rhythmic grid resolution makes it coarser by making the note value longer. TIP You can assign your own key commands for increasing and decreasing the rhythmic grid resolution.
Write mode Note input The caret The appearance of the caret changes depending on the input mode and the currently selected voice number. Multiple staves The caret extends vertically across all the staves onto which notes and notations will be input. This allows you to input, for example, the same dynamics or playing techniques on multiple staves simultaneously or play in chords on a MIDI keyboard and distribute the notes in those chords onto multiple staves.
Write mode Note input Caret when inputting chords Lock to Duration The caret is dashed. Lock to Duration allows you to repitch notes without changing their duration or rhythm. Caret when Lock to Duration is activated Grace Notes The caret is shorter than the default caret. It allows you to input grace notes at the caret position.
Write mode Note input ● The number of the slash voice into which you are about to input notes ● An up-stem slash note or a down-stem slash note symbol indicating the stem direction of the voice, and whether it has stems or is stemless Caret when inputting notes into an up-stem slash voice Caret when inputting notes into a new, second up-stem slash voice Caret when inputting notes into a new, stemless slash voice Percussion kits The caret appears significantly smaller than usual when inputting notes i
Write mode Note input Activating/Deactivating the caret When the caret is activated, you can input notes and notations at the caret position, for example, if you want to input a dynamic in the middle of a tie chain. When the caret is deactivated, you cannot input notes, instead you can select and edit items in the music area. PROCEDURE 1. 2. Activate the caret in any of the following ways: ● Select an item and press Shift-N . ● Double-click a rhythmic position on a staff.
Write mode Note input ● To advance the caret according to the note value currently selected, press Space . ● To move the caret to the next/previous bar, press Ctrl/Cmd-Right Arrow / Ctrl/CmdLeft Arrow . ● To move the caret to the staff above/below, press Up Arrow / Down Arrow . ● To move the caret to the top/bottom staff in the system, press Ctrl/Cmd-Up Arrow / Ctrl/Cmd-Down Arrow .
Write mode Note input ● Press the number on your computer keyboard that corresponds to the duration you want. For example, press 6 for quarter notes (crotchets). Press smaller numbers for smaller durations, such as 5 for eighth notes (quavers) and 4 for 16th notes (semiquavers). Press larger numbers for larger durations, such as 7 for half notes (minims). ● In the Notes panel, click the duration you want. 4. Optional: Select any required rhythm dots. 5.
Write mode Note input In such cases, the notes are shown next to each other on tablature and are colored green. You can then select them individually and make your own string allocation. TIP You can change the default beam, note, and rest grouping settings for each flow independently in Write > Notation Options. You can also specify custom beat groupings within individual time signatures.
Write mode Note input You can override this automatic register selection in the following ways: ● To input a note above the previously input note, press Shift-Alt/Opt as well as the letter for the note, for example, Shift-Alt/Opt-A . ● To input a note below the previously input note, press Ctrl-Alt (Windows) or Ctrl (macOS) as well as the letter for the note, for example, Ctrl-Alt-A (Windows) or Ctrl-A (macOS) .
Write mode Note input PROCEDURE 1. Start note input in any of the following ways: ● Select a note or rest on the staff where you want to input notes and press Shift-N . NOTE If you select a notation, such as a dynamic, pressing Return opens the corresponding popover instead of starting note input. ● 2. Double-click the staff where you want to input notes. Activate Pitch Before Duration in any of the following ways: ● Press K . ● In the Notes toolbox, click Pitch Before Duration . 3.
Write mode Note input NOTE When inputting notes on tablature, you must click durations in the Notes panel. 9. Optional: Press Space to advance the caret by the currently selected note duration without inputting notes. TIP You can also move the caret in different ways and by different increments. 10. Press Esc or Return to stop note input. RESULT Notes are input with the selected duration at the caret position or where you click and are played back as you input them by default.
Write mode Note input Accidental selection during MIDI input on page 201 Switching to galley/page view on page 46 Notes toolbox on page 153 Notes panel on page 155 Rhythmic grid on page 169 Caret on page 170 Notations input on page 225 Disabling MIDI input devices on page 225 Changing the input pitch setting You can input and record notes at either sounding pitch or written pitch according to the current layout, for example, if you want to record notes at their sounding pitch in transposing part layouts.
Write mode Note input 4. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The setting is changed in the current project and for all future projects. If you chose Before inputting note, notes do not remain selected after you input them during pitch before duration note input.
Write mode Note input For example, press 6 for quarter notes (crotchets). Press smaller numbers for smaller durations, such as 5 for eighth notes (quavers) or 4 for 16th notes (semiquavers). Press larger numbers for larger durations, such as 7 for half notes (minims). ● 3. In the Notes panel, click the duration you want. Optional: Add rhythm dots to the duration in one of the following ways: ● For a single rhythm dot, press . . ● For multiple rhythm dots, press Alt/Opt-. as many times as required.
Write mode Note input NOTE This does not apply to grace notes. ● To lengthen a single note up to the rhythmic position of the end of the current selection, choose Write > Edit Duration > Extend to End of Selection. ● To shorten overlapping notes in the same voice so that they no longer overlap, choose Write > Edit Duration > Shorten to Next Note. RESULT The duration of the selected notes is changed.
Write mode Note input 2. 3. 4. Optional: If you want input rests with forced durations, start rest input in any of the following ways: ● Press , . ● In the Notes toolbox, click Rests . Activate Force Duration in any of the following ways: ● Press O . ● In the Notes toolbox, click Force Duration . Select the note/rest duration you want. TIP When forcing the duration of existing notes notated as tie chains, you must reduce their duration first, then increase it to the duration you want. 5.
Write mode Note input Note and rest grouping on page 784 Creating custom beat groupings for meters on page 785 Turning explicit rests into implicit rests on page 1315 Inputting notes with rhythm dots The Dotted Notes tool allows you to input notes with rhythm dots and add rhythm dots to existing notes. You can input notes with up to four rhythm dots. NOTE ● These steps describe inputting notes with the default preference of duration before pitch.
Write mode Note input RESULT During note input, notes are input as dotted notes until you deactivate Dotted Notes or change the note duration. If you add rhythm dots to multiple existing notes that would then overlap, Dorico Pro adjusts the duration of notes in the selection to avoid deleting notes at the end of the selection.
Write mode Note input Caret when adding the first down-stem voice TIP You can press Shift-V as many times as you require. For example, on a staff containing no notes, creating one new voice allows you to input notes into the first down-stem voice, but you can also create another new voice immediately if you want to input notes into the second up-stem voice. ● To input notes into an existing voice, press V until you reach the voice you want. 4. Input the notes you want. 5.
Write mode Note input RELATED LINKS Caret on page 170 Notes toolbox on page 153 Notes panel on page 155 Rhythmic grid on page 169 Inputting notes on page 175 Inputting notes using pitch before duration on page 178 Inputting bar rests into specific voices on page 202 Adding notes above/below existing notes on page 212 Changing the voice of existing notes on page 383 Voices on page 1521 Divisi on page 1390 Condensing on page 437 Status bar on page 36 Hiding/Showing bar rests in additional voices on page 1318
Write mode Note input immediately if you want to input notes into a down-stem slash voice, or a third new slash voice if you want to input notes into a stemless slash voice. ● 4. To input notes into an existing slash voice, press V until you reach the slash voice you want. Input the notes you want. Notes in slash voices appear at the same staff position, regardless of their pitch. By default, this is the middle line of the staff, but this changes in multiple-slash-voice contexts.
Write mode Note input Inputting notes and notations onto multiple staves You can input notes and notations onto multiple staves simultaneously, including automatically exploding the notes in chords that you play on a MIDI keyboard onto the appropriate staves. For example, if you want to input notes onto both piano staves or input the same dynamics for multiple instruments.
Write mode Note input Inputting notes using pitch before duration on page 178 Notations input on page 225 Preferences dialog on page 49 Note Input Options dialog on page 165 Exploding music onto multiple staves on page 383 Inputting notes in Insert mode In Insert mode, you can input notes before existing notes in a single voice without overriding them. This allows you to push existing notes ahead at the same time as inputting new notes at their previous positions.
Write mode Note input Moving the caret manually on page 174 Insert mode Insert mode changes how notes are input and how edits you make outside of note input affect the music. When Insert mode is activated, notes are pushed to subsequent rhythmic positions instead of being overwritten if you input new notes or lengthen existing notes. Similarly, deleting notes or reducing their duration with Insert mode activated pulls surrounding notes closer together without leaving rests between them.
Write mode Note input The name of the percussion instrument or slash voice currently selected by the caret, and any applicable playing technique, is shown directly above the rhythmic grid display. NOTE ● You can only input notes into slash voices in percussion kits when using the five-line staff presentation. ● These steps describe inputting notes with the default preference of duration before pitch. However, you can also specify the pitch before duration instead.
Write mode Note input NOTE You can define MIDI pitches for playing techniques on the Note Input and Editing page in Preferences. 6. Input notes in one of the following ways: ● Any kit presentation type/Individual instruments: Press Y to input notes for the instrument and playing technique shown above the rhythmic grid. ● Any kit presentation type/Individual instruments: Click on the staff where you want to input notes, and at the rhythmic positions where you want them.
Write mode Note input RELATED LINKS Notes toolbox on page 153 Notes panel on page 155 Caret on page 170 Percussion kits vs.
Write mode Note input ● E♭3 (51): Second mapped playing technique ● E3 (52): Third mapped playing technique And so on, up to: ● B3 (59): Tenth mapped playing technique In general, we recommend that you set Use staff position for percussion input. Use percussion map is normally only useful when you are inputting notes onto a drum set and you have already memorized the General MIDI percussion map.
Write mode Note input NOTE Dorico Pro automatically changes the directions of stems according to the positions of notes on the staff when only one voice on the staff contains notes, regardless of their voice. RELATED LINKS Stem direction on page 1412 Inputting notes on tablature You can input notes directly into tablature in the same ways as inputting normal notes.
Write mode Note input 6. ● Press Up Arrow to move it up. ● Press Down Arrow to move it down. Move the caret to other rhythmic positions in any of the following ways: ● To move the caret according to the current rhythmic grid resolution, press Right Arrow / Left Arrow . ● To advance the caret according to the note value currently selected, press Space . ● To move the caret to the next/previous bar, press Ctrl/Cmd-Right Arrow / Ctrl/CmdLeft Arrow .
Write mode Note input PROCEDURE 1. 2. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input. ● Select the existing notes to which you want to add accidentals or whose accidentals you want to change. Select the accidental you want to input in one of the following ways: ● Press - for flat. ● Press = for sharp. ● Press 0 for natural. ● In the Notes panel, click the accidental you want.
Write mode Note input Accidental selection during MIDI input Dorico Pro interprets MIDI data to create accidentals, and automatically determines the spelling of notes according to preset rules. Dorico Pro automatically displays an accidental if one is required. It selects a sharp or flat based on key signature and context. The algorithm for this takes into account the key signature and the intervals between successive notes and chords.
Write mode Note input ● 5. In the Notes toolbox, click Rests . Activate Force Duration in any of the following ways: ● Press O . ● In the Notes toolbox, click Force Duration 6. Select the rest duration you want. 7. Input rests in any of the following ways: . ● Press Y or any of the letters from A to G . ● Click the staff at the rhythmic position of each rest you want to input. A shadow rest appears when inputting with the mouse to indicate where the rest will be input.
Write mode Note input 4. Enter rest into the popover to add a bar rest. 5. Press Return to close the popover. 6. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Right Arrow to advance the caret to the start of the next bar after the bar rest. 7. Optional: If you want to show bar rests in multiple bars for the selected voice, repeat steps 3 to 6 as many times as required.
Write mode Note input PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input. ● Select the note from which you want the tie to start. If you want to input a tie between two specific notes or between a grace note and a normal note, select those two notes. NOTE The two notes must be the same pitch but can be in different voices or on different staves belonging to the same instrument. 2. Optional: During note input, input the note that you want at the start of the tie. 3.
Write mode Note input RELATED LINKS Inputting notes on page 175 Forcing the duration of notes/rests on page 184 Notes toolbox on page 153 Ties on page 1439 Ties vs. slurs on page 1442 Note and rest grouping on page 784 Beam grouping according to meters on page 764 Inputting grace notes You input grace notes in the same ways as normal notes, and they can have any rhythmic note value, accidental, and articulation. You can only input grace notes during note input.
Write mode Note input RELATED LINKS Grace notes on page 967 Grace notes in playback on page 974 Notes toolbox on page 153 Notes panel on page 155 Caret on page 170 Extending the caret to multiple staves on page 174 Inputting notes on page 175 Selecting note/rest durations on page 182 Inputting accidentals on page 199 Inputting articulations on page 225 Changing the type of grace notes on page 971 Inputting notes using pitch before duration on page 178 Inputting chords You can input chords during note input
Write mode Note input 4. Optional: If you want to input chords onto multiple staves at once, extend the caret to those staves. 5. Select a note duration in any of the following ways: ● Press the number on your computer keyboard that corresponds to the duration you want. For example, press 6 for quarter notes (crotchets). Press smaller numbers for smaller durations, such as 5 for eighth notes (quavers) and 4 for 16th notes (semiquavers).
Write mode Note input RELATED LINKS Notes toolbox on page 153 Notes panel on page 155 Caret on page 170 Register selection during note input on page 177 Extending the caret to multiple staves on page 174 Moving the caret manually on page 174 Altered unisons on page 712 Inputting notes using pitch before duration on page 178 Changing the note-based notation input setting on page 181 Chord mode Chord mode changes how notes are input and how edits you make outside of note input affect the music.
Write mode Note input PROCEDURE 1. Select an item on the staff and at the rhythmic position where you want to input tuplets. 2. Press Shift-N to start note input. 3. Optional: If you want to input tuplets onto multiple staves at once, extend the caret to those staves. 4. Press ; to open the tuplets popover. 5. Enter the tuplet you want into the popover as a ratio followed by the beat unit.
Write mode Note input ● Press ; . As tuplets are often described in ratios, such as 3:2, the tuplets popover uses the semicolon key to be memorable. ● Choose Write > Create Tuplet. The icon on the left-hand side of the popover matches the corresponding button in the Notes toolbox on the right of the window. Tuplets button in the Notes toolbox Tuplets popover with an example entry NOTE Clicking Tuplets popover. in the Notes toolbox only inputs a single triplet.
Write mode Note input Type of tuplet Popover entry Quintuplet, five dotted quarter notes in the space of four. 5:4q., 5 4q., or 5:4-6. NOTE When using a number to specify the beat unit, you must separate the tuplet ratio from the beat unit using a space or hyphen. This list is not comprehensive. It is intended to illustrate how you can structure your entry to input different tuplets.
Write mode Note input Adding notes above/below existing notes You can add notes above/below existing notes. You can add multiple notes at the same time, according to their intervals relative to the existing notes. PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes to which you want to add notes. 2. Press Shift-I to open the add intervals popover. 3. Enter the intervals of the notes you want, relative to your selected notes. For example, enter -m3,4 to add notes a minor third below and a fourth above the selected notes.
Write mode Note input Example action Popover entry Add notes above and/or below all notes in selected chords. 3 all or -M2,m3 to all NOTE Separate notes with commas, not with spaces. Add notes only to the top notes in chords. -3 top or dim5 top Add notes only to the bottom notes in chords. aug4 bottom or -2 bottom Specify perfect interval. p, per, or perf Specify major interval. M, maj, or major Specify minor interval. m, min, or minor Specify diminished interval.
Write mode Note input Changing the pitch of individual notes You can raise/lower the pitch and register of individual notes, including grace notes, after they have been input by octave divisions, staff position, and octaves. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the notes whose pitches you want to change. 2. Raise/Lower the pitches of the selected notes in any of the following ways: ● To move notes up one staff position, such as from C to D, press Alt/Opt-Up Arrow .
Write mode Note input PROCEDURE 1. In the music area, open the layout in which you want to respell accidentals. NOTE If you respell accidentals in a full score layout, this also affects their spelling in part layouts. However, if you respell accidentals in part layouts, this only affects their spelling in that part layout. 2. Select the notes you want to respell. NOTE If you want to respell individual noteheads in tie chains, you must be in Engrave mode. 3.
Write mode Note input RESULT The selected notes are transposed by the degree specified. Any figured bass shown on the affected staves is also transposed accordingly. RELATED LINKS Add intervals popover on page 212 Figured bass on page 910 Repitching notes without changing their rhythm You can repitch notes after you have input them while keeping their durations the same, for example, if you want to duplicate the rhythm but have different pitches. PROCEDURE 1. Select the first note you want to repitch. 2.
Write mode Note input TIP 4. ● We recommend using the Calculate interval section to determine your required settings, for example, if you want to transpose from G♭ major to G major. ● Different intervals have different possible qualities. For example, you can specify a major third but not a major octave. Therefore, if you want to set your transposition parameters manually, we recommend selecting the interval before the quality. Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog.
Write mode MIDI recording divisions of the octave. You can choose the direction of the transposition, whether it includes octaves, and the interval and quality or number of divisions by which you want to transpose your selection. According to convention, different intervals have different possible qualities. For example, you can specify a major third but not a major octave. Therefore, we recommend selecting the interval before the quality.
Write mode MIDI recording RELATED LINKS Optimization for MIDI recording on page 223 Preferences dialog on page 49 Inputting notes using MIDI recording You can input notes by recording what you play on a MIDI device in real time. You can record notes in both concert and transposed pitch. PREREQUISITE ● You have connected the MIDI device you want to use. ● You have set the quantization options in the MIDI Quantize Options dialog as appropriate for the music you intend to record.
Write mode MIDI recording RESULT The notes you played on the MIDI device are input onto the selected staff. If you did not specify the voice, notes are recorded into the first available voice on the staff, which is usually the first up-stem voice. If you activated Chords, the notes you played are merged into the first available voice on the staff without overwriting any existing notes. The notated duration of the notes follows your quantization settings, but their played durations are retained for playback.
Write mode MIDI recording RELATED LINKS Playing back music on page 620 Repeats in MIDI recording When recording MIDI into flows that contain repeat structures, such as repeat barlines, Dorico Pro records the notes you play during each playthrough and merges them together into the same voice. Any differences in rhythms between the recordings are notated according to the current meter.
Write mode MIDI recording 3. 4. 5. 6.
Write mode MIDI recording Optimization for MIDI recording Depending on your operating system and the MIDI devices you use for recording, you might find that the notes you record are not notated with the durations or at the rhythmic positions you expected. Optimizing the settings related to MIDI recording can help you achieve better results.
Write mode MIDI recording Changing the audio device buffer size You can change the audio buffer size, for example, if the current buffer size is causing notes input using MIDI recording appear significantly after the beat. NOTE ● If the notes you play when recording MIDI are notated behind the beat, we recommend that you reduce the buffer size for your audio device to the lowest possible value that still produces stable playback with no drop-outs.
Write mode Notations input RESULT When Import CC64 as pedal lines is activated, the MIDI controller CC64 is interpreted as pedal lines. When Snap pedal lines to previous beat is activated, the start of pedal lines is automatically moved back to the start of the beat. RELATED LINKS MIDI Import Options dialog on page 70 Disabling MIDI input devices By default, Dorico Pro accepts MIDI input from all connected MIDI devices, including virtual MIDI cables and inter-application buses.
Write mode Notations input 4. ● Press the key commands for the articulations you want. ● Click the articulations you want in the Notes panel. Optional: Enter the notes or chords you want with your selected articulations. RESULT The selected articulations are added to the selected notes. They are positioned between noteheads or stems and tuplet brackets, so they are closer to the notes than tuplet brackets or tuplet numbers/ratios.
Write mode Notations input Type of articulation Key command Combined tenuto and staccato: ~ (Windows) or | (macOS) RELATED LINKS Articulations on page 718 Inputting slurs You can input slurs, both during note input and by adding them to existing notes. You can also add slurs to existing notes on multiple staves at the same time and to notes in different voices or on different staves belonging to the same instrument, for example, when phrases span both staves of grand staff instruments. PROCEDURE 1.
Write mode Notations input RESULT During note input, slurs begin from the currently selected note on all staves across which the caret extends, not from the caret position. Slurs extend automatically as you input notes, and end on the currently selected note. When adding slurs to existing notes, the selected notes are connected by slurs. For example, if you select two notes belonging to one instrument and two notes belonging to another, two slurs are input connecting the notes on each selected staff.
Write mode Notations input ● To switch to the right hand, press Down Arrow . ● To switch to the left hand, press Up Arrow . The popover icon updates to show the current hand. 5. Fingerings popover when inputting right-hand Fingerings popover when inputting left-hand fingerings fingerings Enter the fingerings you want into the popover. For example, enter: 6. 7. ● 3-2 for a substitution fingering from the third finger to the second finger. ● 1,3,5 for a chord.
Write mode Notations input ● Press Shift-F . ● Choose Write > Create Fingerings. ● Click Fingerings in the Notations toolbox. When inputting fingerings for non-fretted instruments, the icon on the left-hand side of the popover matches the corresponding button in the Notations toolbox. When inputting fingerings for fretted instruments, the icon on the left-hand side of the popover indicates whether you are inputting left-hand or right-hand fingerings.
Write mode Notations input Type of fingering Example popover entry Multiple fingerings for individual notes, for example, for ornaments such as mordents or turns 2343 Single fingerings for multiple notes: enter the same fingering number for two adjacent notes. 1,1 For example, in keyboard music the thumb may depress two keys simultaneously. Alternative fingerings 2(3) NOTE You must use parentheses in the popover, even if you choose to show alternative fingerings in square brackets.
Write mode Notations input NOTE Finger substitutions are shown as immediate by default, but you can change the rhythmic position of the substitution by changing the deferral duration. You can change the appearance and position of each type of fingering on the Fingering page in Engrave > Engraving Options.
Write mode Notations input Type of key signature Popover entry Minor keys (lowercase letters) g, d, f#, bb, and so on Number of sharps 3s, 2#, and so on NOTE Assumes the major key for that many sharps. Number of flats 4f, 5b, and so on NOTE Assumes the major key for that many flats. This list is not comprehensive as you can input every possible key signature. It is intended to illustrate how you can structure your entry to input different types of key signatures.
Write mode Notations input ● Edit Tonality System : Opens the Edit Tonality System dialog and allows you to edit the selected existing tonality system. ● Import Tonality System : Opens the File Explorer/macOS Finder, where you can select the tonality system .doricolib file that you want to import into the current project. ● Export Tonality System : Opens the File Explorer/macOS Finder, where you can select the location to which you want to export the selected tonality system as a .doricolib file.
Write mode Notations input Accidentals Contains all accidentals available in the currently selected tonality system. RELATED LINKS Key signatures on page 983 Custom tonality systems on page 994 Edit Tonality System dialog on page 998 Creating custom tonality systems on page 995 Inputting key signatures with the popover You can input key signatures using the key signatures popover, both during note input and by adding them to existing music. You can also input key signatures only on single staves.
Write mode Notations input When adding key signatures to existing music, they are added at the rhythmic position of the earliest selected item. They appear to the right of barlines and clefs, and to the left of other items, even if this is in the middle of an existing bar. If you selected an existing key signature, the new key signature directly replaces the existing one. NOTE An individual key signature on a single staff is not intended for transposing instruments.
Write mode Notations input ● To input a key signature on all staves, click it in the Key Signatures, Tonality Systems, and Accidentals panel. ● To input a key signature on the selected staff only, Alt/Opt -click it in the Key Signatures, Tonality Systems, and Accidentals panel. RESULT During note input, key signatures are input at the caret position, even if this is in the middle of a bar. However, it is preferable to input key signature changes at barlines.
Write mode Notations input Types of time signatures on page 1459 Time signatures popover The table contains the entries for the time signatures popover that you can use to input the different types of time signatures available. You can open the time signatures popover in Write mode in any of the following ways when either an item is selected or the caret is active: ● Press Shift-M . ● Select an existing time signature and press Return . ● Choose Write > Create Time Signature.
Write mode Notations input Type of time signature Popover entry Beat grouping specified but not shown in the time signature [2+3+2]/8 For example, a time signature of 7/8 is shown but beams are subdivided into 2+3+2 eighth notes.
Write mode Notations input Time Signatures (Meter) panel The Time Signatures (Meter) panel allows you to input different time signatures. In the Create Time Signature section of the panel, you can create uncommon time signatures. ● You can hide/show the Time Signatures (Meter) panel by clicking Time Signatures (Meter) in the Notations toolbox on the right of the window in Write mode.
Write mode Notations input Allows you to include a pick-up bar before the time signature. A pick-up bar is not a complete bar, and so allows you to include only a few beats before the first complete bar. You can select one of the following options for the number of beats in a pick-up bar: 4 ● 1/2 beat ● 1 beat ● 2 beats ● 3 beats Input time signature button Click the button that displays the time signature to input it.
Write mode Notations input RESULT During note input, time signatures are added at the caret position, even if this is in the middle of an existing bar. When adding time signatures to existing music, they are added at the rhythmic position of the earliest selected item. They appear to the right of barlines, key signatures, and clefs, and to the left of other items, even if this is in the middle of an existing bar.
Write mode Notations input ● To input a time signature on all staves, click it in the Time Signatures (Meter) panel. ● To input a time signature on the selected staff only, Alt/Opt -click it in the Time Signatures (Meter) panel. RESULT During note input, time signatures are added at the caret position, even if this is in the middle of an existing bar. When adding time signatures to existing music, they are added at the rhythmic position of the earliest selected item.
Write mode Notations input For example, enter 3/4,0.75 for a 3/4 time signature with a dotted eighth note (dotted quaver) upbeat or 4/4,1 for a 4/4 time signature with one quarter note upbeat. The number after the comma indicates multiples of the rhythmic unit specified by the denominator of the time signature. 6. Input the pick-up bar and close the popover in one of the following ways: ● To input a pick-up bar on all staves, press Return .
Write mode Notations input PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input. ● Select an item at the rhythmic position where you want to input a pick-up bar. If you want to input a pick-up bar on a single staff, select an item that belongs to that staff only. 2. Optional: If you want Dorico Pro to add beats at the end of the region affected by the pick-up bar if required, press I to activate Insert mode. 3.
Write mode Notations input begins in the pick-up bar, not in the first full bar. You can insert beats at the start to push existing music to later rhythmic positions.
Write mode Notations input Tempo marks Example tempo mark Popover entry Adagio Adagio Presto = 176 Presto q = 176 or Presto q=176 Largo ( = 52) Largo (q = 52) or Largo (q=52) = 96-112 q = 96-112, q=96-112, 6 = 96-112, or 6=96-112 = 84 q. = 84, q.=84, 6. = 84, or 6.=84 = 60 h = 60, h=60, 7 = 60, or 7=60 = 120 e = 120, e=120, 5 = 120, or 5=120 rit. rit. or rit ritardando ritardando accel. accel.
Write mode Notations input Metronome mark beat unit Popover entry 16th note x or 4 Eighth note e or 5 Quarter note q or 6 Half note h or 7 Whole note w or 8 Double whole note 2w or 9 Rhythm dot . (period) Tempo equations Example tempo equation Popover entry = e = e., e=e., 5 = 5., or 5=5.
Write mode Notations input Rhythmic feel Popover entry Dotted 8th-16th fixed rhythmic feel 3:1 swing 8ths (fixed) TIP For rhythmic feels, the popover uses the name of the rhythmic feel as set in the Rhythmic Feel dialog. If you have created custom rhythmic feels, you can enter the name of these into the tempo popover.
Write mode Notations input Gradual Tempo Change Contains tempo marks that indicate a change in tempo over a defined period of time, such as rallentando or accelerando. You can add modifiers to gradual tempo changes. Available modifiers are shown at the top of the section. Relative Tempo Change Contains tempo marks that indicate a change in tempo that is relative to the previous tempo, such as mosso (movement, or with movement).
Write mode Notations input Types of tempo marks on page 1421 Changing the metronome mark value on page 1431 Hiding/Showing decimal places for metronome marks on page 1433 Inputting tempo marks with the popover You can input tempo marks using the tempo popover, both during note input and by adding them to existing music. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input. ● Select an item at the rhythmic position where you want to input a tempo mark.
Write mode Notations input Time track on page 609 Tempo mark components on page 1422 Gradual tempo changes on page 1433 Metronome marks on page 1430 Lengthening/Shortening gradual tempo changes on page 1434 Hiding/Showing decimal places for metronome marks on page 1433 Changing the style of gradual tempo changes on page 1434 Inputting tempo marks with the panel You can input tempo marks using the Tempo panel, both during note input and by adding them to existing music.
Write mode Notations input RELATED LINKS Tempo marks on page 1420 Lengthening/Shortening gradual tempo changes on page 1434 Mouse input settings on page 167 Hiding/Showing decimal places for metronome marks on page 1433 Changing the metronome mark value on page 1431 Changing the style of gradual tempo changes on page 1434 Input methods for bars, beats, and barlines You can input both bars and barlines with the keyboard by using the bars and barlines popover, and also with the mouse by using the available o
Write mode Notations input Example action Popover entry Add fourteen bars 14 or +14 Delete one bar –1 Delete six bars –6 Add a bar rest rest Delete empty bars at the end of the flow trim This list is not comprehensive, as you can add and delete any number of bars using the popover. This table is intended to illustrate how you can structure your entry to input and delete bars, and input bar rests.
Write mode Notations input Beat unit Popover entry Quarter note q or 6 Half note h or 7 Whole note w or 8 Double whole note 2w or 9 Rhythm dot .
Write mode Notations input Bars and Barlines panel The Bars and Barlines panel allows you to input bars, bar rests, and different types of barlines. It is located on the right of the window in Write mode. ● You can hide/show the Bars and Barlines panel by clicking Bars and Barlines Notations toolbox on the right of the window in Write mode.
Write mode Notations input RESULT The number of bars or beats specified is input. During note input, bars/beats are input from the caret position. If the caret is in the middle of the bar when inputting bars, sufficient beats are added to ensure that the final bar created has the correct number of beats. The caret position stays at its previous position so you can continue inputting music from the same position.
Write mode Notations input If you selected Start of Selection, bars are input directly after a selected barline, and directly before a selected note, bar, or time signature. TIP Another way to add bars is by choosing a note duration, such as a whole note when in a 4/4 time signature, and pressing Space repeatedly during note input.
Write mode Notations input PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input. ● Select an item at the rhythmic position where you want to input a barline. If you want to input a barline on a single staff, select an item that belongs to that staff only. 2. Optional: If you want to input barlines onto multiple specific staves at once, extend the caret to those staves. 3. Press Shift-B to open the bars and barlines popover. 4. Enter the barline you want into the popover.
Write mode Notations input Inputting barlines with the panel You can input barlines using the Bars and Barlines panel, both during note input and by adding them to existing music. You can also change the type of existing barlines. NOTE These steps describe inputting with the default mouse input preference Create item at selection. PREREQUISITE If you want to input barlines onto single staves only, you have input an independent time signature on those staves. PROCEDURE 1.
Write mode Notations input Repeats in playback on page 627 Input methods for dynamics You can input dynamics with the keyboard by using the dynamics popover, and with the mouse by using the Dynamics panel.
Write mode Notations input Dynamic or modifier Popover entry possibile possibile, poss, or poss. poco poco molto molto più piu or più meno meno mosso mosso crescendo: < cresc. (text) cresc diminuendo: > dim.
Write mode Notations input You can hide immediate dynamics if you only want to show the modifier. RELATED LINKS Dynamics on page 874 Dynamic modifiers on page 890 Niente hairpins on page 888 Hiding/Showing immediate dynamics on page 884 Changing the appearance of gradual dynamics on page 895 Dynamics panel The Dynamics panel contains the different dynamics available in Dorico Pro, including gradual dynamics and dynamic modifiers, such as poco and possibile.
Write mode Notations input independently in multiple-voice contexts, for example, to give the separate staves of grand staff instruments different dynamics. TIP You can also change dynamics during note input by following these steps when the caret is at the rhythmic position of the dynamic you want to change. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input. NOTE If you want to input voice-specific dynamics, the caret must be active.
Write mode Notations input NOTE ● If you entered a dynamic phrase into the popover during note input, such as pp, each dynamic and hairpin lasts a quarter note (crotchet) by default. You can lengthen/shorten gradual dynamics and groups of dynamics later. ● Some modifiers, such as molto, appear before immediate dynamics rather than after them, even if you do not enter them in that order. This follows the generally accepted practice for the placement of that text.
Write mode Notations input NOTE If you want to input voice-specific dynamics, the caret must be active. ● Select an item on the staff and at the rhythmic position where you want to input dynamics. If you want to input dynamics across a duration, select items on the staff that span that duration. 2. In the Notations toolbox, click Dynamics to show the Dynamics panel. 3.
Write mode Notations input AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can move dynamics within dynamic phrases and change the placement of dynamics relative to the staff.
Write mode Notations input Chord symbol roots Type of chord symbol root Popover entry English note names C, Db, F#, B, and so on C, D♭, F♯, B, and so on German note names C, Des, Fis, H, and so on C, D♭, F♯, H, and so on Fixed-do solfège do, reb, fa, fa#, ti, and so on C, D♭, F, F♯, B, and so on Nashville numbers representing scale degrees 1, 2b, 4#, 7, and so on Assuming C major: C, D♭, F♯, B, and so on Chord symbol qualities Chord symbol quality Popover entry Major maj, M, ma, or nothing af
Write mode Notations input Chord symbol alterations Type of chord symbol alteration Popover entry Alterations b5, -5, #9, +9, and so on Added notes add#11, add+11, addb9, add-9, addF#, addBb, and so on Suspensions sus4, sus9, and so on Omissions omit3, no7, and so on Chord symbols with altered bass notes Example altered bass note chord symbols Popover entry G7/D G7,D or Gmaj7,D C(♭5)/E♭ CMb5/Eb or Cmajb5/Eb Fm/D♯ Fm/D# or Fmi/D# Polychord chord symbols Example polychord chord symbols Pop
Write mode Notations input Modal chord symbol Popover entry Dorian dorian Phrygian phrygian Lydian lydian Mixolydian mixolydian Aeolian aeolian Locrian locrian Melodic minor melodicminor Harmonic minor harmonicminor Whole tone wholetone Octatonic or diminished half-whole diminishedhalfwhole, diminishedsemitonetone, octatonichalfwhole, or octatonicsemitonetone Octatonic or diminished whole-half diminishedwholehalf, diminishedtonesemitone, octatonicwholehalf, or octatonictonesemitone
Write mode Notations input Popover navigation Key command Advance the popover to the next beat. Space Move the popover back to the previous beat. Shift-Space Advance the popover to the start of the next bar. Tab Move the popover back to the start of the previous bar.
Write mode Notations input RELATED LINKS Note Input Options dialog on page 165 Inputting chord symbols You can input chord symbols using the chord symbols popover, both for all instruments or only for individual instruments. You can also open the chord symbols popover during note input; however, inputting a chord symbol stops note input. PREREQUISITE If you want to input chord symbols using a MIDI device, you have connected the MIDI device you want to use. PROCEDURE 1.
Write mode Notations input Global chord symbols apply to all instruments in the project and appear on all staves set to show chord symbols. Local chord symbols only apply to the selected instrument. Local chord symbols always appear, even if global chord symbols exist at the same rhythmic positions. NOTE The chord symbol may look different to what you entered into the popover.
Write mode Notations input Indicating root notes in chord symbols You can indicate the root note of chord symbols when inputting chord symbols with a MIDI keyboard. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, open the chord symbols popover. 2. Indicate the root note of a chord symbol in any of the following ways when using a MIDI keyboard: ● First play the root with one finger, and then play the remaining notes of the chord while still holding down the root.
Write mode Notations input 2. Choose Write > Create Chord Symbol Region. RESULT During note input, chord symbol regions are input spanning the duration of the selected note or item, which is usually the last input note. When adding chord symbol regions to existing music, they span the selected duration. The player holding the corresponding instrument is automatically set to show chord symbols in chord symbol regions and slash regions, even if it was set to hide all chord symbols before.
Write mode Notations input Type of clef Popover entry Bass F clef f, F, f4, fa, or bass Tenor C clef ct, CT, c4, ut4, or tenor Alto C clef ca, CA, c3, ut3, or alto Treble G clef, octave below g8ba, G8ba, g8d, G8d, treble8ba, or treble8d Treble G clef, two octaves below g15ba, G15ba, g15d, G15d, treble15ba, or treble15d Treble G clef, octave above g8va, G8va, g8u, G8u, treble8va, or treble8u Treble G clef, two octaves above g15ma, G15ma, g15u, G15u, treble15ma, or treble15u Alto C clef, octa
Write mode Notations input NOTE More clefs are available in the Clefs panel, including the Indian drum clef and rectangular percussion clef. Octave lines Function of octave line Popover entry Shifts notes up by 1 octave. 8va, 8, 8u, or 1u Shifts notes up by 2 octaves. 15ma, 15, 15u, or 2u Shifts notes up by 3 octaves. 22ma, 22, 22u, or 3u Shifts notes down by 1 octave. 8ba, 8vb, 8d, or 1d Shifts notes down by 2 octaves. 15ba, 15vb, 15d, or 2d Shifts notes down by 3 octaves.
Write mode Notations input Archaic Clefs Contains clefs that are rarely used any more, such as the mezzo-soprano clef, baritone bass clef, and sub-bass clef. Octave Lines Contains octave lines, indicating up to three octaves above and below, and a loco line. Inputting clefs with the popover You can input clefs using the clefs and octave lines popover, both during note input and by adding them to existing music. You can also use the popover to change the type of existing clefs.
Write mode Notations input Inputting clefs with the panel You can input clefs using the Clefs panel, both during note input and by adding them to existing music. NOTE ● In Dorico Pro, you cannot hide clefs. Therefore, if you do not want to show any clef, you must input an invisible clef. ● These steps describe inputting with the default mouse input preference Create item at selection. ● Many instruments in Dorico Pro have different types that show alternative clefs by default.
Write mode Notations input 4. Enter the appropriate entry for the octave line you want into the popover. For example, enter 8va for an octave line that shifts notes up one octave. 5. 6. Input the octave line and close the popover in one of the following ways: ● To input an octave line for all voices on the staff, press Return . ● To input an octave line only for the currently selected voice, press Alt/Opt-Return .
Write mode Notations input ● To input an octave line only for the currently selected voice, Alt -click it in the Octave Lines section. Alternatively, when adding octave lines to existing notes, you can click the octave line you want in the Clefs panel first, and then click and drag it to the length you want. RESULT During note input, octave lines are input at the caret position. However, if you input notes using the mouse, octave lines do not automatically extend as you continue inputting notes.
Write mode Notations input Type of hold or pause Popover entry Fermata fer or fermata Very long fermata fermataverylong Long fermata fermatalong Short fermata fermatashort Very short fermata fermataveryshort Short fermata (Henze) fermatashorthenze Long fermata (Henze) fermatalonghenze Curlew (Britten) curlew Caesura caesura or // Thick caesura caesurathick Curved caesura caesuracurved Short caesura caesurashort Breath mark (Comma-like) breathmarkcomma, comma, or , (comma) Breath
Write mode Notations input Holds and Pauses panel The Holds and Pauses panel allows you to input all the different types of holds and pauses available in Dorico Pro, including alternative versions of fermatas. ● You can hide/show the Holds and Pauses panel by clicking Holds and Pauses Notations toolbox on the right of the window in Write mode.
Write mode Notations input RELATED LINKS Extending the caret to multiple staves on page 174 Holds and pauses on page 975 Inputting holds and pauses with the panel You can input holds and pauses using the Holds and Pauses panel, both during note input and by adding them to existing music. NOTE These steps describe inputting with the default mouse input preference Create item at selection. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input.
Write mode Notations input A correctly input caesura. The dotted attachment lines are attached to the notehead after the barline, meaning the caesura is correctly positioned before the barline. An incorrectly input caesura. By clicking to the left of the barline, the caesura is attached to the last eighth note in the bar. When input correctly, the dotted attachment lines link the caesura to the notehead immediately after the barline.
Write mode Notations input The icon on the left-hand side of the popover matches the corresponding button in the Notations toolbox on the right of the window.
Write mode Notations input Type of jazz ornament Popover entry Jazz turn jazz or shake Smear smear Jazz articulations Type of jazz articulation Popover entry Plop (bend) plop Plop (smooth) plopsmooth Scoop scoop Doit (bend) doit Doit (smooth) doitsmooth Fall (bend) fall Fall (smooth) fallsmooth TIP Other ornaments are available in the Ornaments panel on the right of the window in Write mode.
Write mode Notations input Glissando lines Type of glissando line Popover entry Straight glissando line gliss Wavy glissando line glisswavy Guitar techniques Type of guitar technique Popover entry Guitar bend bend Vibrato bar dive and return vibbend Vibrato bar scoop vibscoop Vibrato bar dip vibdip Vibrato bar line wbar or w/bar NOTE Must have duration to show its line.
Write mode Notations input Type of guitar technique Popover entry Hammer-on then pull-off or pull-off then hammer-on (ligado) hp, hopo, hammerpull, lig, or ligado NOTE You must select at least three notes assigned to the same string with alternating pitch directions, such as C-D-C or D-C-D. Right-hand tapping tap Right-hand tapping with pull-off tappull NOTE You must select at least two notes assigned to the same string with descending pitch directions, such as D-C.
Write mode Notations input Jazz ornaments on page 1144 Playing technique duration on page 1200 Ornaments panel The Ornaments panel allows you to input all the different types of ornaments available, including jazz articulations, as well as arpeggio signs, glissando lines, guitar bends, and vibrato bar techniques. ● You can hide/show the Ornaments panel by clicking Ornaments on the right of the window in Write mode.
Write mode Notations input ● Select an item on the staff and at the rhythmic position where you want to input an ornament. If you want to input a trill with a specific duration, select items on the staff that span that duration. 2. Optional: If you want to input ornaments onto multiple staves at once, extend the caret to those staves. 3. Press Shift-O to open the ornaments popover. 4. Enter the appropriate entry for the ornament you want into the popover.
Write mode Notations input 2. In the Notations toolbox, click Ornaments to show the Ornaments panel. 3. In the Ornaments panel, click the ornament you want. RESULT During note input, ornaments are input at the caret position. Trills are input with a default duration of a quarter note. When adding ornaments to existing music, they are input at the rhythmic position of the earliest selected item.
Write mode Notations input 6. Optional: During chord input, input the notes you want. RESULT During chord input, arpeggio signs are input at the caret position. When adding arpeggio signs to existing notes, they are input to the left of the selected notes. Arpeggio signs automatically span the pitch range of all notes at that rhythmic position in the current voice during chord input, and all notes in the selected voices/staves when adding arpeggio signs to existing notes.
Write mode Notations input Arpeggio signs on page 1097 Mouse input settings on page 167 Inputting glissando lines with the popover You can input glissando lines between existing notes using the ornaments popover. You can input glissando lines between both adjacent and non-adjacent notes. NOTE You cannot input glissando lines during note input or on the last note on a staff. Instead, you can input a jazz articulation. PREREQUISITE You have input at least two notes that you want to join with a glissando.
Write mode Notations input Inputting glissando lines with the panel You can input glissando lines between existing notes using the Ornaments panel. You can input glissando lines between both adjacent and non-adjacent notes. NOTE ● These steps describe inputting with the default mouse input preference Create item at selection. If your preference is set to Load pointer with item, you can only input glissando lines between the note you click on and the note immediately following it.
Write mode Notations input Inputting jazz articulations with the popover You can input jazz articulations using the ornaments popover, both during note input and by adding them to existing notes. NOTE You can input jazz ornaments, such as flips or jazz turns, in the same ways as inputting ornaments. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input.
Write mode Notations input Inputting jazz articulations with the panel You can input jazz articulations using the Ornaments panel, both during note input and by adding them to existing notes. NOTE ● You can input jazz ornaments, such as flips or jazz turns, in the same ways as inputting ornaments. ● These steps describe inputting with the default mouse input preference Create item at selection. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input.
Write mode Notations input indications with the keyboard by using the ornaments popover, and with the mouse by using the Ornaments panel. You can also input guitar pre-bends, post-bends, and vibrato bar pre-dives using properties in the Properties panel. You can input guitar techniques during note input and by adding them to existing notes, but you cannot input guitar bends during note input. You can only input guitar bends by adding them to existing notes.
Write mode Notations input RELATED LINKS Ornaments popover on page 285 Guitar bends on page 1114 Inputting guitar pre-bends/pre-dives on page 300 Inputting guitar post-bends on page 300 Key Commands page in the Preferences dialog on page 51 Inputting guitar bends with the panel You can input guitar bends between existing notes, including between grace notes and normal notes, using the Ornaments panel. You can input guitar bends between both adjacent and non-adjacent notes.
Write mode Notations input Inputting guitar pre-bends/pre-dives You can input guitar pre-bends on any existing notes belonging to fretted instruments. You can also specify that pre-bends should be played using the vibrato bar, a technique that is known as a “pre-dive”. PREREQUISITE If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes before which you want to input guitar pre-bends/pre-dives. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2.
Write mode Notations input Properties panel (Write mode) on page 156 Inputting guitar bends with the popover on page 298 Engrave toolbox on page 465 Inputting vibrato bar dives You can input vibrato bar dives, both during note input and by adding them to existing notes. Vibrato bar dives are notated using a smooth fall jazz articulation combined with a vibrato bar indication. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input.
Write mode Notations input AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK If you want vibrato bar indications to show a line, you can lengthen them to give them duration.
Write mode Notations input RESULT Vibrato bar dives are input between notes with descending pitch directions and vibrato bar returns are input between notes with ascending pitch directions. If a vibrato bar dive ends on the same note that a vibrato bar return starts on, they appear as a V on tablature with the bend interval shown at the point.
Write mode Notations input RESULT Vibrato bar dives are input between notes with descending pitch directions and vibrato bar returns are input between notes with ascending pitch directions. If a vibrato bar dive ends on the same note that a vibrato bar return starts on, they appear as a V on tablature with the bend interval shown at the point.
Write mode Notations input Vibrato bar techniques on page 1131 Hiding/Showing guitar techniques on notation staves and tablature on page 1137 Inputting vibrato bar indications/lines with the popover on page 307 Deleting guitar techniques on page 1141 Inputting vibrato bar scoops with the panel You can input vibrato bar scoops using the Ornaments panel, both during note input and by adding them to existing notes. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input.
Write mode Notations input ● Select an item on the staff at the rhythmic position where you want to input a vibrato bar dip. 2. Optional: If you want to input vibrato bar dips onto multiple staves at once, extend the caret to those staves. 3. Press Shift-O to open the ornaments popover. 4. Enter vibdip into the popover. 5. Press Return to close the popover. 6. Optional: During note input, input a note or press Space to advance the caret and input the vibrato bar dip.
Write mode Notations input Changing the staff-relative placement of items on page 371 Inputting vibrato bar indications/lines with the popover You can input vibrato bar indications/lines using the ornaments popover, both during note input and by adding them to existing music. When vibrato bar indications are input across a range of items, they are input with duration and show a duration line, which is dashed by default. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input.
Write mode Notations input ● Select an item on the staff and at the rhythmic position where you want to input a vibrato bar indication. If you want to input a vibrato bar line, select items on the staff that span the required duration. 2. In the Notations toolbox, click Ornaments 3. In the Guitar section, click Vibrato Bar Line to show the Ornaments panel. . RESULT During note input, vibrato bar indications are input at the caret position.
Write mode Notations input 3. Optional: During note input, input at least one note. 4. Press Shift-O to open the ornaments popover. 5. Enter the appropriate entry for the hammer-on/pull-off you want into the popover. For example, enter ho for a hammer-on or hopo for a hammer-on then pull-off. 6. Press Return to close the popover. RESULT The hammer-on/pull-off you specify is input on the selected notes. During note input, this is usually the last note you input.
Write mode Notations input NOTE If you want to input tapping with pull-offs, you must select at least two notes assigned to the same string with descending pitch directions, such as D-C. 2. Optional: If you want to input tapping onto multiple fretted instrument staves at once, extend the caret to those staves. 3. Optional: During note input, input at least one note. 4. Press Shift-O to open the ornaments popover. 5. Enter the appropriate entry for the tapping indication you want into the popover.
Write mode Notations input RELATED LINKS Playing techniques on page 1190 Pedal lines on page 1167 Harp pedaling on page 1156 String indicators on page 954 Inputting playing techniques with the popover on page 315 Inputting playing techniques with the panel on page 317 Inputting pedal lines, retakes, and pedal level changes with the popover on page 318 Inputting pedal lines, retakes, and pedal level changes with the panel on page 319 Inputting harp pedal diagrams on page 321 Inputting string indicators outsi
Write mode Notations input Playing technique Popover entry Strong air pressure strong air pressure Double-tongue double-tongue Down bow downbow Up bow upbow Sul ponticello sul pont Sul tasto sul tasto Poco sul tasto pst Pizzicato pizz Spiccato spicc Arco arco Tongue click (Stockhausen) tongue click Finger click (Stockhausen) finger click Vibraphone motor on motor on Vibraphone motor off motor off Open open Damp damp Damp (large) damp large Full barré full barre Half ba
Write mode Notations input If you do not know the correct entry for a playing technique, start entering part of the playing technique and see if it becomes available in the popover menu. NOTE ● To give playing techniques duration, add -> at the end of your entry, such as vibrato->. During note input, the duration of the playing technique extends as you continue inputting notes or advance the caret. When adding playing techniques to existing notes, they are added as a group.
Write mode Notations input TIP The pipe character is optional.
Write mode Notations input Keyboard Contains playing techniques typically only used for keyboard instruments, such as “Ped.” and different pedal depression levels. Choral Contains playing techniques typically only used for the voice, such as “mouth open” and “tongue click”. Strings Contains playing techniques typically only used for string instruments, such as “col legno battuto” and “down bow”.
Write mode Notations input When you start entering a playing technique into the playing techniques popover, a menu appears that shows valid playing techniques containing the letters/words you enter, which you can select. If you want the playing technique to have duration, you can add -> at the end. 5. Press Return to close the popover.
Write mode Notations input Enabling independent voice playback on page 622 Playback techniques on page 679 Creating custom playing techniques on page 1212 Inputting playing techniques with the panel You can input playing techniques using the Playing Techniques panel, both during note input and by adding them to existing notes. NOTE ● You cannot input playing techniques with duration in sequence, which automatically groups them, when using the panel.
Write mode Notations input RELATED LINKS Changing your mouse input settings on page 168 Grouping playing techniques together on page 1205 Enabling independent voice playback on page 622 Playback techniques on page 679 Creating custom playing techniques on page 1212 Inputting pedal lines, retakes, and pedal level changes with the popover You can input pedal lines using the playing techniques popover, both during note input and by adding them to existing music.
Write mode Notations input Adding retakes and pedal level changes to existing pedal lines with the popover You can add retakes and pedal level changes to existing sustain pedal lines using the playing techniques popover. NOTE You cannot add retakes and pedal level changes to sostenuto or una corda pedal lines. PREREQUISITE You have input a sustain pedal line. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select an item at the rhythmic position where you want the retake or pedal level change to apply. 2.
Write mode Notations input 6. Optional: In the Playing Techniques panel, click the retake or pedal level change you want in the Keyboard section. RESULT The pedal line is input across the selected range.
Write mode Notations input Inputting harp pedal diagrams You can input harp pedal diagrams using the playing techniques popover, both during note input and by adding them to existing music. If you do not input any harp pedaling, Dorico Pro assumes all harp pedals are in their natural setting, as they would be for C major. Any pitches that do not fit with the current harp pedaling, excluding the two lowest harp strings, appear red when colors for notes out of range are shown. PROCEDURE 1.
Write mode Notations input 2. Choose Write > Calculate Harp Pedals. RESULT A harp pedal diagram is input at the start of your selection. Depending on your per-layout settings, it is either displayed as a diagram, using note names, or not shown and instead indicated by a signpost. Inputting string indicators outside the staff with the popover You can input string indicators outside the staff using the playing techniques popover, both during note input and by adding them to existing notes. PROCEDURE 1.
Write mode Notations input ● You can change the staff-relative placement of string indicators.
Write mode Notations input ● You can change the staff-relative placement of string indicators. RELATED LINKS Playing Techniques panel on page 314 Inputting string indicators inside the staff You can show a string indicator inside the staff for each fretted instrument note. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. Dorico Pro automatically detects a string that each pitch could be played on, but you can also specify the string manually.
Write mode Notations input Input methods for lines You can input both horizontal and vertical lines by using the Lines panel. There is no popover for lines. TIP If you want lines to represent specific notations that affect playback if applicable, you can instead input these notations directly. For example, dynamics, arpeggios, glissandi, and trills all have dedicated features in Dorico Pro.
Write mode Notations input Inputting horizontal lines You can input horizontal lines between existing notes or spanning a specified duration using the Lines panel. Horizontal lines can be attached to noteheads, barlines, or rhythmic positions, and can have different attachment types at their start and end. You can also input barline-/rhythmic position-attached lines that apply to all staves. NOTE ● You cannot change the attachment type of horizontal lines after they have been input.
Write mode Notations input AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK ● You can change the placement and staff position of barline-/rhythmic position-attached lines. ● You can add text to lines.
Write mode Notations input RESULT The vertical line specified is input to the left of the selected notes. Its length is adjusted automatically so that it spans the range of all notes in the selected voices/staves at that rhythmic position. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK ● You can change the order of lines when multiple exist at the same rhythmic position and show vertical lines on the right of notes. ● You can lengthen/shorten vertical lines. ● You can add text to lines.
Write mode Notations input RESULT During note input, the text you entered into the text editor is input at the caret position. It is automatically placed above the staves to which it applies, using the default paragraph style, and follows your project-wide settings for the vertical position of text. When adding text to existing music, it is input at the position of the earliest selected item. NOTE ● In Dorico Pro, system text is categorized as a system object.
Write mode Notations input NOTE 5 ● Depending on the font selected, some font styles might not be available. ● You can also change the font style using the following standard key commands: ● Ctrl/Cmd-B for bold ● Ctrl/Cmd-I for italic Font Size Allows you to change the size of selected text. TIP You can also change the font size using the following key commands: 6 ● Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-.
Write mode Notations input 13 Foreground Color Allows you to change the color of selected text. 14 Background Color Allows you to change the background color of selected text.
Write mode Notations input 4. 5. Enter the word or syllable you want to add to the selected note into the popover. ● To enter multiple words on a single note, press Shift-Alt/Opt-Space . ● To include a hyphen within a single word or syllable, press Alt/Opt-- (hyphen). ● To include an elision in a lyric, press _ (underscore). Advance the popover to the next note in one of the following ways: ● If you entered a complete word, or the final syllable in a multi-syllabic word, press Space .
Write mode Notations input ● Choose Write > Create Lyrics. ● Click Lyrics in the Notations toolbox. Lyric lines The popover automatically opens ready to input lyrics into Line 1, except if you are changing an existing lyric. The number shown on the left-hand side of the lyrics popover indicates the lyric line into which the lyric is input. The lyrics popover with an example entry for Line 1 You can change the lyric line number by pressing Down Arrow when the lyrics popover is open.
Write mode Notations input Navigation during lyric input You can move the lyrics popover to input new lyrics and edit existing lyrics without having to close and reopen the lyrics popover. Popover navigation Key command Finish the current word and advance the popover to the next note or chord. Space Finish the current syllable and advance the popover to the next note or chord. - (hyphen) Advance the popover to the next note without showing an extension line or hyphen.
Write mode Notations input NOTE If you selected an item on a staff that has local figures at earlier rhythmic positions, the figured bass popover is automatically set to input local figures when it opens. 3. Optional: Change the type of figure you want to enter in one of the following ways: ● To input local figures, press Alt/Opt-L . ● To input global figures, press Alt/Opt-G . The popover icon updates to show the current type. 4.
Write mode Notations input AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK ● You can hide/show figured bass above specific players in each layout independently. ● You can simplify compound figures, that is, figures 9 and above. ● You can show figures on individual rests.
Write mode Notations input Type of figure Example popover entry Multiple figures 6#42 or 6,#4,2 TIP You can separate figures with commas to remove ambiguity.
Write mode Notations input Accidentals and alterations Type of accidental/alteration Popover entry Sharp # or s TIP For raised thirds, you can enter just without the number.
Write mode Notations input 4. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The figured bass input setting is changed in the current project. This affects all subsequent figured bass you input, but does not affect any existing figured bass in the project. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK ● You can input figured bass using your chosen setting. ● You can reset existing figured bass so it follows your engraving options, regardless of the input setting when you input them.
Write mode Notations input RELATED LINKS Rehearsal marks on page 1255 Changing the index of rehearsal marks on page 1261 Changing the rehearsal mark sequence type on page 1262 Adding prefixes/suffixes to rehearsal marks on page 1263 Changing the rehearsal mark enclosure type on page 1256 Mouse input settings on page 167 Inputting markers/timecodes You can input markers at specific positions in time. Depending on your project-wide settings, timecodes can also be shown alongside markers. PROCEDURE 1.
Write mode Notations input The Add Marker dialog contains the following options: Text Allows you to enter custom text that is shown in the marker. Timecode Allows you to specify the timecode at which you want to input the marker. For example, if you already know the timecodes for each marker, you can enter them directly rather than positioning the playhead at the position of each marker. Valid range Displays the timecode range of the flow.
Write mode Notations input Find Tempo dialog The Find Tempo dialog allows you to calculate tempos that best accommodate your important markers, for example, by identifying which tempos cause markers to coincide as closely as possible with strong beats. ● You can open the Find Tempo dialog in Write mode by clicking Find Tempo in the Markers section of the Video panel. NOTE ● The Find Tempo dialog only considers markers in a single flow.
Write mode Notations input Tempos found Contains a list of possible tempos that you can select to see how they affect the position of your markers relative to beats. The list is updated automatically when you change options such as Tempo range and Beat unit. The list contains columns for the following information: ● BPM: Stands for “beats per minute”. Lists different possible tempos according to their metronome mark value. ● IFO: Stands for “important frames off”.
Write mode Notations input TIP To indicate repeats using repeat barlines, you can input repeat barlines using the available input methods for barlines.
Write mode Notations input Type of repeat marker Popover entry D.C. al Fine dcalf, DC al Fine, D.C. al Fine, and so on D.C. al Coda dcalc, DC al Coda, D.C. al Coda, and so on D.S. ds, D.S., dal segno, and so on D.S. al Fine dsalf, DS al Fine, D.S. al Fine, and so on D.S. al Coda dsalc, DS al Coda, D.S.
Write mode Notations input Type of tremolo Popover entry Three strokes ///2, \\\2, or 32 Four strokes ////2, \\\\2, or 42 Z on stem (buzz roll) z or zonstem Remove all tremolos 0 or clear Slash regions Slash region Popover entry New slash region slash Bar repeats Type of bar repeat Popover entry Repeat last bar % or %1 Repeat last 2 bars %2 Repeat last 4 bars %4 Repeat last bar, group in 2 %1,2 Repeat last bar, group in 4 %1,4 Repeat last 2 bars, group in 2 %2,2 Repeat last 4 ba
Write mode Notations input Repeat Structures panel The Repeat Structures panel contains the different types of repeat notations, including repeat endings, repeat markers, tremolos, rhythm slashes, and bar repeats. Tremolos are included in the Repeat Structures panel because they indicate that notes are repeated, either individually as single-note tremolos or in sequences as multi-note tremolos.
Write mode Notations input RESULT The repeat ending is input, with the first ending segment covering the bars in which you selected items, and a second ending segment created automatically in the following bar. An end repeat barline is created at the end of the first ending if none exists already.
Write mode Notations input EXAMPLE Default repeat ending structure with two endings Repeat ending structure with additional third ending RELATED LINKS Repeat endings on page 1274 Repeats popover on page 344 Inputting repeat endings with the panel You can input repeat endings using the Repeat Structures panel, both during note input and by adding them to existing music. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input.
Write mode Notations input TIP During note input, you can select additional notes before/after the last input note without deactivating the caret by pressing Shift-Right Arrow / Shift-Left Arrow . ● Select the bars that you want to include in the additional ending. NOTE Your selection must start from the first bar following the previous repeat ending segment. 2. In the Notations toolbox, click Repeat Structures 3.
Write mode Notations input Inputting repeat markers with the popover You can input repeat markers, including repeat jumps and repeat sections, using the repeats popover, both during note input and by adding them to existing music. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input. TIP During note input, you can select additional notes before/after the last input note without deactivating the caret by pressing Shift-Right Arrow / Shift-Left Arrow .
Write mode Notations input For repeat jumps, we recommend that you select the barline with which you want the end of the jump instruction to align. For repeat sections, we recommend that you select the barline with which you want the start of the section marker to align. 2. In the Notations toolbox, click Repeat Structures 3. Click the repeat marker you want to input in any of the following sections: ● Repeat Jumps ● Repeat Sections to show the Repeat Structures panel.
Write mode Notations input RESULT Single-note tremolos are input on the selected notes with the number of tremolo strokes specified. Multi-note tremolos with the number of tremolo strokes specified are input between selected individual notes and the notes immediately after them, or between selected pairs of notes. When tuplets are selected, multi-note tremolos are input across the selected tuplets, with the tremolo strokes positioned in the center of all notes in the tuplet.
Write mode Notations input NOTE If you want to input multi-note tremolos, you must select at least two notes on the same staff or cross-staff notes that have the same notated duration. The notes can also be tuplets. 2. In the Notations toolbox, click Repeat Structures to show the Repeat Structures panel. 3. In the Tremolos section, click the button with the number of single-note or multi-note tremolo strokes you want.
Write mode Notations input ● Start note input. ● On the staff where you want to input a slash region, select items that span the required duration. 2. Press Shift-R to open the repeats popover. 3. Enter slash into the popover. 4. Press Return to close the popover. RESULT During note input, slash regions are input spanning the duration of the selected note or item, which is usually the last input note. When adding slash regions to existing music, they span the selected duration.
Write mode Notations input ● You can also input bar repeat regions by clicking Create Bar Repeat Region in the Bar Repeats group of the Repeat Structures panel. However, this only inputs a bar repeat region containing single-bar repeats. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can change how bar repeats are grouped.
Write mode Notations input score layouts and shown in part layouts by default, but you can choose to hide/show cues in any layout.
Write mode Notations input Suggest Cues Allows you to generate suggested locations for cues based on how long players have been resting. RELATED LINKS Cues on page 853 Cue suggestions Cue suggestions are places in the current flow that Dorico Pro has identified as useful locations to input cues, based on a set span of time during which players have not played.
Write mode Notations input ● Sec.: The length of time in seconds the destination instrument has been resting before the entry shown in the Bar column. Click to show the length of resting period in descending order, longest period down to shortest period. Click rows in the cue suggestions table to navigate directly to that location. By default, an area with an equivalent rhythmic duration of 5 to 10 seconds prior to the entry in the destination instrument is highlighted.
Write mode Editing and selecting 7. Optional: To check the context of the cue suggestion, click a row in the cue suggestions table to navigate directly to that position in the layout. Cue suggestions are highlighted for the equivalent rhythmic duration of 5-10 seconds. You can choose not to see highlighted areas by deactivating Highlight suggestions. 8. On the staff where you want to input a cue, select items that span the duration in which you want to show a cue. 9.
Write mode Editing and selecting Selecting/Deselecting notes and items individually You can select/deselect existing notes and other notation items individually in the music area, for example, if you want to add articulations to a selection of notes or delete a short passage of music. TIP If you want to select a large number of notes/items, we recommend that you use one of the larger selection methods. PROCEDURE 1.
Write mode Editing and selecting 2. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-A to expand your selection. 3. Optional: Continue pressing Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-A to extend your selection further. RESULT More of the same types of items and notes in the same voices as your original selection are selected, with the range of selected items expanding each time you press the key command: firstly to the boundaries of the bar, secondly to the boundaries of the system, and finally to the rest of the flow.
Write mode Editing and selecting Large selections You can make large selections, including selecting the contents of whole staves or the whole flow. Select everything in a specific area You can use the Marquee Tool to specify an area in which you want to select everything. Select everything in the whole flow ● Press Ctrl/Cmd-A . ● Choose Edit > Select All. Select everything on a single staff ● Select the first note on the staff, hold down Shift , and select the last note on the staff.
Write mode Editing and selecting Selecting more items of the same type on page 361 System track The system track is a translucent line above the top of each system in Write mode. It allows you to add and delete bars and beats, and to select everything on all staves in the system. The system track above a staff, showing bars The system track above a staff, showing beat units reflecting the current rhythmic grid resolution The color of the system track changes depending on how you are interacting with it.
Write mode Editing and selecting NOTE Selections on the system track are cleared whenever you make any other kind of selection, or when you switch layouts. However, selections on the system track are retained when switching between page and galley view.
Write mode Editing and selecting System Track Select button in the system track The System Track Select button appears filled in when you hover over it RESULT Everything on all staves in the selected bars is selected and highlighted, including system objects, notations, and signposts. NOTE If you then delete your selection, any signposts included are also deleted. This can affect the page layout, for example, by removing ossia staves whose signposts were included in the selection.
Write mode Editing and selecting NOTE If you then delete your selection, any signposts included are also deleted. This can affect the page layout, for example, by removing ossia staves whose signposts were included in the selection.
Write mode Editing and selecting Filter Notes by Pitch dialog The Filter Notes by Pitch dialog allows you to specify notes that you want to filter from a larger selection by their pitch. You can specify pitches in only a single octave or in all octaves. The Filter Notes by Pitch dialog comprises the following: Written/Sounding pitches to filter Allows you to choose whether to filter the notes according to their Written pitch or their Sounding pitch.
Write mode Editing and selecting Changing filters to select/deselect You can change whether the available filter options select or deselect the specified items. By default, filters select items, meaning that the resulting selection only includes the item being filtered. When filters are set to deselect, the resulting selection includes everything except the item being filtered.
Write mode Editing and selecting Playing all/individual notes in chords during note input/selection You can change your default setting for whether all notes in chords are played when you select any note in the chord or whether only the selected notes are played. PREREQUISITE Notes are played during note input/selection. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-, to open Preferences. 2. Click Note Input and Editing in the category list. 3.
Write mode Editing and selecting 4. Press Return to close the popover. RESULT The selected item is changed according to the new entry in the popover. This changes different parameters for different items, such as the duration of a hold or pause or the volume of a dynamic. NOTE ● If you change a fermata to a breath mark, only the fermata on the top staff is changed to a breath mark.
Write mode Editing and selecting RESULT The staff-relative placement of the selected items is changed by setting Placement, Position, or Direction properties appropriately in the corresponding groups of the Properties panel. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain for items whose staff-relative placement properties are local. Deactivating these properties resets items to their default placement.
Write mode Editing and selecting Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 462 Engrave toolbox on page 465 Resetting the position of items You can reset the position of individual items you have moved graphically, which returns them to their default position. Properties relating to the position of items include horizontal and vertical offsets, beat-relative position, and staff-relative placement.
Write mode Navigation Navigation There are different ways you can navigate around the layout currently open in the music area, such as moving the selection to different items or bringing specific bar numbers or pages into view. Many navigation methods function in multiple modes. If you have an item selected, you can navigate to other notes/items, which moves the selection to those notes/items.
Write mode Navigation 3. Optional: Switch the selection to another type of item at the same rhythmic position in one of the following ways: ● Press Tab to cycle forwards through items. ● Press Shift-Tab to cycle backwards through items. NOTE You cannot switch the selection to system objects, such as system text or rehearsal marks. However, you can select system objects directly and navigate through them. 4.
Write mode Navigation 3. Click OK. RESULT The music area updates to show the start of the corresponding page. Dorico Pro automatically centers the top of the page in the music area. TIP You can assign a key command for Go To Page on the Key Commands page in Preferences. Going to bars You can go to any specific bar in any flow in the current layout, for example, to jump quickly to the exact bar that requires changes when editing music. These steps function in Setup, Write, Engrave, and Play modes.
Write mode Signposts Zooming in/out of the music area You can change the zoom level in the music area, for example, if you want a larger overview when inputting notes but to see notes and notations more closely when making detailed graphical amendments. PREREQUISITE If you want to keep a specific item in the center of the music area when you zoom in/out, you have selected that item. PROCEDURE 1. 2. Zoom in in any of the following ways: ● Press Ctrl/Cmd-= or Z .
Write mode Arranging tools The signpost of a hidden time signature When multiple signposts can exist at a single rhythmic position, they stack vertically so that they do not overlap and remain legible. Multiple signposts for different items at the same rhythmic position NOTE By default, signposts are not printed or included when you export graphics files.
Write mode Arranging tools RELATED LINKS Filters on page 367 Condensing on page 437 Changing the duration of notes on page 183 Deleting notes and items You can delete any notes/items you have input into your project independently of each other, such as deleting repeat endings without deleting the notes in them. However, you must be in Write mode. You cannot delete notes and items in Setup, Engrave, or Print modes. You can also delete notes in Play mode, but not other notation items. PROCEDURE 1.
Write mode Arranging tools ● Press Ctrl/Cmd-C , select the position to which you want to paste them, and press Ctrl/ Cmd-V . ● To copy items to the staff above, select them and choose Edit > Paste Special > Duplicate to Staff Above. ● To copy items to the staff below, select them and choose Edit > Paste Special > Duplicate to Staff Below. RESULT The selected items are copied without deleting them from their original positions.
Write mode Arranging tools RESULT The selected items are copied to all of the selected staves. TIP If you selected a range of items on each staff, the selected items are also pasted multiple times to fill the selected range.
Write mode Arranging tools RESULT The selected notes are moved to another staff by cutting them from their original staff and pasting them to the new staff. By default, they are pasted into the first voice active on that staff. Notes within tuplets remain tuplets even if you did not select the tuplet bracket, tuplet number/ ratio, or tuplet signpost.
Write mode Arranging tools RELATED LINKS Moving notes to other staves on page 381 Condensing on page 437 Exploding music onto multiple staves You can explode music onto more staves than it was originally notated for, for example, to get notes in dense piano chords onto all the woodwind staves quickly. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the music you want to explode. 2. Press Ctrl/Cmd-C to copy the music. 3. Select the staves onto which you want to explode the selected music. 4.
Write mode Arranging tools TIP ● You can also choose these options from the context menu. ● If there is only one voice on the staff, you can create a new voice for your selected notes. RESULT The voice of the selected notes is changed, which might cause Dorico Pro to change the stem directions of the selected notes and other notes on the staff, and add implicit rests to ensure correct notation based on convention. If you changed notes to a slash voice, they no longer play back.
Write mode Splitting flows EXAMPLE An E is in the up-stem voice, an F in the down-stem voice. After swapping their voice contents, the E is in the down-stem voice, and the F is in the up-stem voice. RELATED LINKS Swapping the order of voices on page 1525 Voice column index on page 1524 Splitting flows You can split flows at specific rhythmic positions.
Write mode Comments Comments Comments allow you to add notes or instructions at precise positions in your project without affecting the music. They are considered annotations in Dorico Pro, meaning they are not printed by default. Comments exist outside of the music, so they do not affect note spacing, vertical spacing, or casting off. However, you can attach them to specific items and staves in order to show the precise subject of each comment.
Write mode Comments Changing the author name used for comments on page 391 Annotations on page 704 Adding comments You can add comments at any rhythmic position in your project, including adding different comments to multiple staves at the same rhythmic position. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select an item on the staff and at the rhythmic position where you want to add a comment. If you want your comment to apply to a range, select multiple items. 2. Press Alt/Opt-C to open the Comment dialog. 3.
Write mode Comments Comments panel The Comments panel shows all the comments in the current flow as a list. Replies to comments are indented to indicate their relationship to the original comment. The Comments panel is located on the right of the window in Write mode. ● You can hide/show the Comments panel by clicking Comments on the right of the window in Write mode.
Write mode Comments 1 Author name This uses either the current user account or a custom name, depending on the preference that was set when the comment was added. 2 Comment content 3 Date the comment was added to the project 4 Instrument to which the comment applies 5 Bars to which the comment applies The action bar at the bottom of the panel contains the following options: Create Comment Adds a comment to the selected rhythmic position and staff.
Write mode Comments Replying to comments You can add replies to existing comments, which is useful when co-ordinating with others as this organizes the list of comments in the Comments panel into clear sections. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the comment to which you want to reply. You can do this in the music area and in the Comments panel. 2. Press Alt/Opt-R to open the Comment dialog. 3. Enter your reply into the dialog. 4. Click OK to close the dialog and add the reply.
Write mode Comments Changing the author name used for comments You can change the author name used for comments to either your user account name or a custom name. This affects subsequent comments you add to the project without changing the author name used for existing comments. For the custom name, you can specify both the full name that is shown in the Comments panel and the initials shown in the music area. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-, to open Preferences. 2. Click General in the category list. 3.
Write mode Comments PROCEDURE ● Choose View > Comments. RESULT Comments are shown in the music as speech bubbles when a tick appears beside Comments in the menu, and hidden when no tick appears. 392 Dorico Pro 3.5.
Page formatting The formatting of pages in Dorico Pro is determined by a number of factors, including the layout’s staff size, page margins, the master page applied to them, any casting off values applied to them, system and frame breaks, and frame padding. The most important factors that determine how pages are formatted in Dorico Pro are: Staff size Staff size refers to the distance between the top and bottom lines of staves.
Page formatting Changing the page size and/or orientation Deleting or editing individual flow headings is considered a master page override, which is a type of page format change. Music frame margins Music frames have margins at the top and bottom. Music frame margins provide padding to ensure that musical material displayed within the frame remains on the page. For example, if music frames have no padding, the top line on the top staff in the frame is positioned at the top of the frame.
Page formatting Changing the page size and/or orientation By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog. You can select other layouts by using the selection options in the action bar, Shift -clicking adjacent layouts, and Ctrl/Cmd -clicking individual layouts. 3. Click Page Setup in the category list. 4. In the Page Size section, select a page size from the Size menu.
Page formatting Changing page margins Changing page margins You can change the page margins of each layout independently, for example, if you want wider margins for layouts in your project that will be spiral bound. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to change the page margins. By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog.
Page formatting Changing the default staff size PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts whose master page set you want to change. By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog. You can select other layouts by using the selection options in the action bar, Shift -clicking adjacent layouts, and Ctrl/Cmd -clicking individual layouts. 3. Click Page Setup in the category list. 4.
Page formatting Changing the default staff/system spacing By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog. You can select other layouts by using the selection options in the action bar, Shift -clicking adjacent layouts, and Ctrl/Cmd -clicking individual layouts. 3. Click Page Setup in the category list. 4. In the Space Size section, select the staff size you want from the Rastral size menu.
Page formatting Changing the vertical justification of staves/systems By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog. You can select other layouts by using the selection options in the action bar, Shift -clicking adjacent layouts, and Ctrl/Cmd -clicking individual layouts. 3. Click Vertical Spacing in the category list. 4. In the Ideal Gaps section, change the values for the different contexts as required. 5. Click Apply, then Close.
Page formatting Hiding/Showing empty staves RESULT The automatic vertical justification of staves and systems in the selected layouts is changed. Braced staves are never vertically justified.
Page formatting Hiding/Showing empty staves ● Never 5. Activate/Deactivate Allow individual staves of multi-staff instruments to be hidden. 6. Optional: For Players excluded from Hide Empty Staves, activate the checkbox for each instrument you want to be shown regardless of your choice for Hide empty staves. 7. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT Empty staves in the selected layouts are hidden/shown according to your choice.
Page formatting Hiding/Showing empty staves 4. Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. RESULT Staff visibility is changed from the selected rhythmic position or system/frame break signpost onwards until the next staff visibility change or the end of the flow, whichever comes first. If a system/frame break signpost did not yet exist at the selected rhythmic position, a system break with your staff visibility settings is inserted at the selected rhythmic position.
Page formatting Hiding/Showing blank staves after final flows NOTE 2 ● You cannot hide/show ossia staves independently of their main staves. ● Any staves you have added in the current flow, such as by adding extra staves or divisi changes, appear in the list, even after you have deleted them. Action bar Contains options that allow you to change the staff visibility setting of all staves simultaneously. ● Clear All: Deactivates all staves. ● Reset All: Activates all staves and sets them to Reset.
Page formatting Hiding/Showing blank staves after final flows When Show blank staves in systems identical to final flow is activated, blank staves follow the staff grouping of the final flow, such as two bracketed staves in a part layout with two players assigned to it. When it is deactivated, single blank staves without clefs are shown. NOTE You cannot input music or change brackets/braces on blank staves.
Page formatting Hiding/Showing blank staves after final flows RESULT The selected music frame and all music frames in the same frame chain are updated to display blank staves. If you showed blank staves in a master page music frame, this affects all pages to which master pages using the same music frame chain are applied. The number of blank staves depends on the height of the frame and the music frame margins, staff size, and staff/system spacing in the layout.
Page formatting Inserting pages Inserting pages You can insert empty pages or pages that use a different master page into each layout in your project, for example, if you want to add a title page. PROCEDURE 1. In the Pages panel, click Insert Pages Pages dialog. in the Pages section action bar to open the Insert 2. Enter the number of pages you want to insert into the Number of pages to insert field. 3. Select where you want to insert pages.
Page formatting Starting layouts on left-hand pages NOTE You can only delete pages that are considered master page overrides. 3. Delete the selected pages by removing all their master page overrides. ● If any pages in your selection have colored triangles in their top left corner, click Remove Overrides in the Pages section action bar. ● If any pages in your selection have colored triangles in their bottom right corner, rightclick a page and choose Remove Page Number Change(s) from the context menu.
Page formatting Allowing/Disallowing multiple flows on the same page Allowing/Disallowing multiple flows on the same page You can allow/disallow new flows to be shown on the same page as previous flows if there is space, for example, to reduce the number of pages required for parts in works with multiple movements. By default, new flows are allowed on the same page in part layouts and are not allowed in full score layouts. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2.
Page formatting Hiding/Showing flow headings but only want to use it for the first flow in part layouts, even when subsequent flows start at the top of the page. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to change when the First master page is used. By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog.
Page formatting Changing the margins above/below flow headings 5. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT Flow headings are shown above the first system in each flow in the selected layouts when you choose For all flows, hidden when you choose Never, and hidden above the first system in the first flow but shown above all other flows when you choose Not for first flow. They are automatically positioned above each flow and below the preceding flow according to the margins set for each layout.
Page formatting Hiding/Showing information in running headers above flow headings RESULT Changing the value for Flow heading top margin increases/decreases the gap between the top of flow headings and the end of the preceding flow. Changing the value for Flow heading bottom margin increases/decreases the gap between the bottom of flow headings and the start of the next flow.
Page formatting Changing the default music frame margins 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to hide/show information in running headers above flow headings. By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog. You can select other layouts by using the selection options in the action bar, Shift -clicking adjacent layouts, and Ctrl/Cmd -clicking individual layouts. 3. Click Page Setup in the category list. 4.
Page formatting Changing the padding in music frames individually 4. In the Music Frame Margins section, change the values for Top and/or Bottom. 5. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The margins within all music frames in the selected layouts are changed.
Page formatting Changing the horizontal justification of final systems Changing the horizontal justification of final systems You can change whether the final systems of flows always fill the width of frames or only do so above a certain fullness threshold in each layout independently. By default in Dorico Pro, the final systems of flows only justify to the full width of the frame when they are more than half full. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2.
Page formatting Enabling/Disabling condensing PREREQUISITE You have input the notes and notations you want for each instrument onto their separate staves. If you have input the music for multiple parts onto the same staff, you can explode it. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to enable/disable condensing. By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog.
Page formatting Staff size RELATED LINKS Condensing on page 437 Staff labels on condensed staves on page 1368 Creating custom condensing groups on page 446 Including/Excluding condensing groups on page 447 Changing condensing options from rhythmic positions on page 447 Key Commands page in the Preferences dialog on page 51 Switching to galley/page view on page 46 Note input on page 170 Notations input on page 225 Exploding music onto multiple staves on page 383 Inputting notes and notations onto multiple st
Page formatting Staff size Changing the staff size from system/frame breaks You can change the staff size of all staves from the rhythmic position of system/frame breaks onwards in layouts. For example, you can have smaller staves only on pages with more staves, and larger staves on other pages with fewer staves.
Page formatting Staff size Changing the size of individual staves You can change the size of individual staves in each flow independently of other staves and your layout settings. For example, piano accompaniment parts often include the solo line of the instrument the piano is accompanying on a smaller staff. A piano part with smaller viola staff above You can change the size of individual staves to a set scale size, expressed as a percentage of the normal staff size in the layout, or set a custom scale.
Page formatting Staff size ● Changing the staff size of individual staves affects its size for the whole flow. ● If the size of system object font styles is set to Staff-relative, the staff size of the top staff in each instrument family group affects the size of system objects if they are shown above that bracketed group. Font styles that are set to Absolute are unaffected by staff size.
Page formatting Staff spacing Staff spacing The vertical positioning of staves and systems within frames is known as staff spacing. Staff spacing calculations consider the height of staves and the necessary gaps between staves and systems. You can change staff spacing in your project at different levels: ● Change the default staff spacing in each layout in Layout Options. ● Change the staff spacing between individual staves.
Page formatting Staff spacing These gaps do not apply in frames that are automatically justified. ● Braced staff to braced staff and Ossia staff to staff These gaps always apply, including in frames that are automatically justified, because braced and ossia staves are never justified. This includes extra staves. NOTE ● Divisi staves are vertically justified when they use the Staff to staff gap.
Page formatting Staff spacing follow your per-layout ideal gap settings. This helps keep a clear distance between systems on very full pages. ● Justify staves when frame with single system is above this threshold: When activated, all the staves in a single system taller than the set threshold are vertically justified, which distributes them evenly to fill the height of the frame. Staff Visibility Contains options allowing you to control when and which empty staves are hidden in the layout.
Page formatting Staff spacing Moving individual staves/systems vertically You can change the spacing of individual staves, including ossia staves, by changing the vertical position of individual staves and systems independently of your project-wide settings. When Staff Spacing is activated in the Engrave toolbox, the following are shown: ● System spacing handles: Large square handles on the top left corner of the top staff in each system.
Page formatting Staff spacing TIP If you want to move handles by larger increments, you can press Ctrl/Cmd as well as the standard key command, for example, Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-Up Arrow . ● Click and drag a single staff/system spacing handle upwards/downwards. RESULT The vertical position of the selected staves/systems is changed. The color of the handles changes to indicate that you have moved them.
Page formatting Staff spacing ● Green: the frame is comfortably full. Staves and systems have enough vertical space to be legible but are not too far apart. Frames that are 60-100% full are considered comfortably full. ● Red: the frame is over-full, meaning staves and systems might appear squashed with not enough vertical space between them. Frames that are more than 100% full are considered over-full. The fullness of frames is also expressed using a percentage.
Page formatting Staff spacing Moving multiple systems simultaneously You can move multiple systems at the same time so that the gaps between each system remain equal. This is also known as “concertina dragging”. IMPORTANT We recommend that you add extra pages and finish laying out your pages before moving individual staves. Individual staff spacing changes are automatically deleted if the frame in which they occur changes.
Page formatting Casting off 4. Change the first page to which you want to copy staff spacing by changing the value for To page start. 5. Change the last page in the range to which you want to copy staff spacing by changing the value for To page end. 6. Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog.
Page formatting Casting off Hiding/Showing blank staves after final flows on page 403 Fixing the number of bars per system You can define a fixed number of bars you want included in each system in each layout independently. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to fix the number of bars per system. By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog.
Page formatting Frame breaks 6. Activate/Deactivate Scale number of systems by frame height. 7. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The number of systems automatically contained in each music frame in the selected layouts is changed. If you activated Scale number of systems by frame height, the number of systems contained in each frame is adjusted according to the size of the music frame. For example, pages with smaller frames, such as the first page, contain fewer systems than your casting off setting.
Page formatting Frame breaks For example, if you select a clef, the clef is placed at the end of the frame and all following notes are moved to the start of the next music frame. 2. Press Shift-F . RESULT A frame break is inserted immediately before the rhythmic position of the earliest selected item. All notations after the frame break are moved to the next music frame.
Page formatting System breaks ● If you selected ties, all musical material between the first and last notes tie chains is included in the frame, regardless of where in the tie chains you made selections. NOTE The frame break inserted at the start of the selection has Wait for next frame break activated in the Format group of the Properties panel by default.
Page formatting System breaks For example, if you delete all subsequent system breaks, all music until the end of the flow is forced into a single system. ● You can also control the content of systems by fixing the number of bars per system in each layout.
Page formatting System breaks PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, select an item at the rhythmic position that you want to be the start of the system. NOTE We recommend that you select noteheads or barlines. Selecting other items, such as slurs, can cause system breaks to be inserted earlier/later than you might have intended. 2. Ctrl/Cmd -click one of the following: ● A notehead that you want to be at the end of the system ● An item that you want to be at the start of the next system 3.
Page formatting Tacets Deleting system breaks You can delete system breaks after you have inserted them. PREREQUISITE System break signposts are shown. PROCEDURE 1. Select the system break signposts of the system breaks you want to delete. 2. Press Backspace or Delete . Tacets Tacet is the indication used to show that a player does not play anything in an entire flow, which might be a movement in a symphony or cue in a film score. In Dorico Pro, you can generate tacets automatically.
Page formatting Tacets NOTE We do not recommend that you use Copy Staff Spacing and Lock Frame on pages where tacets are the first or last system in frames. Because tacets do not contain any bars, Dorico Pro cannot insert system or frame breaks at the ends of tacets in order to lock the frame contents. You can change the text shown in tacets and the margin above/below them in each layout independently.
Page formatting Tacets When it is deactivated, any flows to which the player is not assigned do not appear in the layout. When the player is assigned to those flows, all bars in the flow are shown in the part, split into empty bars and multi-bar rests as appropriate for the flow. TIP If your project contains many short flows, which appear in part layouts as a single multi-bar rest labeled “Tacet”, showing all the bars separately can help make the length of flows clearer.
Page formatting Condensing By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog. You can select other layouts by using the selection options in the action bar, Shift -clicking adjacent layouts, and Ctrl/Cmd -clicking individual layouts. 3. Click Players in the category list. 4. In the Tacets section, change the values for Margin above tacet and/or Margin below tacet. 5. Click Apply, then Close.
Page formatting Condensing The woodwind section of an orchestral score, including some condensed and some uncondensed staves The large number of complex calculations and considerations that are required to produce condensed music has made this a traditionally difficult and time-consuming task, particularly as, in other notation software applications, this has also required the manual duplication of music and staves in order to produce separate instrumental parts from a condensed full score.
Page formatting Condensing Changing condensing options from rhythmic positions on page 447 Player labels on page 454 Staff labels on condensed staves on page 1368 Hiding/Showing condensed music colors on page 459 Switching to galley/page view on page 46 Divisi on page 1390 Per-flow notation options for condensing You can find options to control condensing in each flow independently on the Condensing page in Write > Notation Options.
Page formatting Condensing Amalgamation approach for notes and chords Allows you to choose whether or not you want to amalgamate notes and chords on condensed staves into a single up-stem voice when players are sometimes in rhythmic unison but have different rhythms at other times. ● Allow amalgamation: Notes and chords are amalgamated into a single up-stem voice when players are in rhythmic unison.
Page formatting Condensing Minimum length of range of rests to allow hiding Allows you to set the duration threshold of inactivity above which you want to hide rests. It is a convention for some publishers to show rests that span short durations, such as two beats between notes, but hide rests that span longer durations.
Page formatting Condensing NOTE ● If a solo player holds multiple instruments, only their first instrument is considered for condensing. Other instruments always appear on a separate staff. ● Only instruments that normally have a single staff and whose music is in a single voice can be condensed, as music already in multiple voices produces ambiguous condensing results. Grand staff instruments cannot be condensed.
Page formatting Condensing example, if two parts have the same rhythms and pitches but their slurs apply to different notes, they are condensed into a shared staff with separate voices to ensure the different slurs are clearly notated. Parts are also condensed into separate voices if their articulations are different. NOTE Clefs and octave lines do not affect the condensing result. Players whose instruments have different clefs and octave lines can be condensed together.
Page formatting Condensing Resetting the position of items on page 373 Condensing results Depending on the pitches and rhythms of notes in the different parts on condensed staves, condensing can result in parts sharing stems, having separate voices, or not condensing and remaining on separate staves. Dorico Pro calculates and considers the condensing of parts for each phrase separately in order to produce the best result.
Page formatting Condensing Not condensed In phrases where neither the rhythms nor the pitches for all players are the same, and pitch crossing exceeds your set value, no condensing occurs and parts remain on separate staves. NOTE ● In addition to rhythms and pitches, Dorico Pro also considers all other notations, such as slurs and dynamics, in order to calculate the best condensing result.
Page formatting Condensing condensing in each layout. You can see these groups in the Condensing section of the Players page in Setup > Layout Options. You can create custom condensing groups, for example, if you want to condense trumpets with different transpositions together. You can also specify groups that you do not want to condense, that is, groups whose players’ staves must always appear separately.
Page formatting Condensing NOTE Other condensing calculations and considerations and your notation options still affect whether or not players condense at specific rhythmic positions. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK If necessary, you can change options for those condensing groups from selected rhythmic positions onwards to change the condensing result.
Page formatting Condensing PREREQUISITE ● You have enabled condensing in the current layout. ● Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. In the music area, open the layout in which you want to change condensing. 2. In Engrave mode, select an item at the rhythmic position where you want to change the condensing result. TIP The item does not have to be on a condensed staff.
Page formatting Condensing Condensing results on page 444 Condensing groups on page 445 Creating custom condensing groups on page 446 Signposts on page 377 Condensing Change dialog The Condensing Change dialog allows you to change and reset notation options for condensing from selected rhythmic positions onwards in layouts. It also allows you to assign players in condensing groups to specific voices and staves manually.
Page formatting Condensing Condensing groups show a warning icon if you have activated manual condensing for them but not yet assigned all their players to voices/staves. 2 Notation Options section Contains all the condensing options from the Notation Options dialog and allows you to change or reset them for the selected condensing group from the position of the condensing change.
Page formatting Condensing RELATED LINKS Per-flow notation options for condensing on page 439 Condensing results on page 444 Condensing groups on page 445 Manually condensing players You can manually change the allocation of players to voices and staves in each condensing group from selected rhythmic positions onwards in individual layouts.
Page formatting Condensing By default, the first player is assigned to the up-stem voice on the first staff. 10. Optional: If you want to assign the next player to a different staff, click Add Staff in the action bar at the bottom of the list on the right. By default, the top player in the players list is automatically assigned to the up-stem voice on the new staff. 11.
Page formatting Condensing Resetting condensing changes from rhythmic positions You can reset changes you have made to condensing to your per-flow defaults, including resetting only selected notation options, from selected rhythmic positions onwards in individual layouts. PREREQUISITE Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. In the music area, open the layout in which you want to reset condensing changes. 2.
Page formatting Condensing 2. Press Backspace or Delete . RESULT The selected condensing changes are deleted. The condensing result returns to either the previous existing condensing change in the flow, if one exists, or the default settings in the layout. This applies until the next existing condensing change or until the end of the flow, whichever comes first. RELATED LINKS Filters on page 367 Player labels Player labels identify the players to which notes on condensed staves belong.
Page formatting Condensing TIP ● You can change the default appearance and position of player labels, including their offset, separator, and “to” indication, on the Condensing page in Engrave > Engraving Options. You can also change the default unison indication for both divisi change and player labels. ● Player labels use the Player Labels paragraph style, which you can edit in the Paragraph Styles dialog.
Page formatting Condensing NOTE If you do not want to show player label signposts, choose View > Signposts > Player Labels. Player label signposts are shown when a tick appears beside Player Labels in the menu, and hidden when no tick appears.
Page formatting Condensing PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-E to open Engraving Options. 2. Click Condensing in the category list. 3. In the Player Labels section, enter the text you want in the following fields, individually or together: 4. ● Text for "to" indication ● Text for unison indication for section players Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The “to” and/or unison indications are changed in all divisi change and player labels project-wide.
Page formatting Condensing Moving player labels graphically You can move individual player labels graphically, for example, to move them closer to the staff when other items cause them to appear further away. PREREQUISITE Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, select the player labels you want to move. 2. Move the player labels in any of the following ways: ● Press Alt/Opt-Right Arrow to move them to the right.
Page formatting Part formatting propagation 5. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT All player labels project-wide have erased backgrounds when Erase background with padding is activated, and do not have erased backgrounds when it is deactivated. When they have erased backgrounds, the erasure padding is determined by the set value. Hiding/Showing condensed music colors You can show notes and rests on condensed staves in gray to help you identify condensed music.
Page formatting Part formatting propagation example, for source layouts whose formatting relies primarily on their Casting Off settings in Setup > Layout Options, it is likely that copying only their layout options is sufficient to produce the required formatting in the destination layouts without adding system/frame breaks on every system. You can also copy the layout-specific property settings from the layout currently open in the music area to all other layouts in which those items appear.
Page formatting Part formatting propagation The Propagate Part Formatting dialog contains the following sections and options: 1 Copy formatting from list Contains a list of all the part layouts in the project. You can only select a single part layout as the source layout. 2 Propagate formatting to list Contains a list of all the part layouts in the project. You can select multiple part layouts as destination layouts.
Page formatting Part formatting propagation 6. Click OK to copy part formatting to the selected layouts and close the dialog. RESULT Part formatting from the selected source layout is copied to the selected destination layouts. However, overrides to individual pages made in Engrave mode are not propagated. ● If you activated Include layout options, layout options are copied from the source layout to the destination layouts.
Page formatting Part formatting propagation Large selections on page 363 Local vs. global properties on page 158 Changing the property scope on page 158 Resetting the appearance of items on page 372 Resetting the position of items on page 373 463 Dorico Pro 3.5.
Engrave mode Engrave mode allows you to manipulate and modify every item in your project, but without deleting them, moving them rhythmically, or changing the pitch of notes. You can also determine how the pages in each layout of your project are formatted for printing or exporting. Project window in Engrave mode The project window in Engrave mode contains the default toolbar, the music area, and the status bar.
Engrave mode Project window in Engrave mode Contains formatting options that allow you to control how music is arranged into systems and frames, to insert frames, and edit frame constraints. Your current selection in the Engrave toolbox determines which formatting options are shown, and the panel is hidden automatically when either Note Spacing or Staff Spacing are activated. 3 Pages panel Allows you to specify how the notation is formatted on pages.
Engrave mode Project window in Engrave mode Graphic Slices panel on page 470 Frames on page 505 Frame constraints on page 531 Staff spacing on page 420 Note spacing on page 562 Graphic slices on page 533 Formatting panel The Formatting panel allows you to change how systems and frames are formatted on pages, including inserting system/frame breaks and manually adding brackets and braces. It is located on the left of the window in Engrave mode.
Engrave mode Project window in Engrave mode Forces music from the selected item onwards onto the next system. Depending on your staff size and other settings, this may mean the music is forced onto the next page. Lock System Fixes the formatting of the selected systems, even if you change the formatting of surrounding musical material and other systems. Make into System Forces all music between the selected items into the same system.
Engrave mode Project window in Engrave mode Insert brace Joins the staves on which you have selected items with a brace. NOTE Staves cannot be joined by both a brace and a sub-bracket or sub-sub-bracket simultaneously. Change barline joins Joins the barlines across the staves on which you have selected items.
Engrave mode Project window in Engrave mode Allows you to insert a music frame. On pages in layouts, this inserts a music frame that belongs to a layout frame chain. On master pages in the master page editor, this inserts a frame that belongs to a master page frame chain. Insert Text Frame Allows you to insert a frame into which you can enter text and text tokens. Insert Graphics Frame Allows you to insert a frame that can contain an image or an illustration.
Engrave mode Project window in Engrave mode Graphic Slices panel The Graphic Slices panel allows you to create graphic slices, export them, and change their graphics file format, color mode, resolution, and export path. It is located on the left of the window in Engrave mode. The Graphic Slices panel contains the following: 1 Create Slice Allows you to draw a graphic slice. 2 Graphic slices table Contains all the graphic slices in the current flow.
Engrave mode Project window in Engrave mode The action bar at the bottom of the table contains the following options: 3 ● Rename Graphic Slice ● Delete Graphic Slice : Allows you to rename the selected graphic slice. : Deletes the selected graphic slice. Image settings Allow you to change the graphics file format, color mode, and image resolution of the selected graphic slices. 4 Destination folder field Displays the current export path where exported graphic slices will be saved.
Engrave mode Project window in Engrave mode Pages panel in Engrave mode The Pages panel is divided into the following sections: Pages Shows the pages in your layout with their page number in the middle. A highlighted page frame indicates the currently selected page. Markings in the top left and the bottom right corner of the pages indicate that a page has overrides. Additional frames at the top or left frames of the page indicate that master page changes have been applied.
Engrave mode Project window in Engrave mode ● Swap with Previous Page the previous page. ● Swap with Next Page next page. ● Remove Overrides : Swaps the arrangement of the selected page with : Swaps the arrangement of the selected page with the : Removes master page overrides from the selected pages. Master Pages Shows the master page pairs that are used in your layout. A highlighted frame indicates the currently selected master page.
Engrave mode Project window in Engrave mode RELATED LINKS Project window in Engrave mode on page 464 Master pages on page 478 Master page sets on page 479 Master page editor on page 488 Flow headings on page 500 Flow heading editor on page 501 Copying frames on page 510 Properties panel (Engrave mode) The Properties panel in Engrave mode provides options that allow you to edit individual notes and notations.
Engrave mode Project window in Engrave mode ● Active: Shows only activated properties. ● All: Shows all properties. Show (property scope) Allows you to filter properties according to their property scope. ● Local Only: Shows only local properties. ● Global Only: Shows only global properties. ● All: Shows all properties. Set local properties Allows you to change the scope of subsequent local properties you change. ● Locally: Local properties only take effect locally.
Engrave mode Engraving Options dialog RELATED LINKS Gradual dynamics on page 893 Guitar bends in Engrave mode on page 1126 Notehead brackets in Engrave mode on page 1062 Sustain pedal lines in Engrave mode on page 1168 Octave lines in Engrave mode on page 849 Slurs in Engrave mode on page 1346 Changing the shape/angle of ties on page 1451 Moving figured bass figures/lines graphically on page 917 Moving fingering slides graphically on page 947 Moving jazz articulations graphically on page 1145 Moving lines g
Engrave mode Engraving Options dialog 1 Search categories field Allows you to filter categories and section titles according to your entry. TIP You can set the focus to the Search categories field by pressing Ctrl/Cmd-L . You can set the focus away by pressing Tab . 2 Category list Contains the categories of options that you can view and change in the dialog.
Engrave mode Master pages pressing Ctrl (Windows) or Opt (macOS) . Resetting options back to the default factory settings only affects the current project, meaning future projects still start with your saved defaults.
Engrave mode Master pages The Master Pages section of the Pages panel in Engrave mode, showing the two default master pages in the Default Full Score master page set. You can customize the default master pages in the master page editor as required for the current project. You can also create new and custom master pages in each master page set. NOTE Changing individual pages in layouts is considered a master page override in Dorico Pro, which is a type of page format change.
Engrave mode Master pages The default master page sets are applied automatically to the appropriate layouts in each new project. You can apply different master page sets to each layout independently. You can also create new master page sets and customize their master pages, and edit the default master page sets as required for the current project. TIP You can share master pages between master page sets by importing master pages.
Engrave mode Master pages Importing master page sets You can import master page sets into projects, for example, if you want to use a master page set you created on a different computer or that contains a specific master page you want to use. Master page sets are saved as .doricolib files. PROCEDURE 1. In the Pages panel, click Import Master Page Set open the File Explorer/macOS Finder. in the Master Page Sets action bar to 2. Locate and select the master page set file you want to import. 3.
Engrave mode Master pages Loading images into graphics frames on page 530 Renaming master page sets You can edit the names of master page sets that you have created. You cannot rename the default master page sets. PROCEDURE 1. In the Master Page Sets section of the Pages panel, double-click the master page set that you want to rename. Alternatively, you can select the master page set and click Rename Master Page Set the action bar. 2. Enter the new name you want. 3. Press Return .
Engrave mode Master pages Custom A page pair that can have any layout. Custom master pages allow you to create layouts that you want to apply to multiple pages but not all pages, for example, if you want to show an image at the same position on only the final pages in each part layout. NOTE If you insert a page to a layout using a custom master page, you create an override.
Engrave mode Master pages ● 5. Selecting (None) always creates a master page without any formatting. Choose one of the following master page types for your new master page: ● First ● Default ● Custom NOTE If you select First or Default, the new master page replaces that existing master page, as each master page set can only have a single first and default master page. If you want to create a new master page without replacing any existing master pages, choose Custom. 6.
Engrave mode Master pages Based on Allows you to select an existing master page on which you want to base the new master page. This creates a new master page with the same frames and formatting as the Based on master page. NOTE Master pages based on existing master pages are linked to the Based on master page. Any changes you make to frames shared between the master pages affect both master pages, for example, changing the text in an existing text frame.
Engrave mode Master pages 5. Click OK to import the selected master page and close the dialog. RESULT The selected master page is imported into the master page set used in the layout currently open in the music area. It becomes available in all layouts using that master page set. If you import a First or Default master page, the imported master page replaces that existing master page, as each master page set can only have a single first and default master page.
Engrave mode Master pages Master page set menu Allows you to select the master page set from which you want to import a master page. You can only select master page sets already in the current project. Master page to import Contains the master pages in the selected master page set, displayed in a list. You can only select and import a single master page at a time.
Engrave mode Master pages NOTE You can also select the master page set from the Current set menu in the Master Pages section of the Pages panel when any layout is open in the music area, but this changes the master page set applied to the layout. 2. In the Master Pages section of the Pages panel, click the master page pair that you want to delete. 3. In the action bar, click Delete Master Page . RESULT The selected master page pair is deleted.
Engrave mode Master pages A master page pair open in the master page editor RELATED LINKS Pages panel on page 471 Customizing master pages You can customize master pages according to your needs in the master page editor. Changing a master page affects the appearance of all pages in all layouts that use that master page. NOTE ● You must specify the page size, orientation, margins, and staff size of layouts on the Page Setup page in Setup > Layout Options.
Engrave mode Master pages ● Left to Right ● Right to Left NOTE 4. ● This copies the master page layout exactly from one page to the other, not as a mirror. For example, text frames for page numbers are not kept on the outside edge automatically. ● Frames copied between right/left pages are linked, including the contents of text frames. Deleting frames and inputting new ones breaks this link. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The selected master page pair is changed.
Engrave mode Master pages Master page override Page number changes A change to the default page number sequence, such as numbering prefatory pages with Roman numerals. Pages with page number changes inherit any subsequent changes you make to the master page. They are shown with a marking in their bottom right corner. Page number change Master page changes A change to the master page assigned to individual pages or all pages from a specific point.
Engrave mode Master pages Flow heading change to single page only Flow heading change from selected page onwards NOTE ● If you inserted a page in the middle or at the end of your layout using a custom master page and remove the override, that page is automatically assigned the Default master page of the master page set. ● You cannot save overrides you have made to individual pages as a master page.
Engrave mode Master pages RESULT Any overrides you made to the master page format are removed from either the selected pages only or from all pages in the layout currently open in the music area. Empty pages that are considered overrides are deleted. If you removed overrides from selected pages only, any other pages with overrides in the layout are unaffected. RELATED LINKS Frames on page 505 Inserting page number changes You can change the page numbers of pages in each layout in your project.
Engrave mode Master pages TIP You can also change other aspects of the appearance of page numbers in the Page Number Change dialog. For example, you can show subordinate numbers as uppercase letters or lowercase letters. RELATED LINKS Starting layouts on left-hand pages on page 407 Page Number Change dialog The Page Number Change dialog allows you to change the page numbers shown on existing pages in each layout, including hiding page numbers or showing them different numbering.
Engrave mode Master pages Page numbers on page 1150 Removing page number changes You can remove page number changes you have made to individual pages, which reverts pages to their default page numbers. Any pages whose page number has been changed are shown with a colored triangle in their bottom right corner in the Pages section of the Pages panel. PROCEDURE 1. In the music area, open the layout whose page number changes you want to remove. 2.
Engrave mode Master pages 5. Select the master page that you want to assign from the Use master page menu. 6. Choose one of the following options for Range: ● Current Page Only Only the selected page is assigned a different master page. ● From This Page Onwards The selected page and all subsequent pages are assigned a different master page. 7. Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. RESULT If you selected Current Page Only, the selected master page is assigned to the selected page only.
Engrave mode Master pages Inserting flow heading changes Inserting flow heading changes allows you to change the flow heading format used on individual pages in each layout independently, including only changing the margins above/below the default flow heading. PREREQUISITE You have created any custom flow headings you want to use in flow heading changes. PROCEDURE 1. In the music area, open the layout whose flow headings you want to change. 2.
Engrave mode Master pages The Insert Flow Heading Change dialog contains the following options: From page Allows you to select the page from which you want to change the flow heading format. The number indicates its position within the layout. The Displayed preview shows the current page number of the selected page, and how that number appears. If you have inserted page number changes in the layout, this might be different to From page.
Engrave mode Master pages Removing flow heading changes You can remove flow heading changes you have assigned to individual pages to revert to the Default flow heading. Any pages whose flow heading has been changed are shown with a marking along their bottom edge, or along their bottom and left edges, in the Pages section of the Pages panel. PROCEDURE 1. In the music area, open the layout whose flow heading changes you want to remove. 2.
Engrave mode Flow headings Flow headings Flow headings allow you to show the titles of flows immediately above their first system automatically. They function like templates, in much the same way as master pages, allowing the same flow heading formatting to be applied to multiple flows in different layouts. Flow headings exist as part of master page sets.
Engrave mode Flow headings Hiding/Showing information in running headers above flow headings on page 411 Editing running headers in master pages on page 966 Master page sets on page 479 Page format changes on page 490 Frames on page 505 Text frames on page 519 Text tokens on page 520 Inserting flow heading changes on page 497 Music frames on page 512 Flow heading editor The flow heading editor allows you to view and change the format of flow headings.
Engrave mode Flow headings A flow heading in the flow heading editor RELATED LINKS Pages panel on page 471 Text editor options in Engrave mode on page 548 Changing the horizontal alignment of text in text frames on page 529 Customizing flow headings You can customize flow headings according to your needs in the flow heading editor, such as by inputting a graphics frame or changing the tokens in an existing text frame.
Engrave mode Flow headings Adding flow headings You can add new flow headings to master page sets. Each master page set can have multiple custom flow headings, but only a single default flow heading. PROCEDURE 1. In the music area, open a layout that uses the master page set to which you want to add flow headings.
Engrave mode Flow headings Hiding/Showing flow headings on page 409 Renaming flow headings You can change the names of flow headings, including default flow headings and your own custom flow headings. PROCEDURE 1. In the music area, open a layout that uses the master page set containing the flow heading you want to rename.
Engrave mode Frames Frames Frames are boxes that allow you to position music, additional text, and graphics on pages. Frames can be any size and shape, as long as they fit within the page margins. In Engrave mode, you can adjust frames according to your needs, including defining frame constraints that control the relationship between the sides of frames and page margins. ● You can edit frames when Frames is selected in the Engrave toolbox.
Engrave mode Frames EXAMPLE The first page of a piano piece. It contains a music frame, text frames for the title, dedication, and composer, a flow heading frame inside the top of the music frame, and graphics frames in the top corners.
Engrave mode Frames 3. ● Insert Text Frame ● Insert Graphics Frame Click and drag in the music area to input the selected frame type. You can draw a frame of any size and shape, as long as it fits within the page margins. RESULT When you release the mouse, the type of frame you chose is input on the page. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK ● You can change the size/shape of the frame or define its constraints.
Engrave mode Frames ● Press Alt/Opt-Left Arrow to move them to the left. ● Press Alt/Opt-Up Arrow to move them upwards. ● Press Alt/Opt-Down Arrow to move them downwards. TIP If you want to move items by larger increments, you can press Ctrl/Cmd as well as the standard key command, for example, Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-Left Arrow . ● Click and drag them in any direction. RESULT The selected frames are moved to new positions.
Engrave mode Frames TIP If you want to move handles by larger increments, you can press Ctrl/Cmd as well as the standard key command, for example, Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-Left Arrow . ● Click and drag the handle to the right/left or upwards/downwards. NOTE You can only move handles on the right/left edges of frames to the right/left. You can only move handles on the top/bottom edges of frames upwards/downwards.
Engrave mode Frames ● Select the frame, press Tab to switch to having the handle in the top left corner selected, then press Right Arrow / Left Arrow / Up Arrow / Down Arrow to select other handles around its edge. ● Click a handle on the frame. NOTE You can only select a single handle on a single frame at a time. 2. Optional: To switch back to having the whole frame selected, press Tab .
Engrave mode Frames RESULT All selected frames are copied to the selected pages at the same positions on the page. If you copied frames to their original page, they overlay their original exactly. RELATED LINKS Pages panel on page 471 Page format changes on page 490 Adding master pages on page 483 Customizing master pages on page 489 Master page editor on page 488 Deleting frames You can delete frames from both individual pages and master pages.
Engrave mode Frames Master pages on page 478 Master page sets on page 479 Applying master page sets to layouts on page 396 Music frames Music frames display the music in your project in a specified order. You can control which parts of the project are displayed using master page music frames and layout music frames.
Engrave mode Frames If you want to connect separate layout music frames on the same page, you can assign them to the same frame chain. IMPORTANT ● Layout music frames are considered overrides to master pages. If you remove all overrides on layout pages, all your layout music frames are also removed. ● Layout music frames cannot show flow headings.
Engrave mode Frames on the master page frame chain. As this affects which flows are automatically displayed in all layouts that use the same master page, we recommend that in such cases you create a separate master page for the layout in which you want to change the formatting. ● Music frames on imported master pages are automatically assigned to their own frame chain, regardless of the frame chain to which they were originally assigned in their source master page set.
Engrave mode Frames 1 Frame Chain Shows the current frame chain of the frame and allows you to change the frame chain to which the frame is assigned. Frame chains that start with an “M” are master page frame chains, while frame chains that start with an “L” are layout frame chains. The second letter allows you to identify different frame chains of the same type.
Engrave mode Frames ● If you want to assign music frames to frame chains on a master page, you have opened the master page in the master page editor. PROCEDURE 1. In the music frame whose frame chain you want to change, click Frame Chain 2. In the Frame Chain list, select the frame chain to which you want to assign the music frame. . NOTE 3. ● You cannot select layout frame chains for frames in the master page editor. ● If you do not want to use any of the available frame chains, click Unlink.
Engrave mode Frames Changing the order of music frames If you have at least two music frames of the same type in the same frame chain on a page, you can change the order in which music is displayed across the frames. PREREQUISITE ● Frames is selected in the Engrave toolbox. ● If you want to change the order of music frames on a master page, you have opened the master page in the master page editor. PROCEDURE 1. In one of the music frames whose order you want to change, click Frame Order 2.
Engrave mode Frames RESULT All frames in the same frame chain are updated to display all flows, only the selected flows, or blank staves. NOTE If you changed the flows assigned to a master page music frame, the number of pages in the layouts to which the master page set is applied automatically updates and the casting off can change. For example, if you assigned an extra flow to the master page frame chain, enough extra pages and frames to display that flow are added to the corresponding layouts.
Engrave mode Frames ● The staff size is not changed automatically, meaning staves can overlap in small frames in the frame chain. RELATED LINKS Staff size on page 416 Applying master page sets to layouts on page 396 Master page editor on page 488 Adding master pages on page 483 Casting off on page 427 Text frames Text frames allow you to display text, including tokens, on pages independently of rhythmic positions in the score.
Engrave mode Frames Text tokens Text tokens are codes that you can use as substitutes for information stored in your project, such as titles, composers, and the time and date. This can reduce the risk of mistakes or outdated information appearing in your project. Text tokens are also known as “wildcards” or “text codes”.
Engrave mode Frames Description Token Path to the project’s save location, including the project file name {@projectfilepath@} Staff label tokens Music symbol Token Full staff labels of the players in the current layout {@staffLabelsFull@} Abbreviated staff labels of the players in the current layout {@staffLabelsShort@} You can use staff label tokens, for example, as an alternative way to name part layouts, instead of using the default {@layoutName@} token shown at the top left of the first page
Engrave mode Frames ● You can include music symbol tokens in fields in the Project Info dialog. For example, if you enter Symphony in B{@flat@} major into the Title field, the title displayed in text frames using the corresponding title token is Symphony in B♭ major.
Engrave mode Frames Per-flow token function Token Flow number of the current flow shown in lower case Roman numerals, such as iii or xvi {@flowNumberRomanLower@} Flow number of the current flow shown in upper case Roman numerals, such as III or XVI {@flowNumberRomanUpper@} Number of this page within the current flow, counting from 1 {@flowPage@} Total number of pages in the current flow {@flowPageCount@} The displayed page number on which the specified flow “n” begins, such as {@flow3PageCount@}
Engrave mode Frames Time/Date tokens: project last saved Time/Date description Time/Date example Token Standard date and time string (locale dependent) Sun Dec 31 11:10:12 2017 {@projectdate@} Four-digit year 2017 {@projectdateyear@} Two-digit year 17 {@projectdateyearshort@} Full month name (locale dependent) October {@projectdatemonth@} Short month name (locale dependent) Oct {@projectdatemonthshort@} Month as a decimal number, range 1-12 10 {@projectdatemonthnum@} Full weekday name
Engrave mode Frames Time/Date description Time/Date example Token Second as decimal number, range 00-59 44 {@projectdatetimesecond@} Time/Date tokens: current time and date Time/Date description Time/Date example Token Standard date and time string (locale dependent) Sun Dec 31 11:10:12 2017 {@date@} Four-digit year 2017 {@dateyear@} Two-digit year 17 {@dateyearshort@} Full month name (locale dependent) October {@datemonth@} Short month name (locale dependent) Oct {@datemonthshort@}
Engrave mode Frames Time/Date description Time/Date example Token Hour in 12-hour clock range 11 {@datetimehour12@} Minute as decimal number, range 00-59 10 {@datetimeminute@} Second as decimal number, range 00-59 44 {@datetimesecond@} RELATED LINKS Project Info dialog on page 92 Player, layout, and instrument names on page 137 Flow names and flow titles on page 144 Renumbering layouts on page 133 Instrument transpositions in staff labels on page 1362 Entering text in text frames You can enter
Engrave mode Frames Master page editor on page 488 Adding master pages on page 483 Adding borders to text frames You can add borders to individual text frames, for example, if you want to make its boundaries clear. PREREQUISITE ● Frames is selected in the Engrave toolbox. ● If you want to add borders to text frames on a master page, you have opened the master page in the master page editor. PROCEDURE 1. Select the text frames to which you want to add borders. 2.
Engrave mode Frames Changing the padding in text frames You can change the padding of individual text frames, which affects the distance between the edges of frames and the text within them. PREREQUISITE ● Frames is selected in the Engrave toolbox. ● If you want to change the padding of text frames on a master page, you have opened the master page in the master page editor. PROCEDURE 1. Select the text frames whose padding you want to change. 2.
Engrave mode Frames Adding master pages on page 483 Text formatting on page 540 Paragraph Styles dialog on page 543 Moving text objects graphically on page 552 Aligning text objects with the start of systems on page 553 Changing the horizontal alignment of text in text frames You can change the horizontal alignment of any text style in text frames, independently of the paragraph style for that text.
Engrave mode Frames RELATED LINKS Paragraph Styles dialog on page 543 Paragraph style overrides on page 551 Master page editor on page 488 Adding master pages on page 483 Graphics frames Graphics frames allow you to display images alongside your music, such as a logo or a decorative header/footer. You can load the following graphics file formats into graphics frames: ● .jpg or .jpeg ● .png ● .
Engrave mode Frames 3. Click Open. RESULT The selected image is loaded into the graphics frame. NOTE Graphics frames on master pages can only show a single image in all layouts. If you change the image in a graphics frame in one layout, this updates the master page and affects all layouts. Frame constraints In Dorico Pro, constraints define the relationship between each of the four sides of a frame and the corresponding page margins.
Engrave mode Frames Changing the page size and/or orientation on page 394 Changing page margins on page 396 Defining frame constraints You can lock/unlock constraints on each side of frames independently, for example, if you want to unlock the bottom constraint only for frames that you want to have a fixed height. PREREQUISITE If you want to define the constraints of frames on a master page, you have opened the master page in the master page editor. PROCEDURE 1.
Engrave mode Graphic slices Graphic slices Graphic slices allow you to export portions of pages as graphics files, for example, to save small musical extracts that you want to use in performance instructions. They exist as fixed frames on specific pages, and function in a similar way to frames. ● You can view, input, and edit graphic slices when Graphic Slices toolbox. is selected in the Engrave Once created, graphic slices remain on the page on which they were created.
Engrave mode Graphic slices Creating graphic slices You can create graphic slices of any size and shape on pages in each layout independently, for example, around a few bars that you want to export as a PNG file. Graphic slices can extend into page margins, up to the edges of pages. PREREQUISITE ● Graphic Slices is selected in the Engrave toolbox. ● The left panel is shown. PROCEDURE 1. In the Graphic Slices panel, click Create Slice. 2. Click and drag in the music area to create a graphic slice.
Engrave mode Graphic slices ● Press Alt/Opt-Right Arrow to move them to the right. ● Press Alt/Opt-Left Arrow to move them to the left. ● Press Alt/Opt-Up Arrow to move them upwards. ● Press Alt/Opt-Down Arrow to move them downwards. TIP If you want to move items by larger increments, you can press Ctrl/Cmd as well as the standard key command, for example, Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-Left Arrow . ● Click and drag them in any direction.
Engrave mode Graphic slices NOTE ● Graphic slices may appear with different sizes/shapes if you change the page size, orientation, or margins in the layout. ● You can also change the size/shape of graphic slices by using the Left, Top, Right, and Bottom properties in the Frames group of the Properties panel.
Engrave mode Graphic slices Renaming graphic slices You can change the names of graphic slices, which are used for their file names when exported. PREREQUISITE ● Graphic Slices is selected in the Engrave toolbox. ● The left panel is shown. PROCEDURE 1. In the Graphic Slices panel, double-click in the Slice name column on the graphic slice you want to rename. 2. Enter a new name or edit the existing name in the text field. 3. Press Return .
Engrave mode Graphic slices AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can export graphic slices, including graphic slices with different image settings and export paths simultaneously.
Engrave mode Graphic slices RELATED LINKS Engrave toolbox on page 465 Hiding/Showing panels on page 41 Graphic Slices panel on page 470 Exporting graphic slices on page 539 Renaming graphic slices on page 537 Exporting graphic slices You can export graphic slices as a variety of graphics files, such as PDF or PNG. TIP You can export graphic slices with different image settings and export paths simultaneously. PREREQUISITE ● Graphic Slices is selected in the Engrave toolbox. ● The left panel is shown.
Engrave mode Text formatting Deleting graphic slices You can delete individual graphic slices, for example, if the casting off the in the layout has changed and the music the slice was originally created for is now on another page. PREREQUISITE ● Graphic Slices is selected in the Engrave toolbox. ● The left panel is shown. PROCEDURE 1. In the Graphic Slices panel, select the graphic slices you want to delete. 2. In the action bar, click Delete Graphic Slice .
Engrave mode Text formatting Text frames on page 519 Entering text in text frames on page 526 Changing the vertical alignment of text in text frames on page 528 Changing the horizontal alignment of text in text frames on page 529 Changing the default font family on page 551 Edit Font Styles dialog The Edit Font Styles dialog allows you to edit the formatting of fonts used for items that you cannot edit using the text editor, such as changing the font size of rehearsal marks, dynamics, or tempo marks.
Engrave mode Text formatting Underlined Fonts appear underlined when Underlined and the corresponding checkbox are both activated. NOTE ● You must activate options before you can change them. Activated options override the Default Text Font font style settings. ● Changes made to font styles apply project-wide, including in part layouts. ● If you cannot find a particular font style, it might instead be a paragraph style.
Engrave mode Text formatting The Music Fonts dialog also contains the following options: Update text fonts when changing music fonts Allows you to include/exclude text fonts when changing the music font. For example, deactivating this option allows you to change the appearance of notes and notations without affecting the appearance of flow titles and staff labels. ● For the Bravura music font, the equivalent text font is Academico.
Engrave mode Text formatting The Paragraph Styles dialog contains the following sections and options: 1 Paragraph styles list Contains all the paragraph styles in the project. If you had text items selected when you opened the dialog, the corresponding paragraph style of the first selected item is selected in the paragraph styles list by default. The action bar at the bottom of the list contains the following options: : Creates a new paragraph style with default values.
Engrave mode Text formatting Adding borders to text objects on page 555 Aligning text objects with the start of systems on page 553 Erasing the background of text objects on page 557 Creating paragraph styles You can create new paragraph styles from scratch and you can duplicate existing paragraph styles and edit the settings, for example, to format text consistently in multiple text frames. PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, choose Engrave > Paragraph Styles to open the Paragraph Styles dialog. 2.
Engrave mode Text formatting RELATED LINKS Changing the horizontal alignment of text in text frames on page 529 Deleting paragraph styles You can delete paragraph styles you have created. However, you cannot delete any of the default paragraph styles. PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, choose Engrave > Paragraph Styles to open the Paragraph Styles dialog. 2. In the paragraph style list, select the style that you want to delete. NOTE You cannot delete any of the default paragraph styles. 3. Click Delete 4.
Engrave mode Text formatting ● New : Creates a new character style with default settings. ● New from Selection : Creates a copy of an existing character style that you can edit separately from the original. ● Save as Default : Saves the selected character style to your user library, allowing you to use it in multiple projects. Appears as for character styles saved as default. ● Revert to Factory : Removes all your changes to the selected character style, returning it to its saved settings.
Engrave mode Text formatting 6. Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. Deleting character styles You can delete character styles. PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, choose Engrave > Character Styles to open the Character Styles dialog. 2. Select the style that you want to delete in the styles list. 3. Click Delete 4. Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. . Text objects vs.
Engrave mode Text formatting Allows you to change the paragraph style applied to the whole paragraph, which can change the appearance, formatting, and alignment of the text. Staff text and system text are always treated as single paragraphs. 3 Font Allows you to change the font family of selected text. 4 Font Style Allows you to change the font style of selected text. NOTE 5 ● Depending on the font selected, some font styles might not be available.
Engrave mode Text formatting TIP You can also make selected text underlined by pressing Ctrl/Cmd-U . ● Overline ● Strikethrough 12 Script Types Allows you to position selected text in one of the following positions relative to the text on the baseline: ● Superscript ● Subscript 13 Foreground Color Allows you to change the color of selected text. 14 Background Color Allows you to change the background color of selected text.
Engrave mode Text formatting TIP You can apply different paragraph styles to separate paragraphs in the same text frame. 3. Select a paragraph style from the paragraph style menu in the text editor. 4. Press Esc or Ctrl/Cmd - Return to close the text editor. RESULT The paragraph style of the selected paragraphs is changed. For example, if you select a single word, the whole paragraph containing that word is changed.
Engrave mode Text formatting RESULT The font family used in the selected default font and paragraph styles is changed. This also affects the font family used by all other font and paragraph styles in the project whose font family has not been overridden.
Engrave mode Text formatting You can also use this property to move text objects by changing the values in the value fields. Deactivating the property resets the selected items to their default position. ● You can change the default positions of all text objects project-wide on the Text page in Engrave > Engraving Options.
Engrave mode Text formatting EXAMPLE Text aligned with the first note in the system Text aligned with the start of the system RELATED LINKS Inputting text on page 328 Paragraph Styles dialog on page 543 Changing the paragraph style of text on page 550 Moving text objects graphically on page 552 Erasing the background of text objects on page 557 Engrave toolbox on page 465 Changing the property scope on page 158 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 462 Enabling/Disabling text
Engrave mode Text formatting TIP You can enable/disable text collision avoidance for all text objects project-wide on the Text page in Engrave > Engraving Options. RELATED LINKS Engrave toolbox on page 465 Changing the property scope on page 158 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 462 Adding borders to text objects You can add borders to text and system text objects individually, for example, if you want to make the boundaries of text objects clear.
Engrave mode Text formatting Changing the thickness of text object borders You can change the thickness of borders around individual text objects, independently of your project-wide setting. PREREQUISITE Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, select the text objects whose border thickness you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Border thickness in the Text group. 3. Change the value in the value field.
Engrave mode Text formatting TIP You can change the default padding of all text objects project-wide on the Text page in Engrave > Engraving Options. However, this does not allow you to change the padding of each edge independently. You can change the default padding between text and each border edge for individual paragraph styles in the Paragraph Styles dialog. However, paragraph style border padding settings are only used when Border is activated for the corresponding paragraph style.
Engrave mode Text formatting AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can change the padding between text objects and each edge of their erased areas. RELATED LINKS Adding borders to text objects on page 555 Changing the property scope on page 158 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 462 Hiding/Showing text objects You can hide/show individual text objects. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains.
Engrave mode Music symbols Music symbols Music symbols in Dorico Pro is a broad term that covers all the different elements used in musical notation, including stem flags, clefs, articulations, and the bold numbers used in multibar rests and time signatures. In Dorico Pro, some music symbols have specific editor dialogs in which you can edit and create custom versions of those symbols. For all other music symbols, you can edit their project-wide appearance in the Edit Music Symbol dialog.
Engrave mode Music symbols The Edit Music Symbol dialog contains the following sections and options: 1 Category menu Allows you to select which type of music symbol is available in the music symbol list. 2 Search field Allows you to filter music symbols according to your entry. 3 Music symbol list Contains all the music symbols in the project within the currently selected category and your search filter, if applicable.
Engrave mode Music symbols Contains controls that allow you to edit individual components. Controls are divided into tabs according to the aspect of the selected component they affect. For music symbols, the Component and Attachments tabs are available. The Component tab contains the following options: ● Offset: Controls the position of the selected component. X moves it horizontally, Y moves it vertically. ● Scale: Controls the size of the selected component.
Engrave mode Note spacing RELATED LINKS Custom playing techniques on page 1206 Custom lines on page 1237 Custom notehead sets on page 1038 Custom key signatures on page 1003 Custom accidentals on page 1000 Note spacing The positions of notes and rests relative to each other, and the automatic gaps between them, are known as note spacing. You can change note spacing in your project at different levels: ● Change the default note spacing in each layout in Layout Options.
Engrave mode Note spacing RESULT The default note spacing is changed in the selected layouts. RELATED LINKS Changing the horizontal justification of final systems on page 414 Note Spacing page in Layout Options The Note Spacing page in Layout Options allows you to change the default values for note spacing in each layout independently. You can also change how full the final system in flows must be before it is automatically justified.
Engrave mode Note spacing Use optical spacing for beams between staves When activated, stems in cross-staff beams are evenly spaced, which can mean the noteheads are unevenly spaced. When deactivated, noteheads in cross-staff beams are evenly spaced, which can mean stems appear unevenly spaced.
Engrave mode Note spacing The Note Spacing Change dialog contains the following options: Default space for crotchet/quarter note Sets the default note spacing for quarter notes (crotchets). The spacing of other durations is scaled proportionally. Increasing the value increases note spacing, decreasing the value decreases note spacing. This is reflected in the preview as you change the value. Minimum space for short notes Sets the minimum note spacing for notes with short durations.
Engrave mode Note spacing We recommend using this option with caution and only if you intend to space lyrics manually, such as in tightly-spaced hymnals. Each option has an activation switch, meaning you can only change values for options that you have chosen to change. You can then choose one of the following options for the note spacing change: Reset Resets note spacing to the default setting in the layout, as set on the Note Spacing page in Layout Options.
Engrave mode Note spacing RESULT The selected note spacing changes are deleted. Note spacing returns to either the previous existing note spacing change in the flow, if one exists, or the default settings in the layout if there is no previous existing note spacing change. This applies until the next existing note spacing change or until the end of the flow, whichever comes first.
Engrave mode Note spacing RESULT The selected note spacing handles are moved, which increases/decreases the spacing to the left of their original rhythmic position. This also affects the spacing of each selected rhythmic position on all staves in the system. The color of the handles changes to indicate that you have moved them. System breaks are automatically inserted at the start/end of each system in which you adjusted note spacing.
Engrave mode Note spacing ● Green: the system is comfortably full. Notes have enough horizontal space to be legible but are not too far apart. Systems that are 60-100% full are considered comfortably full. ● Purple: the system is under-full, meaning notes might appear overly stretched. Systems that are less than 60% full are considered under-full. ● Red: the system is over-full, meaning notes might appear squashed with not enough horizontal space between them.
Engrave mode Note spacing ● Press Alt/Opt-Left Arrow to move it to the left. NOTE ● If you want to move handles by larger increments, you can press Ctrl/Cmd as well as the standard key command, for example, Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-Left Arrow . ● You cannot move note spacing handles with the mouse, you can only move them using the keyboard. RESULT The graphical position of the selected note/item is changed without changing the note spacing of its rhythmic position.
Engrave mode Note spacing System handle at the start of a system 3. System handle at the end of a system Move the handles in any of the following ways: ● Press Alt/Opt-Right Arrow to move them to the right. ● Press Alt/Opt-Left Arrow to move them to the left. NOTE ● If you want to move handles by larger increments, you can press Ctrl/Cmd as well as the standard key command, for example, Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-Left Arrow .
Play mode Play mode allows you to change how your music sounds in playback, including by changing the playback template and assigning VST instruments, inputting automation, adjusting the mix, and changing the sounding duration of notes in playback without affecting their notated duration.
Play mode Project window in Play mode 2 Event display Allows you to view, input, and edit the playback of each flow in your project, including changing the played duration of notes and the tempo at any rhythmic position. 3 VST and MIDI Instruments panel Allows you to load new VST and MIDI instruments. You can also select existing VST and MIDI instruments and edit their settings.
Play mode Project window in Play mode You can also select Line by pressing L . Draw Percussion Allows you to add notes to percussion staves in the drum editor with one click. You do not have to click and drag to a duration when using Draw Percussion. You can also select Draw Percussion by pressing W . Erase Allows you to delete notes. You can make marquee selections to delete multiple notes when Erase is selected. You can also select Erase by pressing E . TIP To deselect Erase, select Object Selection.
Play mode Project window in Play mode VST and MIDI Instruments panel The VST and MIDI instruments panel contains the VST and MIDI instruments available and used in your project, and allows you to edit their settings. It is located on the right of the window in Play mode.
Play mode Project window in Play mode Plug-in instances are automatically numbered to help you differentiate between instances when you have multiple instances of the same plug-in. NOTE Dorico Pro only shows VST 3 instruments in the VST Instruments section by default. If you also want VST 2 instruments to be available, you must allow them. Only Kontakt and NotePerformer are allowed by default. Each plug-in instance contains the following: 1 Activate Instrument Activates/Deactivates the plug-in instance.
Play mode Project window in Play mode Plug-in instances are automatically numbered to help you differentiate between instances when you have multiple instances of the same plug-in. Each MIDI instance contains the following: 1 Activate Instrument Activates/Deactivates the plug-in instance. 2 Endpoint Setup Opens the Endpoint Setup dialog for the corresponding plug-in instance.
Play mode Project window in Play mode 2. In the plug-in instance into which you want to load a new VST/MIDI instrument, select the one you want to load from the menu. RELATED LINKS Playback templates on page 640 Allowing/Blocking VST plug-ins You can allow individual VST 2 instrument plug-ins that you want to use in Dorico Pro and block plug-in you want to prevent Dorico Pro from using. Allowed plug-ins are subsequently available in any project.
Play mode Playback Options dialog Playback Options dialog The Playback Options dialog allows you change how the music you have written sounds when played back. These options affect playback regardless of expression maps and patches, such as how dynamics, pedal lines, and different notations are interpreted during playback.
Play mode Event display Pages are divided into sections, which can contain multiple options. Sections that contain many options are divided into subsections. For options that have multiple possible settings, the current setting is highlighted. 5 Search pages bar Allows you to search section titles and options on the currently selected page according to your entry and navigate through matches. The number of matches is displayed in the bar.
Play mode Event display notation. The event display presents your project in a similar way to that used in a digital audio workstation, or “DAW”, such as Cubase. Event display in Play mode The event display comprises the following: 1 Flow menu Allows you to select the flow you want to be shown in the event display. Only a single flow is shown at a time. 2 Track headers Display the name of each track and contain appropriate options for the track type.
Play mode Event display RELATED LINKS Playhead on page 619 Tracks on page 588 Play toolbox on page 573 Bar numbers on page 744 Piano roll editor The piano roll editor displays MIDI notes for pitched instruments in a continuous sequence, with the vertical position of note events indicating their pitch. In Dorico Pro, pitched instruments are displayed in an individual piano roll editor for their instrument track.
Play mode Event display Drum editor Each unpitched percussion instrument has its own instrument track, including when they are in a percussion kit. You can expand unpitched percussion instrument tracks like other instrument tracks if you want to make changes, such as assigning the instrument to another playback endpoint.
Play mode Event display ● For pitched instruments, click and drag horizontally in the piano roll for the required duration at the pitch position you want. ● For unpitched percussion instruments, click in the drum editor at the positions where you want to input notes. RESULT In the piano roll editor, notes are input at the pitches indicated by the piano keyboard on the left of the piano roll.
Play mode Event display ● Press Alt/Opt-Left Arrow to move them to the left. ● Click and drag them to the right/left. RESULT The selected notes are moved to new rhythmic positions. If you selected multiple notes, they are moved together as a block. NOTE When using the keyboard, you can both transpose and move notes in the piano roll editor in the same action. When using the mouse, you must release the mouse between transposing and moving.
Play mode Event display NOTE If you select multiple notes that end at different rhythmic positions and drag them with the mouse pointer, changing their duration forces all the notes to end at the same rhythmic position. RELATED LINKS Expanding/Collapsing tracks on page 617 Played vs.
Play mode Event display ● When using the keyboard, you can both transpose and move notes in the piano roll editor in the same action. When using the mouse, you must release the mouse between transposing and moving. RELATED LINKS Moving notes in the event display on page 584 Equal Division of the Octave (EDO) on page 992 Play toolbox on page 573 Enabling independent voice playback on page 622 Deleting notes in the event display You can delete notes in the event display in Play mode.
Play mode Tracks Zooming in/out of tracks in the event display You can change the zoom level in the tracks in the event display to make notes appear larger/ smaller. This does not affect the height of tracks. PROCEDURE ● Change the zoom in any of the following ways: ● To make notes appear wider, press Ctrl/Cmd-= or Z . ● To make notes appear narrower, press Ctrl/Cmd-- or X . ● To make notes appear taller, Shift -click and drag upwards on the piano keyboard on the left.
Play mode Tracks Markers track Displays any markers in the flow, including their text. Video track Shows any video regions in the flow, including their file names. RELATED LINKS Event display on page 580 Time track on page 609 Chords track on page 614 Markers track on page 616 Video track on page 617 Expanding/Collapsing tracks on page 617 Instrument tracks Instrument tracks allow you to view, input, and edit notes belonging to the corresponding instrument.
Play mode Tracks Shows the name of the track. Instrument tracks use the full instrument name set in the Edit Instrument Names dialog for the instrument. 4 Track header Contains appropriate options for instrument tracks, such as VST or MIDI port/channel menus. 5 Piano roll editor/Drum editor Displays notes belonging to the instrument in either a piano roll editor or drum editor, depending on the instrument type.
Play mode Tracks Allows you to change the endpoint to which the instrument or voice is assigned by selecting the port you want to use when using a plug-in that has multiple ports of 16 channels. Not available when independent voice playback is enabled and All voices is selected. 7 Channel menu Allows you to change the endpoint to which the instrument or voice is assigned by selecting the channel in the selected VST or MIDI instrument that you want to use for the instrument track.
Play mode Tracks Dynamics lane below an instrument track Dynamics lanes comprise the following: 1 Lane height adjuster Allows you to change the height of the lane by clicking and dragging its bottom corner. 2 Show the dynamics lane Hides/Shows the dynamics lane. This button is located in the track header for the corresponding instrument track. 3 Lane header Shows the name of the lane. 4 Reference lines Indicate the vertical positions of the most common dynamic levels.
Play mode Tracks tool, points within a dynamic event region are constant by default. When you use the Line tool, dynamic event regions have a linear point at the start and a constant point at the end. NOTE Dynamic event regions that you input in the dynamics lane override default playback adjustments for dynamics, such as humanization and increased dynamics for notes with accents. However, the dynamic curve setting still applies to dynamic event regions.
Play mode Tracks 3. In each instrument track header, click Show the dynamics lane . RESULT The dynamics lane for each instrument track is shown when the button is highlighted, and hidden when it is not highlighted. For instrument tracks with independent voice playback enabled, the dynamics lane shows dynamics for the currently selected voice only. Inputting dynamic points You can input dynamic points, including gradual dynamic events, in the dynamics lane for each instrument track.
Play mode Tracks ● For sound libraries that use MIDI CC 1 to control dynamics, the automation lane for CC1 displays values from the dynamics you input, including dynamic points, combined with humanization.
Play mode Tracks EXAMPLE Constant points in a dynamics lane Linear points in a dynamics lane Copying and pasting dynamic points You can copy and paste dynamic points, including to other dynamics lanes and repeating them directly after themselves in the same dynamics lane. PREREQUISITE The dynamics lane is shown for each instrument whose dynamic points you want to copy/paste. PROCEDURE 1. Press S to select Object Selection. 2.
Play mode Tracks ● You can also repeat selections of two or more dynamic points immediately after themselves by pressing R . Each repetition starts at the same position as the last point in the previous repetition. However, you cannot repeat single dynamic points or the points of immediate, combined, or force dynamics input in Write mode.
Play mode Tracks ● To move points of dynamics input in Write mode to the right according to the current rhythmic grid resolution, press Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-Right Arrow . ● To move points of dynamics input in Write mode to the left according to the current rhythmic grid resolution, press Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-Left Arrow . NOTE When multiple dynamics are selected, you can only move them according to the current rhythmic grid resolution. RESULT The selected dynamic points are moved to new positions.
Play mode Tracks RESULT The dynamic points you click or include in a marquee selection are deleted. Deleting points that overrode dynamics that you input in Write mode reverts those dynamics to their default points. Deleting the points of dynamics input in Write mode also deletes the corresponding dynamics.
Play mode Tracks Displays the velocity value of the currently selected note. You can change this value by changing the value in the value field. 5 Velocities whose value has been changed When you have edited the velocity of notes, their velocities appear darker in the velocity lane. 6 Selected note and velocity The currently selected notes and their velocities all appear highlighted. 7 Velocities with default values All notes have a default velocity value of 100.
Play mode Tracks ● If you have Draw velocity lane. ● If you have Line velocity lane. selected, click and draw any shape across the required range in the selected, click and drag a line across the required range in the RESULT The velocity of the affected notes is changed. When using the Object Selection tool, the velocities of the selected notes are changed proportionally. When using the Draw or Line tools, the velocities of all notes within the range are updated when you release the mouse.
Play mode Tracks the automation lane for CC1 displays values from the dynamics you input, including dynamic points, combined with humanization. Automation lane below an instrument track Automation lanes comprise the following: 1 Lane height adjuster Allows you to change the height of the lane by clicking and dragging its bottom corner. 2 Lane header Contains the MIDI controller menu and MIDI value field. 3 Show the automation lane Hides/Shows the automation lane.
Play mode Tracks TIP Clicking and dragging automation points in the automation lane causes a read-out to appear temporarily, showing their value. Although only a single automation lane can be displayed, it is possible to create data for multiple MIDI controllers in the same lane. Automation data is included when exporting MIDI files.
Play mode Tracks 3. Input automation in one of the following ways: ● To input single automation points, click in the automation lane at each position where you want an automation point. ● To input an automation event region containing multiple automation points at regular intervals, click and drag in a single motion in the automation lane. ● To input gradual automation events, click and drag in the automation lane from where you want the gradual automation event to start to where you want it to end.
Play mode Tracks NOTE You can only make automation points constant/linear in a single automation lane at a time. 4. Right-click in the automation lane and choose one of the following options from the context menu: ● To make the selected points constant, choose Make Points Constant. ● To make the selected points linear, choose Make Points Linear. RESULT The selected automation points become constant or linear.
Play mode Tracks 4. Copy the selected automation points in any of the following ways: ● Press Ctrl/Cmd-C . ● Choose Edit > Copy. You can also choose this option from the context menu. 5. Move the playhead to the position to which you want to paste the selected automation points. 6. Paste the selected automation points in any of the following ways: 7. ● Select the header of the automation lane into which you want to paste them and press Ctrl/Cmd-V .
Play mode Tracks ● To move them to the right/left only, Ctrl/Cmd -click and drag them to the right/left. ● To move them upwards/downwards only, Ctrl/Cmd -click and drag them upwards/ downwards. TIP ● If you want to move automation points upwards/downwards by smaller increments, you can press Alt when dragging. ● You cannot move automation points beyond other existing automation points during the same action when using the mouse.
Play mode Tracks Playing techniques lane below an instrument track Playing techniques lanes comprise the following: 1 Lane height adjuster Allows you to change the height of the lane by clicking and dragging its bottom corner. 2 Lane header Shows the name of the lane. 3 Show the playing techniques lane Hides/Shows the playing techniques lane. This button is located in the track header for the corresponding instrument track.
Play mode Tracks 3. In each instrument track header, click Show the playing techniques lane . RESULT The playing techniques lane for each instrument track is shown when the button is highlighted, and hidden when it is not highlighted. For instrument tracks with independent voice playback enabled, the playing techniques lane shows playing techniques for the currently selected voice only.
Play mode Tracks TIP Clicking and dragging tempo changes in the Time track causes a read-out to appear temporarily, showing their precise tempo. Time track header The Time track header contains the following: 1 Plug-in instance menu Allows you to select a VST or MIDI instrument plug-in instance to use for the click. 2 Edit Instrument Opens the corresponding VST or MIDI instrument, which allows you to edit its settings.
Play mode Tracks Hiding/Showing tempo marks on page 1429 Hiding/Showing decimal places for metronome marks on page 1433 Exporting MIDI on page 72 Inputting tempo changes in the Time track You can input tempo changes, including gradual tempo changes, in the Time track in Play mode. Tempo changes input in the Time track do not appear in layouts, but instead are shown as signposts. PREREQUISITE The Time track is shown and expanded. PROCEDURE 1. 2.
Play mode Tracks Moving tempo changes in the Time track You can move tempo changes to new rhythmic positions in the Time track. This affects their rhythmic position in all applicable layouts. PREREQUISITE The Time track is shown and expanded. PROCEDURE 1. Press S to select Object Selection. 2. In the Time track, select the tempo changes you want to move in one of the following ways: ● Click a single tempo change. ● Make a marquee selection around multiple absolute tempo changes.
Play mode Tracks ● Click a single tempo change. ● Make a marquee selection around multiple absolute tempo changes. NOTE For gradual tempo changes, you can only change the tempo of a single point at a time. 3. To change the tempo of the selected tempo changes without moving them rhythmically, Ctrl/Cmd -click and drag the selected tempo change, or one of the selected tempo changes, upwards/downwards. A tempo read-out appears beside the mouse pointer, providing visual feedback of the tempo.
Play mode Tracks RELATED LINKS Selecting multiple items using marquee selections on page 362 Chords track A Chords track is included in every project. You can assign the Chords track to its own endpoint to hear any chords that you input into the score as chord symbols in playback. The Chords track appears above the top instrument track in the event display, and is one of the tracks you can hide/show.
Play mode Tracks 3 Enable Chords Playback Allows you to include chords in, or exclude chords from, playback. 4 Port menu Allows you to change the endpoint to which the Chords track is assigned by selecting the port you want to use when using a plug-in that has multiple ports of 16 channels. 5 Channel menu Allows you to change the endpoint to which the Chords track is assigned by selecting the channel in the selected VST or MIDI instrument that you want to use for chords playback.
Play mode Tracks Markers track The Markers track allows you to view the markers in your project and input new ones. It appears above the top instrument track in the event display in Play mode, and is one of the tracks you can hide/show. The Markers track comprises the following: 1 Track height adjuster Allows you to change the height of the track by clicking and dragging its bottom corner. 2 Track header Shows the name of the track and contains appropriate options.
Play mode Tracks EXAMPLE Marker in the Markers track AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can change the text shown in the marker. RELATED LINKS Changing the start position of videos on page 149 Editing marker text on page 1266 Moving the playhead on page 619 Video track The Video track shows where videos exist in the flow relative to the music. It appears above the top instrument track in the event display in Play mode, and is one of the tracks you can hide/show.
Play mode Tracks controls in track headers and to input and edit track contents, such as notes in the piano roll editor and tempo changes in the Time track. PROCEDURE ● Expand/Collapse tracks in any of the following ways: ● To expand/collapse an individual track, click its disclosure arrow. ● To expand/collapse all instrument tracks, Ctrl/Cmd -click any instrument track disclosure arrow.
Play mode Playhead Playhead The playhead is a vertical line that moves during playback, showing the current rhythmic position. It is also known as a “playback line”. The playhead appears at all times in Play mode and during playback in other modes, and its current position is shown in both the Transport window and the mini transport in the toolbar. You can also choose to show the playhead when playback is stopped in other modes.
Play mode Playing back music ● Click Fast Forward in the Transport window to navigate forwards. ● Click Rewind in the Transport window to navigate backwards. ● Click Rewind to Beginning of Flow in the Transport window to go back to the start of the flow. ● In Play mode, click the ruler at any position. NOTE You cannot click the ruler to move the playhead during playback.
Play mode Playing back music ● To play back all instruments from the selection, select a single note and press P . ● To play back all instruments from the selection, select a single note and choose Play > Play From Selection. ● To play back only a single staff, select multiple items on the staff and press P . NOTE This does not affect which channels are soloed or muted in Play mode. ● To play back multiple staves, select items on multiple staves and press P .
Play mode Playing back music Changing the gap between flows in playback on page 626 Changing the click settings on page 221 Endpoint Setup dialog on page 649 Mini transport on page 29 Key Commands page in the Preferences dialog on page 51 Status bar on page 36 Preferences dialog on page 49 Enabling independent voice playback By default, all voices belonging to a single instrument, including divisi staves, use the same endpoint for playback.
Play mode Playing back music Muting/Soloing tracks You can mute/solo individual tracks. This allows you to set fixed groups to sound in playback, for example, if you only want to listen to certain groups of players at a time. PROCEDURE 1. In the toolbar, click Show Mixer 2. In the Mixer, click the appropriate button at the top of each channel you want to mute/solo. ● Mute ● Solo to show the Mixer. RESULT Each track is muted/soloed and the corresponding buttons are enabled.
Play mode Playing back music RESULT The selected instruments are soloed and all other instruments are muted by changing their mute/solo states in the Mixer. This affects which instruments are muted/soloed until you deactivate their mute/solo states. TIP You can also determine which staves are included in playback for each separate playback without changing their states in the Mixer.
Play mode Playing back music PROCEDURE ● In the Mixer, Ctrl/Cmd -click each volume fader that you want to reset. RELATED LINKS Hiding/Showing the Mixer window on page 638 Mixer on page 635 Changing the tempo mode You can switch the tempo mode at any time between using a single fixed tempo and following tempo changes, for example, if you have a project with multiple tempo changes but want to use a single fixed tempo when recording MIDI. PROCEDURE 1. 2.
Play mode Playing back music Changing the pre-roll duration In Dorico Pro, pre-roll is the time added to playback before the first beat of the first bar in each flow. You can change the pre-roll duration, for example, if some flows in your project start with grace notes. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-P to open Playback Options. 2. Click Timing in the category list. 3. In the Flows section, change the value for Pre-roll before flow. For example, for flows starting with a single grace note, 0.
Play mode Repeats in playback Repeats in playback Dorico Pro supports the playback of repeat structures, including repeat endings, repeat barlines, and repeat markers, provided all the correct jumps and sections are in place. There is no limit to the number of repeat structures you can have in a single flow and still obtain correct playback. By default, Dorico Pro plays sections between repeat barlines twice and includes repeats in playback, except after repeat jumps, such as D.S. al Coda.
Play mode Repeats in playback EXAMPLE Final repeat barline with the default 2 playthroughs set Final repeat barline with 4 playthroughs set and marker shown RELATED LINKS Types of barlines on page 733 Input methods for bars, beats, and barlines on page 253 Including/Excluding repeats in playback after repeat jumps on page 629 Changing the total number of playthroughs in repeat endings on page 1274 Engrave toolbox on page 465 Including/Excluding repeats in playback By default, Dorico Pro plays back all
Play mode Swing playback Including/Excluding repeats in playback after repeat jumps By default, Dorico Pro plays back all playthroughs in all types of repeat structures. You can manually include/exclude repeats indicated by repeat markers, repeat endings, and repeat barlines in playback after individual repeat jumps, independently of your project-wide setting. NOTE You can only include/exclude repeats after repeat jumps, such as D.C. al Fine and D.S. al Coda.
Play mode Swing playback Swing playback allows you to hear the uneven rhythms you want whilst retaining their simplified notation, including if the second eighth note beat is divided into two 16th notes. In Dorico Pro, you can enable swing playback for your whole project, only for certain sections, and only for individual instruments. You can also edit the default swing patterns to customize the rhythmic feel you want in the Rhythmic Feel dialog. You can swing either eighth notes or 16th notes.
Play mode Swing playback Heavy swing 8ths Produces a tempo-dependent eighth note swing ratio of between 3:1 at low tempos and 1.5:1 at high tempos. Light swing 16ths Produces a tempo-dependent 16th note swing ratio of between 1.5:1 at low tempos and 1:1 at high tempos. Light swing 8ths Produces a tempo-dependent eighth note swing ratio of between 1.5:1 at low tempos and 1:1 at high tempos. Medium swing 16ths Produces a tempo-dependent 16th note swing ratio of between 2:1 at low tempos and 1.
Play mode Swing playback Rhythmic Feel dialog on page 634 Enabling swing playback for specific sections/instruments You can enable swing playback for specific sections in your project and for individual instruments independently, for example, if you want only the soloist to swing for a twelve-bar section. PROCEDURE 1.
Play mode Swing playback RELATED LINKS Tempo popover on page 246 Deleting rhythmic feel changes You can delete rhythmic feel changes you have enabled for specific sections or for individual players only. PREREQUISITE Rhythmic change signposts are shown. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the signposts of the rhythmic changes you want to delete. 2. Press Backspace or Delete . RESULT The rhythmic changes are deleted.
Play mode Swing playback 11. Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. 12. Click Apply, then Close. Rhythmic Feel dialog The Rhythmic Feel dialog allows you to edit the settings of the default rhythmic feels used for swing playback and create custom rhythmic feels. ● You can open the Rhythmic Feel dialog by clicking Edit in the Rhythmic Feel section of the Timing page in Play > Playback Options.
Play mode Mixer 3 Name Allows you to enter a name for new rhythmic feels or edit the name of existing rhythmic feels. 4 Depends on tempo Controls whether the swing pattern uses the same ratio at all tempos or changes according to the tempo. 5 ● When Depends on tempo is activated, the swing ratio varies according to the tempo. A second slider appears for High tempo, allowing you to change the values for both Low tempo and High tempo.
Play mode Mixer The Mixer comprises the following: 1 Channel type buttons Allow you to hide/show channels in the Mixer according to their type, and in any combination. 2 Channel controls Allow you to hide/show the corresponding controls in the channel strip according to their type, and in any combination. 3 Deactivate All Mute States/Deactivate All Solo States Allows you to deactivate all mute/solo states by clicking the corresponding button. 4 Zoom Allows you to make channels wider/narrower.
Play mode Mixer 12 MIDI fader Allows you to change the MIDI volume of the channel. Some plug-ins require MIDI faders, and this is often useful if you are using a MIDI device for playback. 13 Click channel Allows you to control the volume of the metronome click. 14 Video channel Allows you to control the volume of video audio. 15 FX Send channel Allows you to control the volume of send effects, such as reverb. By default, this channel has REVerence loaded automatically.
Play mode Transport window EQ Each channel has four bands of EQ. In order to make changes to the EQ bands on a channel, you must first click Enable EQ. You can use this to bypass the EQ on a channel without losing your settings. Sends Each channel has four slots for sends. By default, the first slot for each channel sends to the FX channel, which has reverb loaded on it.
Play mode Transport window The Transport window contains the following information and functions: 1 Bars/Beats display Shows the position of the playhead relative to bars and beats in the current flow in the following order of units: bars, beats, 16th notes, 120ths of a 16th note. 2 Time display Shows the position of the playhead as elapsed time in the following order of units: hours, minutes, seconds, milliseconds.
Play mode Playback templates Changing the tempo mode on page 625 Changing the content shown in the transport display You can switch between showing the timecode, the total elapsed time, and the current rhythmic position of the playhead expressed in bars, beats, and ticks in both the mini transport in the toolbar and the Transport window. PROCEDURE ● In either the mini transport in the toolbar or the Transport window, click the transport display until the content you want appears.
Play mode Playback templates NOTE ● Playback templates are available in all projects you open or create on your computer, meaning any changes you make to playback templates affect all projects that use those playback templates. ● Dorico Pro automatically loads sounds for any new instruments you add to the project, using the sounds included in the current playback template.
Play mode Playback templates The Apply Playback Template dialog comprises the following: 1 Search field Allows you to filter playback templates in the list according to your entry. 2 Name column Contains a list of the playback templates available on your computer. You can click the column header to change the sorting order. 3 Factory column Contains the factory symbol if the playback template in the corresponding row is a factory default playback template.
Play mode Playback templates ● Import: Opens the File Explorer/macOS Finder, where you can select the .dorico_pt files that you want to import as playback templates. ● Delete : Deletes the selected playback templates. NOTE You cannot delete factory default playback templates. 5 Apply and Close Applies the selected playback template to the project and closes the dialog.
Play mode Playback templates The Edit Playback Template dialog contains the following sections and options: 1 Playback template data Allows you to specify the following identifying information for the selected custom playback template: ● Name: Allows you to set the name of the playback template that appears in the program, for example, in the Apply Playback Template dialog. ● ID: Allows you to set the unique ID of the playback template.
Play mode Playback templates always include a factory default playback template at the bottom of the list as a fallback to ensure that all instruments are assigned sounds. In most cases, listing entries in your order of preference in the Entries section is sufficient to achieve your desired playback.
Play mode Playback templates Applying/Resetting playback templates You can change the playback template applied to the current project, for example, if you do not need to use playback and so want to prevent Dorico Pro from loading sounds. Re-selecting playback templates resets them to their default settings. PROCEDURE 1. Choose Play > Playback Template to open the Apply Playback Template dialog. 2. Select the playback template you want to use. 3. Click Apply and Close.
Play mode Playback templates ● To add a factory default playback template, click Add Automatic and select the one you want from the menu. TIP We recommend that you always include a factory default playback template at the bottom of the list as a fallback to ensure that all instruments are assigned sounds. 6.
Play mode Endpoints 4. Click Open. RESULT The selected playback template is imported. It becomes available in the current project and all projects you create/open on your computer. TIP You can also import playback templates by dragging .dorico_pt files into a Dorico Pro project window. Exporting playback templates You can export playback templates so you can send them to other users or use them on other computers.
Play mode Endpoints NOTE Any changes you make within plug-ins are not communicated to Dorico Pro, for example, changing a sound that the expression map expects to use a modulation wheel for dynamics to one that uses note velocity instead. This can lead to unexpected low notes sounding in playback because Dorico Pro is still using the expression and percussion maps for the original sounds.
Play mode Endpoints Displays the number of MIDI ports the corresponding plug-in instance currently uses. You can change the number of MIDI ports, for example, if you are using a plug-in that uses more than one port. Dorico Pro does not load multiple MIDI ports by default. 3 Number of MIDI channels Displays the number of MIDI channels the corresponding plug-in instance currently uses.
Play mode Endpoints Allows you to change the number of audio outputs shown in the Mixer, for example, if you want to hide unused outputs when using plug-ins that provide more audio outputs than Dorico Pro uses. 7 Save Endpoint Configuration Opens the Save Endpoint Configuration dialog, which allows you to enter a name for the current endpoint configuration and save it as a custom endpoint configuration.
Play mode Endpoints 4. ● To save a custom endpoint configuration for only a single plug-in instance, open the Endpoint Setup dialog for that plug-in instance and click Save Endpoint Configuration. ● To save a custom endpoint configuration that includes all VST instrument or MIDI instrument plug-in instances, click Save Endpoint Configuration in the action bar of the corresponding section of the VST and MIDI Instruments panel. Enter a name for your custom endpoint configuration in the Name field.
Play mode Endpoints The Save Endpoint Configuration dialog contains a Name field that allows you to enter a name for the endpoint configuration you are saving. The arrow at the end of the field allows you to select an existing custom endpoint configuration to use to populate the field. If you enter a name that already exists, you can overwrite the existing custom endpoint configuration. When you overwrite existing custom endpoint configurations, Dorico Pro moves the previous version to your recycle bin.
Play mode Endpoints Apply Playback Template dialog on page 641 Assigning instruments/voices to endpoints You can assign instruments to any endpoint, for example, if you have loaded a plug-in with multiple ports and want to change the endpoint of an existing instrument to an endpoint on one of your new ports. For instruments with independent voice playback enabled, you can assign each voice to a different endpoint.
Play mode Expression maps Enabling independent voice playback on page 622 Assigning expression/percussion maps to endpoints You can assign expression/percussion maps to the endpoints in your project, for example, if you have created a custom percussion map and must link it to the endpoint for the corresponding VST patch. PREREQUISITE You have made or imported any expression/percussion maps that you require but do not exist on your computer. PROCEDURE 1.
Play mode Expression maps Different patches and instruments have different approaches to changing dynamics and volume in playback. For example, some patches only change the velocity whereas others use a controller in combination with changing the velocity. Dorico Pro also uses expression maps to specify the playback techniques that are supported by each patch in your project.
Play mode Expression maps The Expression Maps dialog contains the following sections and options: Expression maps list 1 Expression maps list: Contains the expression maps currently available in your project. 2 Search field: Allows you to search for expression maps by name. 3 Show only expression maps used in this project: Allows you to filter the expression maps list so it only includes expression maps used in the current project.
Play mode Expression maps ● Add Expression Map : Adds a new expression map that contains no existing settings. ● Duplicate Expression Map : Creates a copy of an existing expression map that you can edit separately from the original. ● Delete Expression Map : Deletes the selected expression maps. NOTE You can only delete custom expression maps. You cannot delete any default expression maps.
Play mode Expression maps You can hide/show the Base and Add-on Switches section by clicking the section header. The Base and Add-on Switches section contains the following: 1 Switches table: Contains the switches in the currently selected expression map. Allows you to add new switches and edit existing ones. 2 Name: Allows you to change the name that appears for the currently selected switch in the Switches table, for example, so it appears the same as in your sound library.
Play mode Expression maps The Switches table comprises the following: 1 2 Type column: Displays the switch type. Switches can be any of the following types: ● Base ● Add-on ● Init Name column: Displays the name of the switch. By default, this is the same as the playback technique or playback technique combination it triggers. In simple cases, each switch triggers an individual playback technique, such as Staccato or Accent.
Play mode Expression maps ● Delete Technique : Deletes the selected switch. Selecting a switch in the Switches table allows you to edit its controls and actions. Different options are available in the Base and Add-on Switches section depending on the switch type. NOTE ● Most instruments have a “natural” playback technique, which is the most common way of playing the instrument. Dorico Pro requires every instrument to have a defined natural playback technique.
Play mode Expression maps NOTE 4 ● You can change the values of cells in the Actions table by double-clicking them, or selecting them and pressing Return . ● You can only select one action at a time in the Actions table. Actions table action bar: Contains the following options: : Adds a control change action with default settings.
Play mode Expression maps ● ● !=: Not equal to ● <: Less than ● <=: Less than or equal to ● >: More than ● >=: More than or equal to Third column: Controls the note length used by the condition. The following note length values are available: ● Very short: A dotted 16th note at 120 bpm, or 0.1875 seconds ● Short: A dotted eighth note at 120 bpm, or 0.375 seconds ● Medium: A dotted quarter note at 120 bpm, or 0.75 seconds ● Long: A dotted half note at 120 bpm, or 1.
Play mode Expression maps ● Volume dynamic: Allows you to choose whether the volume dynamic for the selected switch is controlled by its Note velocity or a Control change. If you choose Control change, you must specify the controller by number. You can consult the documentation for the VST instrument and/or MIDI controller you are using to find the appropriate controller number.
Play mode Expression maps libraries supports a particular playback technique combination for an instrument but another sound library does not. You can hide/show the Mutual Exclusion Groups section by clicking the section header. The Mutual Exclusion Groups section contains the following options and columns: 1 Auto: Allows Dorico Pro to define mutual exclusion groups automatically. NOTE Activating Auto permanently deletes any manual exclusion groups you have created.
Play mode Expression maps Reset to Library Defaults Allows you to revert any changes you have made to the expression maps from the Default Library. Import Library Opens the File Explorer/macOS Finder, where you can select the .doricolib files that you want to import as expression maps. You can also import Dorico and Cubase expression maps by dragging and dropping them into the Expression Maps dialog.
Play mode Expression maps 1 Techniques list Allows you to select playback techniques to include in a new switch or to change the playback techniques in an existing switch. You can select multiple playback techniques to combine by Ctrl/Cmd -clicking each playback technique. 2 Name Displays the name of the selected playback technique. If you select multiple playback techniques, each name is automatically separated by a + symbol.
Play mode Expression maps Add-on A switch that applies in addition to the existing base switch. For example, some sound libraries allow you to use the same legato switch in addition to different base switches. Add-on switches do not remove or change base switches. Add-on switches can only trigger simple key switch notes and controller values. Init A switch that sends instructions when playback starts, such as ensuring a MIDI controller always starts at a set value.
Play mode Expression maps and want to use the same switches for all four trumpets, you might use a relative channel change action to switch from the “natural” original channel to “muted” on the +1 relative channel. Relative channel numbers relate to the original channel number of the endpoint for the corresponding instrument. A 0 relative channel change switches back to the original channel. TIP You can add actions to individual switches in the Expression Maps dialog.
Play mode Expression maps Adding/Editing mutual exclusion groups in expression maps on page 671 Adding/Editing switches in expression maps You can create new and edit existing switches that trigger playback techniques or combinations of playback techniques in individual expression maps, for example, to add an add-on switch to an existing base switch or to create a new base switch with note length conditions.
Play mode Expression maps 10. Choose one of the following pitches for Middle C (note 60): ● C3 ● C4 ● C5 NOTE Steps 11 to 15 only apply to base switches. For init and add-on switches, you can skip to step 16. 11. Optional: Repeat steps 6 to 10 for each action you require for the currently selected switch. 12. In the Conditions table, add a condition for the currently selected base switch in one of the following ways: ● To create a new condition, click Add Technique in the action bar.
Play mode Expression maps 7. In the Mutual Exclusion Groups column, select the mutual exclusion groups whose playback techniques you want to change. 8. Change the playback techniques in the selected mutual exclusion group in any of the following ways: 9. ● To add new playback techniques to the mutual exclusion group, click Add in the Has techniques column action bar to open the Playing Technique Combinations dialog, select the playback techniques you want to add, then click OK.
Play mode Percussion maps RESULT The selected expression maps are exported as a .doricolib file and saved in the selected location. Percussion maps Unpitched percussion instruments are played back using patches that map unpitched sounds onto different MIDI notes. The pitches required to produce different unpitched sounds vary by device, sound library, manufacturer, and so on, and have no connection to the position of percussion instruments on five-line staves.
Play mode Percussion maps The Percussion Maps dialog is divided into the following sections: 1 Percussion maps list Contains the percussion maps currently available in your project. You can add and delete percussion maps using the following buttons in the action bar at the bottom of the percussion maps list: ● Add Percussion Map ● Duplicate Percussion Map : Creates a copy of an existing percussion map that you can edit separately from the original.
Play mode Percussion maps ● ID: Allows you to set the unique ID of the percussion map. You can enter any content in the ID field. It can be useful to include the instrument and sound library for which you created the map, as well as your name, for example, xmap.user.paulsmith.hso.cowbell. ● Version: Allows you to indicate the percussion map version so you can identify the most recent one.
Play mode Percussion maps You can change the data for the currently selected drum kit note in the Edit Drum Kit Note subsection. 7 Edit Drum Kit Note subsection Allows you to specify data in the following fields for the drum kit note currently selected in the Drum Kit Note Map table: ● Name: The displayed name for the specific combination of instrument and playback technique. You may choose to input the name used in the manufacturer’s documentation for your VST instrument or MIDI output device.
Play mode Percussion maps It can be useful to include the instrument and sound library for which you created the map, as well as your name, in the identification name for percussion maps, for example, xmap.user.paulsmith.hso.cowbell. 6. Choose one of the following options for Map defines sounds for, as appropriate for the current percussion map: ● Multiple Instruments ● Single Instruments 7. In the Drum Kit Note Map section, click Show all to show unmapped notes. 8.
Play mode Percussion maps Importing percussion maps You can import percussion maps into projects. Percussion maps are saved as .doricolib files. PROCEDURE 1. Choose Play > Percussion Maps to open the Percussion Maps dialog. 2. Click Import Library to open the File Explorer/macOS Finder. 3. Locate and select the percussion map file you want to import. 4. Click Open. RESULT The selected percussion map is imported into your project. It appears in the percussion maps list.
Play mode Playback techniques 3. Click Add Technique in the action bar at the bottom left of the dialog. 4. Click Choose Playing Techniques beside the Playback playing technique field to open the Playing Technique Combinations dialog. 5. Select the playback techniques you want. TIP You can select a single playback technique or combine multiple playback techniques. To select multiple playback techniques, Ctrl/Cmd -click each playback technique. 6.
Play mode Playback techniques You can see which playback techniques are in use at any particular rhythmic position in the playing techniques lane for the corresponding instrument track. TIP ● If you have input a playing technique but cannot hear a change in the sound, you might be using a combination of playback techniques that the expression map does not expect.
Play mode Playback techniques The Edit Playback Techniques dialog contains the following sections and options: 1 Category menu Allows you to filter the list of playback techniques by selecting a category from the menu, such as Techniques or Dynamics. 2 Playback techniques list Contains all the playback techniques in the project within the currently selected category.
Play mode Played vs. notated note durations ● Fallback: Allows you to specify another playback technique that can be used if the present one is not available. ● Articulation type: Sets the duration over which the playback technique takes effect. Attribute applies only to the note at the rhythmic position where the playing technique is found, such as a staccato articulation, while Direction applies to all following notes until it is replaced by another playing technique, such as pizzicato.
Play mode Played vs. notated note durations RELATED LINKS Slurs in playback on page 1355 Changing the played duration of notes You can change the played duration of notes individually, both at the start and end of notes. For example, you can make notes sound for longer or start sounding later. PREREQUISITE ● Played Durations is selected in the Play toolbox. ● Object Selection is selected in the Play toolbox. PROCEDURE 1.
Play mode Played vs. notated note durations default played duration. For example, if the notes are staccato, their played duration is half their notated duration by default. RELATED LINKS Velocity lanes on page 599 MIDI recording on page 218 Importing MIDI on page 69 MIDI Import Options dialog on page 70 684 Dorico Pro 3.5.
Print mode Print mode allows you to print your layouts or to export them as graphics files, such as PDF and SVG. ● When printing layouts, you can specify the paper size and other options, such as duplex or booklet printing. ● When exporting layouts, you can specify different graphics file types and the information you want to include in their exported file names.
Print mode Project window in Print mode Shows a list of all layouts in your project and allows you to select what to print or export. NOTE The layout selector in the toolbar is disabled in Print mode. If you want to see a different layout in the print preview area, select it in the Layouts panel. 2 Print Options panel Contains options for printing or exporting your layouts. 3 System Dialogs (macOS only) Contains macOS-specific printing options.
Print mode Project window in Print mode The Layouts panel contains all the layouts in your project, displayed as cards. Each layout card shows the following: 1 Disclosure arrow Expands/Collapses the layout card. 2 Layout type Shows the type of layout from the following options: 3 ● Full score layout ● Instrumental part layout ● Custom score layout Layout name Shows the name of the layout.
Print mode Project window in Print mode ● Press Ctrl/Cmd-9 . ● Click the disclosure arrow on the right edge of the main window. ● Choose Window > Show Right Panel. All the options that you set in the Print Options panel are saved with your project. The options are divided into the following sections: Destination Allows you to select a physical printer for printing or a file location for exporting a graphics file. If you print your work, you can choose how many copies you want to 688 Dorico Pro 3.5.
Print mode Printing layouts print. If you choose to export a graphics file, you can specify the format, color mode, image resolution, file name, and directory of the saved file. Depending on the destination type selected, the button at the bottom of the panel reads either Print or Export. If you have selected some layouts set to print and some set to export graphics, the button reads Print and Export. Job Type Allows you to choose the range of pages to be printed or exported and how they are arranged.
Print mode Printing layouts TIP You can select individual layouts and set up their printing options without printing straight away. Once you have set up the printing options you want for different layouts, you can then select all the layouts you want to print and click Print. Your existing print settings are applied, even if your selection contains layouts with different print settings. For example, you can set your full score layout to print 3 booklet copies and the part layouts to print 1 2-up copy each.
Print mode Printing layouts 16. In the Annotations section, activate each annotation you want to add to the selected layouts. 17. Click Print. RESULT The selected layouts are printed according to the print settings you have applied. If your selection included part layouts set to concert pitch, Dorico Pro shows a warning and offers to switch them all to transposed pitch before printing/exporting. You can also select which layouts you want to switch to transposed pitch or proceed anyway with no changes.
Print mode Exporting layouts as graphics files 5. Click Print/Export/Print and Export. RESULT The specified pages in the selected layouts are printed/exported. Exported files use the file name recipe set for their graphics file format in the Export File Names dialog. RELATED LINKS Export File Names dialog on page 695 Page arrangements for printing/exporting on page 697 Specifying printing options (macOS only) Dorico Pro allows you to access the standard printing options of your operating system.
Print mode Exporting layouts as graphics files TIP We recommend including the Page number token for PNG, SVG, and TIFF files as each page in layouts using these formats is exported as a separate file. 7. Optional: If you only want to export a specified range of pages, choose Page Range in the Job Type section. 8. Optional: If you selected Page Range, enter the pages you want into the value field. ● To specify a range, enter the first page and last page separated with a dash, such as 1-4.
Print mode Exporting layouts as graphics files Changing the image settings for layouts You can change the graphics file format, color mode, and image resolution of layouts individually, for example, if you want to export some layouts as PDF files but others as PNG files. PROCEDURE 1. In the Layouts list, select the layouts whose export path you want to change. 2. In the Print Options panel, choose Graphics in the Destination section. 3. Select a graphics file format from the menu. 4.
Print mode Exporting layouts as graphics files 4. Click Select Folder (Windows)/Open (macOS) to insert the new path in the Destination folder field. 5. Optional: Repeat steps 1 to 4 for other layouts whose export path you want to change. 6. Optional: If you want to change the file name recipe, click File Name Options to open the Export File Names dialog. 7. Optional: In the Export File Names dialog, change the file name recipe for your selected graphics file formats.
Print mode Exporting layouts as graphics files The Export File Names dialog contains the following options: 1 File names for Allows you to select different graphics file formats. You can set different file name recipes for each graphics file format. 2 Preview Displays an example file name based on the current recipe. The layout used for the preview is the one shown in the layout selector in the toolbar.
Print mode Printers NOTE The page number ingredient is not available for the PDF file name recipe as it is a multi-page format. 7 Default separator Allows you to set the characters used to separate ingredients in the file name recipe by default. RELATED LINKS Exporting layouts as graphics files on page 692 Printers You can print layouts from Dorico Pro projects to any printer to which your computer is connected. You can select different printers for each layout in your project.
Print mode Page arrangements for printing/exporting Spreads Prints two pages on each sheet of paper, with odd-numbered pages on the right-hand side and even-numbered pages on the left-hand side. You can also specify a paper size on which to print odd final pages, for example, if you are printing a layout containing five pages. 2-up Prints two pages on each sheet of paper. The first page in the range is printed on the left-hand side of the first sheet of paper.
Print mode Duplex printing Booklet printing Booklets are documents printed on both sides of the paper and folded to resemble the pages in a book. When printed as a booklet, pages are reordered so that you can fold the printed pages and read the content in the same order as they were in the project. Printing layouts as a booklet can be much quicker than printing pages single-sided or doublesided.
Print mode Page sizes and paper sizes printer, a message box informs you to turn over the stack of printed pages and put them back into the printer. Click OK to continue printing the inward pages. Both sides automatically Prints on both sides of each sheet of paper automatically. This option is only available if your printer supports this type of printing. The other menus in the Duplex Printing section allow you to set how the printed image is flipped when printing on the reverse side of the paper.
Print mode Page sizes and paper sizes If you do not select a specific paper size, Dorico Pro automatically chooses a paper size that is based on your computer's locale settings. For example, if these are set to a European country, an international ISO standard might be used, such as A4. If they are set to a North American country, one of their typical standards might be used, such as US Letter.
Print mode Graphics file formats Print odd final page on For Spreads and 2-up job types only: If this is activated, you can select a different paper size or orientation for the odd final page. This setting is useful when printing layouts with an odd number of pages on A3 paper in landscape orientation. For example, if your layout contains five pages, the first four pages fit onto two sheets of A3, while the fifth page would occupy only the left-hand side of a third sheet of A3.
Print mode Graphics file formats Image resolution Image resolution refers to the number of pixels contained in an image. The larger the number of pixels, the sharper and clearer the image appears. In Dorico Pro, you can export PNG and TIFF files with different image resolutions. The image resolution is measured in dots per inch, or “dpi”. ● 72 ● 150 ● 300 ● 600 ● 1200 NOTE A resolution of 72 dpi is suitable for display on screen so that you can embed the graphic in an e-mail or on a web page.
Print mode Annotations Embedding of fonts in PDF and SVG files How fonts are handled in PDF and SVG files mainly depends on the fonts that you use in the project. PDF Files The music and text fonts, and their sub-sets, that are supplied with Dorico Pro are embedded in PDF files during the export. If you open the PDF files on a different computer, they look the same, even if that computer does not have the fonts installed that are used in the document.
Print mode Annotations The Annotations section of the Print Options panel contains the following options: Crop marks Adds short vertical and horizontal lines at each of the four corners of the page. Border Adds an outline around the edge of the page dimensions. Date and time Adds the date and time of printing at the bottom of each page. Watermark Adds large translucent text across the middle of each page. This is useful for indicating that this version is a draft, proof, or perusal score.
Notation reference
Introduction This notation reference contains information about the accepted conventions for presenting different notations and how to change their appearance and placement in Dorico Pro, both for individual items and by changing default settings. It also contains instructions for inputting more complex notations, such as cross-staff glissando lines, which are described in the corresponding chapter.
Accidentals Accidentals are shown beside notes to indicate their pitch, both when notated on a staff and written out in text. In music based in Western tonality, they usually show that the pitch of a note has been altered so that it does not conform to the current prevailing key signature. In Dorico Pro, each note has its own fixed pitch that is independent of the prevailing key signature, and accidentals are automatically hidden and shown as appropriate.
Accidentals Hiding/Showing or parenthesizing accidentals NOTE ● Depending on the accidental duration rule applied to the flow, deleting accidentals might cause accidentals to appear on subsequent notes of the same pitch in the same bar. You can check the pitch of notes by selecting them and looking in the status bar. ● To delete accidentals from a selection of notes with different accidentals, we recommend that you revert them all to natural by pressing 0 or clicking Natural in the Notes panel.
Accidentals Project-wide engraving options for accidentals NOTE ● Hiding accidentals does not affect the pitch of notes in playback. ● If you are hiding/showing many accidentals, we recommend that you consider changing the accidental duration rule. ● You can assign key commands for different accidental hiding, showing, and parenthesizing commands on the Key Commands page in Preferences.
Accidentals Stacking of accidentals ● Accidentals on notes that are an octave apart are stacked in the same column. This also applies to accidentals that are a sixth or more apart, depending on the combination of accidentals. ● Accidentals in the same column never collide. The minimum interval between accidentals that is required to prevent collisions depends on the types of accidentals.
Accidentals Altered unisons Kerning of accidental columns Dorico Pro applies kerning to accidental columns to ensure that the columns to the left of a chord occupy as little horizontal space as possible. In typography, kerning adjusts the space between individual characters to increase legibility. In Dorico Pro, as well as in music engraving in general, kerning allows accidentals to interlock.
Accidentals Microtonal accidentals Changing how altered unisons appear You can change how individual altered unisons appear, including within chords containing other altered unisons, and independently of your per-flow settings. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1.
Accidentals Accidental duration rules NOTE Even if you do not want to use a conventional key signature, you must input an open or atonal key signature in order to change the tonality system and use microtonal accidentals.
Accidentals Accidental duration rules even though the sharp is included in the key signature. Cautionary accidentals are also known as “courtesy accidentals”. When using the common practice accidental duration rule, you can choose to hide, show, or parenthesize cautionary accidentals in different circumstances. In Dorico Pro, common practice is the default accidental duration rule.
Accidentals Accidental duration rules ● 5. Modernist Optional: Customize the options for your chosen accidental duration rule. TIP Options in the Basic section can apply to all accidental duration rules. 6. Click Apply, then Close.
Accidentals Accidental duration rules PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-N to open Notation Options. 2. In the Flows list, select the flows in which you want to change the double accidental cancellation convention. By default, only the current flow is selected when you open the dialog. 3. Click Accidentals in the category list. 4. In the Basic section, choose one of the following options for Single accidentals cancelling double accidentals: 5.
Articulations Articulations are markings that are drawn above or below notes and chords. Articulations tell a performer how to attack a note or how long to play a note relative to its notated duration. In Dorico Pro, articulations are defined as something that alters the way a note is played, in a way that is consistent across all instruments.
Articulations Copying articulations Copying articulations Articulations are automatically included if you copy notes, but they cannot be copied and pasted independently of notes. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the notes with articulations you want to copy. 2. Copy the notes in one of the following ways: ● Press R to repeat the material directly after itself. ● Press Ctrl/Cmd-C , select the position where you want to copy the selected notes, then press Ctrl/Cmd-V .
Articulations Positions of articulations ● Click the articulations you want to delete in the Notes panel. Positions of articulations There are established conventions for the position and placement of articulations relative to notes, the staff, and staff lines, which ensure articulations are always clearly visible. For the smallest articulations, such as staccato marks, correct placement relative to staff lines in particular is vital.
Articulations Positions of articulations ● Inside slurs that start/end on a note or chord with an articulation. ● Inside the curvature of a slur. ● Inside tuplet brackets. Articulations of force are positioned as follows: ● Outside slurs that start/end on a note or chord with an articulation, except if they can be positioned within the staff. ● Inside the curvature of a slur if they fit between the slur and the note or stem, to which they belong, without colliding. ● Outside tuplet brackets.
Articulations Positions of articulations RELATED LINKS Project-wide engraving options for articulations on page 718 Engrave toolbox on page 465 Changing the horizontal position of staccato marks You can change the default horizontal position of all staccato and staccatissimo articulations when they are placed on the stem side of notes project-wide. By default, staccato and staccatissimo articulations are centered on the stem when on the stem side.
Articulations Positions of articulations RESULT The selected articulations are moved vertically. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. TIP ● When you move articulations vertically, Offset Y in the Articulations group of the Properties panel is activated for the corresponding type of articulation. For example, Offset Y under the Articulations of force heading is activated when you move accents.
Articulations Positions of articulations Changing the placement of articulations relative to slurs You can change whether individual articulations of duration are placed inside or outside slur endpoints, independently of your project-wide setting. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. NOTE These steps only apply to articulations of duration. They do not apply to articulations of force or stress.
Articulations Articulations in playback 4. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The default placement of the corresponding types of articulations is changed project-wide. Articulations with Natural placement are placed on the notehead side of notes. TIP You can also change the default gaps between noteheads/stems and articulations and between stacked articulations in the Vertical Position section of the Articulations page.
Articulations Articulations in playback ● You can enable independent voice playback for individual instruments, for example, if you have slurs in one voice and staccatos in another voice. RELATED LINKS Playback techniques on page 679 Playback Options dialog on page 579 Enabling independent voice playback on page 622 726 Dorico Pro 3.5.
Bars Bars indicate a usually regular segment of time according to the number of beats, which is usually determined by the prevailing time signature. Bars are separated from other bars to the left and the right by vertical barlines. Each bar has a number, allowing players to keep track of their place in the music and aiding rehearsal. This is especially important in music for multiple players. Dorico Pro automatically numbers bars and shows barlines between bars as required for the current time signature.
Bars Deleting bars/beats For example, enter –6 to delete six bars, meaning the bar you selected and the subsequent five bars, or -2q to delete two quarter note beats, starting from the selected rhythmic position. 4. Press Return to close the popover. RESULT The number of bars or beats specified is deleted.
Bars Changing the width of empty bars 2. Press Shift-B to open the bars and barlines popover. 3. Enter trim into the popover. 4. Press Return to close the popover. RESULT Empty bars at the end of the selected flow are deleted. RELATED LINKS Bars and barlines popover on page 253 Splitting flows on page 385 Deleting the contents of bars You can delete just the contents of bars without deleting barlines or the bars themselves. PROCEDURE 1.
Bars Splits in bars TIP If you want to move handles by larger increments, you can press Ctrl/Cmd as well as the standard key command, for example, Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-Left Arrow . RESULT The width of the empty bar is changed. For example, if you select the handle of the barline on the right of a bar and nudge the handle to the left, the bar appears narrower. If you select the barline on the right of a bar and nudge the handle to the right, the bar appears wider.
Bars Combining bars Two 4/4 bars with quarter notes Adding a normal barline halfway through the first 4/4 bar restarts the time signature from that point. RELATED LINKS Input methods for time signatures and pick-up bars on page 237 Input methods for bars, beats, and barlines on page 253 Inserting system breaks on page 432 Inserting frame breaks on page 429 Inputting notes in Insert mode on page 192 Combining bars You can combine two or more bars into one, longer bar by deleting the barline between them.
Barlines Barlines are vertical lines that cross staves in order to show how music is divided into bars, according to the time signature. The most commonly used barline is the single barline between adjacent bars, but there are different types, such as double or repeat barlines. The final system in a piece in 12/8 containing, a key change with double barline, three normal barlines, and a final barline at the end Dorico Pro automatically shows barlines as required for the current time signature.
Barlines Per-flow notation options for barlines RELATED LINKS Engraving Options dialog on page 476 Barline spacing on page 738 Barlines on ossia staves on page 1383 Changing the barline shown before codas on page 1287 Per-flow notation options for barlines You can find options for the per-flow the appearance of barlines on the Barlines page in Write > Notation Options.
Barlines Types of barlines Dashed A dashed barline has the same thickness as a normal barline, but has gaps within it to give it a dashed appearance. It is used to subdivide bars to make complex time signatures easier to read, and to differentiate editorial barlines from ones originally in the manuscript. Tick A tick barline is a short line that spans only the top line of the staff.
Barlines Types of barlines End repeat An end repeat line is the mirror of a start repeat line, so it consists of either two or four dots, followed by a normal barline, followed by a thick barline. It shows the end of a repeated section. It is used alongside start repeat lines, which show the start of a repeated section.
Barlines Types of barlines Changing the default barline type in flows By default, Dorico Pro uses single barlines to separate bars in flows. You can change which type of barline automatically separates bars in each flow independently. For example, short or tick barlines are frequently used for most barlines in chant notation. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-N to open Notation Options. 2. In the Flows list, select the flows whose default barline type you want to change.
Barlines Hiding/Showing systemic barlines on single-staff systems 4. 5. Choose one of the following options for Automatic barline at end of flow: ● Final barline ● Double barline ● Normal barline ● Dashed barline ● Thick barline ● No barline Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The default final barline at the end of the selected flows is changed. NOTE You can override individual final barlines by inputting a barline of a different type, but you cannot delete individual final barlines.
Barlines Deleting barlines Deleting barlines You can delete barlines without affecting the rhythmic positions of notes. For example, you might delete existing barlines and input new ones if you want to change where a barline occurs. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the barlines you want to delete. NOTE You must select barlines directly, not their signposts. 2. Press Backspace or Delete . RESULT The barline is deleted.
Barlines Barlines across staff groups Moving barlines graphically You can adjust the spacing between barlines and neighboring notes, time signatures, key signatures, or rests. PROCEDURE 1. In the Engrave toolbox, activate Note Spacing . 2. Select a note spacing handle at the rhythmic position of the barline. 3. Move the handle in any of the following ways: ● Press Alt/Opt-Right Arrow to move it to the right. ● Press Alt/Opt-Left Arrow to move it to the left.
Barlines Barlines across staff groups Barlines on individual staves Barlines across instrumental groups Barlines automatically extend across staff groups that are joined by a bracket or brace. Which staves are included in a bracket depends on the instrumentation and context, but usually staves for instruments from the same family, such as woodwind or strings, are bracketed together. Dorico Pro automatically brackets staves according to the ensemble type set for each layout.
Barlines Barlines across staff groups Custom barline groups You can create custom barline joins and bracket groups by manually arranging your players into groups. If one or more players included in your group were previously in another group, any remaining instruments in their previous group remain grouped. You can put a single player in its own player group so they appear separately, for example, to separate the soloist from the remainder of the ensemble in a concerto.
Barlines Barlines across staff groups RESULT All staves between and including the staves on which you selected items are joined by a barline until the next existing bracket and barline change or the end of the flow, whichever comes first. A signpost appears at the start of the system in which you selected items. If necessary, any existing barline joins are adjusted to accommodate the new barline join.
Barlines Barlines across staff groups 2. Press Backspace or Delete . Lengthening/Shortening custom barline joins You can lengthen/shorten custom barline joins vertically to change the staves across which they span, for example, if you added a new player below a barline join and want to extend the barline join to that staff. PREREQUISITE Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1.
Bar numbers Bar numbers provide a crucial reference point for music that has multiple players, and make the chronological sequence of the music clear. They indicate where players are in the piece, which allows them to co-ordinate themselves easily in rehearsals and concerts. Bar numbers can also be useful when preparing parts and scores, as you can use bar numbers and rehearsal marks to help you quickly compare a part to the score and check the music is correct.
Bar numbers Hiding/Showing bar number enclosures ● Every bar ● None 5. Optional: If you chose Every n bars, set a custom frequency for bar numbers by changing the value for Interval. 6. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT Bar numbers are hidden in the selected layouts when you choose None, and shown at the corresponding frequency when you choose any other option. Changing the Interval value changes how frequently bar numbers are shown.
Bar numbers Hiding/Showing bar number enclosures RESULT Bar numbers in the selected layouts are shown within your selected enclosure type. The size of the enclosure is relative to the font size of the bar numbers, but the size and shape of the enclosure are also determined by your padding values.
Bar numbers Hiding/Showing bar number enclosures Minimum height Sets a minimum value for the height of enclosures. In this example, the value was increased from 2 spaces to 6 spaces. Minimum horizontal padding Sets a minimum value for the distance between the two sides of the enclosure and the bar number within it. In this example, the value was increased from 1/2 a space to 4 spaces.
Bar numbers Hiding/Showing bar number ranges on multi-bar rests Minimum padding Sets a minimum value for the distance between the enclosure line and the bar number within it. In this example, the value was increased from 1/6 of a space to 1 space. All enclosures Enclosure line thickness Sets the thickness of enclosure lines for both rectangle and circle enclosure types. The default is 1/8 of a space. The examples have a thickness of 1/2 a space.
Bar numbers Hiding/Showing guide bar numbers TIP You can change the bar number range separator and the default distance between bar number ranges and the staff in the Multi-bar Rests section of the Rests page in Engrave > Engraving Options.
Bar numbers Bar number paragraph styles Editing the bar number paragraph styles You can edit the formatting of the paragraph styles used for bar numbers, for example, if you want to increase their font size. By default, there is a paragraph style for bar numbers in full score layouts and another paragraph style for bar numbers in part layouts. PREREQUISITE If you want to use additional bar number paragraph styles to the ones provided by default, you have created new paragraph styles. PROCEDURE 1.
Bar numbers Positions of bar numbers 3. Click Bar Numbers in the category list. 4. In the Appearance subsection, select a paragraph style from the Paragraph style menu. 5. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The selected paragraph style is used for all bar numbers in the selected layouts. Positions of bar numbers Bar numbers are typically shown at the start of each system, above the staff, and aligned with the initial barline.
Bar numbers Positions of bar numbers Showing bar numbers above specific staves You can change the staves above which bar numbers appear, which allows you to show bar numbers at multiple vertical positions in each system. For example, in large orchestral scores, you might show bar numbers both at the top of the system and above the string section. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2.
Bar numbers Positions of bar numbers The default value is 2 spaces. 5. Optional: In the Placement subsection, change the value for Minimum distance from other objects. The default value is 3/4 of a space. 6. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT If you increase the values, bar numbers are positioned further away from the staff and/or other objects, either above or below the staff depending on your setting for Placement relative to staff.
Bar numbers Positions of bar numbers Moving bar numbers graphically You can move individual bar numbers graphically without changing the rhythmic positions to which they apply. When bar numbers are shown above multiple staves, you can move each bar number independently. PREREQUISITE Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, select the bar numbers you want to move. 2.
Bar numbers Project-wide engraving options for bar numbers Hiding bar numbers at time signatures shown at system object positions You can choose to hide bar numbers at the same rhythmic position as time signatures shown at system object positions, as the resulting collision can be difficult to resolve in a visually clear way when bar numbers are centered on barlines. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2.
Bar numbers Bar number changes Bar numbers and repeats on page 759 Bar number changes Bar numbers follow a continuous sequence, with each bar having a unique bar number that continues from the previous bar number. However, you can make manual changes to the bar number sequence, including changing to a subordinate sequence.
Bar numbers Subordinate bar numbers 4. Optional: If you chose Primary or Subordinate, change the bar number where you want the bar number sequence change to start by changing the value in the corresponding value field. 5. Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. RESULT The bar number sequence changes, starting from the beginning of the bar in which you selected an item, or from the position of a selected bar number or barline.
Bar numbers Subordinate bar numbers Adding subordinate bar numbers You can create a subordinate bar number sequence that is independent of your primary bar number sequence. This can be useful if you want to insert new bars without changing the bar numbers of existing subsequent bars. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode or Engrave mode, select one of the following: ● An item in the bar from the beginning of which you want subordinate bar numbers to start.
Bar numbers Bar numbers and repeats RESULT The primary bar number sequence resumes from the bar in which you selected an item, or from the position of a selected bar number or barline. TIP You do not have to add subordinate bar number changes in chronological order. You can enter a return to the primary bar number sequence first, before adding the subordinate bar number sequence.
Bar numbers Bar numbers and repeats EXAMPLE Bar numbers not counting repeats with only initial bar numbers shown Bar numbers counting repeats with bar numbers for subsequent repeats shown alongside the initial bar numbers RELATED LINKS Changing the appearance of bar numbers for subsequent repeats on page 761 Adding bar number changes on page 756 Including/Excluding repeats from the bar number count You can choose to include/exclude repeats from the bar number count in all layouts project-wide.
Bar numbers Bar numbers and repeats 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to change which playthroughs are shown in bar numbers. By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog. You can select other layouts by using the selection options in the action bar, Shift -clicking adjacent layouts, and Ctrl/Cmd -clicking individual layouts. 3. Click Bar Numbers in the category list. 4.
Bar numbers Bar numbers and repeats RESULT The appearance of bar numbers for subsequent repeats in the select layouts is changed. For example, if you want multiple bar numbers for the same bar to be separated by pipes, enter | into the Prefix field and nothing into the Suffix field. EXAMPLE Bar number for subsequent repeat with parentheses Bar number for subsequent repeat with pipe for prefix for suffix/prefix 762 Dorico Pro 3.5.
Beaming A beam is a line that connects notes with tails to show rhythmic grouping, which varies according to the metrical structure of the current time signature. This way of grouping notes helps performers calculate quickly exactly how to play their given rhythm and helps them follow both their part and, if applicable, the conductor.
Beaming Beam groups Per-flow notation options for beam grouping You can find options to control the default beam grouping rules in each flow independently on the Beam Grouping page in Write > Notation Options. Dorico Pro has sophisticated underlying rules for producing beam groupings that follow the accepted conventions of music theory, including crossing the half-bar in time signatures like 4/4, beaming all eighth notes together in 3/4, beam groups that include tuplets, and many other situations.
Beaming Beam groups popover means all seven eighth notes (quavers) are beamed together, whereas entering [2+2+3]/8 subdivides the seven eighth notes into two, then two, then three. NOTE The duration of beam groups in Dorico Pro depends on the beat grouping in the current time signature and your per-flow beam grouping settings in Write > Notation Options.
Beaming Beaming notes together manually Resetting beam grouping You can remove all changes made to the beam grouping of notes and chords. This can also be useful if, for example, MusicXML files you have imported have incorrect beaming. PREREQUISITE If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes/chords whose beaming you want to reset. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. Choose Edit > Beaming > Reset Beaming.
Beaming Changing the direction of partial beams RELATED LINKS Engrave toolbox on page 465 Creating fanned beams on page 782 Allowing/Disallowing tuplets to span barlines on page 1488 Centered beams on page 771 Creating cross-staff beams on page 773 Per-flow notation options for beam grouping on page 764 Beam grouping according to meters on page 764 Creating custom beat groupings for meters on page 785 Unbeaming notes You can separate all notes in a beamed group so that each note shows its own tail, for exa
Beaming Beam placement relative to the staff EXAMPLE Partial beam direction Left Partial beam direction Right RELATED LINKS Engrave toolbox on page 465 Beam placement relative to the staff The default staff-relative placement of beams is determined by the staff positions of the notes within the beamed group and their resulting stem directions.
Beaming Beam slants RESULT The beam appears on the side of the staff that corresponds to its forced stem direction. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Beaming Beam slants A phrase containing multiple different beam slants and directions The amount by which a beam slants is typically determined by the interval between the first and last note in the beamed group, provided the pattern of notes in the beam does not dictate a horizontal beam instead. Smaller intervals require a shallower slant and larger intervals require a steeper one. However, the desired amount of slant is not the only factor that must be considered.
Beaming Centered beams 2. Move the handles in any of the following ways: ● Press Alt/Opt-Up Arrow to move them upwards. ● Press Alt/Opt-Down Arrow to move them downwards. TIP If you want to move handles by larger increments, you can press Ctrl/Cmd as well as the standard key command, for example, Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-Up Arrow . ● 3. Click and drag them upwards/downwards. Optional: Repeat steps 1 and 2 to move the other end of the selected beams. RESULT The slants of the selected beams are changed.
Beaming Centered beams A phrase with high and low notes with default beaming The same phrase with high and low notes, but with a centered beam RELATED LINKS Changing the staff-relative placement of beams on page 768 Creating cross-staff beams on page 773 Creating centered beams You can make beams appear in the middle of staves, with high notes above the beam and lower notes below the beam. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains.
Beaming Creating cross-staff beams Engrave toolbox on page 465 Removing centered beams You can remove centered beams and revert beams to their default placements either above or below the phrase. PREREQUISITE If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select at least one note in each centered beam that you want to revert to the default placement. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. Choose Edit > Stem > Remove Centered Beam.
Beaming Creating cross-staff beams NOTE ● When crossing notes to a staff that already contains notes, the stem direction of the existing notes on the staff can change. This is due to how multiple voices at the same rhythmic position are handled. Therefore, you may have to change the stem direction of notes manually. ● You can reset notes to appear on their default staff by selecting them and choosing Edit > Cross Staff > Reset to Original Staff.
Beaming Creating cross-staff beams RESULT Optical cross-staff beam spacing is enabled in the selected layouts. EXAMPLE Default spacing: The distance between noteheads is even. Optical spacing for cross-staff beaming: The distance between stems is even. RELATED LINKS Note spacing on page 562 Cross-staff beam placement in multiple staves When instruments have three or more staves, cross-staff beams can be placed in multiple ways.
Beaming Beam corners 1 If all notes in the beam group are stem-up, the beam is placed above the top staff. 2 If all notes in the beam group are stem-down, the beam is placed below the bottom staff. 3 If notes are stem-down on the top staff and stem-up on the bottom two staves, the beam is placed between the top and middle staves. 4 If notes are stem-down on the top two staves and stem-up on the bottom staff, the beam is placed between the bottom and middle staves.
Beaming Secondary beams Secondary beams Secondary beams are the lines that are added between the primary beam and the notehead as the rhythmic division gets smaller. The primary beam is the outermost beam line that joins all of the notes in the beamed group. Depending on the durations of the notes in the beamed group, the primary beam may in fact be two or more lines; that is, for notes of a 16th or shorter in duration.
Beaming Tuplets within beams NOTE ● The number of beam lines shown at a split in the secondary beam cannot be the same or greater than the number of beam lines in the secondary beam. For example, if you split a secondary beam containing 64th notes, the maximum number of beam lines shown at the split in that beam is three, the equivalent of 32nd notes. ● You can change the default number of secondary beam lines shown in each flow independently on the Beam Grouping page in Write > Notation Options.
Beaming Rests within beams 16th note triplet beamed together with non-tuplet 16th notes Eighth note (quaver) triplet beamed separately from non-tuplet eighth notes RELATED LINKS Per-flow notation options for beam grouping on page 764 Tuplets on page 1485 Tuplet brackets on page 1491 Tuplet numbers/ratios on page 1496 Hiding/Showing tuplet brackets on page 1493 Rests within beams There are different conventions for how beams interact with rests, including whether beams should extend over rests or split a
Beaming Stemlets TIP You can change the default minimum stemlet length and gap between rests and stemlets in the Stems section of the Notes page in Engrave > Engraving Options. RELATED LINKS Per-flow notation options for beam grouping on page 764 Showing stemlets in beam groups You can show stemlets on rests in beam groups individually, independently of your default setting for showing stemlets in the current flow.
Beaming Fanned beams Removing stemlets from beam groups You can remove stemlets from rests in beam groups individually, independently of your default setting for showing stemlets in the current flow. PREREQUISITE If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select at least one note in each of the beam groups from which you want to remove stemlets on rests. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2.
Beaming Fanned beams EXAMPLE Fanned beam accelerando with three lines Fanned beam accelerando with two lines Fanned beam rallentando with three lines Fanned beam rallentando with two lines Creating fanned beams You can create fanned beams across a group of any notes that can be beamed, such as eighth notes (quavers), 16th notes (semiquavers), and 32nd notes. PREREQUISITE If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1.
Beaming Fanned beams 2. In the Properties panel, activate Change fanned beam direction in the Beaming group. EXAMPLE Fanned beam with multiple changes of direction RELATED LINKS Engrave toolbox on page 465 783 Dorico Pro 3.5.
Note and rest grouping There are generally accepted conventions for how notes and rests of different durations are notated and grouped in different contexts and meters. In Dorico Pro, notes are automatically notated to fit within bars and are grouped according to your per-flow settings. Depending on the prevailing time signature, there can be many different ways to beam notes together.
Note and rest grouping Creating custom beat groupings for meters Creating custom beat groupings for meters If your music requires a different beat grouping for a particular meter than the default setting for that time signature, you can specify your preferred beat grouping within the time signature. You can choose whether or not the time signature shows this custom beat grouping. You can also input time signatures only on single staves.
Note and rest grouping Creating custom beat groupings for meters Time signature styles on page 1465 Changing the numerator style of time signatures on page 1466 786 Dorico Pro 3.5.
Brackets and braces Brackets and braces are thick straight and curved lines in the left-hand margin that show instrument groupings. Brackets A bracket is a thick black line, the width of a beam, that groups staves together, most commonly according to instrument family. It often has winged ends that point inwards towards the score. It is always positioned directly to the left of a systemic barline.
Brackets and braces Changing bracket grouping according to ensemble type A brace connecting two piano staves NOTE ● Staves cannot be bracketed and braced simultaneously. Therefore, braced staves are excluded from bracketed groups. They also cannot show sub-brackets or sub-sub-brackets. ● System objects are only shown above instrument families that are bracketed or braced together. ● Blank staves can only show brackets/braces when they are shown after final flows.
Brackets and braces Changing bracket grouping according to ensemble type ● 5. British brass band Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The default bracket grouping is changed in the selected layouts. TIP ● There are further options for bracketing on the Brackets and Braces page, such as hiding/ showing brackets when there is only a single instrument in the bracket group and hiding/ showing braces when only a single staff is shown.
Brackets and braces Secondary brackets Big band Staves are bracketed according to their instrument family, except for brass instruments, which are all bracketed according to their instrument type. Rhythm section instruments are bracketed together. Percussion and timpani are bracketed together. British brass band Brass instruments are bracketed according to their instrument type, except for horns and trumpets, which are bracketed together.
Brackets and braces Secondary brackets Secondary bracket as a sub-bracket Secondary bracket as a brace NOTE You cannot show sub-sub-brackets in addition to braces, you can only show sub-sub-brackets in addition to sub-brackets. You can input and delete sub-brackets from selected rhythmic positions using custom bracket/ brace groups.
Brackets and braces Sub-sub-brackets TIP You can show sub-brackets from selected rhythmic positions onwards using custom bracket/ brace groups, including in layouts where they are hidden by default. Showing secondary brackets as sub-brackets/braces Secondary brackets extend beyond brackets, allowing you to mark groups of staves within a bracketed group. You can show secondary brackets as either braces positioned outside the bracket or as sub-brackets in each layout independently. PROCEDURE 1.
Brackets and braces Project-wide engraving options for brackets and braces You can input and delete sub-sub-brackets from selected rhythmic positions using custom bracket/brace groups. You can change how thick the lines of sub-sub-brackets are, their width, and their design in the Sub-sub-brackets subsection of the Design section of the Brackets and Braces page in Engrave > Engraving Options.
Brackets and braces Custom staff grouping ● None Custom staff grouping In Dorico Pro, custom staff grouping allows you to change which staves are joined with brackets, braces, sub-brackets, sub-sub-brackets, and barlines if your project requires staff grouping not included in the default bracketing settings. Any changes to the default staff grouping are shown as bracket and barline change signposts, which also show the rhythmic position from which the changes apply.
Brackets and braces Custom staff grouping you want and with all staves shown in the layout. You can hide empty staves again after inputting the changes. We also recommend that you input any bracket/brace grouping or barline join changes you want at the beginning of the flow, and add any subsequent changes in chronological order. We do not recommend starting at the end of the flow.
Brackets and braces Custom staff grouping ● Insert brace RESULT All staves in the current layout between and including the staves on which you selected items are joined by the bracket or brace you chose until the next existing bracket and barline change or the end of the flow, whichever comes first. A signpost appears at the start of the system in which you selected items. If necessary, any existing bracket or brace groupings are adjusted to accommodate the new group as brackets/braces cannot overlap.
Brackets and braces Custom staff grouping EXAMPLE Divisi cello staves with default staff grouping Divisi staves with sub-sub-brackets added RELATED LINKS Engrave toolbox on page 465 Showing secondary brackets as sub-brackets/braces on page 792 Hiding/Showing blank staves after final flows on page 403 Showing blank staves in frames on page 404 Lengthening/Shortening custom brackets/braces You can lengthen/shorten custom brackets/braces vertically to change the staves across which they span, for example,
Brackets and braces Custom staff grouping RESULT The selected brackets/braces are lengthened/shortened to staves above/below. This affects the staves included in the brackets/braces on all systems to which the corresponding bracket and barline changes apply. NOTE Only one bracket/brace can exist on each staff, they cannot overlap. If any part of a selected bracket/brace collides with another bracket/brace when it is lengthened/shortened, the other bracket/brace is shortened to accommodate this.
Brackets and braces Custom staff grouping PROCEDURE 1. Select the bracket and barline change signposts that you want to delete. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. Press Backspace or Delete . RESULT The selected bracket and barline changes are deleted. Staff grouping on any corresponding systems follows either the previous bracket and barline change or the project-wide staff grouping settings if there is no previous bracket and barline change.
Chord symbols Chord symbols describe the vertical harmony of the music at a specific moment. They are frequently used in jazz and pop music, where players often improvise around chord progressions. Chord symbols shown above slashes on the Clarinet and Piano staves to help the players improvise around the notated Cornet melody. In Dorico Pro, chord symbols exist globally at the corresponding rhythmic positions by default.
Chord symbols Chord components Chord components Chord symbols consist of a root and a quality, with intervals, alterations, and an altered bass note included if required. Root The root note of the chord, expressed either as a note name or as a specific degree of a scale. Quality Defines the type of chord, such as major, minor, diminished, augmented, halfdiminished, or with added note, such as six or nine. Interval Chord symbols can include one or more added intervals, such as a major seventh or ninth.
Chord symbols Chord symbol appearance presets Chord symbol preset example Chord symbol preset name Default Boston Brandt-Roemer Indiana New York Nashville Jazz Standards Ross Japanese These presets use specific combinations of the options on the Chord Symbols page. You can also adjust these options individually to suit your requirements. Default uses a set of symbols intended to be as unambiguous as possible.
Chord symbols Chord symbol appearance presets Project Default Chord Symbol Appearances dialog The Project Default Chord Symbol Appearances dialog allows you to edit the default appearance of chord symbols. This changes the appearance of chord symbols project-wide. ● You can open the Project Default Chord Symbol Appearances dialog by clicking Edit in the Project Default Appearances section of the Chord Symbols page in Engrave > Engraving Options.
Chord symbols Chord symbol appearance presets Allows you to arrange and edit the components that make up the chord symbol. You can use the controls at the bottom of the dialog, and you can also move individual components in any of the following ways after selecting them in the editor: ● Press the standard key commands for moving items. For example, press Alt/ Opt-Right Arrow to move components to the right, or press Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/OptRight Arrow to move components to the right by larger increments.
Chord symbols Chord symbol appearance presets The Edit Chord Symbol Appearance dialog contains the following sections: 1 Editor Allows you to arrange and edit the components that make up the chord symbol. As well as using the controls at the bottom of the dialog, you can move individual components in any of the following ways after selecting them in the editor: ● Press the standard key commands for moving items.
Chord symbols Chord symbol appearance presets 3 ● Reset Y offset resets the vertical position of the selected component. ● Reset Scale resets the size of the selected component. Alternative component presentations You can create new components and edit existing components by clicking the respective button in the action bar. ● Add Component ● Edit Component Clicking either button opens the Edit Chord Symbol Component dialog, in which you can create new components and edit existing components.
Chord symbols Chord symbol appearance presets ● Glyph, for example, ♮ or ♯. You can use different styles of glyphs by selecting different fonts and font styles/weights from the menus. You can search using SMuFL or Unicode ranges. Click Add Glyph to add the selected glyph to the chord symbol component. NOTE A full list of the different ranges of glyphs is available on the SMuFL website. 3 ● Text, including numbers and other text.
Chord symbols Chord symbol appearance presets ● Attachment to: Sets the attachment point on the selected component which attaches to the component to its left. We recommend that you select a left edge attachment point for Attachment to. There are eight attachment points for glyphs and graphics, and eleven for text, due to the extra space required for letters that extend below the baseline. The example diagram helps you visualize how these points relate to components.
Chord symbols Chord symbol appearance presets NOTE This cannot be undone. If you want to revert your changes, you must delete the chord symbol from the Project Default Appearances list. RELATED LINKS Project Default Chord Symbol Appearances dialog on page 803 Resetting the appearance of chord symbols with single overrides You can reset the appearance of chord symbols you have overridden individually to the project default appearance for that chord symbol. PROCEDURE 1.
Chord symbols Transposing chord symbols ● 4. Underlined Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. Transposing chord symbols You can transpose chord symbols after you have input them, independently of any notes. NOTE Dorico Pro automatically shows the appropriate chord symbols for transposing instruments in transposing layouts. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the chord symbols you want to transpose. 2. Choose Write > Transpose to open the Transpose dialog. 3.
Chord symbols Hiding/Showing chord symbols ● To show chord symbols above all instrument staves held by the player, choose Chord Symbols > Show for All Instruments. ● To show chord symbols only above rhythm section instrument staves held by the player, choose Chord Symbols > Show for Rhythm Section Instruments. ● To show chord symbols only in chord symbol/slash regions on instrument staves held by the player, choose Chord Symbols > Show in Chord Symbol and Slash Regions.
Chord symbols Hiding/Showing the root and quality of chord symbols 2. Right-click the player and choose one of the following options from the context menu: ● To show chord symbols for the selected player in all layouts, choose Chord Symbols > Show in Full Score and Parts. ● To show chord symbols for the selected player only in full score/custom score layouts and not in part layouts, choose Chord Symbols > Show in Full Score Only.
Chord symbols Chord symbol regions By default, chord symbol regions are highlighted with a solid colored line above the top staff line and a colored background. As you zoom out, the colored backgrounds become more opaque, which is especially useful when viewing full score layouts in galley view. These highlights are considered annotations, are not printed by default, and you can hide and show them.
Chord symbols Chord symbol regions NOTE Only one chord symbol region can exist at each rhythmic position. If any part of a selected chord symbol region collides with any part of another chord symbol region as part of its move, the other chord symbol region is shortened to accommodate the one you moved. You can undo this action and restore the previous length of the other chord symbol region.
Chord symbols Positions of chord symbols Hiding/Showing chord symbol region highlights You can hide/show colored highlights for chord symbol regions at any time, for example, if you want to show the highlights when inputting music but hide them when engraving. NOTE This does not affect the solid line shown above the staff in chord symbol regions, which you cannot hide. PROCEDURE ● Choose View > Highlight Chord Symbol Regions.
Chord symbols Positions of chord symbols Showing chord symbols above one/multiple staves You can choose to show chord symbols above all instrument staves set to show chord symbols or only above the top staff in each system in each layout independently. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to change the vertical position of chord symbols.
Chord symbols Positions of chord symbols NOTE Only one chord symbol can exist at each rhythmic position. If a chord symbol passes over another chord symbol as part of its move, the existing chord symbol is deleted. You can undo this action, but any chord symbols deleted in the process are only restored if you moved the chord symbol using the keyboard. Moving chord symbols graphically You can move chord symbols graphically without affecting the rhythmic positions to which they apply.
Chord symbols Respelling chord symbols RELATED LINKS Engrave toolbox on page 465 Changing the property scope on page 158 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 462 Respelling chord symbols You can change the enharmonic spelling of chord symbols for transposing instruments, for example, to choose a simpler enharmonic equivalent spelling. This changes the enharmonic spelling of chord symbols in all transposing layouts and for all instruments with the same transposition. PROCEDURE 1.
Chord symbols Chord symbols imported from MusicXML RESULT The selected chord symbols are respelled according to the selected mode. This does not affect the notes included in the chord symbols. RELATED LINKS Engrave toolbox on page 465 Resetting the enharmonic spelling of chord symbols You can remove enharmonic spelling overrides for chord symbols you have respelled and return them to their default spelling.
Chord diagrams Chord diagrams represent the pattern of strings and frets on fretted instruments and use dots to indicate the stopped finger positions required to produce the corresponding chord. This demonstrates the specific shape of chords in a compact way and is useful if a particular voicing is required. In Dorico Pro, chord diagrams are part of chord symbols, meaning you can show them below chord symbols wherever they are shown.
Chord diagrams Chord diagram components Chord diagram components Chord diagrams use a combination of symbols, dots, and lines to convey the information about strings, fret positions, and finger positions that performers require to play the corresponding chord. 1 Omitted string Indicates a string that must not sound. 2 Open string Indicates a string that must sound but must be left open, that is, not stopped.
Chord diagrams Project-wide note input options for chord diagrams Changing the horizontal position of starting fret numbers on page 831 Changing the orientation of chord diagrams on page 832 Project-wide note input options for chord diagrams You can find options for the project-wide handling of chord diagrams and different components within chord diagrams on the Chord Diagrams page in Write > Note Input Options.
Chord diagrams Hiding/Showing used chord diagrams grids EXAMPLE Chord symbols shown but chord diagrams hidden Chord diagrams shown (standard guitar tuning) RELATED LINKS Inputting chord symbols on page 272 Hiding/Showing chord symbols on page 810 Edit Strings and Tuning dialog on page 120 Changing the open pitches of fretted instrument strings on page 122 Importing fretted instrument tunings on page 122 Hiding/Showing used chord diagrams grids You can hide/show grids that contain all chord diagrams use
Chord diagrams Changing the chord diagram shape 4. In the Chord Diagrams section, activate/deactivate Show chord diagrams used at start of flow. 5. Optional: Change the settings for used chord diagrams grids as required. For example, you can change the fretted instrument tuning for chord diagrams in the grid, their scale size, and the distance between chord diagrams and/or rows of chord diagrams. 6. Click Apply, then Close.
Chord diagrams Changing the chord diagram shape 2. 3. Change the shape in any of the following ways: ● To cycle through all the available shapes for the selected chord, press Alt/Opt-Q . ● To open the Choose Chord Diagram dialog and see all the available shapes for the selected chord at once, press Shift-Alt/Opt-Q . Optional: In the Choose Chord Diagram dialog, select the shape you want to use. TIP If the shape you require is not available, you can click Edit, which allows you to create a new shape.
Chord diagrams Creating new chord diagram shapes Displays all the valid chord diagram shapes for the selected chord and allows you to select a different shape to show at the selected rhythmic position. Shapes you have created yourself appear in a different color. 2 Edit Opens the Edit Chord Diagram dialog, which allows you to edit the shape of chord diagrams, including changing the number of frets shown, stopped fret positions, and the starting fret number.
Chord diagrams Creating new chord diagram shapes The Edit Chord Diagram dialog contains the following options and sections: 1 Name Displays the name of the chord whose chord diagram you are editing in the dialog. You cannot change this name. 2 Tuning Displays the fretted instrument and tuning for the current chord diagram.
Chord diagrams Creating new chord diagram shapes 8 ● O: Open string ● X: Omitted string ● No symbol: Stopped string Chord diagram shape editor Displays the current arrangement of stopped frets using dots, and allows you to change the chord diagram shape and move the stopped fret positions by clicking at the required positions. Each string can only have a single stopped fret position.
Chord diagrams Creating new chord diagram shapes The Edit Chord Diagrams dialog contains the following options and sections: 1 Category menu Allows you to select which shapes are available in the chord diagram shapes list by selecting the number of instrument strings required. 2 Search field Allows you to filter chord diagrams according to your entry.
Chord diagrams Creating new chord diagram shapes ● Save as Default : Saves the selected chord diagram shape to your user library, allowing you to use it in multiple projects. Appears as for chord diagram shapes saved as default. ● Delete : Deletes the selected chord diagram shape. NOTE You cannot delete predefined chord diagram shapes. You must click Delete twice to delete your own chord diagram shapes that you have saved as default.
Chord diagrams Editing the chord diagram font style ● Starting fret: Changes the fret number of the highest fret in the chord diagram. ● Starting fret number offset: Changes the offset of the starting fret number, for example, if you want the starting fret label to appear beside the second fret down the chord diagram in order to include a barré. ● Add fret ● Remove fret ● Reset Chord Diagram its default shape. : Adds a fret to the bottom of the chord diagram.
Chord diagrams Changing the orientation of chord diagrams 4. ● Left ● Right Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The position of starting fret numbers relative to chord diagrams is changed project-wide. TIP There are other options on the Chord Diagrams page to control the appearance and exact position of fret numbers.
Clefs Clefs are the symbol at the start of every system that give the notes on the staff context; that is, the clef tells you which note of the scale applies to each line or space of the staff. For example, the treble clef is also known as a “G clef”, because the spiral shape in the middle centers around G, normally the one above middle C. The other common clefs are: ● The bass clef, or F clef, in which two dots are shown either side of the line corresponding to F, normally the F below middle C.
Clefs General placement conventions for clefs General placement conventions for clefs Clefs are placed at the start of every system, with a small gap between the start of the staff and the left edge of the clef. Their vertical placement must be precise, as this signifies which pitches are intended by the subsequent notes on the staff. Clef changes that occur during a piece are usually smaller than the clefs shown at the start of each system.
Clefs Moving clefs rhythmically PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the clefs you want to move. NOTE 2. ● You cannot select initial clefs at the start of flows or clefs shown automatically at the start of each system. ● When using the mouse, you can only move one clef rhythmically at a time. Move the clefs according to the current rhythmic grid resolution in any of the following ways: ● Press Alt/Opt-Right Arrow to move them to the right. ● Press Alt/Opt-Left Arrow to move them to the left.
Clefs Showing clefs after grace notes NOTE ● If you want to move handles by larger increments, you can press Ctrl/Cmd as well as the standard key command, for example, Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-Left Arrow . ● You cannot move note spacing handles with the mouse, you can only move them using the keyboard. RESULT The clef is moved graphically to the right/left without affecting other items at the same rhythmic position.
Clefs Changing the default size of clef changes EXAMPLE Treble clef before grace notes Treble clef after grace notes to align with bass clef RELATED LINKS General placement conventions for clefs on page 834 Engrave toolbox on page 465 Changing the default size of clef changes You can change the default scale factor of all clef changes project-wide, for example, if you want clef changes to appear larger. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-E to open Engraving Options. 2.
Clefs Setting different clefs for concert/transposed pitch RESULT The selected clefs are deleted. Any music on the staff is respelled according to the previous clef, up until the next existing clef or the end of the flow. RELATED LINKS Input methods for clefs and octave lines on page 275 Setting different clefs for concert/transposed pitch You can set clef changes to show a different clef in concert pitch layouts compared to transposed pitch layouts.
Clefs Hiding/Showing clefs according to layout transpositions Overriding the default clef for layouts on page 135 Changing the octave of clefs on page 839 Hiding/Showing clefs according to layout transpositions You can show individual clefs only in layouts that are either concert or transposed pitch. For example, due to their transpositions, some instruments require clef changes in concert pitch scores to avoid excess ledger lines, but do not require those clef changes in their transposed pitch parts.
Clefs Clefs with octave indicators PROCEDURE 1. Select the clefs whose octave you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Octave shift in the Clefs group. 3. Change the value in the value field. RESULT The octave of the selected clefs is changed in all layouts with the same transposition. For example, 1 shifts clefs up one octave, and -1 shifts clefs down one octave.
Clefs Clefs with octave indicators Input methods for clefs and octave lines on page 275 Changing the octave of clefs on page 839 Respecting/Ignoring clef octave indicators Traditionally, clef octave indicators were used as a reminder of transposing instruments; however, in more recent music, some composers use clef octave indicators as an alternative to octave lines for extended passages. You can change whether Dorico Pro respects or ignores clef octave indicators in each flow independently. PROCEDURE 1.
Octave lines Octave lines indicate where notes are played higher/lower than they appear in the score or part. They are dashed or dotted horizontal lines with an italic numeral at the start. The numeral indicates the number of pitches by which the phrase is changed, such as 8 for one octave and 15 for two octaves. Octave lines that indicate notes are played higher than notated are placed above the staff, while octave lines that indicate notes are played lower than notated are placed below the staff.
Octave lines Project-wide engraving options for octave lines Project-wide engraving options for octave lines You can find options for the project-wide appearance of octave lines on the Octave Lines page in Engrave > Engraving Options. The options on this page allow you to change the appearance of continuation lines, continuation labels, the numeral at the start of octave lines, the position of octave lines relative to accidentals and noteheads, and their staff-relative placement.
Octave lines Changing the angles of octave lines Changing the angles of octave lines You can change the angles of octave lines in multiple places, for example, if you want to add corners to allow an octave line to follow the shape of an angular phrase more closely to save vertical space. PREREQUISITE If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1.
Octave lines Positions of octave lines Resetting the angles of octave lines You can reset the angles and corners of octave lines to return them to a single horizontal line. PREREQUISITE If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes within the octave lines at the positions of the angles/corners you want to reset. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. Choose Edit > Octave Line > Remove Corner/Angle.
Octave lines Positions of octave lines ● To move them to the right according to the current rhythmic grid resolution, press Ctrl/ Cmd-Alt/Opt-Right Arrow . ● To move them to the left according to the current rhythmic grid resolution, press Ctrl/ Cmd-Alt/Opt-Left Arrow . NOTE When multiple octave lines are selected, you can only move them according to the current rhythmic grid resolution. ● Click and drag the octave line to the right/left. RESULT The octave lines are moved to new rhythmic positions.
Octave lines Positions of octave lines 2. Move the octave lines or handles in any of the following ways: ● To move octave lines and handles to the right, press Alt/Opt-Right Arrow . ● To move octave lines and handles to the left, press Alt/Opt-Left Arrow . ● To move octave lines and start handles upwards, press Alt/Opt-Up Arrow . ● To move octave lines and start handles downwards, press Alt/Opt-Down Arrow .
Octave lines Positions of octave lines PROCEDURE 1. Select the octave lines whose numeral alignment relative to notes you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate L alignment in the Octave Lines group. 3. Select one of the following options from the menu: ● Left ● Center ● Right RESULT The alignment of the numerals of the selected octave lines is changed.
Octave lines Deleting octave lines Deleting octave lines You can delete octave lines without deleting notes and other items. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the octave lines you want to delete. 2. Press Backspace or Delete . RESULT The selected octave lines are deleted. Any notes to which the deleted octave lines previously applied are shown at either concert pitch or transposed pitch, depending on your current setting for the layout.
Octave lines Octave lines in Engrave mode Lengthening/Shortening octave line hooks You can change the length of individual octave line hooks, independently of your project-wide setting. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE ● Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1.
Octave lines Tucking index properties Tucking index properties The tucking index of notations determines their position relative to other notations in the vertical stacking order when multiple notations exist at the same rhythmic positions. In most published music, the order in which items appear relative to each other is consistent. Dorico Pro uses established conventions to determine the position and placement of notations automatically.
Octave lines Tucking index properties RESULT The placement of the selected octave lines in the vertical stacking order is changed. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. RELATED LINKS Engrave toolbox on page 465 Changing the property scope on page 158 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 462 852 Dorico Pro 3.5.
Cues Cues are passages of music shown in instrumental parts that are played by a different player, usually to help orientate players before entries or solos following a significant passage of rests. Cues can also be used to assist with co-ordination or tuning between players, or to indicate material that the player might be asked to double. In Dorico Pro, you can input correctly formatted cues quickly using the cues popover.
Cues General placement and notation conventions for cues General placement and notation conventions for cues Cues are usually notated using notes of a smaller size than normal notes, with the name of the cued instrument indicated at the start of the passage. It is generally accepted that full-sized rests are shown above/below cues to reinforce that the player reading the cue does not play these notes. Cues might exclude some notations that are present in the source instrument.
Cues Rhythmic cues group could be misleading as the destination instrument might think this indicates a distinctive melody. You can then change the cue label to include information about the instruments playing the rhythm in the cue. By default, cues from unpitched percussion source instruments are input as rhythmic cues. If you want to save vertical space, you can change them to cues from unpitched percussion source instruments. This positions them on the middle line of the staff by default.
Cues Rhythmic cues RELATED LINKS Inputting cues on page 356 Engrave toolbox on page 465 Changing the distance between rhythmic cues and the staff You can change the distance between individual rhythmic cues and the staff, independently of your project-wide setting. PREREQUISITE If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the labels of the rhythmic cues whose distance from the staff you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode.
Cues Hiding/Showing cues in layouts 2. In the Properties panel, activate Unpitched notes pos. in the Cues group. 3. Change the value in the value field. RESULT The staff position of the selected cues is changed according to the new value. For example, 0 is the middle line of the staff, 4 is the top line of the staff, and -4 is the bottom line of the staff.
Cues Changing the octave of cues NOTE ● You can hide individual cues in layouts where cues are shown, but you cannot show individual cues in layouts where cues are hidden. ● You can hide/show cue signposts by choosing View > Signposts > Cues. Cue signposts are shown when a tick appears beside Cues in the menu, and hidden when no tick appears. RELATED LINKS Signposts on page 377 Hiding/Showing cues individually You can hide/show individual cues in layouts in which cues are shown.
Cues Hiding/Showing octave transpositions in cue labels PROCEDURE 1. Select the labels of the cues whose octave you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Octave shift in the Cues group. 3. Change the value in the value field. RESULT The octave of the selected cues is changed. For example, 1 shifts cues up one octave, and -1 shifts cues down one octave.
Cues Moving cues TIP You can show/hide octave transpositions in all cue labels project-wide on the Cues page in Engrave > Engraving Options. RELATED LINKS Changing the information included in cue labels project-wide on page 863 Engrave toolbox on page 465 Changing the property scope on page 158 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 462 Moving cues You can move cues to new rhythmic positions after they have been input.
Cues Lengthening/Shortening cues Lengthening/Shortening cues You can change the length of cues after they have been input. This changes the material shown in cues to reflect the material at the corresponding rhythmic positions in the source instrument. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the labels of the cues you want to lengthen/shorten. NOTE When using the mouse, you can only lengthen/shorten one cue at a time. 2.
Cues Cue contents 2. Press Backspace or Delete . RESULT The selected cues are deleted from all the layouts containing the affected instruments. For example, deleting a cue in a piano part also deletes the cue from the piano staff in corresponding full score layouts.
Cues Cue labels Changing note spacing from rhythmic positions on page 564 Cue labels Cue labels usually indicate the source instrument from which the music is taken, but can also include other information, such as the transposition interval for transposing instruments. This information can help players identify both where the sound is coming from in the ensemble and the type of sound to listen for.
Cues Cue labels TIP You can also edit cue labels individually. For example, if two instruments are playing in unison, you can edit the cue label that shows the name of one of the instruments to include both instrument names. Editing cue label text You can override the text shown in cue labels individually. For example, if two instruments are playing in unison, you can change the cue label that shows the name of one of the instruments to include both instrument names.
Cues Notations in cues ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, select the cue labels you want to move. 2. Move the cue labels in any of the following ways: ● Press Alt/Opt-Right Arrow to move them to the right. ● Press Alt/Opt-Left Arrow to move them to the left. ● Press Alt/Opt-Up Arrow to move them upwards. ● Press Alt/Opt-Down Arrow to move them downwards.
Cues Notations in cues You can also include dynamics and text in cues, but these are not included by default as this information is not usually required to help identify the cued material. NOTE Playing techniques that only indicate important information for the source instrument, such as bowing marks for string players, are not included in cues. To be included in cues, playing techniques must exist within the range of the cued material.
Cues Stem direction in cues Stem direction in cues Notes in cues normally have the same stem direction, as cues usually highlight lines containing only one voice. Cues are shown by default with bar rests alongside them to indicate that the player reading the cue does not play those notes. If cues contain music in multiple voices, the original stem directions of the source music are used. For single-voice cues, Dorico Pro determines the default stem direction depending on the pitches in the cue.
Cues Ties in cues PROCEDURE 1. Select the labels or signposts of the cues whose stem direction you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Voice direction in the Cues group. 3. Choose one of the following options: ● Force stems up ● Force stems down RESULT The stem direction of all notes in the selected cues is changed. Deactivating Voice direction returns the selected cues back to their default stem direction.
Cues Rests in cues RELATED LINKS Moving rests vertically on page 1323 Hiding/Showing padding rests in cues You can hide/show padding rests before/after individual cues. Padding rests fill up bars when cues start/end partway through bars, so that the full duration of each bar is clear. PREREQUISITE If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the labels/signposts of the cues whose padding rests you want to hide/show.
Cues Clef changes in cues RESULT Bar rests alongside cues are hidden/shown in all layouts in the selected flows in your project. Clef changes in cues If the music for the source instrument is in a different clef from the destination instrument, Dorico Pro automatically inputs a clef change at the start of cues to match the clef used by the source instrument, and a restorative clef change at the end of cues to match the original clef used by the destination instrument.
Cues Viewing options for cues Changing the clef shown in cues You can change the clef shown in individual cues, independently of your project-wide settings. You can show different clefs for the same cue in each layout in which it appears. For example, you can show a cue with a treble clef in a full score layout but with a bass F clef in the corresponding part layout. PREREQUISITE If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1.
Cues Viewing options for cues RELATED LINKS Signposts on page 377 Hiding/Showing cue note colors on page 872 Hiding/Showing cue highlights You can hide/show highlights on bars where cues exist, which can help you get an overview of where you have already added cues and which instruments are used as the source of cues.
Cues Viewing options for cues RESULT Material in cues appears gray when a tick appears beside Cues in the menu, and black when no tick appears. EXAMPLE Cue note colors shown 873 Dorico Pro 3.5.
Dynamics Dynamics indicate the loudness of the music, and can be combined with other instructions to give the performer a detailed understanding of how to perform the music, while also leaving room for interpretation. Dynamics can indicate an immediate change in volume or a gradual change over a specified duration. By default, they are placed below the staff for instruments and above the staff for voices.
Dynamics Project-wide engraving options for dynamics In Dorico Pro, a hairpin can be shown as messa di voce, which shows a pair of hairpins. In some cases, this is easier than having separate lines for each half of the pair. Force/Intensity of attack These dynamics, such as and , indicate that a note has a stronger attack than is usually expected for the dynamic, similar to an accent articulation. Combined dynamics Combined dynamics, such as or –, specify a sudden change of dynamic.
Dynamics Positions of dynamics In general, dynamics are not placed within the staff, as hairpins in particular become very hard to read. They are also not usually placed within tuplet brackets. Dynamics are placed outside of notations such as slurs, which must be kept close to noteheads, but inside pedal lines, which can be placed further from noteheads and still be clearly understood. You can move dynamics to different rhythmic positions in Write mode.
Dynamics Positions of dynamics RELATED LINKS Erasing the background of dynamics on page 882 Engrave toolbox on page 465 Changing the property scope on page 158 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 462 Changing the alignment of dynamics relative to noteheads Immediate dynamics, such as and , are usually horizontally aligned with the optical center of noteheads.
Dynamics Positions of dynamics NOTE When using the mouse, you can only move one dynamic rhythmically at a time. 2. Move the dynamics in any of the following ways: ● To move a single dynamic to the next notehead on the staff, press Alt/OptRight Arrow . ● To move a single dynamic to the previous notehead on the staff, press Alt/OptLeft Arrow . ● To move them to the right according to the current rhythmic grid resolution, press Ctrl/ Cmd-Alt/Opt-Right Arrow .
Dynamics Positions of dynamics TIP You can show handles on all items, not just selected items, by choosing Engrave > Show Handles > Always. This can make it easier to select individual handles on multiple items. 2. Move the dynamics or handles in any of the following ways: ● Press Alt/Opt-Right Arrow to move them to the right. ● Press Alt/Opt-Left Arrow to move them to the left. ● Press Alt/Opt-Up Arrow to move them upwards. ● Press Alt/Opt-Down Arrow to move them downwards.
Dynamics Positions of dynamics require parts of different groups of dynamics to be aligned. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE ● Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, select the dynamics you want to align. 2. Choose Edit > Dynamics > Align Dynamics. You can also choose this option from the context menu.
Dynamics Showing dynamics in parentheses You can allow/disallow hairpins across barlines if the hairpin ends on the first note in the next bar. Disallowing hairpins across barlines ensures hairpins appear the same length on all staves. You can also change the minimum distance before hairpins are allowed to extend beyond barlines.
Dynamics Erasing the background of dynamics ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1. Select the dynamics you want to appear parenthesized. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Parenthesized in the Dynamics group. RESULT Each of the selected dynamics is shown in parentheses individually. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Dynamics Erasing the background of dynamics AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can change the padding between dynamics and each edge of their erased areas.
Dynamics Changing dynamic levels Changing dynamic levels You can change the levels of dynamics without reopening the dynamics popover and for multiple different dynamics simultaneously, for example, if you want to increase the dynamic level of all dynamics in a phrase. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the dynamics whose dynamic level you want to change. 2. Change the dynamic level in one of the following ways: ● To increase the dynamic level, choose Edit > Dynamics > Increase Dynamic Intensity.
Dynamics Hiding/Showing combined dynamic separators RESULT The selected immediate dynamics are hidden when Hide intensity marking is activated, and shown when it is deactivated. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. If no other dynamic exists at their rhythmic position, they are indicated by signposts. However, signposts are not printed by default.
Dynamics Changing the appearance of sforzando/rinforzando dynamics TIP You can change the default separator for combined dynamics and whether separators are shown for all combined dynamics or only mezzo combined dynamics project-wide on the Dynamics page in Engrave > Engraving Options.
Dynamics Copying dynamics Copying dynamics You can copy dynamics to other rhythmic positions after they have been input. You can select dynamics on a single staff to copy to another single staff, or you can select dynamics across multiple staves to copy across the same number of staves. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the dynamics you want to copy. TIP If you want to copy many dynamics or, for example, just gradual dynamics, you can use a filter. 2. Press Ctrl/Cmd-C to copy the dynamics. 3.
Dynamics Voice-specific dynamics NOTE Deleting dynamics that are linked to other staves can cause the selected dynamics to be deleted from all linked staves as well. If you do not select and delete all dynamics in the group, the selected dynamics are also deleted from all linked staves. However, if you select and delete the whole group of dynamics from a single staff, those dynamics are not deleted from other staves.
Dynamics Niente hairpins TIP You can turn existing hairpins into niente hairpins by selecting them and clicking niente in the Gradual Dynamics section of the Dynamics panel, or by activating Niente in the Dynamics group of the Properties panel.
Dynamics Dynamic modifiers EXAMPLE A niente shown as Circle on hairpin A niente shown as Text RELATED LINKS Project-wide engraving options for dynamics on page 875 Engrave toolbox on page 465 Changing the property scope on page 158 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 462 Dynamic modifiers Modifiers add further detail to dynamics than simply their volume level, and can help guide how a player performs a note or phrase. Modifiers include poco a poco, molto and subito.
Dynamics Dynamic modifiers 2. In the Properties panel, activate the following properties, individually or together, in the Dynamics group: ● To add modifiers before dynamics, activate Prefix. ● To add modifiers after dynamics, activate Suffix. 3. Enter the text you want to add into the corresponding value field. 4. Press Return . RESULT The text you entered is added to the selected dynamics as a modifier.
Dynamics Dynamic modifiers ● 4. Activate Subito position and choose one of the following options: ● Left ● Right RESULT The appearance and/or position of the selected subito modifiers is changed. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. TIP You can change the default appearance of subito modifiers and their position relative to dynamics on the Dynamics page in Engrave > Engraving Options.
Dynamics Gradual dynamics ● You can change the erasure padding of modifiers centered inside hairpins, both individually and by changing your default settings.
Dynamics Gradual dynamics You can use these handles to change the angle of hairpins.
Dynamics Gradual dynamics EXAMPLE Original dynamic phrase Lengthened dynamic phrase RELATED LINKS Groups of dynamics on page 903 Positions of dynamics on page 875 Moving dynamics rhythmically on page 877 Ungrouping dynamics and removing dynamics from groups on page 904 Changing the appearance of gradual dynamics You can change the appearance of individual gradual dynamics, for example, to change a crescendo hairpin to a messa di voce pair of hairpins with two directions or to show a particularly long c
Dynamics Gradual dynamics RESULT The appearance of the selected gradual dynamics is changed. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. TIP You can change the default appearance of all gradual dynamics project-wide on the Dynamics page in Engrave > Engraving Options. EXAMPLE Hairpin cresc./dim. cresc….
Dynamics Gradual dynamics EXAMPLE Hairpin not shown as continuation Hairpin shown as continuation RELATED LINKS Project-wide engraving options for dynamics on page 875 Grouping dynamics together on page 904 Engrave toolbox on page 465 Changing the property scope on page 158 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 462 Changing the angle of hairpins By default, hairpins are horizontal and are automatically adjusted to avoid collisions with other objects, such as noteheads and slur
Dynamics Gradual dynamics TIP If you want to move handles by larger increments, you can press Ctrl/Cmd as well as the standard key command, for example, Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-Up Arrow . ● Click and drag them upwards/downwards. RESULT The angle of the selected hairpins is changed. Each end can be moved independently of the other. This also affects all hairpins linked to the selected hairpins in the current layout.
Dynamics Gradual dynamics ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, select one of the outer handles of the hairpins whose aperture you want to change. TIP 2. ● The hairpins you select do not have to be the same direction, or on the same staff. ● You can show handles on all items, not just selected items, by choosing Engrave > Show Handles > Always. This can make it easier to select individual handles on multiple items.
Dynamics Gradual dynamics Hiding/Showing flared ends on hairpins Flared ends are usually shown at the end of crescendo hairpins and indicate a sudden burst in volume at the end of the crescendo. You can hide/show flared ends on any hairpin. NOTE You can only show flared ends on hairpins with solid lines. PREREQUISITE If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the hairpins on which you want to hide/show flared ends.
Dynamics Gradual dynamics RESULT The size of the flared ends on the selected hairpins is changed. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. ● Increasing the W value makes the selected flared ends wider by starting their angle earlier in the hairpin, decreasing the value makes the selected flared ends narrower. ● Increasing the H value makes the selected flared ends taller, decreasing the value makes them shorter.
Dynamics Gradual dynamics AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can show poco a poco text centered inside hairpins. RELATED LINKS Dynamic modifiers on page 890 Showing modifiers centered inside hairpins on page 892 Engrave toolbox on page 465 Gradual dynamic spacing Dorico Pro ensures that hairpins can always be clearly distinguished by giving hairpins a minimum default length. However, this can affect note spacing. The default minimum hairpin length is three spaces.
Dynamics Groups of dynamics Note spacing on page 562 Adjusting note spacing at individual rhythmic positions on page 567 Gradual dynamics truncated by immediate dynamics A hairpin is automatically truncated if an immediate dynamic is positioned within its range, either before or after the hairpin is input. The hairpin remains tied to its originally designated rhythmic positions, even if graphically it appears shorter.
Dynamics Groups of dynamics NOTE ● Groups of dynamics apply project-wide, meaning you cannot have dynamics grouped one way in some layouts but differently in other layouts. However, you can graphically align selected dynamics independently of their groups. ● As well as horizontal groups of dynamics, you can also link groups of dynamics vertically if you want the same dynamics to appear on multiple staves.
Dynamics Linked dynamics ● To ungroup all dynamics in the selected groups, choose Edit > Dynamics > Ungroup Dynamics. ● To remove only the selected dynamics from their groups, choose Edit > Dynamics > Remove from Group. TIP You can also choose these options from the context menu. Linked dynamics Identical dynamics at the same rhythmic position on multiple staves can be linked together. This happens automatically when you copy and paste dynamics between staves.
Dynamics Linked dynamics NOTE ● If you delete only some dynamics from a group that is linked to other staves, those dynamics are also deleted from the linked staves. If you delete a whole dynamic group from one staff, this does not affect linked dynamics on other staves. ● As well as vertically linked dynamics, you can also group dynamics horizontally. This automatically aligns the dynamics in a row and allows them to be moved and edited as a group.
Dynamics Dynamics font styles RELATED LINKS Disabling automatic linking of dynamics and slurs when pasting on page 370 Dynamics font styles You can change different aspects of the fonts used for dynamics in the Edit Font Styles dialog. There are different font styles for different types of dynamics. The following fonts affect the appearance of dynamics: ● Dynamic Music Text Font: Used for dynamic glyphs, such as and . Must be SMuFLcompliant.
Dynamics Playback Options for dynamics Playback Options for dynamics You can change settings for how dynamics are interpreted in playback by making adjustments to the scale of the graphical curve on the Dynamics page in Play > Playback Options. Dynamic Curve The graph at the top of the Dynamics page in Playback Options maps a continuous curve. This curve determines how the volume of dynamics increases across the range to .
Dynamics Playback Options for dynamics Sustaining and non-sustaining instruments The volume settings for sustaining instruments and non-sustaining instruments vary in terms of their control of gradual dynamics. Sustaining instruments Sustaining instruments include string, wind, and brass instruments, because they can hold a note while being in control of its volume throughout. Dorico Pro applies gradual dynamics to these instruments in playback.
Figured bass Figured bass is a shorthand that uses figures to specify the harmony above the notated bass notes. It is particularly common in Baroque and early Classical music and in the parts of accompanying instruments, such as harpsichords and viols. Figured bass informs performers about the intended harmony but allows room for interpretation, such as improvised arpeggiated phrases using notes from the chord.
Figured bass Project-wide engraving options for figured bass Changing the staff-relative placement of figured bass on page 916 Appearance of figured bass on page 920 Changing the font used for figured bass project-wide on page 920 Project-wide engraving options for figured bass You can find options for the project-wide appearance and position of figured bass on the Figured Bass page in Engrave > Engraving Options.
Figured bass Hiding/Showing figured bass in layouts By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog. You can select other layouts by using the selection options in the action bar, Shift -clicking adjacent layouts, and Ctrl/Cmd -clicking individual layouts. 3. Click Players in the category list. 4. In the Figured Bass section, activate/deactivate each player above/below which you want to show figured bass. 5. Click Apply, then Close.
Figured bass Showing figured bass on rests ● You can assign a key command for Hide/Show Item on the Key Commands page in Preferences, which applies to chord symbols, playing techniques, figured bass, text objects, and time signatures.
Figured bass Lengthening/Shortening figured bass figures PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the figured bass figures you want to lengthen/shorten. NOTE When using the mouse, you can only lengthen/shorten one figured bass figure at a time and it must have duration already. When using the keyboard, you can lengthen/shorten multiple figures, but they must all have duration already and this only affects their overall duration, not their suspension duration. 2.
Figured bass Hiding/Showing figured bass suspension hold lines Hiding/Showing figured bass suspension hold lines You can hide/show hold lines between the figures at the start and end of figured bass suspensions individually, independently of your project-wide settings. PREREQUISITE If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the figured bass suspensions whose hold lines you want to hide/show. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2.
Figured bass Positions of figured bass You can move individual figured bass figures to different rhythmic positions in Write mode. They are positioned by default according to your settings in Engraving Options. This includes Dorico Pro’s kerning, which applies across whole systems to ensure all figures and alterations are legible. You can move figures and hold lines graphically in Engrave mode, but this does not change the rhythmic positions to which they apply.
Figured bass Positions of figured bass EXAMPLE Figured bass below the staff Figured bass above the staff RELATED LINKS Changing the property scope on page 158 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 462 Moving figured bass figures rhythmically You can move figured bass figures to new rhythmic positions after they have been input. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the figured bass figures you want to move.
Figured bass Positions of figured bass of each other, meaning you can lengthen/shorten hold lines graphically. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. Handles on a hold line in Engrave mode NOTE If you want to move handles at the start/end of figured bass hold lines because you want to change their length, we recommend that you lengthen/shorten them rhythmically first before refining their graphical length.
Figured bass Positions of figured bass Moving figures with hold lines moves them both together. Moving hold lines or hold line handles moves the hold lines independently of the figure. Dorico Pro automatically lengthens hold lines between suspensions and resolutions when you move resolution figures. TIP Multiple different properties in the Figured Bass group of the Properties panel are activated automatically when you move the corresponding figure, hold line, or hold line handle.
Figured bass Appearance of figured bass Appearance of figured bass The appearance of individual figures is determined either by your current engraving options or your popover entry, depending on the figured bass input setting when you input them.
Figured bass Appearance of figured bass 5. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The font style used for figured bass project-wide is changed. TIP ● You can edit different aspects of the font styles used for figured bass in the Edit Font Styles dialog. Bold figured bass figures use Figured Bass Font. Plain figured bass figures use Figured Bass Text Font. ● You can edit the appearance of individual bold figures in the Edit Music Symbol dialog.
Figured bass Appearance of figured bass Hiding/Showing cautionary figured bass alterations You can hide/show cautionary alterations and cautionary accidentals on figured bass projectwide in either just the same bar as the alteration or in the same and following bars, for example, to avoid ambiguity. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-E to open Engraving Options. 2. Click Figured Bass in the category list. 3. In the Accidentals section, choose one of the following options for Cautionary alterations: 4.
Figured bass Appearance of figured bass EXAMPLE Figure with compound intervals Figure with simplified compound intervals RELATED LINKS Engrave toolbox on page 465 Fixing the current appearance of figured bass You can fix the current appearance of individual figured bass figures, for example, if you input them with the input setting Follow Engraving Options but want to keep their current appearance, regardless of future changes you make to figured bass engraving options.
Figured bass Appearance of figured bass RESULT The selected figured bass figures are reset to follow your current settings on the Figured Bass page in Engrave > Engraving Options. This can affect their appearance and suspension duration. TIP You can assign a key command for Reset Figured Bass on the Key Commands page in Preferences.
Fingering Fingerings can be added to music to recommend which fingers players should use for notes. This can be useful for music aimed at players learning the instrument and for difficult musical passages where certain fingering patterns make the notes much easier to play. Fingerings are often used in keyboard music, as players can use all ten fingers to play notes, and in guitar music, where fingerings are often used alongside fret positions.
Fingering General placement conventions for fingering General placement conventions for fingering Fingerings are placed as close as possible to the notes to which they apply, so the performer can read them easily and clearly. In music for grand staff instruments, such as the piano and harp, it is accepted to place fingerings for the right hand above the top staff, and fingerings for the left hand below the bottom staff.
Fingering Changing fingerings to substitution fingerings Changing fingerings to substitution fingerings Substitution fingerings indicate where players should change the finger used for the note. You can change existing fingerings to substitution fingerings. PREREQUISITE If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the fingerings you want to change to substitution fingerings. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2.
Fingering Changing existing fingerings RESULT The rhythmic position of the substitution fingering is changed. Dorico Pro automatically arranges deferred substitutions so they are ordered appropriately alongside any fingerings that coincide with the substitution. NOTE You can only change the position of single substitution fingerings when dragging their handles with the mouse.
Fingering Moving fingerings graphically Moving fingerings graphically You can move fingerings graphically, independently of the noteheads to which they apply. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. NOTE You cannot move fingerings to different rhythmic positions as they are properties of notes.
Fingering Moving fingerings graphically Resetting the positions of fingerings You can reset the positions of individual fingerings whose graphical positions you have moved. PREREQUISITE Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, select the fingerings whose positions you want to reset. 2. Reset their positions in any of the following ways: ● Choose Edit > Reset Position. ● In the Properties panel, deactivate Offset in the Fingering and Positions group.
Fingering Moving fingerings graphically ● You can change the staff-relative placement of all fingerings project-wide to follow voice directions on the Fingering page in Engrave > Engraving Options. This can be useful in complex contrapuntal music where fingering may not be clear if it is only placed above the top staff and below the bottom staff.
Fingering Changing the size of fingerings Changing the position of individual fingerings relative to slurs, octave lines, and tuplet brackets By default, fingerings are positioned inside the arcs of slurs, but outside the start/end of slurs. You can change the position of fingerings relative to individual slurs, independently of your project-wide settings. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains.
Fingering Showing enclosures/underlines on fingerings PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, select the fingerings whose size you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Scale in the Fingering and Positions group. 3. Change the value in the value field. 4. Press Return . RESULT The scale size of the selected fingerings is changed. For example, changing the value to 50 scales the selected fingerings to half their normal size.
Fingering Hiding/Showing fingering TIP You can find options that determine the default design of all fingering decorations project-wide, such as their line thickness, by clicking Advanced Options in the Design section of the Fingering page in Engrave > Engraving Options.
Fingering Deleting fingerings Deleting fingerings You can remove fingerings from notes after you have input them. However, because fingerings are properties of notes rather than separate items in Dorico Pro, you cannot select and delete them as you would for other items. PREREQUISITE If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes from which you want to remove fingerings. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2.
Fingering Fingering font styles NOTE Changes made to font styles apply to the entire project, including part layouts.
Fingering Fingering font styles NOTE You must choose a SMuFL-compliant font for the Fingering Font and Fingering Horn Branch Accidental Font font styles. 3. Activate the following options, individually or together, to change the corresponding aspect of the font: ● Font family ● Size ● Style ● Underlined 4. Optional: Repeat steps 2 and 3 for any other font style you want to edit. 5. Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog.
Fingering Cautionary fingerings Cautionary fingerings Cautionary fingerings remind players that fingerings specified at previous rhythmic positions continue to apply to notes that are still sounding. Dorico Pro automatically shows cautionary fingerings when you add other fingerings at rhythmic positions where notes with existing fingerings are still sounding. By default, cautionary fingerings are shown enclosed in parentheses.
Fingering Fingerings for fretted instruments ● Suppress RESULT The appearance of cautionary fingerings on the selected notes is changed. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. TIP You can change the default appearance of all cautionary fingerings project-wide in the Alternative, Editorial and Cautionary section of the Fingering page in Engrave > Engraving Options.
Fingering Fingerings for fretted instruments By default, Dorico Pro shows “p” for right-hand thumb fingerings and “e” for right-hand fingerings for the pinky finger, but there are different conventions for these letters. You can change these default settings for all fingerings project-wide. NOTE In Dorico Pro, we use “pinky” to refer to the smallest finger, but it can also be called “little” or “fifth digit”.
Fingering Fingerings for fretted instruments PROCEDURE 1. Select all the notes for which you want to hide/show brackets for right-hand fingerings. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Vertical position in the Plucked Fingering group. 3. Select one of the following options from the menu: ● To hide brackets and show a separate fingering for each selected note, select Above staff or Below staff.
Fingering Fingerings for fretted instruments PREREQUISITE ● You have input the fingerings whose position you want to change. ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1. Select the left-hand fingerings whose position you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2.
Fingering Fingerings for fretted instruments erased backgrounds or not. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. NOTE These steps only apply to left-hand fingerings belonging to fretted instruments. PREREQUISITE ● Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, select the left-hand fingerings whose background erasure you want to change. 2.
Fingering Fingerings for fretted instruments Adding fingerings to arpeggio signs You can add fingerings to arpeggio signs to indicate which right-hand finger should be used to strum a chord. By default, fingerings are placed at the bottom of arpeggio signs. NOTE These steps only apply to arpeggio signs belonging to fretted instruments. PREREQUISITE ● You have input the arpeggio signs to which you want to add fingerings. ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox.
Fingering Fingerings for fretted instruments Allowing/Disallowing arpeggio sign fingerings in the staff By default, arpeggio sign fingerings are always shown outside the staff. You can choose to allow them to be shown in the staff when their arpeggio signs end inside the staff. NOTE These steps only apply to arpeggio signs belonging to fretted instruments. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-E to open Engraving Options. 2. Click Fingering in the category list. 3.
Fingering Fingering slides Fingering slides Fingering slides indicate that the performer should slide their finger up/down the neck of the instrument. They are notated as an angled line between fingerings. The note at the start of a fingering slide is known as a source note. The note at the end of a fingering slide is known as the destination note.
Fingering Fingering slides ● You have specified the same string for the notes at the start and end of the slides. ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the destination notes before which you want to hide/show fingering slides. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate/deactivate Slide in in the Fingering and Positions group.
Fingering Fingering slides ● Fingering slides shown only before the destination note have a fixed length, and so do not have handles at the start/end. ● You cannot move whole fingering slides that join notes. You can only move their handles. PREREQUISITE ● Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1.
Fingering Fingering slides RELATED LINKS Engrave toolbox on page 465 Changing the property scope on page 158 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 462 Changing the length of fingering slides You can change the length of individual fingering slides and show them either joining the source and destination fingerings or with a fixed length before the destination note, independently of your project-wide maximum distance threshold.
Fingering Fingerings for valved brass instruments RELATED LINKS Engrave toolbox on page 465 Changing the property scope on page 158 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 462 Fingerings for valved brass instruments For instruments like trumpet and horn, fingering is used to show which valves must be depressed to produce a specific note. You can enter fingerings for valved brass instruments into the fingerings popover as numbers without any separation.
Fingering Hiding/Showing string fingering shift indicators ● Thumb trigger RESULT Branch indicators are added to the selected fingerings. TIP You can change the appearance of branch indicators in the Brass section of the Fingering page in Engrave > Engraving Options.
Fingering Hiding/Showing string fingering shift indicators NOTE These steps do not apply to fingerings belonging to fretted instruments, which can show fingering slides instead. PREREQUISITE ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes or fingerings on string instrument staves from which you want to indicate a fingering shift.
Fingering Fingerings imported from MusicXML files 2. In the Properties panel, activate Shift direction in the Fingering and Positions group. 3. Choose one of the following options: ● Up ● Down RESULT The selected shift indicators are angled up/down. NOTE You can also affect the direction of string shift indicators by specifying the strings on which notes are played.
String indicators String indicators are commonly used in guitar music to tell performers the string on which they should play a note, particularly for pitches that are possible on multiple strings. String indicators show the string number inside a circle enclosure, optionally with a dashed line to indicate they apply to a range of notes. Open pitches commonly appear as a zero without an enclosure.
String indicators Project-wide engraving options for string indicators in the Edit Playing Techniques dialog also affects the appearance of string indicators inside the staff for stopped pitches. In Dorico Pro, string indicators inside the staff are considered properties of the corresponding notes. You can only select them independently of their corresponding notes in Engrave mode.
String indicators Changing the size of string indicators 4. ● Zero fingering ● String number as indicator ● Zero as indicator Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The appearance of all open string indicators inside the staff is changed project-wide. When open string indicators appear as Zero fingering, they use the fingering font style set for the project. This does not affect the appearance of string indicators outside the staff.
String indicators Lengthening/Shortening string indicators NOTE When using the mouse, you can only lengthen/shorten one string indicator at a time and it must have duration already. When using the keyboard, you can lengthen/shorten multiple string indicators, but they must all have duration already. 2. Lengthen/Shorten the string indicators in any of the following ways: ● To lengthen them by the current rhythmic grid resolution, press Shift-Alt/OptRight Arrow .
String indicators Deleting string indicators RELATED LINKS Moving string indicators graphically on page 960 Playing technique duration on page 1200 Playing technique continuation lines on page 1199 Hiding/Showing playing technique duration lines on page 1202 Changing the style of playing technique continuation lines on page 1203 Edit Playing Techniques dialog on page 1207 Input methods for playing techniques, pedal lines, string indicators, and harp pedal diagrams on page 310 Deleting string indicators You
String indicators Positions of string indicators right if left-hand fingerings are present. You can change the notehead-relative position of string indicators individually. You can move string indicators outside the staff to different rhythmic positions in Write mode. They are positioned by default according to your settings in Engraving Options. You can also change the staff-relative placement of string indicators outside the staff individually, in the same ways as for playing techniques.
String indicators Positions of string indicators You can undo this action, but any string indicators shortened/deleted in the process are only restored if you moved string indicators using the keyboard. RELATED LINKS Lengthening/Shortening string indicators on page 956 Moving string indicators graphically You can move string indicators graphically without changing the rhythmic positions or notes to which they apply.
String indicators Positions of string indicators TIP Offset in the String Indicators group of the Properties panel is activated automatically when you move string indicators inside the staff. ● Offset X moves string indicators inside the staff horizontally. ● Offset Y moves string indicators inside the staff vertically. The following properties in the Playing Techniques group of the Properties panel are activated automatically when you move the corresponding item: ● Offset moves string indicators.
String indicators Positions of string indicators TIP You can change the default notehead-relative positions of all string indicators inside the staff project-wide on the String Indicators page in Engrave > Engraving Options. The available options include automatically changing the notehead-relative position if left-hand fingerings are present.
Front matter Front matter in Dorico Pro is a broad term that covers all information included before the first bar of music in scores.
Front matter Adding dedications in master pages NOTE If you only enter information for individual flows in the Project Info dialog, that information does not automatically appear on the first page. You can change the tokens in the default master pages to refer to specific flows if required.
Front matter Adding player lists RESULT A dedication is shown above the title of all pages that use the selected master page format if a dedication is entered into the appropriate field in the Project Info dialog. RELATED LINKS Project Info dialog on page 92 Creating paragraph styles on page 545 Text editor options in Engrave mode on page 548 Adding player lists You can add the player list text token to any layout or master page.
Front matter Editing running headers in master pages Master page editor on page 488 Adding master pages on page 483 Editing running headers in master pages The Default Part master page set shows the part name at the top left of the first pages in flows, and shows the part name centered at the top of subsequent pages as a running header.
Grace notes Grace notes are notes without a fixed duration, which are intended to be played quickly. They are scaled-down versions of normal notes, and are commonly shown with a slash through their stem. Grace notes with slashed stems are known as acciaccaturas and are often played very fast. Grace notes without slashed stems are known as appoggiaturas and are often played slower than acciaccaturas.
Grace notes General placement conventions for grace notes General placement conventions for grace notes Grace notes function like normal notes in many ways, but there are some specific conventions about their stem direction, position relative to noteheads, and the placement of stem slashes. Grace notes appear stem up by default, except when there are multiple voices with grace notes in a single staff, in which case grace notes in the lower voices appear stem down.
Grace notes General placement conventions for grace notes Grace note placement in multiple-voice contexts According to accepted notation convention, grace notes appear stem up by default when there is only one voice on a staff, even if the notehead to which they are attached is stem down. However, when there are multiple voices on the staff, all notes in the upper voices appear stem up and all notes in the lower voices appear stem down, including all grace notes.
Grace notes Showing grace notes before/after barlines Showing grace notes before/after barlines By default, grace notes are positioned after barlines and directly before the notehead to which they apply, including for the first note in a bar. You can position individual grace notes before barlines, for example, so the first normal note in the bar is not pushed too far from the barline, or to indicate that grace notes are played before the beat.
Grace notes Grace note slashes You can set the precise measurements of each part of grace note stem slashes in the Grace Notes section of the Notes page in Engrave > Engraving Options. In this section, you can change the following: ● Thickness of grace note stem slashes ● Default length of grace note stem slashes ● Position of grace note stem slashes relative to the end of the stem Changing the type of grace notes You can change the type of individual grace notes after they have been input.
Grace notes Grace note slashes 3. ● Slash inset from stem tip ● Slash offset to right Change the values in the value fields. RESULT Increasing Slash inset from stem tip moves grace note slashes further from the tips of stems and closer to the noteheads. Decreasing the value moves them closer to the tips of stems and further from the noteheads. Increasing Slash offset to right moves grace note slashes to the right, decreasing the value moves them to the left.
Grace notes Grace note stems RESULT Increasing Slash length lengthens grace note slashes on both single grace notes and grace note beams, decreasing the value shortens grace note slashes. Increasing Slash protrusion from beam increases how far slashes extend beyond grace note beams, decreasing the value decreases how far slashes extend beyond grace note beams. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Grace notes Grace notes in playback RELATED LINKS Engraving Options dialog on page 476 Beaming on page 763 Beam groups on page 763 Grace notes in playback Slashed and unslashed grace notes are handled differently in playback. Slashed grace notes of any note duration, and unslashed grace notes a 16th note or shorter, play back before the beat with a single default sounding duration. Unslashed grace notes an eighth note or longer play back on the beat.
Holds and pauses Different notations are used to show where the established rhythmic flow of the music is interrupted, either with a moment of repose or a short silence, before continuing. The most subtle effect is produced by a tenuto mark, with more significant effects denoted with holds and pauses. The duration of the break in the music intended by the hold or pause does not need to be specified.
Holds and pauses Types of holds and pauses Fermata Description Short fermata (Henze) Indicates that a note is held a little bit longer than the rhythm indicates, as used by Hans Werner Henze. Fermata Indicates that a note is held for longer than the rhythm indicates. Long fermata Indicates that a note is held quite a lot longer than the rhythm indicates. Long fermata (Henze) Indicates that a note is held quite a lot longer than the rhythm indicates, as used by Hans Werner Henze.
Holds and pauses Project-wide engraving options for holds and pauses Types of caesuras There are different types of caesuras available in Dorico Pro. All caesuras indicate a break in sound, but different types are often needed for different styles of musical scores.
Holds and pauses Positions of holds and pauses Fermatas affect the overall tempo of the piece, so all players must be able to see where they occur. Therefore, fermatas are shown on all staves at the same rhythmic position, or the rhythmic position of the note, chord, or rest that corresponds with the end of the fermata, including over a bar rest if a staff has no notes in that bar.
Holds and pauses Positions of holds and pauses Changes to fermatas on single staves Changing the type of fermata or caesura on one staff automatically changes the type on all staves at that rhythmic position, as a pause at one particular rhythmic position can only be of one duration. However, if you override a particular fermata on one staff, for example, by changing it to a Britten curlew or a breath mark, changing the existing fermata on another staff does not change the marking on the overridden staff.
Holds and pauses Positions of holds and pauses NOTE Only one type of hold or pause can exist at each rhythmic position. If a hold or pause passes over another hold or pause as part of its move, the existing hold or pause is deleted. You can undo this action, but any holds and pauses deleted in the process are only restored if you moved the hold or pause using the keyboard.
Holds and pauses Positions of holds and pauses Changing the property scope on page 158 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 462 Changing the number of fermatas per staff You can change the maximum number of fermatas that appear on each staff at individual positions when there are multiple voices on a staff. PREREQUISITE If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1.
Holds and pauses Positions of holds and pauses RESULT The selected fermatas are positioned above the barline at the end of the bars they were in originally, appearing only above staves that are not joined by the barline. Depending on the instrumentation, this may mean they only appear at the top of the system. Deactivating Attach to barline returns the selected fermatas to their default positions. 982 Dorico Pro 3.5.
Key signatures Key signatures are the markings that show the current key of music by indicating which notes in the scale for that key are sharpened or flattened. They are shown at the start of each system on every applicable staff. Traditionally, accidentals are organized following the pattern of the circle of fifths, which is different for sharp keys and flat keys.
Key signatures Types of key signatures Clef Arrangement of sharps Arrangement of flats Treble Bass Alto Tenor NOTE For custom, non-standard key signatures, you can determine the order in which accidentals appear in the Edit Custom Key Signature dialog.
Key signatures Project-wide engraving options for key signatures Open key signature Although open, or atonal, key signatures appear the same as C major or A minor key signatures because none shows any accidentals, open key signatures behave differently. In an open key signature, the spelling of accidentals is based on the current direction of the music. If the music is rising, sharps are preferred, whereas if the music is falling, flats are preferred.
Key signatures Multiple simultaneous key signatures ● Instruments that do not usually have key signatures, such as timpani or horn, have a No key sig version in Dorico Pro which never show key signatures. You can select the appropriate instrument type from the instrument picker when adding or changing instruments. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the key signatures or signposts of key signatures you want to delete. 2. Press Backspace or Delete .
Key signatures Positions of key signatures appear at the start of every system, even if the key signature has not changed. They apply until the end of the flow or until the next key signature change, whichever comes first. The correct position for key signatures is between clefs and time signatures. If a key signature change occurs during a piece or movement, it should be placed immediately after a barline.
Key signatures Positions of key signatures ● Gap between accidentals in key signatures ● Gap between cancellation naturals RELATED LINKS Engraving Options dialog on page 476 Moving key signatures rhythmically You can move key signatures to new rhythmic positions after they have been input. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the key signatures you want to move. NOTE When using the mouse, you can only move one key signature rhythmically at a time. 2.
Key signatures Transposing key signatures alongside selections A smaller circular handle appears beside the key signature. 3. Press Tab to select the circular handle. 4. Move the handle in any of the following ways: ● Press Alt/Opt-Right Arrow to move it to the right. ● Press Alt/Opt-Left Arrow to move it to the left. NOTE ● If you want to move handles by larger increments, you can press Ctrl/Cmd as well as the standard key command, for example, Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-Left Arrow .
Key signatures Enharmonic equivalent key signatures 2. Choose Write > Transpose to open the Transpose dialog. 3. Adjust the parameters required for your transposition, such as interval and quality. TIP 4. ● We recommend using the Calculate interval section to determine your required settings, for example, if you want to transpose from G♭ major to G major. ● Different intervals have different possible qualities. For example, you can specify a major third but not a major octave.
Key signatures Cautionary key signatures G♯ major requires a double sharp leading note A♭ major, the enharmonic equivalent to G♯, does not require a double sharp leading note By default, Dorico Pro selects an enharmonic equivalent key signature if it has fewer accidentals. However, you can change this setting by deactivating Prefer enharmonic equivalent key signatures with fewer accidentals in the Transposition section of the Accidentals page in Write > Notation Options.
Key signatures Tonality systems Splitting flows on page 385 Formatting panel on page 466 Inserting system breaks on page 432 Tonality systems The term “tonality system” is used in Dorico Pro to encompass three crucial elements that together make up the concept of tonality. The three elements that make up tonality systems are: ● A number of equal divisions of the octave, or EDO. For example, standard Western scales with half-step (semitone) steps have 12-EDO. ● A set of accidentals.
Key signatures Tonality systems Edit Tonality System dialog on page 998 Changing the tonality system You can change the tonality system used in your project at key signature changes, including changing to a custom tonality system you have created. PREREQUISITE If you want to use a tonality system other than Equal temperament (12-EDO) or Equal temperament (24-EDO), you have created or imported a custom tonality system. PROCEDURE 1.
Key signatures Tonality systems 2. In the Tonality System section, click Import Tonality System macOS Finder. 3. Locate and select the tonality system file you want to import. 4. Click Open. to open the File Explorer/ RESULT The selected tonality system is imported. It becomes available in the current project only. TIP If you want to make tonality systems available in all future projects you open on your computer, you can save them as default in the Edit Tonality System dialog.
Key signatures Tonality systems RELATED LINKS Custom divisions of the octave on page 999 Custom accidentals on page 1000 Custom key signatures on page 1003 Key Signatures, Tonality Systems, and Accidentals panel on page 233 Creating custom tonality systems You can create custom tonality systems, which can have any number of octave divisions and contain as many custom accidentals and custom key signatures as required. Each project can contain multiple custom tonality systems. PROCEDURE 1.
Key signatures Tonality systems 10. Customize the arrangement of the key signature. 11. Click OK to save your changes and close the Edit Custom Key Signature dialog. 12. Optional: Repeat steps 9 to 11 for each custom key signature you want in your custom tonality system. 13. Optional: If you want your new custom tonality system to be available in all future projects you open on your computer, click Save As Default. 14. Click OK to save your changes and close the Edit Tonality System dialog.
Key signatures Tonality systems 6. Optional: If you created a new custom accidental, change the value in the Pitch delta value field to change the number of octave divisions by which it raises/lowers notes. NOTE 7. ● We do not recommend setting pitch deltas that are more than half of the total number of octave divisions. ● You cannot change the pitch delta when editing the default accidentals in the default 12-EDO and 24-EDO tonality systems. Customize the appearance of the accidental.
Key signatures Tonality systems For example, you can add accidentals to the key signature and then change the pitch and octave to which it applies. You can also select other clefs to see how they affect the arrangement of the key signature. 7. Click OK to save your changes and close the Edit Custom Key Signature dialog. 8. Optional: Repeat steps 4 to 7 for each custom key signature you want to create for the current tonality system. 9.
Key signatures Tonality systems Allows you to enter a name for a new tonality system, or edit the name of an existing custom tonality system you created. 2 Divisions Allows you to specify how many divisions of the octave you want assigned to each interval. 3 Accidentals Displays the accidentals currently available in the selected tonality system in a list, from lowest pitch delta at the top to highest pitch delta at the bottom.
Key signatures Tonality systems Although you can divide the octave into any number of divisions, the number of equal divisions in the octave must be divisible by 12 to be able to show a standard Western key signature in Dorico Pro. RELATED LINKS Creating custom tonality systems on page 995 Custom key signatures on page 1003 Custom accidentals Custom accidentals can contain traditional accidental glyphs but also other musical symbols, text, and graphics.
Key signatures Tonality systems 1 Name Allows you to enter a name for your accidental. 2 Pitch delta Allows you to set a value for how much the accidental raises/lowers the pitch of notes. For example, in 12-EDO, a pitch delta of 2 raises notes by two equal divisions of the octave. NOTE We do not recommend setting pitch deltas that are more than half of the total number of octave divisions. 3 Accidental component selector Allows you to choose components to add to your accidental.
Key signatures Tonality systems NOTE Although some components scale their height and width independently, others retain their aspect ratio, meaning only one value affects their overall size. ● Z order: Allows you to Bring Forward or Send Backward the selected component in relation to other components when they overlap. ● Color: Allows you to change the color of the selected component. The Attachments tab is only available if the accidental comprises at least two separate components.
Key signatures Tonality systems RELATED LINKS Edit Tonality System dialog on page 998 Creating/Editing custom accidentals on page 996 Custom key signatures Custom key signatures can comprise traditional accidentals in a different order, or custom accidentals you have designed in a specific order for your requirements. ● You can find all key signatures available in the current tonality system in the Custom Key Signatures section of the Edit Tonality System dialog.
Key signatures Tonality systems The Edit Custom Key Signature dialog contains the following sections: 1 Name Allows you to enter a name for your key signature. 2 Clef Shows how your key signature appears in treble clef, bass clef, alto clef, and tenor clef. You can edit your key signature in any of these clefs. 3 Root Allows you to select the base note of your key signature from the menu.
Key signatures Tonality systems Playback of custom tonality systems Dorico Pro can play back custom tonality systems with any number and distribution of octave divisions. Dorico Pro achieves full microtonal playback by calculating the appropriate pitch delta for every note, whether or not it is written with an accidental. Depending on the virtual instruments used for playback, Dorico Pro produces microtonal playback in different ways.
Lyrics In Dorico Pro, the term lyrics is used for all text that is sung by singers. To differentiate sung text from any other forms of text that often appear in musical scores, other forms of text are referred to as performance instructions, tempos, dynamics, and so on. Lyrics for a soprano duet with basso continuo accompaniment In Dorico Pro, lyrics were designed so that it is simple to make changes to existing lyrics without having to re-input new lyrics each time.
Lyrics Project-wide engraving options for lyrics The horizontal spacing of lyrics must be wide enough so that words or syllables do not overlap with the words or syllables on either side. For this reason, note spacing must sometimes be adjusted to accommodate lyrics. To reduce how severely the note spacing is changed to accommodate lyrics, which can distort the appearance of rhythms, Dorico Pro allows the alignment of some lyrics to be adjusted relative to their corresponding notes.
Lyrics Filters for lyrics Line 3 Selects only Line 3 lyrics and translation lyrics for Line 3 in the current selection, including Line 3 below the staff and Line 3 above the staff. Line 4 Selects only Line 4 lyrics and translation lyrics for Line 4 in the current selection, including Line 4 below the staff and Line 4 above the staff. Line 5 Selects only Line 5 lyrics and translation lyrics for Line 5 in the current selection, including Line 5 below the staff and Line 5 above the staff.
Lyrics Types of lyrics Types of lyrics Lyrics are divided into different lyric types in Dorico Pro. Lyric lines Lyric lines contain normal lyrics and can be shown with verse numbers. They can be both below and above the staff. Chorus lines Chorus lines contain lyrics in an italic font and are placed between lyric lines. For example, if there are two lyric lines, the chorus line appears between Line 1 and Line 2. Chorus lines do not have verse numbers.
Lyrics Types of syllables in lyrics ● Deactivating both properties changes the selected lyrics to normal lyrics. Their line number is indicated by the number in Line number in the Lyrics group of the Properties panel. NOTE If other chorus lines exist at the same position on the side of the staff where you want to change your current selection to chorus lines, the two lines collide. To avoid this, change the type of the whole lyric line, which automatically avoids collisions.
Lyrics Deleting lyric lines NOTE Changing the syllable type changes whether a hyphen is shown after the selected lyrics, not before them. Therefore, if you want to show a hyphen before lyrics, you must change the syllable type of the lyrics immediately preceding them. PREREQUISITE If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the lyrics whose syllable type you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2.
Lyrics Copying/Pasting lyrics Deleting lyrics individually You can delete individually selected lyrics without deleting other lyrics in the same lyric line. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the lyrics you want to delete. 2. Press Backspace or Delete . RESULT The selected lyrics are deleted.
Lyrics Lyric text editing The lyrics popover automatically advances to the next note in the selected voice according to the source text. For example, for syllables followed by hyphens in the source, the popover advances as if you had pressed - (hyphen), which automatically shows hyphens after those syllables. 7. 8.
Lyrics Lyric text editing 2. Press Return or Shift-L to open the lyrics popover. 3. Change the existing text in the lyrics popover. 4. Optional: If you want to change other existing lyrics, advance the popover in one of the following ways: ● To advance the popover to the next note if you entered a complete word, or the final syllable in a multi-syllabic word, press Space . Existing lyrics are automatically selected in the popover when you press Space .
Lyrics Positions of lyrics The Edit Lyrics dialog comprises the following: 1 Text editor Allows you to edit all the lyrics in the selected lyric line in the current flow, with hyphens and spaces as appropriate. For example, you can add a comma after the final syllable in a line for a poem setting or replace a hyphen with a space. NOTE You cannot add, delete, or change the duration/rhythmic position of lyrics, such as the number of notes to which each lyric applies.
Lyrics Positions of lyrics You can prevent Dorico Pro from considering lyrics in note spacing calculations using the Make space for lyrics option on the Note Spacing page in Setup > Layout Options and in the Note Spacing Change dialog; however, we recommend using this option with caution. You can change the default positions of lyrics project-wide on the Lyrics page in Engraving Options.
Lyrics Positions of lyrics If a subsequent system does not have a first line, but does have the second and third lines, then the second and third lines of lyrics are moved upwards. The second line of lyrics takes the place of the first line.
Lyrics Positions of lyrics ● Press Alt/Opt-Left Arrow to move them to the left. TIP If you want to move items by larger increments, you can press Ctrl/Cmd as well as the standard key command, for example, Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-Left Arrow . ● Click and drag them to the right/left. RESULT The selected lyrics are moved to the right/left. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Lyrics Positions of lyrics NOTE When using the mouse, you must only select handles at the start of each lyric line. 2. Move the selected lyric lines upwards/downwards in any of the following ways: ● Press Alt/Opt-Up Arrow to move them upwards. ● Press Alt/Opt-Down Arrow to move them downwards. TIP If you want to move handles by larger increments, you can press Ctrl/Cmd as well as the standard key command, for example, Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-Up Arrow . ● Click and drag the handles upwards/downwards.
Lyrics Positions of lyrics Removing lyric line vertical offsets You can remove changes you have made to the vertical offsets of individual lyric lines and reset them to their default positions. PREREQUISITE Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. 2. In Engrave mode, select one of the following: ● To remove offsets from specific lyric lines in specific systems, select any lyric in each lyric line and in each system.
Lyrics Lyric hyphens and lyric extender lines RESULT The alignment of the selected lyrics is changed. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Lyrics Lyric hyphens and lyric extender lines Moving lyric extender lines and hyphens You can move lyric extender lines and hyphens horizontally. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. NOTE You cannot move lyric extender lines or hyphens upwards/downwards, as their vertical position is determined by their lyric line number and your project-wide settings in Engrave > Engraving Options.
Lyrics Lyric hyphens and lyric extender lines Lengthening/Shortening lyric extender lines and hyphens You can lengthen/shorten individual lyric extender lines and lyric hyphens. Lengthening/ Shortening lyric hyphens increases/decreases the space in which lyric hyphens are shown. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. NOTE The start handles of lyric extender lines and hyphens are attached to the lyrics from which they extend.
Lyrics Lyric line numbers ● The following properties in the Lyrics group of the Properties panel are activated if you move the corresponding handle on lyric extender lines and hyphens: ● Line start X moves the start handles of lyric extender lines and hyphens horizontally. ● Line end X moves the end handles of lyric extender lines and hyphens horizontally. For example, if you move a whole lyric extender line to the right, both handles are moved so both properties are activated.
Lyrics Lyric line numbers TIP To identify which line you are working on, select a syllable in the line of lyrics and check the number in the Line number value field in the Lyrics group of the Properties panel. Alternatively, you can activate verse numbers on the Lyrics page in Engrave > Engraving Options. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select a lyric in the line whose lyric line type you want to change. The lyric line can be above or below the staff.
Lyrics Lyric line numbers PROCEDURE 1. Select the individual lyrics whose line number you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, change the value for Lyric number in the Lyrics group. RESULT The line number of the selected lyrics is changed to match the value in the value field. NOTE The position of the selected lyrics relative to other lyric lines might be changed.
Lyrics Verse numbers Changing the staff-relative placement of individual lyrics You can change the staff-relative placement of individual lyrics within lyric lines. PREREQUISITE If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the lyrics whose staff-relative placement you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2.
Lyrics Verse numbers 3. 4. In the Verse Numbers section, choose one of the following options for Verse numbers for each line of lyrics: ● Show verse numbers ● Do not show verse numbers Click Apply, then Close. RESULT Verse numbers are either shown or hidden project-wide. Changing the punctuation of verse numbers You can change how verse numbers are punctuated project-wide. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-E to open Engraving Options. 2. Click Lyrics in the category list. 3.
Lyrics Changing the font styles used for lyrics Changing the font styles used for lyrics You can change aspects of the fonts used for the available types of lyrics project-wide. PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, choose Engrave > Font Styles to open the Edit Font Styles dialog. 2. Select the font you want to change from the Font style menu: 3.
Lyrics East Asian elision slurs TIP If you want to show lyrics in an italic font because they are intended to be either chorus lyrics or translation lyrics, you can change their lyric type instead. If you want all normal lyric lines to appear in an italic font project-wide, you can change the font style of the Lyrics Font.
Lyrics East Asian elision slurs TIP You can choose to hide/show East Asian elision slurs on all applicable lyrics project-wide on the Lyrics page in Engrave > Engraving Options. RELATED LINKS Engrave toolbox on page 465 Changing the property scope on page 158 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 462 1031 Dorico Pro 3.5.
Notes Notes are shapes that are positioned on staves to indicate musical pitches. Notes are most commonly shown with oval-shaped, round noteheads that are either filled or void depending on their duration, but there are many different designs of noteheads that you can use. Depending on their duration, notes can have stems that help indicate their duration.
Notes Notehead sets ● A wider white notehead with one or two vertical strokes on either side, or a square white notehead, for double whole notes (breves) Pitch-dependent notehead sets contain noteheads that vary according to the pitch of notes rather than their duration. ● In pitched notehead sets, there are different noteheads for different pitches. For example, the Pitch Names notehead set shows the letter name and any applicable accidental of each note within its notehead.
Notes Notehead sets Notehead set design Notehead set name Large Circled Noteheads Circled Noteheads Slashed Noteheads (Bottom Left to Top Right) Slashed Noteheads (Top Left to Bottom Right) Cross noteheads Notehead set name Notehead set design Circle X Noteheads Large X and Diamond Noteheads Ornate X Noteheads Plus Noteheads With X Noteheads X Noteheads 1034 Dorico Pro 3.5.
Notes Notehead sets Notehead set design Notehead set name X and Circle X Noteheads X and Diamond Noteheads Triangular noteheads Notehead set name Notehead set design Large Arrow Down Noteheads Large Arrow Up Noteheads Triangle Down Noteheads Triangle Left Noteheads Triangle Right Noteheads Triangle Up Noteheads Diamond noteheads Notehead set design Notehead set name Diamond Noteheads 1035 Dorico Pro 3.5.
Notes Notehead sets Notehead set design Notehead set name Old-Style Diamond Noteheads White Diamond Noteheads Wide Diamond Noteheads Slash noteheads Notehead set name Notehead set design Muted Slash Noteheads Oversized Slash Noteheads Slash Noteheads Small Slash Noteheads Round and square noteheads Notehead set design Notehead set name Moon Noteheads Rectangular Noteheads 1036 Dorico Pro 3.5.
Notes Notehead sets Notehead set design Notehead set name Round White with Dot Noteheads RELATED LINKS Changing the notehead design of individual noteheads on page 1046 Hiding stems on page 1418 Creating custom notehead sets on page 1044 Creating custom noteheads on page 1045 Pitch-dependent notehead set designs Pitch-dependent notehead sets use different notehead designs or different notehead colors depending on the pitch of notes.
Notes Notehead sets Pitched noteheads Notehead set design Notehead set name Figurenotes© Noteheads Pitch Name Noteheads RELATED LINKS Notehead sets on page 1032 Changing the notehead design of individual noteheads on page 1046 Showing differently shaped noteheads for each scale degree project-wide on page 1048 Showing note names in noteheads project-wide on page 1048 Custom notehead sets You can create and edit custom noteheads and notehead sets, for example, to create noteheads with specific shapes tha
Notes Notehead sets The Edit Notehead Sets dialog contains the following sections and options: 1 Category menu Allows you to filter the list of notehead sets by selecting a category from the menu, such as Crosses or Diamonds. This corresponds to where notehead sets are located in the menu, for example, Edit > Notehead > Crosses > X Noteheads. 2 Notehead sets list Contains all the notehead sets in the project within the currently selected category.
Notes Notehead sets Displays the noteheads in the notehead set currently selected in the notehead set list, and contains the following options that apply to the notehead set: ● Name: Allows you to enter a new name or edit the existing name for the selected notehead set. ● Category: Allows you to select a category for the notehead set, such as Crosses. This corresponds to where notehead sets are located in the menu, for example, Edit > Notehead > Crosses > X Noteheads.
Notes Notehead sets according to your project-wide setting for Appearance of double whole note (breve) notehead on the Notes page in Engrave > Engraving Options. 6 ● Pitch: Specifies the note name and accidental for which the selected notehead is used (Pitched type noteheads only). ● Degree: Specifies the scale degree for which the selected notehead is used, using integer numbers from 1 to 7 (Scale Degree type noteheads only).
Notes Notehead sets The Edit Notehead dialog contains the following sections and options: 1 Name Contains the saved name for predefined noteheads, or an automatically generated name for new noteheads. You cannot change this name. 2 Component selector Allows you to choose components to add to the notehead. You can add different types of components by clicking the respective tab titles. ● Glyph, for example, ♮ or ♯.
Notes Notehead sets We recommend that you position the notehead in the center of the editor so that its left edge is aligned with the thicker vertical grid line and its middle is aligned with the thicker horizontal grid line. 4 Editor action bar Contains selection and view options for the editor. 5 ● Zoom: Allows you to change the zoom level in the editor. ● Select: Allows you to select the next/previous component.
Notes Notehead sets There are eight attachment points for glyphs and graphics, and eleven for text, due to the extra space required for letters that extend below the baseline. The example diagram helps you visualize how these points relate to components.
Notes Notehead sets 7. ● To add an existing notehead, click Add Notehead to Set bar and select the notehead you want from the menu. in the Notehead Set action ● To create a new notehead with default settings, click New Notehead action bar. ● To create a new notehead that is a copy of an existing one, select the existing notehead in the Notehead action in the Notehead Set section and click New from Selection bar.
Notes Notehead sets PREREQUISITE If you want to create custom noteheads in a custom notehead set, you have created that notehead set. PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, choose Engrave > Notehead Sets to open the Edit Notehead Sets dialog. 2. Select the required notehead set category from the Category menu. 3. In the notehead sets list, select the notehead set in which you want to create custom noteheads. 4. Create a new notehead in one of the following ways: 5.
Notes Notehead sets ● If you want to change the notehead design to represent harmonics or rhythm slashes, you can instead turn notes into harmonics or change them to a slash voice. You can also input slash regions. PREREQUISITE If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the noteheads whose design you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. Choose Edit > Notehead > [Notehead type] > [Notehead design].
Notes Notehead sets 4. ● Larger noteheads (Default) ● Note names ● Figurenotes© colors Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The notehead design of all notes is changed project-wide. NOTE This does not change the notehead design of noteheads whose design you have changed individually, for example, if you changed selected notes to have diamond noteheads.
Notes Changing the size of notes 4. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The notehead design of all noteheads not overridden individually is changed to show the note name inside noteheads. TIP To ensure the note names are easy to read, you can increase the staff size of layouts in your project.
Notes Moving notes rhythmically 4. Optional: If you activated Custom scale, change the value in the value field. RESULT The size of the selected notes is changed. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. ● If you activated Scale, the selected notes are changed to the selected default scale size. ● If you activated Custom Scale, the selected notes are changed to the custom percentage scale size you set.
Notes Changing the width of ledger lines You can undo moving notes immediately, which restores any notes deleted in the process.
Notes Rhythm dot consolidation Hiding/Showing ledger lines You can hide/show ledger lines on individual notes, for example, if you want to indicate approximate pitches using the relative vertical positions of notes. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE ● Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1.
Notes Rhythm dot consolidation Rhythm dot consolidation on unison notes One rhythm dot shown per notehead in unisons Rhythm dots shown for each notehead for unisons on lines, but only one shown per unison in spaces Only one rhythm dot shown per unison TIP You can also change how rhythm dots in multiple voices are consolidated individually.
Notes Specifying the string for individual notes Moving rhythm dots You can move rhythm dots horizontally. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. However, you cannot move an individual rhythm dot independently of other rhythm dots at the same rhythmic position. PREREQUISITE ● Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1.
Notes Hiding/Showing colors for notes out of range The string number for the instrument is shown, followed by the fundamental pitch and the octave number of that string in parentheses. For example, the lowest cello string is expressed as 4 (C2). NOTE The options available in the menu depend on the selected pitches and the instrument type. RESULT The string on which the selected notes are played is changed.
Notes Bracketed noteheads EXAMPLE Colors for notes out of range shown. Three notes in the middle of the phrase are bright red, while the rest are the darker red. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK If showing colors for notes out of range reveals some notes do not fit with the current harp pedal settings, you can input a new pedal diagram for that passage or calculate a suitable harp pedal diagram.
Notes Bracketed noteheads NOTE On tablature, round brackets are automatically shown around the second note/chord and all subsequent notes/chords in tie chains. If you show brackets around all noteheads in tie chains on tablature, these automatic notehead brackets are included.
Notes Bracketed noteheads NOTE Round brackets on single noteheads that use the font glyph do not show handles in Engrave mode, meaning you cannot lengthen/shorten them or change their shape/width. You can also change the maximum interval within chords for which you want to allow Dorico Pro to use a single bracket and whether adjacent strings in tablature show a single bracket or separate brackets. There are musical examples for many options to demonstrate how they affect the appearance of your music.
Notes Bracketed noteheads In Write mode, only the first noteheads in tie chains are bracketed. In Engrave mode, only the selected noteheads are bracketed, including in tie chains. If you selected all notes in chords, Dorico Pro shows a single bracket for each chord unless they contain very large gaps, in which case Dorico Pro automatically splits brackets. If you selected individual notes within chords, they are each shown with separate brackets.
Notes Bracketed noteheads ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes whose notehead bracket positions relative to tie chains you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate/deactivate Bracket until end of tie chain in the Bracketed Noteheads group.
Notes Bracketed noteheads Splitting brackets on chords You can split brackets on any notehead within a chord. By default, Dorico Pro automatically shows a single bracket for all notes in a chord unless it contains very large gaps, in which case Dorico Pro automatically splits brackets. PREREQUISITE If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the individual notes in chords immediately above where you want to split brackets.
Notes Bracketed noteheads 3. 4. In the Design section, choose one of the following options for Round bracket appearance for single noteheads: ● Use font glyph ● Use drawn curve Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The appearance of round brackets on all single noteheads is changed project-wide. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can change the length and shape of individual round notehead brackets that use the drawn curve.
Notes Bracketed noteheads Moving notehead brackets graphically You can move individual notehead brackets graphically without changing the notes to which they apply, including moving left and right notehead brackets independently of each other. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. NOTE You cannot move notehead brackets rhythmically.
Notes Bracketed noteheads ● You can change the default positions of all notehead brackets, including the gaps between them and other items, on the Bracketed Noteheads page in Engrave > Engraving Options.
Notes Bracketed noteheads ● L bracket extents controls the height of left notehead brackets. T moves their top handles, B moves their bottom handles. ● R bracket extents controls the height of right notehead brackets. T moves their top handles, B moves their bottom handles. You can also use these properties to lengthen/shorten notehead brackets graphically by changing the values in the value fields. Deactivating the properties resets the selected notehead brackets to their default positions.
Notes Bracketed noteheads ● You can also click and drag middle handles in the corresponding directions. RESULT The shape of the selected notehead brackets is changed. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. If necessary, other nearby items, such as ties and slurs, automatically move to avoid collisions. This might affect note spacing and casting off.
Harmonics Harmonics are pitches produced by touching resonating strings at specific positions along their length, allowing the corresponding harmonic partial to sound. Harmonics often have a high pitch with a glassy, purer sound than stopped pitches. There are two different types of harmonics: natural and artificial. Harmonic partials are numbered according to their order in the harmonic series, which also correlates to the node on the string which produces them.
Harmonics Turning notes into harmonics Turning notes into harmonics You can turn existing notes into artificial and natural harmonics. Harmonics can represent the sounding, touched, or stopped pitch. PREREQUISITE ● ● You have input the notes you want to turn into harmonics. However, the pitch you should input depends on the style/appearance you want to use. ● For natural harmonics, we recommend that you input the desired sounding pitch.
Harmonics Changing the harmonic partial AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can change the partial for harmonics. You can also change the appearance of natural harmonics and the type of artificial harmonics. If you want to turn harmonics back into normal notes, deactivate Type in the Harmonics group.
Harmonics Hiding/Showing or parenthesizing harmonic accidentals Artificial harmonic with default partial (notation and tablature) Partial changed to the fifth (notation and tablature) RELATED LINKS Tablature on page 1404 Specifying the string for individual notes on page 1054 Hiding/Showing or parenthesizing harmonic accidentals You can hide/show individual harmonic accidentals, or show them in round or square brackets, independently of hiding/showing or parenthesizing accidentals of stopped pitch notes
Harmonics Appearances/Styles of harmonics ● You can assign key commands for different accidental hiding, showing, and parenthesizing commands on the Key Commands page in Preferences. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can also hide/show or parenthesize accidentals on the normal noteheads that indicate the stopped pitch for artificial harmonics shown using diamond noteheads.
Harmonics Appearances/Styles of harmonics On tablature, the touched fret is always shown for natural harmonics, regardless of the selected appearance. If the touched fret cannot be calculated, a pink question mark is shown. Artificial harmonics Normal Shows two noteheads: one indicating the stopped pitch, the other the touched pitch. The touched pitch is automatically calculated based on the partial; the default partial is the second partial.
Harmonics Appearances/Styles of harmonics Single notehead (sounding) Shows a single notehead indicating the sounding pitch. On tablature, the stopped fret is shown on the left and the sounding pitch is shown on the right in parentheses. Single notehead (sounding) artificial harmonic on notation staff Single notehead (sounding) artificial harmonic on tablature Single notehead (stopped) Shows a single notehead indicating the stopped pitch.
Harmonics Appearances/Styles of harmonics ● White diamond notehead RESULT The appearance of the selected natural harmonics is changed, including on fretted instrument notation staves. The touched pitch shown on tablature is not changed automatically. NOTE ● Changing the appearance of natural harmonics does not automatically change their notated pitch.
Harmonics Appearances/Styles of harmonics NOTE Pinch indicates the use of a different technique to produce the harmonic. 1075 Dorico Pro 3.5.
Ornaments Ornaments are markings that indicate multiple notes are played in addition to the notated pitch. They are used to decorate music, such as in Baroque music, which is highly decorated with trills and other ornaments. Over time, specific ways of notating how performers should play notes have developed and different ornament symbols indicate different patterns of decorative notes. Nonetheless, ornaments give some freedom to performers to embellish music in their own way.
Ornaments Changing ornament intervals RELATED LINKS Engraving Options dialog on page 476 Changing ornament intervals You can change the intervals of ornaments, both above and below the notated pitch, to indicate which pitches are played in the ornament. The intervals of ornaments are indicated by accidentals. For some ornaments, you can only change the interval in one direction. For example, you can only change the interval above short trills and below mordents. NOTE These steps do not apply to trills.
Ornaments Positions of ornaments EXAMPLE No accidentals Flats above and below Naturals above and below Sharps above and below RELATED LINKS Engrave toolbox on page 465 Trill intervals on page 1086 Changing trill intervals on page 1088 Changing trill intervals partway through trills on page 1089 Project-wide engraving options for ornaments on page 1076 Changing vibrato bar dip intervals on page 1136 Positions of ornaments Ornaments, including trills, are placed above the notes to which they apply.
Ornaments Positions of ornaments NOTE When using the mouse, you can only move one ornament at a time. 2. Move the ornaments in any of the following ways: ● To move a single ornament to the next notehead on the staff, press Alt/OptRight Arrow . ● To move a single ornament to the previous notehead on the staff, press Alt/OptLeft Arrow . ● To move them to the right according to the current rhythmic grid resolution, press Ctrl/ Cmd-Alt/Opt-Right Arrow .
Ornaments Positions of ornaments TIP You can show handles on all items, not just selected items, by choosing Engrave > Show Handles > Always. This can make it easier to select individual handles on multiple items. 2. Move the ornaments or handles in any of the following ways: ● Press Alt/Opt-Right Arrow to move them to the right. ● Press Alt/Opt-Left Arrow to move them to the left. ● Press Alt/Opt-Up Arrow to move them upwards. ● Press Alt/Opt-Down Arrow to move them downwards.
Ornaments Positions of ornaments Changing the position of ornaments relative to slurs Ornaments are positioned outside of slurs by default. You can change the position of ornaments relative to slurs individually. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE ● Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1.
Ornaments Trills TIP You can change the start position of all trills project-wide on the Ornaments page in Engrave > Engraving Options. RELATED LINKS Project-wide engraving options for ornaments on page 1076 Engrave toolbox on page 465 Changing the property scope on page 158 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 462 Trills Trills are fast alternations between two notes, similar to a tremolo, that were a common decoration in Baroque, Classical, and Romantic music.
Ornaments Trills Hiding/Showing trill marks You can hide/show trill marks at the start of individual trills. This also hides/shows trill marks on all systems on which the trills extend. PREREQUISITE If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the trills whose trill marks you want to hide/show. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Show trill mark in the Trills group. 3.
Ornaments Trills If only Start speed is activated, the speed of the whole trill extension line is changed. If only End speed is activated, the speed of the end half of the trill extension line is changed. EXAMPLE A trill extension line starting slow and ending fast AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can customize the playback speed of trills individually.
Ornaments Trills PROCEDURE 1. Select the trills whose extension lines you want to hide/show. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate/deactivate Has trill line in the Trills group. 3. Activate/Deactivate the corresponding checkbox. RESULT Trill extension lines are shown when the checkbox is activated, and hidden when the checkbox is deactivated. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Ornaments Trill intervals ● Click and drag the circular handle at the start/end of the trill to noteheads to the right/ left. RESULT Single trills are lengthened/shortened according to the current rhythmic grid resolution or to the next/previous notehead, whichever is closer. Multiple trills are lengthened/shortened according to the current rhythmic grid resolution.
Ornaments Trill intervals Microtonal trill intervals When using other tonality systems than 12-EDO, you can specify trill intervals based on diatonic steps and the total number of divisions from the written note. In 24-EDO, you can describe trill intervals based on their quality, such as major or minor.
Ornaments Trill intervals Signposts are shown at the position of each hidden trill interval accidental. However, trill interval signposts are hidden by default. TIP You can choose to repeat or hide all Hollywood-style trill intervals on successive notes in the Trill Intervals section of the Ornaments page in Engrave > Engraving Options.
Ornaments Trill intervals By default, trill intervals appear as accidentals when the interval is a second and as auxiliary notes for all other intervals. Signposts are shown at the position of each trill interval that does not require an accidental or auxiliary note. However, trill interval signposts are hidden by default.
Ornaments Trill intervals RELATED LINKS Changing the appearance of trill intervals on page 1091 Ornaments popover on page 285 Signposts on page 377 Hiding/Showing signposts on page 378 Resetting trill intervals You can reset trill intervals to the default trill interval of a second, either major or minor depending on the context, including resetting individual trill intervals within a single trill independently. PREREQUISITE If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox.
Ornaments Trill intervals Hollywood-style Indicates the trill interval using text. ● H.T. for half-step/minor second trills ● W.T. for whole step/major second trills Auxiliary note Indicates the trill interval using a small, parenthesized, stemless notehead shown in the staff immediately to the right of the first note to which the trill applies, and at the correct staff position for the trilled-to pitch.
Ornaments Trill intervals ● Accidental ● Hollywood style ● Auxiliary note RESULT The appearance of the selected trill intervals on notation staves is changed. This does not affect their appearance on tablature. TIP You can change the default appearance of all trills with a second interval project-wide in the Trill Intervals section of the Ornaments page in Engrave > Engraving Options.
Ornaments Trills in playback ● On the right ● Superscript RESULT The position of interval indicators relative to the selected trill marks is changed. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. TIP You can change the default position of interval indicators relative to all trill marks project-wide in the Trill Intervals section of the Ornaments page in Engrave > Engraving Options.
Ornaments Trills in playback Variable speeds within trills are included in playback. You can determine the default playback speeds of slow, normal, and fast trills on the Trills page in Playback Options, and you can change the playback speed of individual trills. Additionally, you can hide trill speed changes in trill extension lines whilst retaining the speed changes in playback.
Ornaments Trills in playback 4. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT Sampled trills are enabled when you choose Use samples if possible, and disabled when you choose Generated trills only.
Ornaments Trills in playback PROCEDURE 1. Select the trills whose starting note you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Start on upper note in the Trills group. 3. Activate/Deactivate the corresponding checkbox. RESULT The selected trills start on the upper note when the checkbox is activated, and on the lower note when the checkbox is deactivated.
Arpeggio signs Arpeggio signs are vertical lines that indicate chords are to be played arpeggiated, or “spread”, so that the notes in the chord are played very quickly one after another. Arpeggio signs are normally shown as vertical wavy lines. Arpeggiated chords can be played in two directions: ● Upwards, starting from the bottom note in the chord. ● Downwards, starting from the top note in the chord.
Arpeggio signs Types of arpeggio signs Types of arpeggio signs There are different types of arpeggio signs to convey the different arpeggiation directions and techniques. Up arpeggio A vertical wavy line that indicates chords are to be arpeggiated from the bottom note upwards. Down arpeggio A vertical wavy line that indicates chords are to be arpeggiated from the top note downwards.
Arpeggio signs Types of arpeggio signs Changing the type of arpeggio signs You can change the type of arpeggio signs after they have been input. PREREQUISITE If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the arpeggio signs whose type you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2.
Arpeggio signs Length of arpeggio signs ● Arrow ● Swash RESULT The appearance of the ends of the selected arpeggio signs is changed. TIP You can change the default appearance of the ends of all arpeggio signs project-wide on the Arpeggio Signs page in Engrave > Engraving Options.
Arpeggio signs Length of arpeggio signs ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, select the square handles at one end of the arpeggio signs you want to lengthen/shorten. TIP You can show handles on all items, not just selected items, by choosing Engrave > Show Handles > Always. This can make it easier to select individual handles on multiple items. 2.
Arpeggio signs General placement conventions for arpeggio signs General placement conventions for arpeggio signs Arpeggio signs are positioned to the left of the notes, including any applicable accidentals, to which they apply, but are positioned between grace notes and normal notes. They should appear within the same bar as the notes to which they apply, and not on the other side of the barline.
Arpeggio signs General placement conventions for arpeggio signs You can change the rhythmic grid resolution if you want to move arpeggio signs to notes at other rhythmic positions. NOTE ● If you move arpeggio signs to the rhythmic position of a rest, they are deleted. ● Only one arpeggio sign can exist at each rhythmic position. If an arpeggio sign in your selection passes over another arpeggio sign as part of its move, the existing arpeggio sign is deleted.
Arpeggio signs Arpeggios in playback For example, if you move a whole arpeggio sign upwards, both handles are moved so Top Y offset and Bottom Y offset are both activated. You can also use all three properties to move arpeggio signs graphically by changing the values in the value fields. Deactivating the properties resets the selected arpeggio signs to their default position.
Arpeggio signs Arpeggios in playback As well as setting a default length for arpeggios, you can also set minimum and maximum values for the length of arpeggios, expressed as a fraction of the notated value of the arpeggio. This is to ensure all notes with arpeggio signs can be heard within their notated duration. TIP You can also use properties in the Arpeggios Playback group of the Properties panel to override the default playback options for individual arpeggio signs.
Arpeggio signs Arpeggios in playback Changing the playback duration of arpeggios You can change the duration of individual arpeggios in playback, independently of your projectwide settings. The duration of arpeggios is expressed as a fraction of the notated rhythm of chords. For example, an arpeggio on a quarter note (crotchet) chord with a note offset value of 1/2 lasts an eighth note (quaver), whereas with a note offset value of 1/8 it lasts a 32nd note.
Glissando lines Glissando lines indicate a continuous transition between two notes, which can be smooth or in chromatic steps. They can have straight lines or wiggly lines, and can be shown with a text indication or as a line without text. There are different conventions regarding the playing techniques for glissando and portamento.
Glissando lines Project-wide engraving options for glissando lines In Dorico Pro, you can make detailed adjustments to the default positions of glissando lines on the Glissando Lines page in Engrave > Engraving Options. You can also move the start/end positions of individual glissando lines in Engrave mode.
Glissando lines Changing the style of glissando lines Changing the style of glissando lines Glissando lines can be shown as straight lines or wiggly lines. You can change the glissando line style of glissando lines individually, independently of your project-wide setting. PREREQUISITE If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the glissando lines whose style you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2.
Glissando lines Changing glissando line text ● Gliss. ● Port. ● No text RESULT The text shown on the selected glissando lines is changed. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. TIP You can change the text shown on all glissando lines project-wide on the Glissando Lines page in Engrave > Engraving Options.
Glissando lines Moving glissando lines graphically If Always show is chosen, glissando line text is always shown, even if the glissando line is short. However, this can cause the glissando line text to collide with other items, such as noteheads and stems. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Glissando lines Moving glissando lines graphically TIP You can show handles on all items, not just selected items, by choosing Engrave > Show Handles > Always. This can make it easier to select individual handles on multiple items. 2. Move the glissando lines or handles in any of the following ways: ● Press Alt/Opt-Right Arrow to move them to the right. ● Press Alt/Opt-Left Arrow to move them to the left. ● Press Alt/Opt-Up Arrow to move them upwards.
Glissando lines Glissando lines in playback Glissando lines in playback Glissando lines are reflected in playback using a sequence of notes, all a small interval apart, between the start and end notes for each glissando. Glissandos belonging to harps consider the current harp pedaling when determining the pitches to use in playback. Glissandos for all other instruments use the 12-EDO chromatic scale, regardless of the current tonality system.
Guitar bends The guitar bend is a technique commonly performed on electric guitars, where the performer pushes strings out of their normal alignment after notes start to sound. Bending strings tightens them, which produces the characteristic pitch fluctuation. Performing a guitar bend often also involves sustaining the bent pitch before allowing the string to return to its natural position and un-bent pitch. In Dorico Pro, these actions are called a “guitar bend hold” and “release” respectively.
Guitar bends Guitar bends on chord on notation staff Guitar bends on chord on tablature Sequences of consecutive guitar bends are notated as bend runs on tablature. In Engrave mode, guitar bend runs function as a group. Guitar bend runs on tablature Guitar bend holds Guitar bend holds indicate that the performer should maintain the pitch at the peak of a guitar bend. They are usually shown on tied notes. On tablature, guitar bend holds are notated using a horizontal line.
Guitar bends Release on notation staff Release on tablature If you input releases on multiple notes in chords, they are notated with a single downwards-pointing curved line on tablature. If the bend intervals are the same for all notes, the end pitches are parenthesized together.
Guitar bends Guitar pre-bends and pre-dives Guitar pre-bends and pre-dives Guitar pre-bends and pre-dives are techniques commonly performed on electric guitars, where the performer changes the initial sounding pitch of strings before playing notes, either by bending strings to tighten them or using the vibrato bar to loosen them.
Guitar bends Guitar post-bends Guitar pre-dive on notation staff Guitar pre-dive on tablature NOTE ● You can change the appearance of multiple consecutive guitar pre-bends/pre-dives on the Guitar Bends page in Engrave > Engraving Options. Subsequent notes with guitar prebends/pre-dives are known as “re-strikes”. ● By default, stems, stem flags, and beaming appear stem-up on tablature in single-voice contexts, which means they can collide with guitar bends, pre-bends/pre-dives, and dives and returns.
Guitar bends Vibrato bar dives and returns Microtonal post-bend on notation staff Microtonal post-bend on tablature If you input guitar post-bends on multiple notes in chords, their arrowheads are automatically aligned. On notation staves, the appropriate number of curved lines is shown according to the staff positions of notes in chords. Guitar post-bends on chord on notation staff Guitar post-bends on chord on tablature NOTE Guitar post-bends are not currently reflected in playback.
Guitar bends Bend intervals Vibrato bar dive and return on notation staff Vibrato bar dive and return on tablature Sequences of consecutive vibrato bar bends on notes with the same pitch direction, such as E-D-C, are notated on tablature with an additional line protrusion beyond the staff and bend interval for each vibrato bar bend.
Guitar bends Project-wide engraving options for guitar bends, pre-bends, post-bends, and vibrato bar dives and returns Bend intervals for guitar pre-dives and vibrato bar dives and returns always appear as numbers/ fractions, such as 1 for a whole step vibrato bar dive and return. Microtonal bend intervals appear as fractions according to the prevailing tonality system, such as 3/4. Bend intervals for microtonal post-bends appear as 1/4.
Guitar bends Hiding/Showing guitar bend hold lines releases, and hold lines on tablature. You can also set precise positions for the endpoints of guitar bends, pre-bends, post-bends, and vibrato bar dives and returns relative to noteheads, beams, and staff lines. There are musical examples for many options to demonstrate how they affect the appearance of your music.
Guitar bends Changing the direction of guitar pre-bends/pre-dives Changing the direction of guitar pre-bends/pre-dives You can change the direction of guitar pre-bends/pre-dives individually. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. By default, guitar pre-bends/pre-dives are positioned on the notehead-side of notes in single-voice contexts. In multiple-voice contexts, they are positioned on the stem-side of notes.
Guitar bends Deleting guitar pre-bends, pre-dives, and post-bends 2. In the Properties panel, activate Pre-bend accidental in the Guitar Pre-bends group. 3. Choose one of the following options: ● Hide ● Show RESULT Accidentals on the selected guitar pre-bends are hidden when you choose Hide, and shown when you choose Show. This does not affect the interval shown for the selected guitar pre-bends on tablature.
Guitar bends Moving guitar bends, pre-bends/pre-dives, post-bends, holds, and vibrato bar dives and returns graphically NOTE You cannot move guitar bends or vibrato bar dives/returns rhythmically. If you want to change their rhythmic positions, you must delete them from their original positions and input new guitar bends or vibrato bar dives and returns at the new positions. PREREQUISITE ● Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox.
Guitar bends Moving guitar bends, pre-bends/pre-dives, post-bends, holds, and vibrato bar dives and returns graphically Moving guitar bends or handles in guitar bend runs or on guitar bends/releases with an adjacent guitar bend/release using the mouse also moves or adjusts all other guitar bends in those guitar bend runs or adjacent guitar bends.
Guitar bends Moving guitar bends, pre-bends/pre-dives, post-bends, holds, and vibrato bar dives and returns graphically Guitar bend handles on notation staff in Engrave mode Guitar bends and holds On tablature, guitar bends and holds have the following handles: 1 Guitar bend start handle 2 Guitar bend middle handle 3 Guitar bend end handle 4 Bend interval handle 5 Hold start handle 6 Hold end handle Releases On tablature, releases have the following handles: 1 Release start handle 2 Relea
Guitar bends Moving guitar bends, pre-bends/pre-dives, post-bends, holds, and vibrato bar dives and returns graphically If guitar bends cross system and frame breaks, you can move the guitar bend segment on each side of the break independently. NOTE Adjoining guitar bends, such as guitar bend runs or a guitar bend that ends on the same note that a return starts on, function as a group. When using the mouse, moving any guitar bend in the group moves all the others.
Guitar bends Moving guitar bends, pre-bends/pre-dives, post-bends, holds, and vibrato bar dives and returns graphically 3 Guitar pre-bend/pre-dive start handle You can move these handles to change the shape of guitar pre-bends/pre-dives on notation staves, change the graphical length and angle of guitar pre-bends/pre-dives on tablature, and move bend intervals. When you move guitar pre-bend/pre-dive end handles, the bend interval also moves to retain its position relative to the end handle.
Guitar bends Moving guitar bends, pre-bends/pre-dives, post-bends, holds, and vibrato bar dives and returns graphically Vibrato bar dive and return handles on notation staff in Engrave mode On tablature, vibrato bar dives and returns have the following handles: 1 Vibrato bar dive start handle 2 Vibrato bar dive end handle/Vibrato bar return start handle 3 Vibrato bar return end handle 4 Bend interval handle You can move these handles to change the shape or angle of vibrato bar dives and returns a
Guitar techniques The term “guitar techniques” covers a range of techniques typically associated with guitar music, such as hammer-ons, pull-offs, and pitch alterations that use the vibrato bar on electric guitars.
Guitar techniques Tapping In Dorico Pro, vibrato bar dips are considered ornaments. You can select and delete them independently of the notes to which they apply. Vibrato bar dips appear on both notation staves and tablature and are placed above the staff. You can change the staff-relative placement of individual vibrato bar dips. Vibrato bar indications/lines Vibrato bar indications are text instructions that indicate that the performer should use the vibrato bar.
Guitar techniques Tapping is similar to hammer-ons and pull-offs, except tapping indications appear on every note whereas hammer-on and pull-off indications typically appear centered on slurs. A phrase containing right-hand and left-hand tapping By default, tapping indications only appear on notation staves and are placed above the staff. You can change the staff-relative placement of individual tapping indications.
Guitar techniques Hammer-ons and pull-offs Changing the staff-relative placement of guitar techniques on page 1138 Moving guitar techniques graphically on page 1140 Fingerings for fretted instruments on page 939 Hammer-ons and pull-offs Hammer-ons and pull-offs involve performers tapping or plucking the strings of fretted instruments with their left hand strongly enough that the corresponding pitch sounds without additional striking, producing a legato effect.
Guitar techniques Project-wide engraving options for guitar techniques Pull-off on notation staff Pull-off on tablature Ligados Ligados specify that the performer should both hammer on and pull off notes within a single phrase. Ligados require at least three notes on the same string with alternating pitch directions, such as C-D-C. In Dorico Pro, ligados comprise at least one hammer-on and pull-off.
Guitar techniques Showing notes as dead notes Showing notes as dead notes You can show individual notes belonging to fretted instruments as dead notes. Dead notes are notated with cross noteheads on notation staves and with an X on tablature. PREREQUISITE If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes belonging to fretted instruments that you want to show as dead notes. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2.
Guitar techniques Hiding/Showing guitar techniques on notation staves and tablature 2. In the Properties panel, change the value for Interval above in the Ornaments group. For example, enter 1 for a half step interval, 2 for a whole step interval, or 3 for a minor third interval. RESULT The interval of the selected vibrato bar dips is changed.
Guitar techniques Changing the staff-relative placement of guitar techniques 6. ● Notation and tablature ● Tablature only Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The corresponding guitar techniques are hidden/shown on all corresponding staves projectwide.
Guitar techniques Lengthening/Shortening vibrato bar indications/lines RELATED LINKS Moving guitar bends, pre-bends/pre-dives, post-bends, holds, and vibrato bar dives and returns graphically on page 1124 Changing the direction of guitar pre-bends/pre-dives on page 1123 Changing the staff-relative placement of items on page 371 Engrave toolbox on page 465 Changing the property scope on page 158 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 462 Lengthening/Shortening vibrato bar indication
Guitar techniques Moving guitar techniques graphically TIP You can move vibrato bar indications/lines graphically in Engrave mode, including changing their graphical length.
Guitar techniques Deleting guitar techniques ● ● You cannot move tapping, hammer-on, and pull-off indications using the keyboard. Click and drag them in any direction. NOTE You cannot move vibrato bar scoops using the mouse. RESULT The selected guitar techniques are moved graphically without affecting the rhythmic positions/ notes to which they are attached. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Guitar techniques Deleting guitar techniques RESULT Tapping, hammer-on, and pull-off indications and/or vibrato bar scoops are removed from the selected notes. 1142 Dorico Pro 3.5.
Jazz articulations Jazz articulations in Dorico Pro cover a range of note ornamentations that are idiomatic to jazz music, and brass instruments in particular. Although they are often known as jazz “articulations”, these techniques function more like ornaments than articulations because they change the pitch rather than the duration or attack of notes. For this reason, they are considered ornaments in Dorico Pro. They are found in the Ornaments panel, and you can also input them using the ornaments popover.
Jazz articulations Jazz ornaments Fall (bend) Fall (smooth) Additionally, there are other jazz ornaments commonly used by brass instruments that you can add to notes in the same ways as inputting jazz articulations. If your sound library includes samples for jazz articulations, Dorico Pro loads the required samples using playback techniques.
Jazz articulations Project-wide engraving options for jazz articulations Project-wide engraving options for jazz articulations You can find options for the project-wide appearance and position of ornaments on the Jazz Articulations page in Engrave > Engraving Options. The options on the Jazz Articulations page allow you to change the default length of bends and the default line style, design, and angle of smooth jazz articulations.
Jazz articulations Moving jazz articulations graphically ● Press Alt/Opt-Up Arrow to move them upwards. ● Press Alt/Opt-Down Arrow to move them downwards. TIP If you want to move items by larger increments, you can press Ctrl/Cmd as well as the standard key command, for example, Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-Left Arrow . ● Click and drag them in any direction. RESULT The selected jazz articulations or handles are moved graphically without affecting the notes to which they apply.
Jazz articulations Changing the type/length of existing jazz articulations You can change the default positions of all jazz articulations project-wide relative to other jazz articulations and to noteheads on the Jazz Articulations page in Engrave > Engraving Options. In Engrave mode, smooth jazz articulations have a handle at each end that you can use to move the start and end of each smooth jazz articulation independently. You can also move whole individual jazz articulations graphically.
Jazz articulations Deleting jazz articulations NOTE You must select notes with smooth jazz articulations on the same side, for example, only select notes with smooth jazz articulations before them. 2.
Jazz articulations Deleting jazz articulations RESULT All jazz articulations are removed from the selected notes. RELATED LINKS Input methods for ornaments, arpeggio signs, glissando lines, and jazz articulations on page 285 Inputting vibrato bar dives on page 301 1149 Dorico Pro 3.5.
Page numbers Page numbers are used to give each page a unique number, and indicate its position relative to other pages. Just as in newspapers and books, musical scores and parts use page numbers to make sure the music stays in the correct order. Because you can have multiple flows in a single project in Dorico Pro, you do not need to change page numbers manually in most cases.
Page numbers Moving page numbers in master pages Moving page numbers in master pages In order to change where page numbers are shown, you must move the text frames that contain page numbers. The most efficient way to do this is to move the text frames containing page numbers in master page formats. PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, double-click a master page pair whose page number position you want to change in the Master Pages section of the Pages panel. 2.
Page numbers Page number paragraph styles Page number paragraph styles The paragraph style for page numbers controls all aspects of their appearance, including their font, size, and horizontal alignment. You can edit the existing page number paragraph style, and create additional page number paragraph styles, in the Paragraph Styles dialog. ● You can open the Paragraph Styles dialog in Engrave mode by choosing Engrave > Paragraph Styles.
Page numbers Hiding/Showing page numbers 3. Open the Page Number Change dialog in any of the following ways: ● Right-click in the Pages section and choose Insert Page Number Change from the context menu. ● Click Insert Page Number Change . 4. In the Page Number Change dialog, enter the number of the page from which you want to change the page number numeral style in the From page field. 5. Select the numeral style you want from the following options for Sequence type: 6.
Page numbers Hiding/Showing page numbers RESULT ● If you select Always shown, page numbers are shown on all pages that have a text frame containing the page number token in the selected layouts. ● If you select Always hidden, page numbers are hidden on all pages in the selected layouts, including on pages that have a text frame containing the page number token.
Page numbers Hiding/Showing page numbers ● 7. Not on first page Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. RESULT The visibility of page numbers is changed in the layout currently open in the music area, from the page number specified until the next page number change with a different setting or the end of the project, whichever comes first.
Harp pedaling Harp pedaling is a broad term that covers the specific requirements for notating music for harps. This primarily involves harp pedal diagrams, which are often necessary due to the way in which modern concert harps change their tuning.
Harp pedaling Project-wide engraving options for harp pedaling Note Names Indicates the required accidentals for the seven diatonic pitches, arranged in two lines. Right-foot pedals are shown on top and left-foot pedals are shown below. Any pitches that you input that do not fit with the current harp pedal diagram are considered out of range, and appear red when colors are shown for notes that are out of range.
Harp pedaling Changing the appearance of harp pedal diagrams Changing the appearance of harp pedal diagrams Harp pedaling can be shown as a diagram or using note names. You can change the appearance of harp pedal diagrams individually, independently of your project-wide setting. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE ● Harp pedaling is shown in the current layout.
Harp pedaling Hiding/Showing harp pedaling in layouts Hiding/Showing harp pedaling in layouts You can input and calculate harp pedaling in any layout, but by default harp pedaling is not shown in full score layouts, as they are usually only useful for the performer. You can hide/show harp pedaling in each layout independently. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to hide/show harp pedaling.
Harp pedaling Hiding/Showing borders on harp pedal diagrams RESULT The selected harp pedal diagrams are hidden when Hide is activated, and shown when it is deactivated. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. Signposts are shown at the position of each hidden harp pedal diagram. However, signposts are not printed by default.
Harp pedaling Hiding/Showing borders on harp pedal diagrams EXAMPLE Note name harp pedal diagram with border hidden Note name harp pedal diagram with border shown Changing the thickness of harp pedal diagram borders You can change the thickness of borders on individual note name harp pedal diagrams, independently of your project-wide setting. NOTE These steps only apply to harp pedal diagrams using note names. PREREQUISITE ● Harp pedaling is shown in the current layout.
Harp pedaling Positions of harp pedal diagrams ● Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, select the harp pedal diagrams whose padding you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate the following properties, individually or together, in the Harp Pedals group: 3. ● Left padding ● Right padding ● Top padding ● Bottom padding Change the values in the value fields.
Harp pedaling Positions of harp pedal diagrams Moving harp pedal diagrams rhythmically You can move harp pedal diagrams to new rhythmic positions after they have been input. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the harp pedal diagrams or the signposts of harp pedal diagrams that you want to move. NOTE When using the mouse, you can only move one harp pedal diagram rhythmically at a time. 2.
Harp pedaling Partial harp pedaling TIP If you want to move items by larger increments, you can press Ctrl/Cmd as well as the standard key command, for example, Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-Left Arrow . ● Click and drag them in any direction. RESULT The selected harp pedal diagrams are moved to new graphical positions. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Harp pedaling Partial harp pedaling NOTE Only harp pedal diagrams using note names can be shown as partial. Allowing/Disallowing partial harp pedaling You can allow/disallow partial harp pedaling for individual note name harp pedal diagrams, independently of your project-wide settings. For example, if your default setting is to allow partial harp pedaling for up to two pedal changes, but you want to show one harp pedal diagram with three pedal changes as partial.
Harp pedaling Partial harp pedaling EXAMPLE Harp pedal diagram showing all pedals Partial harp pedal diagram RELATED LINKS Hiding/Showing harp pedaling in layouts on page 1159 Inputting harp pedal diagrams on page 321 Engrave toolbox on page 465 Changing the property scope on page 158 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 462 1166 Dorico Pro 3.5.
Pedal lines Pedal lines indicate to performers which piano pedals to use, and can also give performance instructions, such as how far down to depress the pedals and when to lift the pedal to clear the resonance. Most pianos have either two or three pedals. These pedals are: Sustain pedal The sustain pedal controls the dampers on the piano strings, which is why it is also known as the “damper pedal”. It is also the most commonly used pedal.
Pedal lines Sustain pedal retakes and pedal level changes RELATED LINKS Input methods for playing techniques, pedal lines, string indicators, and harp pedal diagrams on page 310 Pedal lines in playback on page 1189 Pedal line start signs, hooks, and continuation lines on page 1181 Text pedal line signs on page 1186 Lines on page 1214 Playing technique continuation lines on page 1199 Sustain pedal retakes and pedal level changes Pedal retakes indicate where a player should lift the sustain pedal, which damp
Pedal lines Sustain pedal retakes and pedal level changes move each part of the pedal line independently, and to change the pedal levels at the start, end, and at each retake or pedal level change. A sustain pedal with a retake in Engrave mode There are two handles for the start of the pedal line, three for retakes and pedal level changes, and three for the end of the pedal line.
Pedal lines Sustain pedal retakes and pedal level changes End of sustain pedal lines ● The top handle changes the hook length. You can move this handle upwards/downwards. ● The right handle changes the pedal level at the end of the pedal line. You can move this handle upwards/downwards. ● The bottom handle moves the end point of the pedal line. You can move this handle to the right/left.
Pedal lines Sustain pedal retakes and pedal level changes PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, select the right handles on the start signs whose start pedal levels you want to change. TIP You can show handles on all items, not just selected items, by choosing Engrave > Show Handles > Always. This can make it easier to select individual handles on multiple items. 2. Move the start level handles in any of the following ways: ● Press Alt/Opt-Up Arrow to move them upwards.
Pedal lines Sustain pedal retakes and pedal level changes TIP You can show handles on all items, not just selected items, by choosing Engrave > Show Handles > Always. This can make it easier to select individual handles on multiple items. 2. 3. Move the start level handles in any of the following ways: ● Press Alt/Opt-Up Arrow to move them upwards. ● Press Alt/Opt-Down Arrow to move them downwards. ● Press Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-Up Arrow to snap the level to 0 (not depressed).
Pedal lines Sustain pedal retakes and pedal level changes TIP You can show handles on all items, not just selected items, by choosing Engrave > Show Handles > Always. This can make it easier to select individual handles on multiple items. 2. Move the end level handles in any of the following ways: ● Press Alt/Opt-Up Arrow to move them upwards. ● Press Alt/Opt-Down Arrow to move them downwards. ● Press Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-Up Arrow to snap the level to 0 (not depressed).
Pedal lines Positions of pedal lines RELATED LINKS Playing techniques popover on page 311 Positions of pedal lines The default placement of pedal lines is below the bottom staff, even if there are only notes in the upper staff for the right hand. They are placed outside all other notations, including octave lines, slurs, and articulations. If one pedal is used, it is placed as close to the bottom of the staff as possible, while remaining outside of all other notations.
Pedal lines Positions of pedal lines Moving pedal lines rhythmically You can move pedal lines to new rhythmic positions after they have been input. Any retakes or pedal level changes on the pedal lines are also moved. NOTE If you want to move retakes or pedal level changes independently of the pedal line, you must first remove them from their original positions and input new retakes or pedal level changes at the new positions. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the pedal lines you want to move.
Pedal lines Positions of pedal lines independently, meaning you can lengthen/shorten them graphically. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. NOTE You can only change the angle of pedal lines by changing the level. PREREQUISITE ● Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1.
Pedal lines Positions of pedal lines For example, if you move a whole pedal line to the right, both handles are moved so Start X offset and End X offset are both activated. You can also use all of these properties to move pedal lines, retakes, and pedal level changes, and lengthen/shorten pedal lines graphically, by changing the values in the value fields. Deactivating the properties resets the selected pedal lines to their default positions.
Pedal lines Lengthening/Shortening pedal lines EXAMPLE Pedal line starting/ending before grace notes Pedal line starting/ending after grace notes RELATED LINKS Project-wide engraving options for pedal lines on page 1180 Engrave toolbox on page 465 Lengthening/Shortening pedal lines You can lengthen/shorten pedal lines rhythmically after they have been input. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the pedal lines you want to lengthen/shorten.
Pedal lines Lengthening/Shortening pedal lines TIP You can move pedal lines graphically in Engrave mode, including changing their graphical length. RELATED LINKS Positions of pedal lines on page 1174 Moving pedal lines rhythmically on page 1175 Moving pedal lines graphically on page 1175 Splitting pedal lines You can split sustain pedal lines at any rhythmic position with an existing item along their length into two separate pedal lines. NOTE These steps only apply to sustain pedal lines.
Pedal lines Project-wide engraving options for pedal lines PREREQUISITE If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the sustain pedal lines on the same staff that you want to merge together. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. NOTE You can only merge pedal lines on one staff at a time. 2. Choose Edit > Pedal Lines > Merge Pedal Lines. You can also choose this option from the context menu.
Pedal lines Pedal line start signs, hooks, and continuation lines RELATED LINKS Sustain pedal retakes and pedal level changes on page 1168 Engraving Options dialog on page 476 Pedal line start signs, hooks, and continuation lines Pedal lines normally comprise a start sign, a continuation line, and an end hook. This indicates clearly to performers where to depress each type of pedal, how long to keep it depressed, and where to lift it.
Pedal lines Pedal line start signs, hooks, and continuation lines TIP ● Deactivating Sign appearance returns the selected pedal lines to your default setting for start sign appearance. ● You can change the default start sign appearance of all pedal lines project-wide on the Pedal Lines page in Engrave > Engraving Options. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK If you selected a text sign appearance, you can edit the text shown.
Pedal lines Pedal line start signs, hooks, and continuation lines RELATED LINKS Engrave toolbox on page 465 Lengthening/Shortening pedal line hooks You can change the length of hooks shown at the start/end of pedal lines individually, independently of each other and independently of your project-wide settings. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains.
Pedal lines Pedal line start signs, hooks, and continuation lines ● You can change the default hook length for all pedal lines project-wide by changing the value for Hook length in the Design section of the Pedal Lines page in Engrave > Engraving Options. This value applies to hooks at the start/end of pedal lines.
Pedal lines Pedal line start signs, hooks, and continuation lines PREREQUISITE ● Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, select the pedal lines whose dashes you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate the following properties, individually or together, in the Pedal Lines group. 3. ● Dash length ● Dash gap length Change the values in the value fields.
Pedal lines Text pedal line signs RESULT Increasing Line width makes pedal continuation lines thicker, decreasing the value makes pedal continuation lines thinner. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. TIP You can change the default thickness for all pedal continuation lines project-wide in the Design section of the Pedal Lines page in Engrave > Engraving Options.
Pedal lines Text pedal line signs continuation text shown at the start of new systems, and you can override the restorative text shown at the end of una corda pedal lines. You can change the design of all pedal lines project-wide according to their type in the Design section of the Pedal Lines page in Engraving Options, and you can change the appearance of individual pedal lines, independently of your project-wide settings.
Pedal lines Text pedal line signs RELATED LINKS Changing the start sign appearance of pedal lines on page 1181 Engrave toolbox on page 465 Editing pedal line continuation text You can change the text shown at the start of subsequent systems when pedal lines continue across system/frame breaks. NOTE These steps only apply to pedal lines that use text as their start sign. PREREQUISITE If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1.
Pedal lines Pedal lines in playback 4. Press Return . RESULT The restorative text shown at the ends of the selected una corda pedal lines is changed. Deactivating Restorative text restores the default restorative text for the selected pedal lines. NOTE Deactivating properties permanently deletes any custom text entered. RELATED LINKS Engrave toolbox on page 465 Pedal lines in playback Pedal lines are automatically played back in Dorico Pro.
Playing techniques The term “playing techniques” covers a wide range of instructions intended to tell performers to modify the sound of the notes they are playing, for example, by changing their embouchure or changing the position of their bow, or by modifying their instrument, such as adding a mute or depressing a pedal. In Dorico Pro, there are the following types of playing techniques: Glyph playing techniques Playing techniques that display symbols, such as up bow or down bow markings.
Playing techniques Project-wide engraving options for playing techniques RELATED LINKS Input methods for playing techniques, pedal lines, string indicators, and harp pedal diagrams on page 310 Playback techniques on page 679 Pedal lines on page 1167 String indicators on page 954 Playing technique continuation lines on page 1199 Groups of playing techniques on page 1204 Edit Font Styles dialog on page 541 Changing the default font family on page 551 Project-wide engraving options for playing techniques You
Playing techniques Erasing the background of text playing techniques RESULT The text you entered is added to the selected playing techniques and appears after them. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Playing techniques Hiding/Showing playing techniques AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can change the padding between playing techniques and each edge of their erased areas. RELATED LINKS Engrave toolbox on page 465 Changing the erasure padding of text playing techniques You can change the erasure padding of individual playing techniques, including changing the padding between playing techniques and each edge of their erased areas independently.
Playing techniques Positions of playing techniques PROCEDURE 1. Select the playing techniques you want to hide, or the signposts of playing techniques you want to show. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate/deactivate Hidden in the Playing Techniques group. RESULT The selected playing techniques are hidden when Hidden is activated, and shown when it is deactivated.
Playing techniques Positions of playing techniques You can change the default positions of all playing techniques project-wide on the Playing Techniques page in Engrave > Engraving Options.
Playing techniques Positions of playing techniques RELATED LINKS Moving pedal lines rhythmically on page 1175 Groups of playing techniques on page 1204 Moving playing techniques graphically You can move playing techniques graphically without changing the rhythmic positions to which they apply. You can also move the start/end of playing technique continuation lines independently, meaning you can lengthen/shorten them graphically.
Playing techniques Positions of playing techniques TIP If you want to move items by larger increments, you can press Ctrl/Cmd as well as the standard key command, for example, Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-Left Arrow . ● Click and drag them in any direction. RESULT The selected playing techniques or handles are moved to new graphical positions. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Playing techniques Lengthening/Shortening playing techniques PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, select the playing techniques whose vertical order you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Tucking index in the Playing Techniques group. 3. Change the value in the value field. RESULT The order of the selected playing techniques relative to any other playing techniques at the same rhythmic position, or along their duration, is changed.
Playing techniques Playing technique continuation lines NOTE ● ● When multiple playing techniques are selected, you can only lengthen/shorten them according to the current rhythmic grid resolution. ● When using the keyboard, lengthening/shortening playing techniques with duration only moves their end. You can move the start of playing techniques with duration by moving them rhythmically, or by clicking and dragging the start handle once they have duration.
Playing techniques Playing technique continuation lines Playing techniques show duration lines when the following conditions are met: ● The playing technique has duration. ● The continuation type for the playing technique is set to show lines. ● The playing technique is ungrouped or is the final playing technique in a group. Transition line Indicates that the playing technique at the start must gradually turn into the playing technique at the end over the duration specified by the line.
Playing techniques Playing technique continuation lines NOTE Playing technique duration does not affect playback. The sounds produced in playback rely on the playback technique associated with the playing technique, the expression map settings, and the sound libraries loaded in the project.
Playing techniques Playing technique continuation lines Symbol shown at the start of subsequent segments of playing technique continuation lines that continue across multiple systems. 7 End cap Symbol shown at the end of playing technique continuation lines.
Playing techniques Playing technique continuation lines EXAMPLE Duration line shown Duration line hidden Duration line hidden but sim. shown Signs repeated on each note AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can change the style of the duration lines.
Playing techniques Groups of playing techniques Changing the caps of playing technique continuation lines You can change the caps of individual playing technique continuation lines independently of their line body styles. You can also change the caps of individual segments of playing technique continuation lines that continue across multiple systems. PREREQUISITE Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1.
Playing techniques Groups of playing techniques Transition lines are automatically shown between playing techniques in groups. The final playing technique in playing technique groups can show a duration line if it has duration. All of the playing techniques in a group are highlighted when any of the playing techniques in the group are selected. In Engrave mode, you can move each playing technique and continuation line within a group individually.
Playing techniques Custom playing techniques 2. Choose Edit > Playing Techniques > Group Playing Techniques. You can also choose this option from the context menu. RESULT The selected playing techniques are grouped together. Their durations are extended to reach the next playing technique in the group, and transition lines are shown between playing techniques in the group.
Playing techniques Custom playing techniques Playing Techniques panel in Write mode. You can also input them using the popover by entering the popover text assigned to them.
Playing techniques Custom playing techniques Contains all the playing techniques in the project within the currently selected category. The action bar at the bottom of the list contains the following options: ● New : Adds a new blank playing technique. ● New from Selection : Creates a copy of an existing playing technique that you can edit separately from the original. ● Save as Default : Saves the selected playing technique to your user library, allowing for playing techniques saved as default.
Playing techniques Custom playing techniques ● Playback technique: Allows you to choose the playback technique for the playing technique, that is, the action/switch that changes the sample sound used. Multiple playing techniques can use the same playback technique. If you need a playback technique not in the list, click Edit to open the Edit Playback Techniques dialog, where you can create custom playback techniques.
Playing techniques Custom playing techniques The Edit Playing Technique dialog contains the following sections and options: 1 Name Contains the saved name for predefined playing techniques, or an automatically generated name for new playing techniques. You cannot change this name. 2 Component selector Allows you to choose components to add to the playing technique. You can add different types of components by clicking the respective tab titles. ● Glyph, for example, ♮ or ♯.
Playing techniques Custom playing techniques 4 Editor action bar Contains selection and view options for the editor. 5 ● Zoom: Allows you to change the zoom level in the editor. ● Select: Allows you to select the next/previous component. ● Show Attachments ● Delete : Shows all the attachments on all components in the editor. : Deletes the selected component. Controls Contains controls that allow you to edit individual components.
Playing techniques Custom playing techniques 5 Middle Right 6 Baseline Left (text only) 7 Baseline Center (text only) 8 Baseline Right (text only) 9 Bottom Left 10 Bottom Center 11 Bottom Right RELATED LINKS Edit Playing Techniques dialog on page 1207 Creating custom playing techniques You can create custom playing techniques, including choosing their continuation line styles and playback techniques, for example, if the default glyph used for a particular playing technique is not the one to which
Playing techniques Custom playing techniques 10. Optional: If you want to use a playback technique that is not available, click Edit to open the Edit Playback Techniques dialog, in which you can add and edit playback techniques. For example, some sound libraries require you to map specific actions/switches manually, so you might create a new playback technique to which you can assign actions/switches in the expression map for such a sound library. 11. Change any other options on the General tab as required.
Lines Lines can convey a variety of meanings in music, such as indicating which hand to use in piano music or a gradual change in bow pressure. In Dorico Pro, lines can be vertical, horizontal, or angled between notes and have different styles and appearances.
Lines A phrase containing two notehead-attached lines, showing where the melody moves between piano staves ● Barline-attached Attached to a rhythmic position and aligned with barlines, if their rhythmic positions coincide with barline positions. Barline-attached lines are always horizontal. A barline-attached line spanning two full bars ● Rhythmic position-attached Attached to a rhythmic position and positioned relative to notes, chords, or rests at those rhythmic positions.
Lines Line components Lines panel on page 325 Custom lines on page 1237 Adding text to lines on page 1229 Changing the placement of horizontal lines on page 1220 Arpeggio signs on page 1097 Glissando lines on page 1107 Octave lines on page 842 Trills on page 1082 Playing technique continuation lines on page 1199 Pedal lines on page 1167 Repeat endings on page 1274 Guitar bends on page 1114 Tuplet brackets on page 1491 Line components In Dorico Pro, lines consist of multiple components that together functio
Lines Project-wide engraving options for lines Symbol shown at the end of lines. Caps can be arrowheads, hooks, terminal lines, music symbols, or text.
Lines Positions of lines Vertical lines Vertical lines are positioned to the left of the notes to which they apply, including any applicable accidentals, but are positioned between grace notes and normal notes. If multiple vertical lines exist at the same rhythmic position, the most recent line is positioned furthest to the right, that is, directly to the left of notes, chords or rests.
Lines Positions of lines AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can change the order of vertical lines when multiple vertical lines exist at the same rhythmic position and on the same side of notes. Changing the horizontal order of vertical lines You can change the horizontal order of vertical lines when multiple vertical lines exist at the same rhythmic position and on the same side of notes. PREREQUISITE If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1.
Lines Positions of lines EXAMPLE Vertical line after grace notes Vertical line before grace notes Changing the placement of horizontal lines You can show individual horizontal lines above, below, or inside the staff. By default, horizontal lines are placed above the staff. NOTE These steps only apply to barline-/rhythmic position-attached horizontal lines. PREREQUISITE If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1.
Lines Positions of lines RELATED LINKS Engrave toolbox on page 465 Changing the staff-relative placement of items on page 371 Changing the staff position of horizontal lines inside the staff You can change the staff position of horizontal lines shown inside the staff, including changing the staff position of the start/end of lines independently of each other, for example, if you want lines to appear angled.
Lines Positions of lines to move vertical lines along a phrase containing rests, we recommend deleting them and inputting new vertical lines at the new positions instead. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the lines you want to move. NOTE When using the mouse, you can only move one horizontal line rhythmically at a time. 2. Move the lines in any of the following ways: ● To move a single horizontal line to the next notehead on the staff, press Alt/OptRight Arrow .
Lines Positions of lines If horizontal lines cross system and frame breaks, you can move the line segments on each side of the break independently. Handles on a vertical line and horizontal line in Engrave mode PREREQUISITE ● Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1.
Lines Length of lines ● Start offset moves start horizontal line handles. X moves them horizontally, Y moves them vertically. ● End offset moves end horizontal line handles. X moves them horizontally, Y moves them vertically. The following properties in the Vertical Lines group of the Properties panel are activated automatically when you move the corresponding vertical line handle: ● Top offset moves top vertical line handles. X moves them horizontally, Y moves them vertically.
Lines Length of lines Lengthening/Shortening horizontal lines You can lengthen/shorten horizontal lines rhythmically after they have been input. NOTE These steps only apply to barline-/rhythmic position-attached horizontal lines. You cannot lengthen/shorten notehead-attached horizontal lines, except by lengthening/shortening the notes to which they are attached. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the horizontal lines you want to lengthen/shorten.
Lines Length of lines Lengthening/Shortening vertical lines You can lengthen/shorten individual vertical lines to different staff positions. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. By default, vertical lines span the range of all notes in the same voice at the same rhythmic position. PREREQUISITE ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties.
Lines Changing the body style of lines PROCEDURE 1. Select the rhythmic position-attached horizontal lines whose start and/or end position you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Horizontal start position in the Horizontal Lines group. 3. Select one of the following options from the menu: ● Notehead ● Notehead center ● Accidental 4. Activate Horizontal end position in the Horizontal Lines group. 5.
Lines Changing the caps of lines NOTE You must select either only horizontal lines or only vertical lines. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Line body style in either the Horizontal Lines or Vertical Lines group. 3. Select the style you want from the menu. RESULT The body style of the selected lines is changed. NOTE ● This does not affect the caps of the selected lines. ● You can also create custom lines with the line bodies, caps, and annotations you want by default.
Lines Changing the direction of lines NOTE ● This does not affect the body style of the selected lines. ● You can also create custom lines with the line bodies, caps, and annotations you want by default. Changing the direction of lines You can change the direction of both horizontal and vertical lines, for example, to make a horizontal line with an arrow end cap point to the left, or to make a vertical line with text appear upside-down with its text reading downwards.
Lines Adding text to lines PROCEDURE 1. Select the lines to which you want to add text. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. NOTE You must select either only horizontal lines or only vertical lines. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Text in either the Horizontal Lines or Vertical Lines group. 3. Enter the text you want into the value field. 4. Press Return . RESULT The text you entered into the value field is shown centered in the middle of the selected lines.
Lines Adding text to lines Line text font styles There are different font styles for line text according to the line type. You can change different aspects of these fonts in the Edit Font Styles dialog, such as changing the font size to make line text appear larger. The following fonts are used for line text: ● Horizontal Line Font: Used for text on horizontal lines. ● Vertical Line Font: Used for text on vertical lines.
Lines Adding text to lines EXAMPLE Text Above Text Centered Text Below RELATED LINKS Engrave toolbox on page 465 Changing the placement of text relative to lines on page 1233 Creating custom playing techniques on page 1212 Edit Lines dialog on page 1241 Changing the position of text relative to vertical lines You can change the position of text relative to vertical lines individually, for example, to show text on the left of vertical lines.
Lines Adding text to lines EXAMPLE Text Left Text Centered Text Right Changing the placement of text relative to lines You can change the placement of text relative to lines individually, for example, to show text at the start of horizontal lines or the top of vertical lines. PREREQUISITE If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the lines whose text placement you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode.
Lines Adding text to lines RELATED LINKS Engrave toolbox on page 465 Changing the direction of lines on page 1229 Custom lines on page 1237 Edit Lines dialog on page 1241 Forcing line text to be horizontal You can force the text of individual lines always to appear horizontal, for example, to make text on vertical lines easier to read. PREREQUISITE If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the lines whose text you want to keep horizontal.
Lines Adding text to lines RESULT Borders with the corresponding thickness are added to text on the selected lines. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. TIP You can add borders to text annotations by default in the Edit Line Annotations dialog.
Lines Adding text to lines EXAMPLE Line text with non-erased background Line text with erased background Changing the erasure padding of line text You can change the erasure padding of text on individual lines, including changing the padding between line text and each edge of their erased areas independently. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE ● Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox.
Lines Custom lines Custom lines Custom lines allow you to design lines that appear any way you want and save them for use in multiple projects. Custom lines comprise the same components as the default lines in Dorico Pro. However, there are many possible combinations, and you can create new components and edit existing ones. ● Lines can have custom annotations as caps or as centered annotations, which can appear repeated across the duration of lines.
Lines Custom lines 9. ● None ● Center Annotation ● Hyphenated Text Optional: If you chose Center Annotation and want to use a new line annotation style or edit an existing one, click Line Annotation Editor to open the Edit Line Annotations dialog and create a new line annotation or edit an existing one. 10.
Lines Custom lines For example, you can change the width of generic lines/wedges and add multiple repeatable symbols to repeatable symbol line bodies. 6. Optional: If you chose Repeatable Symbols and want to use new repeatable symbols or edit an existing one, click Edit in the symbol selector editor bar to open the Edit Repeatable Symbols dialog and create a new repeatable symbol or edit an existing one. 7.
Lines Custom lines ● For Arrowhead, Hook, Terminal Line, and Text annotations, use the available line annotation options. For example, you can change the width of arrowheads, hooks, and terminal lines and change font style and attachments of text. ● For Music Symbol annotations, add and arrange components in the Edit Line Annotation dialog and use the available line annotation options in the Edit Line Annotations dialog. For example, you can change the attachment points of music symbols. 5.
Lines Custom lines RESULT The new custom repeatable symbol is added to the project. If you clicked Save as Default so that it appears as , the custom repeatable symbol is available in all future projects on your computer AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can add your new custom repeatable symbol to repeatable symbol line bodies.
Lines Custom lines Contains all the lines in the project within the currently selected category and your search filter, if applicable. The action bar at the bottom of the list contains the following options: ● New : Adds a new line with default settings. ● New from Selection from the original. ● Save as Default : Saves the selected line to your user library, allowing you to use it in multiple projects. Appears as for lines saved as default.
Lines Custom lines staff. When deactivated, the line follows your settings on the Lines page in Engrave > Engraving Options. 9 ● Hooks follow dash pattern (lines with dashed/dotted line bodies only): Allows you to choose whether or not hook or terminal line caps use the line body style pattern, provided the hooks/terminal lines are long enough to display the pattern. For line patterns with multiple dash-gap values, the first is used.
Lines Custom lines ● Position: Allows you to select the vertical position of text relative to the line body. RELATED LINKS Creating custom lines on page 1237 Line components on page 1216 Lines panel on page 325 Changing the placement of horizontal lines on page 1220 Edit Font Styles dialog on page 541 Edit Line Bodies dialog The Edit Line Bodies dialog allows you to change the appearance and settings of all line bodies in the project and add, edit, and delete custom line bodies.
Lines Custom lines ● Save as Default : Saves the selected line body to your user library, allowing you to use it in multiple projects. Appears as for line bodies saved as default. ● Revert to Factory : Removes all your changes to the selected line body, returning it to its saved settings and appearance. ● Delete : Deletes the selected line body. NOTE You cannot delete predefined line bodies or any line body that is currently used in your project.
Lines Custom lines ● Add to Start: Adds the selected symbol to the line body as the start symbol. Start symbols only appear at the start of lines and are not repeated. ● Add to Middle: Adds the selected symbol to the middle of the line body. It is added to the right of any existing symbols. ● Add to End: Adds the selected symbol to the line body as the end symbol. End symbols only appear at the end of lines and are not repeated.
Lines Custom lines The Edit Line Annotations dialog contains the following sections and options: 1 Category menu Allows you to select which type of line annotation is available in the line annotations list. 2 Search field Allows you to filter line annotations in the selected category according to your entry. 3 Line annotations list Contains all the line annotations in the project within the currently selected category and your search filter, if applicable.
Lines Custom lines NOTE You cannot delete predefined line annotations or any line annotation that is currently used in your project. 4 Name Allows you to enter a new name or edit the existing name for the selected line annotation. 5 Preview Displays the line annotation in its current form in all possible positions. 6 Line annotation options Contains options that control the appearance of the selected line annotation. The options available depend on the category of the current line annotation.
Lines Custom lines For Text line annotations, the following options are available: ● Text: Allows you to enter the text you want for the text annotation. ● Font style: Allows you to select the font style for the text annotation. ● Horizontal attachment: Allows you to select the attachment point of the text annotation relative to vertical lines. ● Vertical attachment: Allows you to select the attachment point of the text annotation relative to horizontal lines.
Lines Custom lines The Edit Line Annotation dialog contains the following sections and options: 1 Name Contains an automatically generated name for the new music symbol annotation. You cannot change this name. 2 Component selector Allows you to choose components to add to the music symbol annotation. You can add different types of components by clicking the respective tab titles. ● Glyph, for example, ♮ or ♯.
Lines Custom lines 5 ● Zoom: Allows you to change the zoom level in the editor. ● Select: Allows you to select the next/previous component. ● Show Attachments ● Delete : Shows all the attachments on all components in the editor. : Deletes the selected component. Controls Contains controls that allow you to edit individual components. Controls are divided into tabs according to the aspect of the selected component they affect.
Lines Custom lines The Edit Repeatable Symbols dialog contains the following sections and options: 1 Search field Allows you to filter repeatable symbols according to your entry. 2 Repeatable symbols list Contains all the repeatable symbols in the project. The action bar at the bottom of the list contains the following options: ● New : Adds a new blank repeatable symbol and opens the Edit Repeatable Symbol dialog, where you can design your new repeatable symbol.
Lines Custom lines ● Symbol: Clicking Edit opens the Edit Repeatable Symbol dialog, where you can edit the appearance of the repeatable symbol. ● Repeat offset: Allows you to set the point along the repeatable symbol where the following symbol starts, measured in spaces from the left edge of the repeatable symbol.
Lines Custom lines NOTE A full list of the different ranges of glyphs is available on the SMuFL website. 3 ● Text, including numbers and other text. You can use numbers and text from the available Preset text list or select any font available from the menu and enter your preferred text into the text box at the bottom. Click Add Text to add the selected or input text to the repeatable symbol.
Rehearsal marks Rehearsal marks are an ordered sequence of letters or numbers, which along with bar numbers, provide a reference point for music that has multiple players, and make the chronological sequence of the music clear. They tell performers where they are in the piece, and allow performers to orient and co-ordinate themselves easily in rehearsals and concerts. Rehearsal marks can also be used to indicate significant changes in the music, and you can freely decide their positions.
Rehearsal marks Changing the rehearsal mark enclosure type There are musical examples for many options to demonstrate how they affect the appearance of your music. RELATED LINKS Engraving Options dialog on page 476 Rehearsal mark enclosure size and padding values on page 1257 Changing the rehearsal mark enclosure type Rehearsal marks are usually shown in an enclosure, which can be a rectangle, rounded rectangle or a circle. You can change the enclosure type of all rehearsal marks project-wide. PROCEDURE 1.
Rehearsal marks Changing the rehearsal mark enclosure type Rehearsal mark enclosure size and padding values You can change the default shape and size of rehearsal mark enclosures on the Rehearsal Marks page in Engraving Options. You can change the minimum dimensions, line thickness, and padding values of rehearsal mark enclosures. All enclosures Enclosure line thickness Sets the thickness of enclosure lines for both rectangle and circle enclosures. The default is 1/8 of a space.
Rehearsal marks Positions of rehearsal marks Top padding between text and enclosure Sets the value for the distance between the top line of the enclosure and the rehearsal mark within it. In this example, the value was increased from 1/2 a space to 2 spaces. Bottom padding between text and enclosure Sets the value for the distance between the bottom line of the enclosure and the rehearsal mark within it. In this example, the value was increased from 1/8 of a space to 2 spaces.
Rehearsal marks Positions of rehearsal marks You can move rehearsal marks to different rhythmic positions in Write mode. They are positioned by default according to your settings in Engraving Options. The vertical spacing between the top two staves is increased to allow room for the rehearsal mark and the tempo marks. You can move rehearsal marks graphically in Engrave mode, for example, when space is tight you can move tempo marks graphically away from their default positions.
Rehearsal marks Positions of rehearsal marks ● Click and drag the rehearsal mark to barlines to the right/left. RESULT A single rehearsal mark is moved to existing barlines to the right/left. Multiple rehearsal marks are moved according to the current rhythmic grid resolution. NOTE Only one rehearsal mark can exist at each rhythmic position. If a rehearsal mark passes over another rehearsal mark as part of its move, the existing rehearsal mark is deleted and replaced by the rehearsal mark being moved.
Rehearsal marks Deleting rehearsal marks Deactivating the property resets the selected rehearsal marks to their default positions. RELATED LINKS Engrave toolbox on page 465 Deleting rehearsal marks You can delete rehearsal marks. Deleting a rehearsal mark in any layout deletes the rehearsal mark from all layouts. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the rehearsal marks you want to delete. 2. Press Backspace or Delete . RESULT The selected rehearsal marks are deleted.
Rehearsal marks Changing the rehearsal mark sequence type TIP You can also change the sequence type of rehearsal marks, for example, if you want rehearsal mark C to appear as rehearsal mark 3. Changing the rehearsal mark sequence type Rehearsal marks can be letters, numbers, or bar numbers. You can change the sequence type of individual rehearsal marks, and create secondary rehearsal mark sequences. In Dorico Pro, you can use all three available rehearsal mark sequences simultaneously.
Rehearsal marks Adding prefixes/suffixes to rehearsal marks Adding prefixes/suffixes to rehearsal marks You can add both prefixes and suffixes to individual rehearsal marks. PREREQUISITE If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the rehearsal marks to which you want to add a prefix or suffix. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2.
Markers Markers are labels locked to a particular position in time, most commonly in relation to a video. They typically indicate an important moment that requires musical prominence, and composers often use them to help shape the writing process. Markers on a timecode staff showing custom text and timecodes By default, markers in Dorico Pro show the default text “Marker” and also include the timecode of their fixed position in time. In Dorico Pro, you can use markers in any project.
Markers Hiding/Showing markers RELATED LINKS Engraving Options dialog on page 476 Hiding/Showing markers By default, markers are shown in full score layouts and hidden in part layouts. You can hide and show markers in each layout independently, for example, if markers are helpful for the conductor to see but not for the players. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to hide/show markers.
Markers Editing marker text 5. Optional: If you chose Timecode staff, select the bracketed instrument family above which you want to show the timecode staff from the Position timecode staff above bracket menu. 6. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The vertical position of markers is changed in the selected layouts. NOTE ● If you show markers on a timecode staff, timecodes are also shown on the staff by default.
Markers Editing the marker/timecode font styles RELATED LINKS Add Marker dialog on page 340 Engrave toolbox on page 465 Editing the marker/timecode font styles You can edit the formatting of the font styles used for all markers and timecodes project-wide, for example, if you want markers to appear bold and italic. Markers and timecodes use different fonts, meaning you can change them independently of each other. PROCEDURE 1.
Markers Moving markers rhythmically RESULT The timecode of the marker is changed. The marker automatically moves relative to the music to reflect its new time position. RELATED LINKS Markers section of the Video panel on page 341 Moving markers rhythmically You can move markers to new rhythmic positions. However, as markers have a fixed position in time, moving markers relative to the notated music automatically changes the tempo on either side of the marker.
Markers Defining markers as important 2. In the Markers section, activate the checkbox in the Imp. column for each marker you want to define as important. RESULT Markers with activated checkboxes are defined as important. The Find Tempo button at the bottom of the Markers section becomes available. RELATED LINKS Find Tempo dialog on page 342 1269 Dorico Pro 3.5.
Timecodes Timecodes indicate an exact position in time, usually in the context of a video. They allow precise synchronization between multiple elements, such as music and moving images, and can be used as a reference tool. Timecodes are displayed in the format hh:mm:ss:ff, which is two-digit hours, minutes, seconds, and frames.
Timecodes Changing the initial timecode value RELATED LINKS Frame rates on page 151 Video Properties dialog on page 147 Editing the marker/timecode font styles on page 1267 Changing the timecode frequency on page 1273 Changing the content shown in the transport display on page 640 Markers on page 1264 Hiding/Showing markers on page 1265 Changing the vertical position of markers on page 1265 Changing the vertical position of timecodes on page 1271 Hiding/Showing timecodes in markers on page 1272 Changing th
Timecodes Hiding/Showing timecodes in markers By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog. You can select other layouts by using the selection options in the action bar, Shift -clicking adjacent layouts, and Ctrl/Cmd -clicking individual layouts. 3. Click Markers and Timecode in the category list. 4. In the Timecode subsection, choose one of the following options for Show timecode: 5.
Timecodes Changing the timecode frequency RELATED LINKS Markers on page 1264 Changing the vertical position of timecodes on page 1271 Changing the vertical position of markers on page 1265 Changing the timecode frequency You can show timecodes at different intervals in layouts in which timecodes are shown on a separate staff. For example, you can show timecodes every bar in full score layouts but only at the start of each system in part layouts.
Repeat endings For music with repeated passages, repeat endings show which bars are played at the end of each repetition, with different endings each time if required. They are also known as “volta lines”, or as “first and second endings”, but in this documentation, we refer to them as “repeat endings”. Repeat endings comprise two or more segments, where each segment contains a different possible ending.
Repeat endings Changing the total number of playthroughs in repeat endings PROCEDURE 1. Select the repeat endings whose total number of playthroughs you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate No. times played in the Repeat Endings group. 3. Change the value in the value field. NOTE You cannot have fewer playthroughs than the number of segments. RESULT The total number of playthroughs in the selected repeat endings is changed.
Repeat endings Project-wide engraving options for repeat endings EXAMPLE Default distribution of playthroughs Customized distribution of playthroughs Project-wide engraving options for repeat endings You can find options controlling the project-wide design, position, and appearance of repeat ending segments on the Repeat Endings page in Engrave > Engraving Options.
Repeat endings Positions of repeat endings NOTE ● This does not automatically input or reposition repeat barlines. You must input repeat barlines as appropriate manually. ● You can also lengthen/shorten the final segment in a single repeat ending by selecting the repeat ending and using the following key commands: ● Press Shift-Alt/Opt-Right Arrow to lengthen the final segment. ● Press Shift-Alt/Opt-Left Arrow to shorten the final segment.
Repeat endings Positions of repeat endings 2. Move the repeat ending to the next/previous bar in any of the following ways: ● Press Alt/Opt-Right Arrow to move it to the right. ● Press Alt/Opt-Left Arrow to move it to the left. ● Click and drag it to the right/left. RESULT The selected repeat ending is moved to the next/previous bar. NOTE ● This does not automatically input or reposition repeat barlines. You must input repeat barlines manually as appropriate.
Repeat endings Editing repeat ending text ● Press Alt/Opt-Up Arrow to move them upwards. ● Press Alt/Opt-Down Arrow to move them downwards. TIP If you want to move items by larger increments, you can press Ctrl/Cmd as well as the standard key command, for example, Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-Left Arrow . ● Click and drag them in any direction. RESULT The selected repeat ending segments or handles are moved graphically.
Repeat endings Changing the appearance of individual final repeat ending segments RESULT The text shown in the selected segments is changed. Deactivating Custom text restores the default text for the selected repeat ending segments. NOTE Deactivating properties permanently deletes any custom text entered.
Repeat endings Lengthening/Shortening repeat ending hooks Lengthening/Shortening repeat ending hooks You can lengthen/shorten the hooks in repeat endings individually, independently of your project-wide settings. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. NOTE You cannot change the hook length of an individual segment in a repeat ending. Changing the hook length affects the whole repeat ending.
Repeat markers Repeat markers show that musical material is to be repeated, but unlike repeat endings, repeat markers often involve jumping to different positions and sections in the music instead of moving through the music consecutively. In Dorico Pro, repeat markers are divided into the following types: Repeat jumps Specify the position from which players or playback must jump, such as D.C. al Coda. You can qualify the conditions under which repeat jumps are used, such as “second time only”.
Repeat markers Project-wide engraving options for repeat markers Paragraph Styles dialog on page 543 Repeats in playback on page 627 Types of barlines on page 733 Project-wide engraving options for repeat markers You can find options controlling the project-wide design, position, and appearance of repeat markers on the Repeat Markers page in Engrave > Engraving Options.
Repeat markers Changing the size of coda/segno symbols corresponding options for the Repeat Marker Jumps paragraph style that have not been overridden. RELATED LINKS Paragraph Styles dialog on page 543 Editing repeat marker text on page 1285 Showing repeat markers on one/two lines on page 1286 Changing the size of coda/segno symbols You can change the default size of all coda and segno symbols project-wide and independently of each other. This does not affect the size of text in repeat markers.
Repeat markers Editing repeat marker text NOTE You can only enter values between 1 and 3. RESULT Marker index changes the order of the selected repeat marker relative to other repeat markers of the same type. ‘Jump to’ index changes the destination of the selected repeat marker. TIP You can change the default appearance of all multiple repeat markers project-wide in the Repeat Sections section of the Repeat Markers page in Engrave > Engraving Options.
Repeat markers Editing repeat marker text RELATED LINKS Project-wide engraving options for repeat markers on page 1283 Engrave toolbox on page 465 Showing repeat markers on one/two lines You can show individual repeat markers either on a single line or spread across two lines independently of your per-layout settings, for example, if a single long repeat marker extends beyond the page margins in one part layout.
Repeat markers Changing the barline shown before codas Engrave toolbox on page 465 Changing the property scope on page 158 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 462 Changing the barline shown before codas You can change the default barline shown before all codas project-wide that are preceded by a repeat jump, for example, if you want to show double barlines in such cases instead of normal barlines. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-E to open Engraving Options. 2.
Repeat markers Positions of repeat markers Changing the staff-relative placement of repeat markers on page 1289 Changing the positions of system objects on page 1387 Repeats in playback on page 627 Moving repeat markers rhythmically You can move repeat markers to new rhythmic positions after they have been input. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the repeat markers you want to move. NOTE When using the mouse, you can only move one repeat marker rhythmically at a time. 2.
Repeat markers Positions of repeat markers TIP Start offset in the Repeat Markers group of the Properties panel is activated automatically when you move repeat markers. ● Start offset X moves repeat markers horizontally. ● Start offset Y moves repeat markers vertically. You can also use this property to move repeat markers by changing the values in the value fields. Deactivating the property resets the selected repeat markers to their default positions.
Bar repeats Bar repeats indicate that the musical material in preceding bars must be repeated exactly, but without notating that material again. Bar repeats can comprise groups of one, two, or four bars. For example, a one-bar repeat indicates that the material in one bar is repeated, meaning every bar in the region repeats the same material. A four-bar repeat indicates that the material in the previous four bars is repeated.
Bar repeats Project-wide engraving options for bar repeats Moving bar repeat regions on page 1292 Lengthening/Shortening bar repeat regions on page 1293 Hiding/Showing multi-bar rests on page 1320 Types of barlines on page 733 Annotations on page 704 Project-wide engraving options for bar repeats You can find options controlling the project-wide design and appearance of bar repeats on the Bar Repeats page in Engrave > Engraving Options.
Bar repeats Moving bar repeat regions TIP ● Any dynamics you add within bar repeat regions affect the playback of the repeated music. ● You can also change the length of the repeated phrase by opening the repeats popover and changing the entry.
Bar repeats Lengthening/Shortening bar repeat regions Lengthening/Shortening bar repeat regions You can lengthen/shorten bar repeat regions after they have been input. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the bar repeat region you want to lengthen/shorten. NOTE You can only lengthen/shorten one bar repeat region at a time. 2. Lengthen/Shorten the bar repeat region in any of the following ways: ● To lengthen it by the duration of its grouping, press Shift-Alt/Opt-Right Arrow .
Bar repeats Bar repeat counts Bar repeat counts Bar repeat counts are numbers shown at regular intervals either above or below bar repeats, to help players keep track of how many bars have passed. The intervals are usually based on typical musical phrases, such as every four or eight bars. NOTE Bar repeat counts are only shown on one-bar repeat regions.
Bar repeats Bar repeat counts PROCEDURE 1. Select the one-bar repeat regions whose start count you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Count from in the Bar Repeat Regions group. 3. Change the value in the value field. RESULT The number and position of bar repeat counts on the selected bar repeats is changed.
Bar repeats Bar repeat counts RESULT The count frequency is changed for the selected bar repeat regions. TIP You can also change the default count frequency for all bar repeat regions project-wide on the Bar Repeats page in Engrave > Engraving Options.
Bar repeats Bar repeat counts Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 462 Editing the bar repeat count font style You can edit the formatting of the font style used for all bar repeat and slash region counts project-wide, for example, if you want counts to appear bold and italic. PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, choose Engrave > Font Styles to open the Edit Font Styles dialog. 2. Select Bar Repeat Count from the Font style menu: 3.
Bar repeats Bar repeat grouping TIP If you want to move items by larger increments, you can press Ctrl/Cmd as well as the standard key command, for example, Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-Left Arrow . ● Click and drag them in any direction. RESULT The selected bar repeat counts are moved to new graphical positions. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Bar repeats Bar repeat grouping Eight-bar phrase with seven one-bar repeats grouped every four bars TIP You can also choose to show a three-bar repeat to complete a four-bar phrase on the Bar Repeats page in Engrave > Engraving Options; however, this is less commonly used than a combination of one-bar and two-bar repeats.
Rhythm slashes Rhythm slashes are diagonal lines positioned on staves that are used to indicate that performers should play something, but without specifying the exact rhythms and pitches. They are often accompanied by chord symbols to indicate the set of notes the performer should use. There are two different types of rhythm slashes: Slashes with stems Slashes with stems usually indicate the rhythm to be played, but not the pitches. Also known as “rhythmic notation”.
Rhythm slashes Slash regions In Write mode, each region has a handle at the start and end, which you can use to move and lengthen/shorten regions. When two different slash regions are adjacent, they alternate highlight colors to ensure the separate regions are always identifiable.
Rhythm slashes Project-wide engraving options for rhythm slashes Project-wide engraving options for rhythm slashes You can find options controlling the project-wide design and appearance of rhythm slashes in the Rhythmic slashes section of the Notes page in Engrave > Engraving Options. These options affect both slash voices and slash regions.
Rhythm slashes Slashes in multiple-voice contexts 2. In the Properties panel, activate Voice direction in the Slash Regions group. 3. Choose one of the following options: ● Up ● Down RESULT The voice direction, and therefore stem direction, of the selected slash regions is changed. NOTE This only affects the direction of stems in slash regions on the middle line of the staff and when multiple slash regions exist at the same rhythmic position.
Rhythm slashes Slashes in multiple-voice contexts Engrave toolbox on page 465 Hiding/Showing notes alongside slash regions You can hide/show notes at the same rhythmic positions as slash regions, for example, if you want to input notes to hear in playback but only want to show the slash region, or if you want to notate suggested notes in addition to the slash region. PREREQUISITE If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1.
Rhythm slashes Splitting slash regions PROCEDURE 1. Select any part of each slash region whose padding rests you want to hide/show. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate the following properties, individually or together, in the Slash Regions group: ● Hide rests before start ● Hide rests after end RESULT Padding rests are hidden on the corresponding side of the selected slash regions.
Rhythm slashes Lengthening/Shortening slash regions ● Press Alt/Opt-Right Arrow to move them to the right. ● Press Alt/Opt-Left Arrow to move them to the left. NOTE You cannot move slash regions rhythmically with the mouse. RESULT The selected slash regions are moved to new rhythmic positions. NOTE If a single slash region passes over another slash region as part of its move, the existing one is unaffected as multiple slash regions can exist at the same rhythmic position.
Rhythm slashes Hiding/Showing stems in slash regions RELATED LINKS Slashes in multiple-voice contexts on page 1302 Changing the voice direction of slash regions on page 1302 Hiding/Showing stems in slash regions You can hide/show stems on slashes in individual slash regions. By default, slashes in slash regions are shown without stems. PREREQUISITE If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1.
Rhythm slashes Slash region counts RELATED LINKS Slash regions on page 1300 Project-wide engraving options for rhythm slashes on page 1302 Editing the bar repeat count font style on page 1297 Changing the start count of slash regions You can change the number from which individual slash region counts start, for example, if you want to input more precise notation between two slash regions but want the count to appear to continue across the regions.
Rhythm slashes Slash region counts RESULT The count frequency is changed for the selected slash regions. TIP You can also change the default count frequency for all slash regions project-wide in the Rhythmic slashes section of the Notes page in Engrave > Engraving Options.
Rhythm slashes Slash region counts Moving slash region counts You can move individual slash region counts graphically without changing the rhythmic positions to which they apply, for example, to accommodate other items at the same position better. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. NOTE If you want to move slash region counts because you want to change the bar to which the number applies, you can change the start count instead.
Rhythm slashes Slash region counts Changing the staff-relative placement of slash region counts You can show the counts on individual slash regions either above or below the staff, independently of your project-wide setting. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. NOTE Changing the staff-relative placement of slash region counts affects all counts on the region.
Rests Rests are markings with a rhythmic value that indicate no note is played for that duration. Each note duration has an equivalent rest, for example, a quarter note rest is different to a sixteenth note rest. All notes and rests within a bar must add up to the duration of the bar, according to the prevailing time signature. The table shows some examples of notes and the rests with the equivalent rhythmic value.
Rests Implicit vs. explicit rests Rests stay within the staff wherever possible. They do not move above or below the staff when the notes around them are very high or very low. However, on staves with multiple voices, rests are placed higher on the staff, or above the staff, for up-stem voices and lower on the staff, or below the staff, for down-stem voices. Example rest positions in a multiple-voice context Rests in multiple voices must not overlap.
Rests Implicit vs. explicit rests RELATED LINKS Inputting rests on page 201 Inputting notes on page 175 Deleting rests on page 1317 Forcing the duration of notes/rests on page 184 Turning explicit rests into implicit rests on page 1315 Hiding/Showing rest colors on page 1316 Implicit rests in multiple-voice contexts In Dorico Pro, implicit rests are shown automatically to fill in rhythmic positions around notes, including when there are multiple voices on the staff.
Rests Per-flow notation options for rests A phrase with multiple voices showing implicit rests. The same phrase without implicit rests. You can choose when rests are shown in a number of different multiple-voice contexts projectwide on the Rests page in Write > Notation Options. RELATED LINKS Per-flow notation options for rests on page 1315 Moving rests vertically on page 1323 Turning explicit rests into implicit rests Implicit rests and explicit rests behave differently.
Rests Project-wide engraving options for rests Per-flow notation options for voices on page 1521 Stem direction on page 1412 Project-wide engraving options for rests You can find options for the project-wide appearance of rests on the Rests page in Engrave > Engraving Options. The options on the Rests page allow you to change the style, appearance, width, and precise position of rests.
Rests Deleting rests Deleting rests You can delete both implicit rests and explicit rests, for example, if you want to hide rests before/ after notes in another voice used to show passing notes. NOTE ● If you want to delete rests because multiple rests of the same duration appear at the same position in multiple-voice contexts, you can choose to consolidate these rests in the Rest positioning section of the Rests page in Notation Options. ● You cannot delete rests from unpitched percussion instruments.
Rests Hiding/Showing bar rests in empty bars Hiding/Showing bar rests in empty bars You can hide/show bar rests in empty bars in each layout independently. For example, you can hide bar rests in full score layouts but show bar rests in part layouts. Bar rests are usually shown in empty bars in music to indicate to performers that they have nothing to play. However, there are contexts in which it is preferable to hide bar rests in empty bars, and instead leave the bar completely empty.
Rests Multi-bar rests ● 5. Omit bar rests Click Apply, then Close. RESULT Bar rests are shown between notes or explicit rests in all voices in the selected flows when you choose Show bar rests, and hidden when you choose Omit bar rests. NOTE Show bar rests does not automatically show bar rests in empty bars before the first note or explicit rest in additional voices. For additional voices that do not start in the first bar, you must input a bar rest in the first bar manually. RELATED LINKS Implicit vs.
Rests Multi-bar rests Hiding/Showing multi-bar rests You can hide/show multi-bar rests in each layout independently, and choose whether bar repeats are consolidated into multi-bar rests. For example, you can hide multi-bar rests in full score layouts but show multi-bar rests in part layouts. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to hide/show multi-bar rests.
Rests Multi-bar rests 3. In the Multi-bar Rests section, choose one of the following options for Multi-bar rests that extend to the end of the flow in the Appearance subsection: ● Show tacet al fine ● Show bar count 4. Optional: Change the value for Minimum number of bars’ rest at the end of flow to show ‘tacet al fine’. 5. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The appearance of all multi-bar rests at the end of flows is changed project-wide.
Rests Multi-bar rests 4. 5. Choose one of the following options for Bar count on grand staff instruments: ● Show between staves ● Show above or below each staff Click Apply, then Close. Changing the font used for multi-bar rest bar counts By default, bar counts on multi-bar rests use a bold, Arabic font that is similar in appearance to the digits in time signatures. You can change the font used for bar counts on multi-bar rests project-wide. PROCEDURE 1.
Rests Moving rests vertically PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, select an item at the rhythmic position where you want to split multi-bar rests. 2. Choose Engrave > Split Multi-bar Rest. RESULT All multi-bar rests in all layouts are split at the selected position. A signpost is shown at the position of the multi-bar rest split.
Rests Moving rests vertically ● You can change the horizontal position of rests, and the spacing around them, in Engrave mode when Note Spacing is activated, in the same ways as changing the position of notes. RELATED LINKS Notation Options dialog on page 163 Note spacing on page 562 Engrave toolbox on page 465 Changing the property scope on page 158 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 462 1324 Dorico Pro 3.5.
Slurs Slurs are tapered, curved lines that join notes to indicate legato articulation and phrasing. Depending on the context and the instrument to which they apply, slurs can have additional meanings to simply marking phrases. For example, for wind players, a slur indicates that all the notes in the phrase are played in the same breath and without re-tonguing or re-articulating any notes. For string players, a slur indicates that all the notes in the phrase are played legato and under one bow.
Slurs General placement conventions for slurs RELATED LINKS Engraving Options dialog on page 476 General placement conventions for slurs There are different conventions for the placement, endpoint position, shape, and curvature direction of slurs in various contexts.
Slurs General placement conventions for slurs Changing the position of slurs relative to tie chains You can change the position of individual slurs relative to tie chains, including slurs starting on grace notes, for example, to save vertical space. PREREQUISITE If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the slurs whose position relative to tie chains you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2.
Slurs General placement conventions for slurs Due to the general placement conventions of grace notes, slurs in Dorico Pro appear below grace notes and curve downwards by default. Slurs starting from grace notes only appear above notes and curve upwards in up-stem voices in multiple-voice contexts.
Slurs General placement conventions for slurs Slur endpoint positions In order to avoid collisions, the default positions of slur endpoints vary depending on whether slurs are placed on the notehead side or stem side of notes, their position relative to staff lines, and whether articulations, ties, and other slurs exist at the same rhythmic position.
Slurs General placement conventions for slurs ● You can change the default placement of all articulations relative to slur endpoints projectwide in the Slurs section of the Articulations page in Engraving Options. Slur endpoints relative to ties and other slurs The default position of slur endpoints is 1/4 space above an existing slur that starts/ends on the same note.
Slurs General placement conventions for slurs Changing the shape of slurs on page 1348 Nested slurs on page 1340 Slur collision avoidance By default, Dorico Pro automatically adjusts the shape and position of slurs to avoid collisions with items under their arc.
Slurs General placement conventions for slurs Cross-staff and cross-voice slurs on page 1339 Accidentals on page 708 Enabling/Disabling slur collision avoidance You can allow or prevent individual slurs from automatically adjusting to avoid collisions, independently of your project-wide settings. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE ● Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox.
Slurs Slur styles Short slur spanning a large pitch range, without adjustment The same slur with some shape adjustment, making the curve smoother The same slur again with poor adjustment, making the curve too angular Default slur handle placement Slur handle placement to create the corresponding slur Slur handle placement to create the corresponding slur TIP When adjusting slur ends, you can achieve the best results using the following guidelines: ● The control point at the lower end of the slur doe
Slurs Slur styles Dashed Slurs appear as tapered dashed lines. Can be used to indicate an optional slur, for example, to recommend breathing/bowing patterns. Dotted Slurs appear as dotted lines. The dots are the same size and the same distance apart over the whole length of the slur. Half-dashed start The first halves of slurs appear as dashed lines, the second halves as solid lines. Used to denote that a slur was written incompletely in the source in critical editions.
Slurs Slur styles ● Solid ● Dashed ● Dotted ● Half-dashed start ● Half-dashed end ● Editorial RESULT The style of the selected slurs is changed. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Slurs Slur styles RELATED LINKS Project-wide engraving options for slurs on page 1325 Engrave toolbox on page 465 Changing the property scope on page 158 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 462 Changing the size of gaps in dashed/dotted slurs You can change the length of gaps in dashed/dotted slurs individually, independently of your project-wide settings. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains.
Slurs Slur curvature direction PREREQUISITE ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1. Select the slurs whose curvature style you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Curvature style in the Slurs group. 3.
Slurs Slur curvature direction Up Forces slurs to curve upwards, and appear above notes. Down Forces slurs to curve downwards, and appear below notes. Up/Down Forces slurs to comprise two segments: the first curves upwards, the second curves downwards to create a mirrored S-shape. It is typically used when phrases start in the lower staff and end in the upper staff, for example, in piano parts.
Slurs Cross-staff and cross-voice slurs 3. Choose one of the following options: ● Up ● Down ● Up/Down (mirrored S-shape) ● Down/Up (S-shape) RESULT The curvature direction of the selected slurs is changed. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. TIP ● You can adjust the precise shapes of slurs, and each slur segment, in Engrave mode using the handles on each slur.
Slurs Nested slurs By default, Dorico Pro adjusts cross-staff slurs to avoid collisions. You can change the collision avoidance of cross-staff slurs in the Avoiding Collisions section of the Slurs page in Engrave > Engraving Options.
Slurs Nested slurs ● Start note input. ● Select the notes you want to include in the outer slur. TIP ● If you only select a single note, the slur connects that note to the next note in the same voice on the staff. To input slurs between notes in different voices, you must select both notes, for example, by selecting the first note then Ctrl/Cmd -clicking the second.
Slurs Moving slurs rhythmically NOTE ● You can input the outer slur and inner slurs in any order as Dorico Pro automatically adjusts slurs so that shorter slurs are positioned within longer slurs, and ensures they do not collide. ● Slur collisions are not automatically avoided if you activate Disable auto curve adjustment in the Slurs group of the Properties panel for individual slurs.
Slurs Lengthening/Shortening slurs Lengthening/Shortening slurs You can change the length of slurs rhythmically after they have been input. NOTE You can only lengthen/shorten cross-staff slurs to notes on the same staff as the corresponding endpoint, and you can only lengthen/shorten cross-voice slurs to notes in the same voice as the corresponding endpoint. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the slurs you want to lengthen/shorten.
Slurs Linked slurs Linked slurs with the top slurs selected You can also manually link and unlink slurs. RELATED LINKS Inputting slurs on page 227 Unlinking slurs on page 1344 Linked dynamics on page 905 Disabling automatic linking of dynamics and slurs when pasting on page 370 Linking slurs together Dorico Pro automatically links slurs of the same duration at the same rhythmic positions together when you copy and paste slurs or material including slurs between staves, or enter them simultaneously.
Slurs Slur segments NOTE You cannot only unlink a single slur from the group. Slur segments A standard slur consists of one segment. You can make more elaborate shapes with slurs with multiple segments, for example, to allow you to create more complex slur shapes than are possible with a single curved segment. Adding more segments to a slur by default creates evenly spaced waves within its length. Therefore, having more segments makes each wave shorter.
Slurs Slurs in Engrave mode Changing the number of segments in individual slurs You can change the number of segments in individual slurs, for example, to allow you to create slurs with unusual shapes. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE ● Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1.
Slurs Slurs in Engrave mode 3 Slur height 4 Right control point 5 Right endpoint For example, moving the left endpoint moves the start of a slur, but the rest of the handles stay in their existing positions. However, moving the right control point also causes the slur height handle to move. This gives you fine control over the shape of slurs, while ensuring the end result remains curved and smooth.
Slurs Slurs in Engrave mode point causes the control point at the start/end of the next/previous segment to move the same amount in the opposite direction. This avoids tight corners, ensuring that multi-segment slurs are always as smoothly and symmetrically curved as possible. In multi-segment slurs, right control points are connected to the left control point in the adjacent segment. If there is no adjacent segment, the right/left control points next to the right/left endpoints can be moved independently.
Slurs Slurs in Engrave mode TIP You can show handles on all items, not just selected items, by choosing Engrave > Show Handles > Always. This can make it easier to select individual handles on multiple items. 2. Move the slurs or handles in any of the following ways: ● Press Alt/Opt-Right Arrow to move handles to the right. ● Press Alt/Opt-Left Arrow to move handles to the left. ● Press Alt/Opt-Up Arrow to move slurs or handles upwards. ● Press Alt/Opt-Down Arrow to move slurs or handles downwards.
Slurs Slurs in Engrave mode RELATED LINKS Slur height on page 1352 Slur shoulder offset on page 1353 Engrave toolbox on page 465 Changing the property scope on page 158 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 462 Changing the angle of slurs You can change the angle or rotation of individual slurs without affecting their overall shape. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains.
Slurs Slurs in Engrave mode EXAMPLE Slur with default angle Slur with changed angle RELATED LINKS Slurs over system and frame breaks on page 1330 Engrave toolbox on page 465 Changing the property scope on page 158 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 462 Changing the thickness of slurs You can change the thickness of individual slurs, including changing the thickness of the middle of slurs independently of the ends of slurs, independently of your project-wide settings.
Slurs Slur height Changing the property scope on page 158 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 462 Slur height The height of slurs determines how far above/below notes slurs extend vertically. You can change values for the heights of all slurs project-wide on the Slurs page in Engraving Options. You can also change the height of individual slurs in Engrave mode. Increasing the height of slurs makes them extend further from the staff.
Slurs Slur shoulder offset TIP You can show handles on all items, not just selected items, by choosing Engrave > Show Handles > Always. This can make it easier to select individual handles on multiple items. 2. Move the handles in any of the following ways: ● Press Alt/Opt-Up Arrow to move them upwards. ● Press Alt/Opt-Down Arrow to move them downwards.
Slurs Slur shoulder offset You can find options controlling the default shoulder offset of all slurs project-wide by clicking Advanced Options in the Design section of the Slurs page in Engrave > Engraving Options. There are separate settings for short, long, and flat slurs. You can adjust the shoulders of individual slurs in Engrave mode.
Slurs Slurs in playback TIP ● The following properties in the Slurs group of the Properties panel are activated automatically when you move the corresponding slur handles: ● Start handle offset moves the left control points of slurs. X moves them horizontally, Y moves them vertically. ● End handle offset moves the right control points of slurs. X moves them horizontally, Y moves them vertically.
Slurs Slurs in playback A phrase in an instrument staff The same phrase in the piano roll in Play mode RELATED LINKS Playback Options dialog on page 579 Played vs. notated note durations on page 682 Enabling independent voice playback on page 622 1356 Dorico Pro 3.5.
Staff labels Staff labels are used to identify staves in music containing multiple players, and are positioned to the left of systems, before the initial barline of each system. Staff labels indicate the instrument or instruments currently playing the music on the staff or staves to which they apply. It is usual to show instrument names in full in the staff labels for the first systems in each flow, and abbreviated instrument names in the staff labels of subsequent systems.
Staff labels Instrument names in staff labels NOTE Staff labels do not show all instruments held by players, for example, in the staff label for the first system. You should include a comprehensive instrumentation list that shows any doubling at the front of your score. Dorico Pro includes the instrument transposition, or instrument pitch, in staff labels for transposing instruments by default. Transposing instruments are instruments whose sounding pitch is different to the notated pitch.
Staff labels Staff label paragraph styles Edit Instrument Names dialog on page 141 Changing instrument names on page 140 Renaming layouts on page 139 Staff label paragraph styles Staff labels use paragraph styles to format their fonts, including their size, spacing, alignment, and other formatting options. When staff labels contain multiple separate parts, such as when the instrument name and instrument number have different vertical positions, you can format each part separately.
Staff labels Hiding/Showing staff labels TIP You can change the length of staff labels shown on systems for each layout independently on the Staves and Systems page in Setup > Layout Options.
Staff labels Hiding/Showing staff labels at system/frame breaks choosing the setting appropriate for the most flows in the layout, then changing the length of staff labels at other positions as required. ● You can change both full and short instrument names in the Edit Instrument Names dialog.
Staff labels Instrument transpositions in staff labels ● Signposts are shown for system/frame breaks. ● Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, select the system/frame break signposts at the positions where you want to hide/show staff labels. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Staff labels in the Format group. 3.
Staff labels Instrument transpositions in staff labels commonly shown with their transposition, also known as their “instrument pitch”, as part of their instrument name or layout name. Depending on the options set for Show transposition in the Edit Instrument Names dialog for each transposing instrument, they might show transpositions in staff labels even if you have hidden transpositions in staff labels in their layout.
Staff labels Instrument transpositions in staff labels RELATED LINKS Changing instrument names on page 140 Changing the position of instrument transpositions in full staff labels You can show instrument transpositions before/after instrument names in staff labels in each layout independently. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts whose instrument transposition position you want to change.
Staff labels Hiding/Showing instrument change labels at the start of flows Hiding/Showing instrument change labels at the start of flows You can hide/show instrument change labels at the start of each flow in each layout independently. These labels can be useful for players holding multiple instruments as a way of clarifying the instrument required in their part layouts, which do not normally show staff labels. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2.
Staff labels Changing the staff label numbering style EXAMPLE Each staff shown with a separate staff label Staff labels grouped between adjacent identical solo instruments RELATED LINKS Staff labels on condensed staves on page 1368 Changing the staff label numbering style You can change the staff label numbering style of solo and section players independently, for example, if you want solo players to use Arabic numerals, such as “2”, and section players to use Roman numerals, such as “II”. PROCEDURE 1.
Staff labels Showing vocal staff labels in uppercase/title case Showing vocal staff labels in uppercase/title case You can show the staff labels on vocal staves in uppercase letters or in title case. Many European publishers prefer vocal staves to have staff labels with capital letters, but this is not true of all publishers. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-E to open Engraving Options. 2. Click Staff Labels in the category list. 3.
Staff labels Staff labels on condensed staves Percussion kit presentation type Staff label Single-line instruments Multiple instrument names: one for each kit instrument, positioned beside the corresponding single-line staff. Example Staff labels for single-line instruments use the same font and paragraph style as used for standard instrument staff labels. You can change the player names, layout names, and instrument names of percussion kits in the same ways as for other players and instruments.
Staff labels Staff labels on condensed staves Staff labels on condensed brass staves Because condensing can change frequently, staff labels on condensed staves can vary from one system to another. The staff labels for condensed divisi staves reflect the divisions at the start of the system and show instrument names. You can choose to show divisi group names instead of instrument names and change how player numbers are stacked in staff labels on all condensed staves project-wide.
Staff labels Staff labels on condensed staves Changing number stacking in condensed staff labels You can change how player numbers on condensed staves are stacked, for example, if you always want them stacked vertically, including on systems where players are condensed into a single voice. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-E to open Engraving Options. 2. Click Staff Labels in the category list. 3.
Staves A staff is a line or group of lines on which musical notes are notated to indicate the pitch and rhythm of music. Pitched instruments use the traditional five-line staff and unpitched instruments often use a single-line staff. Notes are positioned on the lines and in the spaces on five-line staves, and can also use ledger lines above/below the staff to represent pitches that cannot fit on the staff.
Staves Changing the thickness of staff lines You can change other aspects of staves on the Staves and Systems page in Layout Options. For example, you can change which staff labels are shown on systems, indent the first system of each flow, and fix the number of bars included in each system. You can also select above which staves system objects appear, according to their instrument families.
Staves Extra staves NOTE You can only delete one staff at a time. 2. Choose Edit > Staff > Remove Staff. You can also choose this option from the context menu. RESULT The selected staff is deleted from the selected rhythmic position and a signpost appears indicating the staff change. The staff is deleted until the next staff change signpost that applies to that staff or the end of the flow, whichever comes first.
Staves Extra staves An extract of Debussy's piano prelude "Feuilles mortes" with three staves When you add extra staves, they exist for the whole flow. However, you can control exactly where they appear, as often extra staves are only needed for short sections. Extra staves can end immediately, and so are followed by white space until the end of the system, or can fill the width of the system, even if they do not contain music for part of the system.
Staves Extra staves RELATED LINKS Showing extra staves across whole systems on page 1377 Ossia staves on page 1378 Divisi on page 1390 Condensing on page 437 Voice-specific dynamics on page 888 Hiding/Showing empty staves on page 400 Adding extra staves You can add extra staves both above and below instruments that belong to solo players, and show them for both limited sections or for the entire flow. For example, some complex piano music requires three staves rather than two to display the music clearly.
Staves Extra staves EXAMPLE Piano with an extra staff added above the top staff in the second bar RELATED LINKS Ossia staves on page 1378 Hiding/Showing blank staves after final flows on page 403 Showing blank staves in frames on page 404 Moving the start/end positions of extra staves You can move the rhythmic start and end positions of extra staves after you have added them. Because you can move the start/end of extra staves independently, you can also lengthen/ shorten extra staves. PROCEDURE 1.
Staves Extra staves Showing extra staves across whole systems By default, extra staves are only shown from where they begin and until where they end. You can change this setting to that extra staves fill the full width of any system on which they appear instead, in each layout independently. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to show extra staves across the full width of systems.
Staves Ossia staves Ossia staves Ossia staves are smaller staves shown above/below the main staff of an instrument. They are used to show alternative phrases that can be played instead of the original phrase, such as suggestions for ornaments, alternative notations from other sources, or an easier version.
Staves Ossia staves Hiding/Showing ossia staves on page 1382 Changing the placement of system objects relative to ossia staves on page 1388 Condensing on page 437 Adding ossia staves You can add ossia staves for solo and section players, both above and below existing staves. For grand staff instruments, you can add two-staff ossias. NOTE ● You cannot add ossia staves to percussion kit instruments.
Staves Ossia staves NOTE When using the mouse, you can only move one staff change signpost rhythmically at a time. 2. 3. Move the selected staff change signposts according to the current rhythmic grid resolution in any of the following ways: ● Press Alt/Opt-Right Arrow to move them to the right. ● Press Alt/Opt-Left Arrow to move them to the left. ● Click and drag the ossia signpost to the right/left. Optional: Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the signposts at the other end of the ossia staves.
Staves Ossia staves RESULT The scale factor of ossia staves relative to the prevailing staff size is changed in all layouts project-wide. RELATED LINKS Staff size on page 416 Changing the padding on ossias that start/end mid-bar You can change how far staff lines extend beyond the left/right of ossia staves that begin/end in the middle of bars. Padding such ossia staves ensures that notes, accidentals, rhythm dots, and other items are always shown on staff lines. PROCEDURE 1.
Staves Ossia staves By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog. You can select other layouts by using the selection options in the action bar, Shift -clicking adjacent layouts, and Ctrl/Cmd -clicking individual layouts. 3. Click Staves and Systems in the category list. 4. In the Ossias and Extra Staves section, choose one of the following options for Ossias crossing a system break: 5.
Staves Ossia staves RESULT Ossias are shown in the selected layouts when Show ossias is activated, and hidden when it is deactivated. Deleting ossia staves You can remove ossia staves so they are no longer shown in any layout, but without automatically deleting the music on them. PROCEDURE 1. 2.
Staves Ossia staves NOTE When an ossia appears between the main staves of an instrument, for example, below the right-hand staff of a piano, then the ossia is joined with the same barline as the main staves, regardless of your chosen settings on the Barlines page in Engraving Options.
Staves System dividers 3. Click Staves and Systems in the category list. 4. In the Ossias and Extra Staves section, activate/deactivate Show label before ossia. 5. Optional: If you activated Show label before ossia, choose one of the following staff label options: ● Default ● Custom 6. Optional: If you chose Custom, enter the staff label you want into the Custom ossia label field. 7. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT Staff labels are hidden/shown in the selected layouts.
Staves System objects By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog. You can select other layouts by using the selection options in the action bar, Shift -clicking adjacent layouts, and Ctrl/Cmd -clicking individual layouts. 3. Click Staves and Systems in the category list. 4. In the System Dividers section, choose one of the following options for Show system dividers: ● When number of staves differs ● When minimum number of players present 5.
Staves System objects ● Repeat endings ● Repeat markers ● System text ● Tempo marks ● Time signatures shown above the staff ● Horizontal lines that apply to all staves System objects automatically appear at least once in all layouts. You can show system objects at multiple positions in each system by showing them above multiple instrument families. For example, you might show them above the woodwind, brass, percussion, and string families.
Staves System indents 6. ● Repeat endings ● Rehearsal marks Click Apply, then Close. RESULT System objects appear above the top staff in each bracketed group you select, provided a bracketed group for that instrument family is included in the selected layouts. If you activated options for Also show below bottom staff, the corresponding notations additionally appear below the bottom staff. NOTE System objects are only shown above instrument families that are bracketed or braced together.
Staves System indents A violin part with the first system indented In Dorico Pro, system indents automatically adjust to accommodate staff labels. For example, if a system contains a staff label that is significantly longer than the minimum system indent, Dorico Pro increases the indent on that system to ensure the staff label remains legible and is not cut off on the left edge or collides with the music.
Divisi Divisi is when players split, or “divide”, in order to play multiple lines of music, commonly for a limited passage, before returning to play together, or “tutti”. Divisi passages can be notated with all lines on a single staff or across multiple staves. Divisi is a technique most commonly used in orchestral string writing, as the string section typically contains a large number of players compared to the number of staves.
Divisi Change Divisi dialog TIP If you want to show the parts for multiple solo players on the same staff, you can use condensing. RELATED LINKS Unison ranges on page 1396 Extra staves on page 1373 Inputting notes into multiple voices on page 187 Condensing on page 437 Enabling/Disabling condensing on page 414 Change Divisi dialog The Change Divisi dialog allows you to change how section players are divided and change the appearance and grouping of staff labels.
Divisi Change Divisi dialog Shows any groups of divisions you have created. Grouping sections together gives you more flexibility in how the staves are labelled. 3 Divisions Shows each current individual division. Each division corresponds to a separate staff. 4 Action bar Contains options that allow you to change the number and arrangement of divisions. : Adds a solo staff. Dorico Pro automatically adds solo staves above ● Add Solo Division section staves.
Divisi Inputting divisi changes Divisi staff labels on page 1398 Hiding/Showing staff labels on page 1360 Hiding/Showing divisi section numbers in staff labels on page 1400 Inputting divisi changes You can input divisi changes on any section player staff. Divisi changes can last for any duration and include any number of staves. NOTE ● You cannot input divisi changes on staves belonging to solo players. If you want to notate music for a solo player across multiple staves, you can add extra staves instead.
Divisi Editing existing divisi changes RELATED LINKS Divisi staff labels on page 1398 Ending divisi passages on page 1395 Enabling/Disabling condensing on page 414 Condensing calculations and considerations on page 441 Staff labels on condensed staves on page 1368 Editing existing divisi changes You can edit divisi changes after you have input them, for example, if you want to add a solo line in addition to an existing section division. PROCEDURE 1.
Divisi Ending divisi passages NOTE When using the mouse, you can only move one divisi change signpost at a time. 2. 3. Move the divisi changes according to the current rhythmic grid resolution in any of the following ways: ● Press Alt/Opt-Right Arrow to move them to the right. ● Press Alt/Opt-Left Arrow to move them to the left. ● Click and drag the divisi change signpost to the right/left. Optional: Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the signposts at the other end of the divisi passages.
Divisi Unison ranges NOTE The number of staves in a system is defined by the first divisi change in the system. If you input a divisi change on a system with an existing divisi change, the number of staves is not changed to reflect the new divisi change until the next system. Unison ranges Unison ranges are passages of tutti music that are replicated automatically onto all staves when divisi passages start/end partway through systems.
Divisi Divisi on vocal staves Hiding/Showing unison range colors You can show unison ranges in a different color so you can identify those passages more easily. When unison range colors are shown, notes in unison ranges appear gray. Notes on the top staff remain black, as Dorico Pro notates real notes in tutti sections on the top staff in the section by default. PROCEDURE ● Choose View > Note And Rest Colors > Divisi Unison Ranges.
Divisi Divisi staff labels Arrows at the start and end of divisi passages on vocal staves are known in Dorico Pro as divide arrows. Dorico Pro shows these arrows on vocal staves by default, but you can also hide them on all staves project-wide. Hiding/Showing divide arrows on vocal staves You can hide/show divide arrows on all vocal staves project-wide. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-E to open Engraving Options. 2. Click Divisi in the category list. 3.
Divisi Divisi staff labels clarification. When editing divisi staff labels individually, you can also customize the font of each label in the divisi change. NOTE Changes made to staff labels in the Change Divisi dialog apply to all layouts. They also affect the text shown in any corresponding divisi change labels above staves, even if you had already changed the text shown in those labels. PROCEDURE 1.
Divisi Divisi staff labels Hiding/Showing divisi section numbers in staff labels You can hide/show divisi section numbers in staff labels before initial barlines in each layout independently. For example, you can show divisi section numbers in staff labels in part layouts but hide them in full score layouts. NOTE ● These steps only apply to divisi changes whose section numbers are set to Follow Options in the Change Divisi dialog.
Divisi Divisi change labels EXAMPLE Divisi section numbers and staff labels both shown Divisi section numbers hidden but staff labels shown RELATED LINKS Divisi staff labels on page 1398 Change Divisi dialog on page 1391 Hiding/Showing staff labels on page 1360 Divisi change labels Divisi change labels identify the divisions on each divisi staff. They are particularly useful when divisi changes occur partway through systems and the precise division of the section would otherwise be ambiguous.
Divisi Divisi change labels TIP Divisi change labels use the Player Labels paragraph style, which you can edit in the Paragraph Styles dialog. RELATED LINKS Paragraph Styles dialog on page 543 Player labels on page 454 Divisi staff labels on page 1398 Staff labels on condensed staves on page 1368 Changing the default to/unison indications on page 456 Editing divisi change labels You can show custom text in individual divisi change labels shown above staves.
Divisi Divisi in playback Hiding/Showing divisi change labels above staves You can hide/show section numbers above staves in divisi sections in each layout independently, for example, to clarify which staves correspond to sections in the divisi when divisi changes occur partway through systems, or to show a change in weighting between staves. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2.
Tablature Tablature is an alternative notation to the five-line staff, and is used for fretted instruments. On tablature, pitches are indicated by fret numbers positioned on lines, each of which represents a string on the instrument. As tablature is commonly used for guitars, it usually shows six lines.
Tablature Project-wide engraving options for tablature Guitar techniques on page 1131 Ties on page 1439 Trills on page 1082 Project-wide engraving options for tablature You can find options for the project-wide design of tablature notation on the Tablature and Staves pages in Engrave > Engraving Options. The options on the Tablature page allow you to change the default direction, position, and alignment of stems, the position of rhythm dots, and the enclosures for chords on tablature.
Tablature Hiding/Showing notation staves and tablature RELATED LINKS Inputting notes on tablature on page 198 Changing the placement of rhythm dots on tablature on page 1410 Hiding/Showing notation staves and tablature You can show notation staves only, tablature only, or both in each layout independently and for each player holding at least one fretted instrument independently.
Tablature Changing the allocated string for notes on tablature RELATED LINKS Players on page 97 Fretted instrument tuning on page 108 Inputting notes on tablature on page 198 Guitar bends on page 1114 Guitar techniques on page 1131 Hiding/Showing guitar techniques on notation staves and tablature on page 1137 Changing the allocated string for notes on tablature You can change the string to which individual notes are allocated on tablature manually, for example, if you input the notes on the notation staff
Tablature Hiding/Showing enclosures around notes on tablature EXAMPLE Default string allocation After changing the strings for some notes to reduce the distance between frets RELATED LINKS Inputting notes on tablature on page 198 Engrave toolbox on page 465 Hiding/Showing enclosures around notes on tablature You can hide/show enclosures around all chords on tablature that are a half note or longer, that is, durations shown with hollow noteheads on notation staves. PROCEDURE 1.
Tablature Hiding/Showing enclosures around notes on tablature EXAMPLE None Ellipse Rounded rectangle RELATED LINKS Showing notes as dead notes on page 1136 Hiding/Showing guitar techniques on notation staves and tablature on page 1137 Changing the shape of enclosures on single notes on tablature Single notes on tablature require different enclosure shapes to chords as their overall dimensions can be very different, such as double-digit fret numbers often being wider than their height.
Tablature Changing the placement of rhythm dots on tablature Changing the placement of rhythm dots on tablature By default, rhythm dots shown on tablature appear once per chord and are placed above the top string line. You can change their placement and show multiple rhythm dots next to notes. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-E to open Engraving Options. 2. Click Tablature in the category list. 3. In the Rhythm Dots section, choose one of the following options for Position of rhythm dots: 4.
Stems Stems are vertical lines that extend from noteheads that are a half note or shorter in duration. In combination with notehead design, they allow the duration of each note to be clearly identified. For example, quarter notes (crotchets) and eighth notes (quavers) both have solid black noteheads and stems, but eighth notes also have flags on their stems. 16th notes have two flags, 32nd notes have three flags, and so on.
Stems Stem direction RELATED LINKS Engraving Options dialog on page 476 Project-wide engraving options for tremolos on page 1478 Stem direction In Dorico Pro, the stem direction of notes and chords follows rules that are based on the conventions of music engraving. Stem direction is determined automatically, but you can manually change the stem direction of individual notes, chords, or of an entire voice. The rules that are applied depend on the following: ● How many voices are active on the staff.
Stems Stem direction notes in down-stem voices have down stems. This applies even when the stems of notes would normally point in the other direction, based on their position on the staff. NOTE The order in which notes appear between different up-stem voices and different down-stem voices depends on their pitch and your settings on the Voices page in Write > Notation Options. You can also change the voice column index of notes individually.
Stems Stem direction Beam groups in single voices The stem direction within beam groups is determined by the balance of notes within the beam group that are above/below the middle line of the staff. ● If the majority of notes in the beam group are above the middle line, stems in the beam group point downwards. ● If the majority of notes in the beam group are below the middle line, stems in the beam group point upwards.
Stems Stem direction 5. ● Up ● Down Click Apply, then Close. Changing the stem direction of notes You can manually change the stem direction of any note. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes whose stem direction you want to change.
Stems Stem direction EXAMPLE Stems pointing in the same direction but in different voices Stems in the same direction and in the same voice RELATED LINKS Changing the voice of existing notes on page 383 Engrave toolbox on page 465 Changing the property scope on page 158 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 462 Changing the default stem direction of voices You can change the default stem direction of voices after they have been input, including slash voices.
Stems Stem length Removing stem direction changes You can remove changes to the directions of stems and revert stems to their default directions. PREREQUISITE If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes whose stem direction changes you want to remove. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. Choose Edit > Stem > Remove Forced Stem. You can also choose this option from the context menu.
Stems Hiding stems ● Press Alt/Opt-Down Arrow to make stems shorter. NOTE If you want to lengthen/shorten stems by larger increments, you can press Ctrl/Cmd as well as the standard key command, for example, Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-Up Arrow . ● Click and drag the square handles at the end of the stems upwards/downwards. RESULT The selected stems are lengthened/shortened, regardless of their stem direction.
Stems Erasing the background of stems crossed by hairpins RELATED LINKS Engrave toolbox on page 465 Lengthening/Shortening stems on page 1417 Erasing the background of stems crossed by hairpins You can erase the backgrounds of all stems project-wide that are crossed by hairpins. This can aid legibility in tightly spaced scores and allow hairpins closer to the staff. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-E to open Engraving Options. 2. Click Notes in the category list. 3.
Tempo marks Tempo marks indicate how fast music is played, often with a combination of text instructions and metronome marks. They are also known as “tempo changes”, “tempo indications”, and “tempo markings”. A tempo mark can show text instructions, a metronome mark, or a combination of the two.
Tempo marks Project-wide engraving options for tempo marks Time track on page 609 Input methods for tempo marks on page 246 Positions of tempo marks on page 1424 System objects on page 1386 Changing the positions of system objects on page 1387 Changing the tempo mode on page 625 Project-wide engraving options for tempo marks You can find options for the project-wide appearance of tempo marks on the Tempo page in Engrave > Engraving Options.
Tempo marks Tempo mark components RELATED LINKS Metronome marks on page 1430 Gradual tempo changes on page 1433 Tempo equations on page 1437 Input methods for tempo marks on page 246 Tempo panel on page 249 Tempo popover on page 246 Tempo mark font styles on page 1429 Tempo mark components Tempo mark components include text, metronome marks, parentheses, and approximate indications.
Tempo marks Tempo mark components Components for gradual tempo changes The following components only apply to gradual tempo changes, such as rallentando: Poco a poco Poco a poco text is shown immediately after gradual tempo change text when the checkbox beside the property is activated.
Tempo marks Positions of tempo marks PREREQUISITE If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the gradual tempo changes to which you want to add poco a poco text. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Poco a poco in the Tempo group. RESULT Poco a poco text is shown immediately after the text in the selected gradual tempo changes.
Tempo marks Positions of tempo marks RELATED LINKS Project-wide engraving options for tempo marks on page 1421 System objects on page 1386 Changing the positions of system objects on page 1387 Moving tempo marks rhythmically You can move tempo marks to new rhythmic positions after they have been input. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the tempo marks you want to move. NOTE When using the mouse, you can only move one tempo mark at a time. 2.
Tempo marks Positions of tempo marks ● Individual start/end handles of gradual tempo changes TIP You can show handles on all items, not just selected items, by choosing Engrave > Show Handles > Always. This can make it easier to select individual handles on multiple items. 2. Move the tempo marks or handles in any of the following ways: ● To move tempo marks or handles to the right, press Alt/Opt-Right Arrow . ● To move tempo marks or handles to the left, press Alt/Opt-Left Arrow .
Tempo marks Changing tempo text Changing the end position of gradual tempo changes relative to barlines You can change how the ends of individual gradual tempo change continuations are positioned relative to barlines, independently of your project-wide setting. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. NOTE This does not affect the appearance of gradual tempo changes with the text-only style.
Tempo marks Changing tempo text 2. In the Properties panel, enter the tempo text you want into the Text field in the Tempo group. 3. Press Return . RESULT The tempo text for the selected tempo marks is changed. TIP You can also change the tempo text by opening the tempo popover and changing the entry.
Tempo marks Tempo mark font styles Tempo mark font styles There are different font styles for different types of tempo marks and tempo mark components. You can change different aspects of these fonts in the Edit Font Styles dialog, such as changing their font size to make tempo marks appear larger. The following fonts are used for tempo marks: 1 Gradual Tempo Text Font: Used for gradual tempo changes, such as "rallentando". 2 Immediate Tempo Text Font: Used for absolute tempo changes, such as “Adagio”.
Tempo marks Deleting tempo marks RELATED LINKS Changing the type and appearance of absolute tempo changes on page 1423 Signposts on page 377 Engrave toolbox on page 465 Deleting tempo marks You can delete tempo marks, which resets the tempo for playback to the previous tempo mark or the default tempo if there is no previous tempo mark. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the tempo marks or the signposts of tempo marks you want to delete. 2. Press Backspace or Delete .
Tempo marks Metronome marks Tempo mark font styles on page 1429 Time track on page 609 Changing the metronome mark value You can change the metronome mark value of individual absolute tempo marks after they have been input, including changing the beat unit. NOTE These steps do not apply to gradual tempo changes or reset/relative tempo marks. PREREQUISITE If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1.
Tempo marks Metronome marks PROCEDURE 1. Select the absolute tempo marks whose metronome mark values you want to show as a range. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Tempo range (bpm) in the Tempo group. 3. Change the value in the value field. RESULT The tempo range, expressed as beats per minute, is changed for the selected tempo marks. By default, metronome mark ranges use a dash separator.
Tempo marks Gradual tempo changes PROCEDURE 1. Select the gradual tempo changes whose final tempo you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, change the value for Final tempo % in the Tempo group. 3. Press Return . RESULT The final tempo at the end of the selected gradual tempo changes is changed. For example, if you change the value to 20 on a gradual tempo change that started at 100 bpm, the final tempo is 20% of 100 bpm, which is 20 bpm.
Tempo marks Gradual tempo changes RELATED LINKS Input methods for tempo marks on page 246 Project-wide engraving options for tempo marks on page 1421 Changing the line style of gradual tempo changes on page 1435 Changing the final tempo at the end of gradual tempo changes on page 1432 Tempo mark font styles on page 1429 Lengthening/Shortening gradual tempo changes You can lengthen/shorten gradual tempo changes rhythmically after they have been input. PROCEDURE 1.
Tempo marks Gradual tempo changes 2. In the Properties panel, activate Gradual style in the Tempo group. 3. Select one of the following options from the menu: ● rit. ● rit... ● rit-e-nu-to RESULT The style of the selected gradual tempo changes is changed. NOTE ● Only gradual tempo changes with valid full text appear separated into syllables, for example, ritenuto or accelerando.
Tempo marks Gradual tempo changes 3. Select one of the following options from the menu: ● Solid ● Dotted ● Dashed RESULT The line style of the selected gradual tempo changes is changed. TIP You can change the default line style of all gradual tempo changes project-wide on the Tempo page in Engrave > Engraving Options.
Tempo marks Tempo equations For example, you can change the default dash length for dashed lines following text and dashed lines between hyphenated text separately. RELATED LINKS Engrave toolbox on page 465 Changing the property scope on page 158 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 462 Changing the line thickness of gradual tempo changes You can change the thickness of dashed and solid lines in gradual tempo changes individually, independently of your project-wide settings.
Tempo marks Tempo equations RELATED LINKS Input methods for tempo marks on page 246 1438 Dorico Pro 3.5.
Ties A tie is a curved line that joins two notes of the same pitch. When notes are longer than the maximum duration of a bar in the prevailing time signature, they automatically appear in Dorico Pro as tie chains, that is, a sequence of adjacent notes joined with ties. Each sequence of ties, whether they join two notes or ten notes together, represents a single note with the duration of all the tied notes combined.
Ties General placement conventions for ties ● When you tie existing notes together, they might be consolidated into fewer or more notes within a tie chain, depending on the musical context, the time signature, and the position of the start of the note in the bar. ● Articulations can only appear once on each tie chain, either at the start or the end, depending on the type of articulation. For example, staccato marks appear at the end whereas accents appear at the start.
Ties General placement conventions for ties For both conventions, Dorico Pro automatically positions the ends of ties as close as possible to the notes that they join while avoiding collisions with other notations. The vertical placement of ties is also automatically adjusted in Dorico Pro so that neither of the end points of ties, nor the apex of tie curves, starts or ends on a staff line. If this happens, it can cause the shape of ties to appear distorted, which makes the music harder to read.
Ties Project-wide engraving options for ties Project-wide engraving options for ties You can find options for the project-wide appearance, position, and placement of ties on the Ties page in Engrave > Engraving Options. The options on the Ties page allow you to change the default curvature direction, shape, and appearance of ties, and the position of ties relative to noteheads and other ties in tie chains.
Ties Tie styles Dashed Ties appear as tapered dashed lines. Can be used to denote optional or suggested ties, for example, in vocal music where some verses have more syllables than others and therefore require more notes. Dotted Ties appear as dotted lines. The dots are the same size and the same distance apart over the whole length of the tie. Can also be used to denote optional or suggested ties. Half-dashed start The first halves of ties appear as dashed lines, the second halves as solid lines.
Ties Tie styles ● Any changes to tie chains in Write mode only affect the first tie in the chain. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Style in the Ties group. 3. Select one of the following options from the menu: ● Solid ● Dashed ● Dotted ● Half-dashed start ● Half-dashed end ● Editorial RESULT The style of the selected ties is changed. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Ties Tie styles 2. In the Properties panel, activate Dash/dot in the Ties group. 3. Change the value in the value field. RESULT Increasing the value makes dashes/dots bigger, decreasing the value makes dashes/dots smaller. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Ties Tie curvature direction RELATED LINKS Engrave toolbox on page 465 Erasing the background of time signatures on page 1475 Tie curvature direction The direction of tie curvatures is determined by the stem direction of the notes/chords at each end of the tie, the number of notes in chords at each end, and the number of voices on the staff.
Ties Non-standard ties PROCEDURE 1. Select the ties whose curvature direction you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. NOTE ● In Write mode, you can only select whole tie chains. In Engrave mode, you can select individual ties within tie chains. ● Any changes to tie chains in Write mode only affect the first tie in the chain. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Direction in the Ties group. 3.
Ties Non-standard ties The start of a tie chain before a system break The end of the same tie chain after a system break Tied notes with accidentals across system breaks and page breaks The ends of ties for tied notes with accidentals across system breaks and page breaks are also automatically positioned. As tied notes in Dorico Pro are treated as one note notated to fit in time signatures, cautionary accidentals at the start of new systems/frames are not shown by default.
Ties Hiding/Showing laissez vibrer ties Notes leading into a chord notated Notes leading into a chord notated Multiple grace notes before a as a series of tied chords as tied non-adjacent notes chord with ties between nonadjacent notes Ties between different voices You can input ties between notes of the same pitch in different voices belonging to the same instrument.
Ties Deleting ties TIP ● You can edit the length and shape of laissez vibrer ties individually like any other tie in Engrave mode. You can also change the default minimum length of all laissez vibrer ties project-wide in the Length section of the Ties page in Engrave > Engraving Options. ● You can assign a key command for Toggle Laissez Vibrer Tie on the Key Commands page in Preferences.
Ties Splitting tie chains Splitting tie chains You can split tie chains at specified positions, for example, if you want to change the pitch halfway through a tie chain or delete individual ties within tie chains. This does not remove any other ties in the tie chain. NOTE If you want to split ties because Dorico Pro notated notes differently than you expected, you can change the default note and rest grouping settings according to different meters.
Ties Changing the shape/angle of ties can affect the position of neighboring handles. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. A tie in Engrave mode Handles on ties behave differently to slurs. For example, moving the left endpoint moves both the start of a tie and the other handles apart from the right endpoint. This allows you to change the angle and/or width of the tie without changing its overall shape.
Ties Tie shoulder offset TIP The following properties in the Ties group of the Properties panel are activated automatically when you move the corresponding tie handles: ● Start offset moves the left endpoints of ties. X moves them horizontally, Y moves them vertically. ● End offset moves the right endpoints of ties. X moves them horizontally, Y moves them vertically. ● Start handle offset moves the left control points of ties. X moves them horizontally, Y moves them vertically.
Ties Tie shoulder offset Changing the shoulder offset of ties You can change the shoulder offset of individual ties, independently of your project-wide settings. For example, you might want to change the shoulder offset of a few very short or very long ties in your project to improve their shape. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE ● Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox.
Ties Tie height ● End handle offset moves the right control points of ties. X moves them horizontally, Y moves them vertically. You can also use these properties to change the shoulder offset of individual ties by changing the values in the value fields. Deactivating the properties resets the corresponding handles on the selected ties to their default positions.
Ties Tie height PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, select the tie height (middle) handle of the ties whose height you want to change. TIP You can show handles on all items, not just selected items, by choosing Engrave > Show Handles > Always. This can make it easier to select individual handles on multiple items. 2. Move the handles in any of the following ways: ● Press Alt/Opt-Up Arrow to move them upwards. ● Press Alt/Opt-Down Arrow to move them downwards.
Time signatures Time signatures indicate the meter of music, and apply to all bars from where they first appear until a subsequent change of time signature. Meter describes the rhythmic pulse of music, and its division into beats and bars. A time signature is made up of two parts: numerator on top, and denominator underneath. These are the same mathematical terms as are used for fractions due to their similar arrangement.
Time signatures General conventions for time signatures A 5/8 time signature input before an existing 4/4 time signature without Insert mode activated, leaving only three eighth note beats in the second 5/8 bar.
Time signatures Project-wide engraving options for time signatures Large time signatures on page 1463 Changing the size and position of time signatures on page 1464 Time signature font styles on page 1475 Project-wide engraving options for time signatures You can find options for the project-wide appearance of time signatures, including large time signatures, on the Time Signatures page in Engrave > Engraving Options.
Time signatures Types of time signatures Compound In compound time signatures, each beat is divided by three into equal groups of dotted notes, such as 6/8, which contains two dotted quarter note beats, or 9/4, which contains three dotted half note beats. Irregular Irregular time signatures, such as 5/4 or 7/8, cannot be subdivided into equal beat groups. Because the numerator is odd, these time signatures must be divided into unequal beat groups.
Time signatures Pick-up bars Aggregate An aggregate time signature shows two or more meters within the same bar, such as 2/4+3/8+5/4. Dorico Pro automatically shows dashed barlines to indicate the divisions between the different meters, but you can also specify that you do not want to show dashed barlines when you input aggregate time signatures with the popover. Open An open time signature has no restrictions on meter, beaming, or beats. Any number of notes can be added, with any beaming.
Time signatures Pick-up bars Because pick-up bars are linked to the number of notes/rests in the music, in Dorico Pro they are linked to time signatures and so you must input pick-up bars as part of time signatures. However, you can hide time signatures you do not want to show in the music.
Time signatures Large time signatures EXAMPLE Irregular bar defined as pick-up into common time Irregular bar defined as normal irregular bar, not a pick-up Large time signatures Large time signatures are scaled-up time signatures that appear much larger than normal relative to the staff size. They can be helpful in orchestral scores, as the smaller staff size in such scores means standard time signatures are small and harder for conductors to read.
Time signatures Large time signatures Therefore, we recommend that you use one of the narrow designs in layouts that show large time signatures on bracketed groups. Time signatures shown at system object positions Similar to showing large time signatures once per bracketed group, you can also show time signatures only at system object positions and above the staff.
Time signatures Time signature styles 4. 5. Choose one of the following options for Time signature position and size: ● Show on every staff ● Show once per bracket ● Show at system object positions Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The size and position of time signatures in the selected layouts is changed.
Time signatures Time signature styles Number denominator Note denominator (beat length) Note denominator (note duration) None denominator Open meter styles Open time signatures can be shown as an X, Penderecki’s symbol, or be hidden with no symbol. No symbol open time signatures are indicated by signposts. X open style Penderecki’s symbol open style No symbol open style Interchangeable time signature separator styles Interchangeable time signatures can have different separator styles.
Time signatures Time signature styles PREREQUISITE If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the time signatures whose numerator style you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Numerator style in the Time Signatures group. 3. Choose one of the following options: ● Number ● Beat group RESULT The numerator style of the selected time signatures is changed.
Time signatures Time signature styles Changing the open meter style of time signatures You can change the open meter style of individual time signatures, independently of your project-wide setting. PREREQUISITE If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the open meter time signatures whose style you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode.
Time signatures Positions of time signatures NOTE In the Properties panel, Separator in the Time Signatures group is automatically activated for interchangeable time signatures. 2. Select one of the following options from the Separator menu: ● Parentheses ● Brackets ● Equals sign ● Slash ● Space ● Hyphen RESULT The separator style of the selected interchangeable time signatures is changed.
Time signatures Positions of time signatures You can change the default positions of all time signatures project-wide, including both their horizontal and vertical positions, on the Spacing Gaps and Time Signatures pages in Engrave > Engraving Options. You can also change the position of time signatures in each layout independently, for example, if you want to show time signatures above the staff and at system object positions in some layouts but only once per bracket in other layouts.
Time signatures Positions of time signatures Moving time signatures graphically You can move individual time signatures to new graphical positions without affecting the positions of any other items. NOTE ● These steps do not apply to time signatures shown at system object positions. ● You cannot move time signatures shown at the start of systems. You can only move time signature changes that occur partway through systems or at the end of systems. PROCEDURE 1.
Time signatures Positions of time signatures Moving time signatures shown at system object positions graphically You can move time signatures shown at system object positions graphically, in different ways to moving other time signatures graphically. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. NOTE ● These steps do not apply to time signatures shown on staves.
Time signatures Hiding/Showing time signatures RELATED LINKS Changing the size and position of time signatures on page 1464 Hiding bar numbers at time signatures shown at system object positions on page 755 System objects on page 1386 Changing the positions of system objects on page 1387 Project-wide engraving options for time signatures on page 1459 Engrave toolbox on page 465 Changing the property scope on page 158 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 462 Changing the position
Time signatures Changing the design of time signatures RESULT The selected time signatures are hidden in all layouts when Hide time signature is activated, and shown when it is deactivated. Signposts are shown at the position of each hidden time signature. However, signposts are not printed by default. NOTE ● Hidden time signatures do not take up any horizontal space, so hiding/showing time signatures affects note spacing.
Time signatures Erasing the background of time signatures RESULT The design of time signatures in the selected layouts is changed. If you choose Plain font, time signatures use a different font style than the one used for the other options. Time signature font styles Different time signature designs use different font styles. You can edit the formatting of fonts used for time signatures in the Edit Font Styles dialog.
Time signatures Deleting time signatures EXAMPLE Time signatures with non-erased backgrounds Time signatures with erased backgrounds RELATED LINKS Ties on page 1439 Types of time signatures on page 1459 Large time signatures on page 1463 Erasing the background of dynamics on page 882 Erasing the background of text playing techniques on page 1192 Deleting time signatures You can delete time signatures without affecting the relative rhythmic positions of notes. PROCEDURE 1. 2.
Tremolos Tremolos are thick, slanted lines that cross individual stems or are positioned between multiple stems. They are used to indicate that notes are repeated, either individually or in sequences of multiple notes. Using tremolo strokes instead of notating each notehead can save horizontal space and make fast passages easier to read. The number of tremolo strokes indicates both how many times notes are repeated and how fast they are.
Tremolos Project-wide engraving options for tremolos Measured tremolos The number of tremolo strokes corresponds to a precise rhythm in the prevailing tempo and meter. Unmeasured tremolos There is no link between the number of strokes and rhythm. Instead, unmeasured tremolos are played as fast as possible, whatever the tempo. Unmeasured tremolos often use three or more tremolo strokes, and can also be accompanied by a “trem.” text indication.
Tremolos Tremolos in tie chains You can change the default positions of all tremolo strokes project-wide on the Tremolos page in Engrave > Engraving Options. RELATED LINKS Moving tremolo strokes on page 1482 Project-wide engraving options for tremolos on page 1478 Tremolos in tie chains By default, all notes in tie chains are shown with tremolo strokes when single-note tremolos are added to tie chains. Deleting tremolo strokes from tied notes removes tremolo strokes from all notes in tie chains.
Tremolos Changing the speed of tremolos EXAMPLE The default number of tremolo strokes in a tie chain where the second note is longer than the first. The number of tremolo strokes on the second note has been changed to match the first. RELATED LINKS Engrave toolbox on page 465 Changing the speed of tremolos on page 1480 Input methods for repeats and tremolos on page 343 Changing the speed of tremolos You can change the speed of tremolos after they have been input by changing the number of strokes.
Tremolos Deleting tremolos 2. Click Tremolos in the category list. 3. In the Multi-note Tremolos section, choose one of the following options for Appearance of half note (minim) tremolos: 4. ● All lines join stems ● Outermost line joins stems ● No lines join stems Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The appearance of all multi-note half note tremolos project-wide is changed.
Tremolos Rhythmic positions of notes with tremolos EXAMPLE Notes with single-note tremolos and multi-note tremolo Notes with multi-note tremolo deleted but single-note tremolos remain Notes with both multi-note tremolo and single-note tremolos deleted Rhythmic positions of notes with tremolos You can move notes with single-note tremolos and multi-note tremolos to new rhythmic positions in the same ways as normal notes.
Tremolos Tremolos in playback ● Press Alt/Opt-Up Arrow to move them upwards. ● Press Alt/Opt-Down Arrow to move them downwards. TIP If you want to move handles by larger increments, you can press Ctrl/Cmd as well as the standard key command, for example, Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-Up Arrow . ● Click and drag them upwards/downwards. RESULT The selected tremolo strokes are moved upwards/downwards. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Tremolos Tremolos in playback For example, if the option is set to require three tremolo strokes, an eighth note with two tremolo strokes is played as unmeasured, because the single beam of the eighth note is included in the calculation. You can also specify the default length of notes in unmeasured tremolos. You express the duration of notes as a fraction of the length of a quarter note played at 120 quarters per minute in the Tremolos section.
Tuplets Tuplets indicate where a beat is divided into a different number of subdivisions than is usually expected according to the current meter. They can be used to fit more notes or fewer notes in a beat than usually exist in a beat, according to the usual pattern of subdivision.
Tuplets Project-wide engraving options for tuplets The horizontal position of tuplet brackets should allow it to be immediately obvious which notes are included in the bracket. They should not extend so far that notes following the tuplet appear to be included. A tuplet clearly showing the three quarter notes included in the triplet. With an extended tuplet bracket, the duration of the triplet is now unclear.
Tuplets Turning existing notes into tuplets NOTE You can skip steps 3 and 4 if you are inputting nested tuplets into existing tuplets. 5. Press ; to open the tuplets popover again. 6. Enter the ratio for the inner tuplet into the popover. For example, enter 5:4. 7. Press Return to close the popover and enter the inner tuplet. 8. Enter or play in the pitches you want. 9.
Tuplets Turning tuplets into normal notes RELATED LINKS Tuplets popover on page 209 Inputting tuplets on page 208 Turning tuplets into normal notes You can turn any existing tuplets notes into normal notes, for example, if you want to turn tuplet eighth notes into standard eighth notes. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select just the brackets, numbers/ratios, or signposts of the tuplets you want to turn into normal notes. NOTE You must not select any of the noteheads in the tuplets. 2.
Tuplets Moving tuplets rhythmically EXAMPLE A 16th note sextuplet across a barline, notated as two triplets The same sextuplet allowed to span the barline and beamed together AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can beam notes in the selected tuplets together.
Tuplets Deleting tuplets NOTE ● If Chords is not activated and any of your selected notes collide with other notes in the same staff and at the same rhythmic position that are in the same voice as your selected notes, the existing notes are deleted and replaced with your selected notes. You can undo moving notes immediately, which restores any notes deleted in the process. ● Tuplets are not automatically adjusted at the mid-point of bars, where it is convention to split tuplets to show the beat division.
Tuplets Tuplet beams Tuplet beams Tuplet beams join notes in tuplets that can be joined with beams just like non-tuplet beams. You can make the same changes to tuplet beams that you can make to any other beam.
Tuplets Tuplet brackets PROCEDURE 1. 2. In Engrave mode, select any of the following that you want to move: ● Tuplet numbers/ratios ● Whole tuplet brackets ● Individual handles on tuplet brackets Move the tuplet brackets, tuplet numbers/ratios, or handles in any of the following ways: ● Press Alt/Opt-Right Arrow to move handles to the right. ● Press Alt/Opt-Left Arrow to move handles to the left. ● Press Alt/Opt-Up Arrow to move handles, whole brackets, and tuplet numbers/ratios upwards.
Tuplets Tuplet brackets Changing the property scope on page 158 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 462 Hiding/Showing tuplet brackets You can hide/show tuplet brackets independently of tuplet numbers/ratios. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties.
Tuplets Tuplet brackets ● 2. The end corner handle Move the handles in any of the following ways: ● Press Alt/Opt-Right Arrow to move them to the right. ● Press Alt/Opt-Left Arrow to move them to the left. ● Press Alt/Opt-Up Arrow to move them upwards. ● Press Alt/Opt-Down Arrow to move them downwards. TIP If you want to move handles by larger increments, you can press Ctrl/Cmd as well as the standard key command, for example, Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-Left Arrow . ● 3.
Tuplets Tuplet brackets RESULT The placement of the selected tuplet brackets is changed. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. TIP ● Deactivating Placement returns the selected tuplets to their default placement. ● You can also switch selected tuplets between being above/below the staff or cross-staff above/cross-staff below by pressing F .
Tuplets Tuplet numbers/ratios Changing the property scope on page 158 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 462 Forcing tuplet brackets to be horizontal You can change the angle of individual tuplet brackets so that they appear horizontal, independently of your project-wide setting. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox.
Tuplets Tuplet numbers/ratios brackets. It is not shown if you select notes within the tuplet, or notes within the tuplet and the tuplet number/ratio or bracket. RELATED LINKS Changing the font used for tuplet numbers/ratios on page 1498 Hiding/Showing tuplet numbers/ratios You can hide/show tuplet numbers/ratios individually. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains.
Tuplets Tuplet numbers/ratios Changing the position of tuplet numbers/ratios You can change the horizontal positions of tuplet numbers and ratios in individual tuplet brackets, independently of your project-wide setting. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1.
Tuplets Tuplet numbers/ratios 4. ● Regular weight ● Plain font Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The font used for tuplet numbers/ratios project-wide is changed. ● Bold weight and Regular weight are both based on the Tuplet Font style, which must be SMuFL-compliant. ● Plain font uses the Tuplet Plain Font style, which can be any text font. TIP You can edit different aspects of the Tuplet Plain Font style, such as its font size, in the Edit Font Styles dialog.
Unpitched percussion The term “unpitched percussion” covers all percussion instruments that are not tuned to specific pitches. This includes instruments such as bass drum, guiro, maracas, cymbals, and shakers. Dorico Pro provides comprehensive support for unpitched percussion notation, with flexible options for combining music for multiple instruments into percussion kits that can then be displayed differently in different layouts.
Unpitched percussion Percussion kits and drum sets NOTE Kit instruments in player cards in the Players panel in Setup mode are colored green, whereas individual percussion instruments not part of percussion kits are colored the same light blue as all other instruments. Percussion kits and drum sets A percussion kit is a collection of unpitched percussion instruments that are played by a single player. Drum sets are a particular type of percussion kit that are often used in pop and rock music.
Unpitched percussion Percussion kits and drum sets Exporting percussion kits You can export percussion kits as .doricolib files. This allows you to use kits again without having to create them from scratch. PROCEDURE 1. In the Players panel in Setup mode, expand the card of the player whose percussion kit you want to export. 2. Click the arrow that appears in the kit instrument label when you hover over it and choose Edit Percussion Kit to open the Edit Percussion Kit dialog. 3.
Unpitched percussion Per-flow notation options for unpitched percussion Per-flow notation options for unpitched percussion You can find options for how notes in percussion kits are notated in each flow independently on the Percussion page in Notation Options. For example, you can choose to notate all notes in a percussion kit in a single voice rather than in multiple voices.
Unpitched percussion Notations on notes in percussion kits a snare drum and tom-tom note are at the same rhythmic position, and you add an accent, the accent is added to both instruments because they are both shown in the same down-stem voice by default. You can see the accent applied to each note if you switch to the single-line instruments presentation type. Tuplets When working in the grid and five-line staff kit presentation types, tuplets are added to all instruments in the same voice.
Unpitched percussion Percussion kit presentation types Inputting lyrics on page 331 Dynamics in percussion kits Unlike other items, dynamics are not shared between the grid/five-line staff presentation types and the single-line instruments presentation type. Any dynamics added to instruments in the single-line instruments presentation type do not appear when you switch to grid/five-line presentations.
Unpitched percussion Percussion kit presentation types The numbers down the right-hand side of the editing area in the Edit Percussion Kit dialog correspond to the number of staff spaces between each instrument line. By default, all instruments in a grid are two spaces apart. The order in which the instruments are listed matches the order in which they appear in the score.
Unpitched percussion Playing techniques for unpitched percussion instruments 3. Click Players in the category list. 4. In the Percussion section, choose one of the following options for each percussion kit in your project: 5. ● 5-line Staff ● Grid ● Single-line Instruments Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The presentation type is changed for the selected percussion kits in the selected layouts.
Unpitched percussion Playing techniques for unpitched percussion instruments Percussion Instrument Playing Techniques dialog The Percussion Instrument Playing Techniques dialog allows you to edit the set of playing technique-specific noteheads defined for each unpitched percussion instrument.
Unpitched percussion Playing techniques for unpitched percussion instruments EXAMPLE Three different snare drum playing technique-specific noteheads followed by two clash cymbal playing technique-specific noteheads All of these settings are saved in the percussion instrument within your project, and you can export them from one project and import them into others. NOTE Overrides for articulations and tremolos are not currently reflected in playback, but this is planned for future versions.
Unpitched percussion Playing techniques for unpitched percussion instruments The Override Percussion Noteheads dialog comprises the following: 1 Instrument name Displays the name of the percussion instrument whose noteheads are listed in the dialog. 2 Playing techniques table Contains the noteheads for the selected percussion instrument, arranged into the following columns: ● Playing Technique: Displays the playing technique associated with the notehead in the corresponding row of the table.
Unpitched percussion Playing techniques for unpitched percussion instruments PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the notes whose playing technique-specific notehead you want to change. NOTE If you select a single note in percussion kits, the current playing technique is shown above the rhythmic grid. It is not shown if you select multiple notes. 2.
Unpitched percussion Playing techniques for unpitched percussion instruments 3. Select the playing technique you want to create in the dialog that opens. 4. Click OK to add the selected playing technique to the playing technique-specific noteheads list. 5. Select the notehead you want for the playing technique from the Notehead set menu. NOTE Leave Notehead set as (Unset) to use the default notehead set as defined on the Notes page in Engrave > Engraving Options. 6.
Unpitched percussion Percussion legends NOTE This does not affect the appearance of playing technique-specific noteheads in grid and singleline instrument kit presentation types. RELATED LINKS Override Percussion Noteheads dialog on page 1509 Percussion legends Percussion legends list the percussion instruments in use when using the five-line presentation type.
Unpitched percussion Percussion legends Adding percussion legends to five-line staff kit presentations You can add percussion legends at specific rhythmic positions to indicate the instruments in the kit. Percussion legends can show all instruments in the kit or only instruments sounding within the specified range. NOTE Percussion legends only appear when kits use the five-line staff percussion kit presentation type and in the layout in which they were added.
Unpitched percussion Percussion legends NOTE Key commands lengthen/shorten items by moving their end only. ● Click and drag the circular handle at the start/end to the right/left. RESULT The rhythmic range covered by the selected sounding instrument percussion legend is changed according to the current rhythmic grid resolution. The instruments included in the percussion legend are automatically updated to reflect the instruments playing within the range.
Unpitched percussion Voices in percussion kits PROCEDURE 1. Select the percussion legends whose instrument name lengths you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Use short names in the Percussion Legends group. RESULT Short instrument names are shown in the selected percussion legends. Deactivating Use short names returns the selected percussion legends to showing full instrument names.
Unpitched percussion Voices in percussion kits You can also override this option for individual percussion kits, and for individual notes in percussion kits. Notes in the same voice cannot be notated using different durations and are notated using ties by default instead. You can eliminate the use of ties by choosing to truncate longer notes so that only their onsets appear on the Percussion page in Notation Options.
Unpitched percussion Unpitched percussion in Play mode Specifying the stem direction/voice of instruments in percussion kits You can specify the stem direction for each instrument in individual percussion kits. You can also set which voice they are in, allowing you to control which instruments share voices in percussion kits. PROCEDURE 1. In the Players panel in Setup mode, expand the card of the player holding the kit whose instrument stem directions and voices you want to specify. 2.
Unpitched percussion Unpitched percussion in Play mode Drum editor on page 582 Inputting notes in the event display on page 583 Moving notes in the event display on page 584 Unpitched percussion imported from MIDI files When importing MIDI files, Dorico Pro optionally interprets music for tracks set to use channel 10 as drum sets if Interpret channel 10 as General MIDI percussion is activated in the MIDI Import Options dialog.
Unpitched percussion Universal Indian Drum Notation Universal Indian Drum Notation Dorico Pro supports the Universal Indian Drum Notation system developed by Keda Music Ltd. Universal Indian Drum Notation has been designed primarily for tabla, but can also be applied to other Indian drums with two heads, such as nagara, dhol, dholak, mridangam, and pakhawaj.
Voices For many instruments, such as flute or trombone, each staff usually contains a single musical line in a single voice that is read from left to right along the staff. When multiple, independent lines must be shown in a single staff, each line can be a separate voice. The most common use for showing multiple voices in a single staff is in vocal music, when the soprano and alto lines share a single staff and the tenor and bass lines share another staff.
Voices Hiding/Showing voice colors Hiding/Showing voice colors You can show notes in different colors according to their voice, for example, to check which notes are in which voice. When voice colors are hidden, all notes appear black by default. Voice colors are randomly assigned, meaning colors do not refer to specific voices. Voice colors are considered annotations and are not printed by default. PROCEDURE ● Choose View > Note And Rest Colors > Voice Colors.
Voices Allowing/Disallowing noteheads in opposing voices to overlap Allowing/Disallowing noteheads in opposing voices to overlap You can allow/disallow the noteheads of unison notes in opposing voices to overlap in different contexts in each flow independently. For example, if you want to allow notes with and without rhythm dots to overlap but disallow half notes to overlap with shorter notes. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-N to open Notation Options. 2. Click Voices in the category list. 3.
Voices Note positions in multiple-voice contexts 2. Stem to stem, which does not allow noteheads to overlap. This voice order keeps notes in different voices separate. Dorico Pro positions notes by default with the noteheads partially overlapping, in order to minimize the horizontal space they occupy and to maintain the clarity of the rhythm.
Voices Note positions in multiple-voice contexts One voice Two voices vertically Three voices all still aligned in the same vertically aligned voice column Four voices with two voice columns Five voices with two voice columns RELATED LINKS Rhythm dot consolidation on page 1052 Swapping the order of voices Dorico Pro automatically positions notes with the noteheads partially overlapping, in order to minimize the horizontal space they occupy and maintain the clarity of the rhythm.
Voices Unused voices RELATED LINKS Stem direction on page 1412 Implicit rests in multiple-voice contexts on page 1314 Engrave toolbox on page 465 Changing the property scope on page 158 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 462 Changing the voice column of notes You can change the voice column, and therefore the horizontal order, of all notes in selected voices at individual rhythmic positions, independently of your per-flow settings.
Voices Notes crossed to staves with existing notes in other voices RELATED LINKS Inputting notes into multiple voices on page 187 Notes crossed to staves with existing notes in other voices When you create cross-staff beams by crossing notes to staves that already contain notes, the stem direction of the existing notes may change. This is due to how multiple voices at the same rhythmic position are handled in Dorico Pro.
Voices Slash voices ● By default, notes in slash voices are not played back. You can have multiple slash voices active at the same time. To accommodate all slash voices in multiple-voice contexts, Dorico Pro changes their staff position automatically. However, you can also change the staff position of rhythm slashes manually.
Voices Slash voices RELATED LINKS Changing the voice of existing notes on page 383 Engrave toolbox on page 465 Adding slash voices to percussion kits You can add slash voices to percussion kits, for example, to show the desired rhythm for a passage without specifying the instruments to be played. You can add multiple slash voices to the same kit, including slash voices with and without stems. NOTE Rhythm slashes in percussion kits only appear when the five-line staff presentation is used.
Voices Slash voices 2. Click Repeats in the category list. 3. In the Rhythm Slashes section, activate/deactivate Play slash voices. 4. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT All notes in slash voices project-wide are included in playback when Play slash voices is activated, and excluded when it is deactivated. When slash voices are included in playback, notes in slash voices play back with their input pitch.
Glossary A action The mechanism inside pianos that allows the hammers to strike the strings with different forces, depending on the strength with which the player depresses the corresponding key. It allows pianos to use a greater dynamic range, hence their full name “pianoforte”. anacrusis See pick-up bar. articulation (1) In music notation, symbols that indicate how a note should be played, typically affecting their onset (attack), release, or duration.
Glossary allowing incremental manipulation of the corresponding sound or effect, such as increasing/ decreasing the string vibrato intensity. You can specify the sound or effect that each CC switches to and controls in each sound library using expression maps. In Dorico Pro, each instrument track has 127 available MIDI CCs, each with a value range from 0 to 127. Because MIDI CC does not use notes on a MIDI keyboard, it allows you to use the full range of MIDI keyboard notes for note input.
Glossary D dead note A note played on a fretted instrument whose sound is muted to produce a sound that is more percussive than pitched. Usually produced by gently resting one hand on the string. Also known as a “muted”, “muffled”, “ghost”, or “silenced” note. In Dorico Pro, only notes belonging to fretted instruments, such as the guitar or banjo, can be dead notes. disclosure arrow A small arrow that is shown on all edges of the main window in Dorico Pro.
Glossary exploding The process of assigning music to more instruments than it was written for originally. Exploding music is often a key step in arranging and orchestrating music, such as when a piano piece is arranged for string quartet. See also reducing. F family Instruments of a similar kind that are typically bracketed together in a score, such as woodwind, brass, percussion, and strings. fermata A notation that indicates all notes at that position are held for longer than their notated length.
Glossary grace note A small note, often used to show an ornament or embellishment, that is not counted towards the number of beats in the bar; instead, it steals from the duration of either the preceding or the following rhythmic notes. Also known as an “arhythmic note”. In common practice, a grace note with a slashed stem is an acciaccatura, which is to be played as quickly as possible, either immediately before or at the rhythmic position of the note or chord that follows it.
Glossary I implicit rest A rest that is automatically shown around the notes you input. Its notated duration automatically adjusts according to the time signature and its position in the bar. Implicit rests can be suppressed between notes in a particular voice, which hides them. See also explicit rest. Insert mode A way of changing how notes are input. When Insert mode is activated, new notes push all subsequent notes in the same voice along by the input duration instead of overwriting existing notes.
Glossary lock duration Functionality that allows you to change the pitches of existing music while retaining existing rhythms. lyric Any text that is intended to be sung or spoken by an individual singer or group of singers. A lyric can be a whole word or an individual syllable in a multi-syllabic word. Lyrics are shown at each rhythmic position where a new word or syllable begins.
Glossary notation options Options that affect the way the music is notated, particularly concerning how notes and rests are grouped according to meter, rules for the extent of accidentals, and options for transposition. These options can be set independently for each flow in the Notation Options dialog. note input The standard method of adding notes to staves in sequence that is possible when the caret is active. The caret automatically advances to the next rhythmic position after each note is input.
Glossary PC Short for “program change” or “patch change”, it is a MIDI message that allows you to access different sounds by switching to the corresponding programs. Because programs can also include effects presets, they allow you to change to specific sounds quickly, which is particularly useful in live performances. You can specify the programs that each PC switches to in each sound library using expression maps. See also MIDI, CC, patch.
Glossary Print mode A mode in Dorico Pro that allows you to print and export the layouts in your project. See also modes. print preview area The main part of the window in Print mode where you can see a preview of what is going to be printed or exported as a graphic. See also Print mode. project A Dorico Pro file that can contain multiple flows and layouts. See also flow and layout.
Glossary Setup mode A mode in Dorico Pro where you can set up the fundamental elements of the project: instruments and the players that hold them, flows, layouts, and videos. You can also determine how they interact with each other, for example, by changing the players assigned to layouts. See also modes. SMuFL Short for “Standard Music Font Layout”, it is a font specification that maps all the different symbols required for music notation onto a standard layout.
Glossary only contains the staves required for that player, which is often a single staff and means multiple systems can fit on each page. See also system break, page break, casting off. system break The forced termination of a system of music at a particular rhythmic position, typically at a barline. Indicated in Dorico Pro with signposts. system formatting The distribution of bars into systems and systems into frames.
Glossary U upbeat See pick-up bar. V value line A visual representation of value over time in tracks or lanes in Play mode. Fully horizontal value lines indicate a constant value, while angled value lines indicate a smooth change in value within a given duration, usually between two points. See also constant point, linear point. vertical justification The spreading out of staves and systems across the full height of frames with as even a distribution of space as possible.
Index A a2. See player labels abbreviated dates 524 dynamics 874, 891 player labels 454 staff labels 113, 1358, 1360, 1361, 1391 tempo text 1428 absolute channel change actions 668 absolute tempo changes 1421 components 1422 Academico font 542 accelerando. See gradual tempo changes. See also trills accents. See articulations acciaccaturas.
Index added notes chord symbols 269 adding. See inputting additional endings 348, 349, 1274 voices 187, 1318, 1521 additive time signatures.
Index arpeggio signs (continued) engraving options 1097 filter 367 fingerings 926, 944, 945 formatting 559, 1099 grace notes 1104 handles 1100, 1103 inputting 285, 287, 292, 293 length 292, 293, 1100 moving 1102, 1103 muting in playback 624 panel 290, 293 playback 1104–1106 popover 287, 292 position 1097, 1100, 1102, 1104 rhythm slashes 1097 spacing 1102 swash 1098 symbols 559 types 287, 1099 voices 292, 293 arrangements accidentals in key signatures 983 flows 126 movements 126 arranger 92, 522 arranging 3
Index attack articulations 718 dynamics 874 playback 655 attribute playback techniques 680 audio buffer size 223, 224 device setup 49 dialog 77 exporting 76, 77 mixer 635 outputs in mixer 649 playback 640, 646 repeats 627 videos 150 volume 150, 635 warning 36 auditioning chords 370 MIDI devices 218 notes 218, 369, 370 augmented 212 accidentals 714 chord symbols 268, 801 figured bass 911 intervals 212, 286, 714, 911, 1088, 1089 trills 286, 1088, 1089 author name 386 changing 391 auto-save 79, 80 date and ti
Index bar repeats (continued) changing 370, 1291 changing number 1294 consolidating 1320 counts 1294 default settings 1291 deleting 379 dynamics 1291 engraving options 1291 filter 367 font style 1294, 1297 formatting 559 frame breaks 429 frequency 1295 grouping 1298, 1299 handles 1293 hiding counts 1296 highlights 1290, 1293 inputting 346, 347, 355 length 1293 moving 1292 moving counts 1297 multi-bar rests 1320 panel 347 parentheses 1296 phrase length 370, 1291 playback 370, 1291 popover 346 regions 1290 s
Index bars (continued) deleting contents 729 display 638, 640 divisions 730 duration 727 fixing number 428, 430, 432 glissando lines 1108 going to 376 grouping 1298, 1299 inputting 253, 256–258 length 727 moving 429, 432 multi-bar rests 1319, 1320 navigation 376 note grouping 23, 784, 785 numbers 744 panel 256, 257 pick-up bars 1461, 1462 popover 253, 256 repeat 1274, 1282, 1290 rests. See bar rests selecting 365 splitting 730 timecodes 1273 tuplets 1488 upbeats. See pick-up bars vibrato. See vibrato bar.
Index bend intervals 1120 appearance 1121 handles 1126, 1128, 1129 hiding 1120, 1121 microtonal 1120 showing 1121 bends guitar. See guitar bends. See also dives jazz. See jazz articulations. See also jazz ornaments vibrato. See vibrato bar bindings. See ties. See also laissez vibrer ties birds eyes. See fermatas black noteheads 1032, 1033 blank areas.
Index brackets (continued) templates 59 time signatures 1463, 1464, 1473 tuplets 1493 wings 793 Brandt-Roemer chord symbols 801 brass instruments fingerings 925, 935, 950 horn branch indicators 935, 950 parts 133 playing techniques 314 slide positions 951 transposition 107, 133 Bravura music font 542 breaking multi-bar rests 1319, 1322 tie chains 1451 breaks frame 429 page 429 system 431 breath marks 975, 976 appearance 370 deleting 379 inputting 281, 283, 284 moving 979, 980 multiple at same position 978
Index chains frames 513 ties 1439 Change Divisi dialog 1391 change labels condensing. See player labels divisi 1401 instruments 105–107 channel change actions 649, 655, 668 channels 635 changing 654 controls 635, 637 endpoints 648 expression maps 649, 655, 668.
Index chord symbols (continued) modal 269, 818 moving 816, 817 MusicXML import 819 navigation during input 270 no chord 269 omissions 269 pitch 131 playback 614, 615 players 272, 810, 816 polychords 269, 273 popover 165, 267 position 815 quality 274, 812 regions.
Index coda (continued) inputting 351 mid-system gap 1282, 1287 multiple 1283, 1284 sections 1282 size 1283, 1284 codec 146 codes 520 time 1270 col legno. See playing techniques collapsing.
Index concert pitch (continued) status display 36 viewing 131 concertina dragging 426 condensing 382, 398–400, 416, 437, 439, 447 calculations 441, 444 changing 439, 446, 447, 449, 451, 453 colors 459 default settings 439, 444, 453 deleting changes 453 dialog 449 disabling 414 divisi 414, 451, 1368 enabling 414 erased backgrounds 458 excluding groups 447 extra staves 441, 1373 filter 367 groups. See condensing groups hiding player labels 455 including groups 447 labels.
Index conventions (continued) playing techniques 1194 rehearsal marks 1258 rests 1312 tempo marks 1424 ties 1440 time signatures 1458 tremolos 1478 trills 1078 tuplets 1485 voices 1523 converting layouts to graphics files 692 notes into tuplets 1487 PDF 692 tuplets into normal notes 1488 copies printing multiple 689 Copy Staff Spacing dialog 427 copying 378–381 articulations 719 automation 605 barlines 127 chord diagram shapes 824 Chord mode 208 divisi 1396 dynamics 370, 596, 887 exploding 383 flows 63, 12
Index cues (continued) engraving options 854 filter 367 hiding 857, 858 highlights 871, 872 inputting 356, 358, 359 instrument names 863 instrument transpositions 863 instruments 357 labels. See cue labels length 861 lyrics 866 moving 856, 860, 864 multiple 867 notations included 865, 866 ornaments 866 overlapping 867 panel 357–359 placement 854, 862 playing techniques 866 popover 356, 357 position 854, 856 register 858 respelling notes 862 rests 163, 868, 869 rhythmic.
Index custom tonality systems (continued) importing 993 key signatures 997, 1003 octave divisions 999 panel 233 playback 1005 cut common time 983, 1459 cutting slash regions 1305 tie chains 1451 D da capo al coda 1282 al fine 1282 al segno 1282 font 1283 inputting 351 size 1283 word wrapping 1286 dal segno 1282 damping. See playing techniques dark theme 47 dashed barlines 238, 255, 258, 260, 733, 736, 1383, 1459.
Index deleting (continued) automation 607 bar number changes 757 bar repeats 379 barline joins 742 barlines 738 bars 253, 727–729 beams 767 beats 254, 727 braces 798 brackets 798 breath marks 379 caesuras 379 centered beams 773 clef overrides 137 clefs 837 comments 379, 388 condensing changes 453 cues 861 duplicate notes 382 dynamics 598, 887 empty pages 25 endpoints 651, 653 fermatas 379 figured bass 379 fingerings 935 flow heading changes 499 flow headings 409, 489, 504 flow numbers 501, 502 flows 128, 1
Index design (continued) time signatures 1474, 1475 wedges 1244 designation strings. See string indicators destination exporting files 538, 694 instruments 853 notes 946 devices audio 49 diagonal accidental stacking 710 diagrams chords. See chord diagrams harp pedaling 1156, 1158 dialogs 25 diamond noteheads 1034, 1035, 1046 accidentals 1070 harmonics 1068, 1071, 1073, 1074 percussion 1508 dimensions page size 700 paper size 700 diminished. See augmented diminuendo.
Index divisi (continued) shortening 1394 signposts 377 staff labels 1360, 1368, 1370, 1391, 1398, 1400, 1403 staff spacing 399 staves 400–402, 1393, 1396 text 1402 tutti 1395 unison labels 456, 1401 unison ranges 1396, 1397 vocal staves 1397, 1398 divisions of the octave. See octave divisions. See also EDO doits. See jazz articulations dolce. See dynamic modifiers dorian chord symbols 269, 818 DoricoBeep 221, 609 dots chord diagrams 820, 821, 826 guitar tapping 1132, 1135 rhythm. See rhythm dots.
Index duration (continued) horizontal lines 1225 jazz articulations 1147 lines. See duration lines locking 216 notated 682 notes 23, 155, 182, 183, 585, 682 pedal lines 1189 played 682 playing techniques 311, 315, 317, 1198, 1200, 1205 pre-roll 626 rests 182 slurs 1355 string indicators 956 terminology 14 tremolos 1483, 1484 vibrato bar lines 1139 duration before pitch note input 175 duration lines 1199, 1214 appearance 1203, 1207 default settings 1207 figured bass.
Index dynamics (continued) voice-specific 263, 265, 591, 594, 888 volume 884, 908 dynamics lanes 261, 591, 874 constant points 595 copying points 596 deleting points 598 editing 597 hiding 593 inputting points 594 linear points 595 moving points 597 showing 593 Dynamics panel 263, 265 E East Asian elision slurs 1030 hiding 1030 showing 1030 Edit Accidental dialog 1000 Edit Chord Diagram dialog 826 Edit Chord Diagrams dialog 828 Edit Chord Symbol Appearance dialog 804 Edit Chord Symbol Component dialog 806
Index enclosures (continued) tablature 1405, 1408, 1409 text 543, 555, 556, 1234, 1246 end barlines 736 end repeat barlines 255, 733, 736 inputting 258, 260 playthroughs 627 repeat endings 1274 endings additional 348, 349 playthroughs 1274 repeat.
Index enharmonic spelling (continued) notes 201, 214 respelling 214 ensembles 84, 102 adding 86, 102, 125 brackets 59, 788, 789 divisi 1390, 1391 groups 123, 125 staff grouping 59, 789 templates 59 envelopes dynamics 591, 597 equal division of the octave 992 equalization 637 equations tempo marks 249, 1437 erased backgrounds 557 bar numbers 745 dynamics 882 fingerings 942 hairpins 1419 lines 1235, 1241, 1246 padding 543, 556, 883, 1161, 1193, 1236, 1419 player labels 458 playing techniques 1192 staff lines
Index exporting (continued) watermarks 704 WAV files 76, 77 expression maps 655, 656 actions 661, 670 conditions 662, 670 creating 669–671 dialog 656, 666 dynamics 663 endpoints 648, 651, 655 exporting 672 file format 655, 672 filters 656 hiding playing techniques 1193 importing 672 MIDI 909 mutual exclusion groups 664, 669, 671 order 656 pitch 656, 669 playback techniques 656, 666, 670 playing techniques 679, 1193 resetting 665 switches 659, 667, 670 transpose 657, 659, 663 trills 1093 volume 909 Expressi
Index figured bass (continued) suspensions 336, 911, 915 transposing 215, 216 vertical position 911 file formats 702 audio 76 backups 81 expression maps 655, 672 frames 530 graphic slices 533 graphics files 702 MIDI 69 MusicXML 66 percussion maps 678 playback templates 640 tonality systems 994 videos 146 file names 695 graphic slices 537 ingredients 695 recipes 695 setting 695 tokens 520 files 63 different Dorico versions 61 exporting 63, 537–539, 692, 694 importing 63 loading into frames 530 missing fonts
Index fingering (continued) underlines 933 valved brass instruments 950 fingering slides 946 handles 946, 947 hiding 946 length 949 moving 947 resetting 947 showing 946 first and second endings. See repeat endings first master pages customizing 489 replacing 483, 484 first pages formatting 408 master pages 408, 482 page numbers 1153 first steps starting new projects 58, 59 first systems indents 1389 fit to paper 701.
Index flows (continued) tempo tracks 73 timecodes 90 titles 144, 145, 411 tokens 522 trimming 253, 728 videos 90, 146, 148, 149 voices 654 Flows panel 83, 90 hiding 90 showing 90 flutter-tongue. See playing techniques flz. See playing techniques folders backups 81, 82 export path 538, 694 follow tempo mode 625 font styles 540, 541 bar numbers.
Index Formatting panel 464, 466 forte.
Index fretted instruments (continued) slides 946 string indicators. See string indicators strings 122, 1054 tablature. See tablature tuning 108, 111, 120 front matter 963 dedications 964 player list 520 project information 963 running headers 966 full score layouts. See layouts full screen mode 45 full stop.
Index glissando lines (continued) system breaks 1111 text 1109, 1110 thickness 1108 tie chains 1113 types 288 global chord symbols 272, 800 figured bass 334, 910 properties 156, 158, 462, 474 glyphs accidentals 214, 1000 bracketed noteheads 1057, 1061, 1062 chord symbols 806 dynamics 907 fonts 542, 907 formatting 559 lines 1249, 1253 music symbols 559 noteheads 1038, 1041, 1044, 1045 pedal lines 1181 playing techniques 1190, 1206, 1207, 1209, 1212 symbols 1253 trills 1076, 1078 go to.
Index grand staff instruments (continued) cues popover 357 dynamics 263, 265, 875, 888 hiding staves 400–402, 420 MIDI recording 219 multi-bar rests 1319, 1321 slurs 227 staff grouping 59, 789 staves 739 swing playback 632 ties 203 vertical justification 420 graphic slices 126, 505, 533 color mode 537 deleting 540 exporting 538, 539 file formats 533 file names 537 handles 535 image resolution 537 inputting 534 moving 534, 535 renaming 537 shape 535 showing 533 size 535 Graphic Slices panel 470 graphics acc
Index guitar bends (continued) length 1124 lines 1121 microtonal 300, 1118, 1120 moving 1124 parentheses 1114 playback 1114 popover 288, 298, 299 position 1121 post-bends 300, 1118 pre-bends 1117 releases 1114, 1121 runs 1114, 1124, 1126 segments 1126, 1129 shape 1124 spacing 1121 tablature 1405 thickness 1121 guitar post-bends 1118 bend intervals 1120, 1121 chords 1118 deleting 1124 handles 1129 inputting 300 microtonal 300, 1118 moving 1124 shape 1124 guitar pre-bends 1117 accidentals 1123 bend intervals
Index handles (continued) hairpins 878, 898 jazz articulations 1145 lines 1222 lyrics 1016, 1018, 1021–1023 note spacing 567, 569 notehead brackets 1061, 1062, 1064 octave lines 843, 846, 849, 850 pedal lines 1168, 1175, 1183 percussion legends 1514 playing techniques 1196, 1200 releases 1126, 1129 repeat endings 1276, 1278 selecting 475, 569 slash regions 1306 slurs 1332, 1345–1347 staff spacing 423 stems 1417, 1482 string indicators 960 system spacing 423 tempo marks 1425, 1434 ties 1451, 1453, 1455 tril
Index hiding (continued) divider arrows 1398 divisi change labels 1391 divisi colors 373, 1397 divisi staff labels 1360, 1400, 1403 divisi staves 400–402 dynamics 884–886, 891 dynamics lanes 593 East Asian elision slurs 1030 empty staves 400 figured bass 336, 911–913, 915 fingering slides 946 fingerings 934, 938 flared hairpins 900 flow headings 409 flow page numbers 411 flow titles 411, 966 flows 130, 434 Flows panel 90 glissando line text 1110 graphic slices 533 guitar bend hold lines 1122 guitar bend in
Index hold lines (continued) moving 1124, 1126 position 1121 showing 913, 915, 1122 holds. See pauses Holds and Pauses panel 284 Hollywood-style trills 1090 intervals 1092 position 1092 showing 1091 hooks length 1281, 1491 lines 1239, 1246 octave lines 849, 850 pedal lines 1168, 1172, 1181–1183 playing techniques 1199, 1202 repeat endings 1281 tuplets 1491 horizontal alignment dynamics 879 ornaments 1078 staves 414 systems 414 text 529, 543, 545, 553 horizontal lines. See lines.
Index indents (continued) staff labels 1361 systems 414, 570 independent voice playback 622 changing endpoints 654 inputting notes 583 piano roll editor 582 playing techniques 315, 317 index rehearsal marks 1261 Indian drum notation 833, 1520 Indiana chord symbols 801 indicators audio engine 36 caret 888 clefs 840, 841 condensing 454 divisi 1401 fingerings 229, 950 frame fullness 424 horn branches 950 MIDI input 36 octaves 840, 841 players 454 string fingerings 951, 952, 1054 system fullness 568 tempo.
Index inputting (continued) left-hand fingerings 231 line text 1229 lines 311, 315, 317, 325–327 lyrics 331, 334 markers 340, 616 master page changes 495 master page sets 480 master pages 483, 484 metronome marks 246, 251, 252 microtonal accidentals 714 MIDI 218, 219, 225, 603 mouse input 167, 168, 182 music symbols 1212, 1239, 1240 mutual exclusion groups 671 nested slurs 1340 nested tuplets 1486 notehead brackets 1058 noteheads 1044, 1045 notes 170, 175, 178, 181, 184, 192, 219, 583 notes in multiple voi
Index instrument names 137, 1357 alignment 141 changing 140 cues. See cue labels Endpoint Setup dialog 649 hiding 1360 length 141, 1360 mixer 635 numbering 104, 1358, 1364 Play mode 589, 635, 649 resetting 141, 144 saving as default 141 showing 1360 staff labels 141, 521, 1358, 1360 tokens 521 tracks 589. See also instrument tracks instrument picker 86 instrument pitches. See instrument transpositions instrument tracks 588, 589 automation.
Index integers metronome marks 1433 intensity dynamics 263, 265, 370, 591, 884, 908 interactive key commands map 52 interchangeable time signatures 1459 inputting 238, 240–242 specifying for individual bars 1459 interface 27 interspersion accidentals 710 intervals add intervals popover 212 auto-save 81 chord symbols 268, 801 dips 1136 figured bass 911, 922 fretted instruments 120 guitar bends.
Index key commands (continued) defining 49 finding 53 galley view 46 keyboard layouts 55 languages 55 maps 52 MIDI 54 mouse input 153 muting 623, 624 navigation 34, 375, 376 notehead sets 1046 page view 46 playback 620 removing 55 resetting 55 searching 52, 53 soloing 623, 624 text formatting 329, 548 key signatures 983 accidentals 708, 983, 1000 appearance 985 atonal 985 barlines 735, 986 cancellation style 985 cautionary 991 changes 735, 983, 986 changing 370 clefs 986 custom 994, 995, 997, 999, 1000, 10
Index layout frame chains 514 layout names 137, 139 accidentals 139 changing 139 resetting 139 text tokens 520 layout numbers 88 order 132 renumbering 133 layout options 25, 93 bar numbers 744, 745, 748, 751 copying to other layouts 459, 461 dialog 93 saving as default 93 searching 93 Layout Options dialog 93 layout selector 29 order of layouts 132 switching layouts 40 layouts 24, 88, 96, 128, 437 accidentals 214 adding flows 130 adding pages 406 adding players 130 bar numbers 744, 748–750, 760 blank stave
Index layouts (continued) repeat marker text 1286 restoring 133 running headers 411, 966 scale size 701 selecting 29 settings 93 sorting 132 staff grouping 794 staff labels 521, 1360, 1400, 1403 staff size 397 staff spacing 398, 399, 420, 554 staves 400–402 switching 40 system dividers 1385 system formatting 398, 414, 420, 431, 459 system objects 1386–1388 tabs 31, 42 tacet al fine 1320 tacets 434–436 text 482, 554, 558 time signatures 1463, 1464, 1474 timecodes 1265, 1271, 1273 titles 478, 482, 500 tokens
Index levels channels 635 dynamics. See dynamic levels nested tuplets 1486 libraries chord diagrams 828 fretted instrument tunings 122, 123 percussion 673 sound 575, 578, 640, 655, 656, 673 lifts jazz articulations. See jazz articulations pedal lines. See pedal retakes ligado. See hammer-ons light swing 630, 634 light theme 47 line breaks player labels 457 repeat markers 1286 line spacing 397, 543, 545, 550.
Index linking dynamics 370, 905, 906 flow names 144 flow titles 144 groups of dynamics 903 master pages 483, 484, 489 music to frames 515, 516 percussion maps to VST/MIDI 655 slurs 370, 1343, 1344 lists comments 388 players 520, 965 little finger. See pinky finger loading MIDI instruments 577 playback templates 646 sounds 577, 646 video files 148 VST instruments 577 local chord symbols 272, 800 figured bass 334, 910 properties 156, 158, 462, 474 locations backups folder 82 lock duration.
Index maps expression 655 key commands 52 percussion 673 marcato. See articulations margins changing 396, 570 chord diagrams 823 flow headings 410, 497 hiding 373 music frames 412 MusicXML files 66 pages 393, 396 staves 412, 570 tacets 436 mark-up. See comments. See also annotations markers 1264 appearance 1264 comments.
Index metronome click. See click metronome marks 1420, 1430 appearance 1422, 1423 beat units 247, 370, 1430, 1431 changing 370, 612, 1431 click 221 components 1422, 1423 decimal places 251, 252, 1431, 1433 equations 249, 1437 fonts 1429 hiding 1429 inputting 246, 251, 252 multiple positions 1386 parentheses 1422 playback 221, 638, 1431, 1433 popover 246 range 1431 selecting 361 showing 1429 size 1429 values 370, 612, 1431 vertical positions 1386 mezzo dynamics. See dynamics soprano clef.
Index MIDI instruments (continued) loading 577 numbering 576 MIDI Quantize Options dialog 71 MIDI recording 218, 219 audio buffer size 223, 224 click settings 221 count-in 222 devices 225.
Index moving (continued) flow headings 410, 423 frames 507, 508 fret numbers 831 glissando lines 1111 grace notes 970, 971, 1050 graphic slices 534, 535 guitar bends 1124 hammer-ons 1138, 1140 harp pedal diagrams 1163 hold lines 1124 instruments 112, 125 jazz articulations 1145, 1146 key signatures 988 lines 1218, 1219, 1221, 1222 lyric extender lines 1022 lyric hyphens 1022 lyrics 875, 1017, 1018, 1020, 1024–1027 markers 1267, 1268 MIDI data 606 navigating.
Index music (continued) editing 167 fixing into frames 430 fixing into systems 432 symbols. See music symbols music area 32 event display.
Index navigation (continued) note input 175, 177, 178, 198 notes 374 pages 375 print preview area 34, 685 rhythmic grid 169 Write mode 374 nested slurs 1330, 1340 tuplets 1486 New Master Page dialog 484 new projects starting 58 templates 57, 59 New York chord symbols 801 niente hairpins 888 changing 889 circle 888 inputting 261, 263, 265 styles 889 text 888 ninth chord diagrams 165 no chord symbols 269 nodes 1067 changing 1069 non-arpeggio signs.
Index note input (continued) percussion kits 193, 196, 197 pitch 181 playing notes back 369 register selection 177 repitching notes 216 rests 1313 retrospective recording 220 rhythmic grid 169 starting 174 stem direction 197 tablature 178, 198 ties 203 tuplets 208 voices 187 Note Input Options dialog 165 chord diagrams 822 chord symbols 271 figured bass 911 note spacing 465, 562–564, 682, 774 activating 465 barlines 739 changing 562, 564, 567 copying to other layouts 461 cross-staff beams 774 default 562 d
Index notes (continued) brackets. See bracketed noteheads brass fingerings 950 changing pitch 214, 216 chord diagrams 821 chords 206, 208 colors 459, 1055, 1522 condensing. See condensing copying 379–381, 719 crossing to other staves 381, 773 cues 854, 867 custom scale size 1049 dead notes 1136 default settings 1032, 1405 deleting 379, 587, 727, 1481 deselecting 369 dotted 186, 764, 784 drum editor 584 durations 155, 182, 183, 585, 682 dynamics 261, 591, 874.
Index notes (continued) tuplets 1485, 1487 types 155 unbeaming 767 undamped 1449 unisons 1523 unscaling 1488 velocity 599. See also velocity lanes voices 187, 383, 384 Notes panel 152, 155 showing more note durations 155 Notes toolbox 153 scissors 1451 November music font 542 numbers backups 81 bar repeats 1294 bars 744, 756 beam lines 777 figured bass.
Index opening (continued) MusicXML files 60 projects 58–61, 80 tabs 42 templates 59 tracks 617 transport window 638 video tutorials 57 video window 149 windows 45 optical spacing cross-staff beams 774 optimized staves 398–400. See also condensing optional notes.
Index overlapping (continued) barlines 743 braces 795, 797 brackets 795, 797 cues 867 notes 183, 1521, 1523, 1524 slash regions 1302 slurs 1331 staves 394, 397, 398, 416 text 554 ties 1440 voices 1521, 1523, 1524 overline text 329, 543, 546, 548 Override Percussion Noteheads dialog 1509 overrides chord symbols 803, 808, 809 clefs 133–135, 137, 838, 839 condensing 447 endpoints 651 flow headings 492, 500 layouts 133–137 master pages.
Index page view 38 arrangements 39 changing to 46 flows 385 pages adding 406 arrangements 39 assigning flow headings 497 assigning master pages 495 background color 48 breaks. See frame breaks changing view 46 color 48 deleting 406, 492 dragging 376 editing 490, 492 exporting 539, 691, 692, 697 extracts. See graphic slices flow headings 501 formatting 490, 963 frames.
Index parent styles paragraph styles 543, 545 parentheses accidentals 709, 716, 1070 bar repeat counts 1294, 1296 dynamics 881 fingerings 228, 229, 938 fret numbers 1114, 1119 ghost notes. See bracketed noteheads guitar bend releases 1121 guitar bends 1114, 1117 harmonics 1070 metronome marks 1422, 1423 noteheads. See bracketed noteheads octave line numerals 842 pedal continuation signs 1186 percussion notes.
Index pedal lines (continued) position 1174, 1177, 1180 releases 1181 removing retakes 1173 retakes. See pedal retakes signposts 377 splitting 1179 staff-relative placement 1174 start signs 1180, 1181, 1186 symbols 559 text 1186–1188 thickness 1185 types 313, 1167 pedal retakes 1168 adding 313, 318–320 alignment 1180 grace notes 1180 handles 1168 notes 1174, 1180 pedal level 1171 position 1180 removing 1173 types 1170 pedals harp pedaling. See harp pedaling piano. See pedal lines percussion 1500 drum sets.
Index piano (continued) hand marks. See lines level changes 1168, 1173 pedal lines. See pedal lines playback 1189 reduction. See reducing. See also condensing retakes 1168, 1173 slurs 227 substitution fingering 927 piano roll editor 582 changing note durations 683 deleting notes 587 event display. See event display independent voice playback 582 inputting notes 583 instrument tracks 589 moving notes 584 note length 585 played vs.
Index plain font bar numbers 749 figured bass 920, 921 fingerings 936 multi-bar rests 1322 playing techniques 1190 string indicators 954 time signatures 1474, 1475 tuplets 1498 Play mode 19, 572 channel strips 637 deleting notes 587 drum editor 582 Endpoint Setup dialog 649 event display 580 exporting expression maps 672 expression maps 655, 666 inputting notes 583 loading sounds 577, 578 MIDI instruments 576, 577 mixer 635, 637 moving notes 584 note durations 585, 682, 683 overrides 683 panels 35, 572, 57
Index playback (continued) voices 622, 654 volume 369, 624, 635 playback options 25, 579 dialog 579 dynamics 908 pedal lines 1189 repeats 627 saving as default 579 searching 579 slurs 1355 swing playback 631 timing 725, 1104 tremolos 1483 trills 1093 Playback Options dialog 579 playback techniques 648, 670, 679, 680, 718, 1190 attribute 680 combinations 666, 670 creating 680 deleting 671, 680 direction 680 editing 680 endpoints 648 expression maps 655, 656 fallback 680 mutual exclusion groups 671 percussio
Index players (continued) naming 137, 139, 140 numbering instruments 104 ossia staves 1378 panel 83, 84 part layouts.
Index playthroughs (continued) optional notes. See bracketed noteheads repeats 627, 629, 1275 total number 1274 plops. See jazz articulations plucked instruments arpeggio fingering 944, 945 fingerings 228, 926, 939 popover 231 slides 946 string indicators. See string indicators strings 1054 tablature.
Index position (continued) jazz articulations 1146 key signatures 986 lines 1217 new items 167 notes in multiple-voice contexts 1523 octave lines 847, 848 order 851 pauses 977 pedal lines 1177 resetting 373 rhythm dots 1410 slurs 1326, 1329, 1337 staccato 722 string indicators 958 time signatures 1458 trill intervals 1092 tucking index 851 vertical order 851 videos 149 possibile. See dynamic modifiers post-bends. See guitar post-bends pre-bends. See guitar pre-bends pre-dives.
Index projects (continued) backups 81 default font styles 551 different Dorico versions 61 exporting 67, 72, 75 exporting flows 64, 65 flows 63–65, 126, 145, 385 font styles 551 frame rates 151 full screen mode 45 importing flows 63, 64, 66 layouts.
Index ratios grace notes 970 note spacing 563, 564 swing playback 630 tuplets 1496–1498 re-strikes. See guitar pre-bends recent projects 61 recipes 695 recording click settings 221 count-in 222 input pitch 181 MIDI 218, 219, 223, 625, 638 retrospective recording 220, 638 tempo 625 Recover Auto-saved Projects dialog 80 recovering 220 backups 81 files 79–81 notes 220 rectangle above systems. See system track bar number enclosures 745, 746 chord enclosures 1408 colored. See signposts music. See music frames.
Index repeat endings (continued) inputting 344, 347–349 length 1276, 1278 MIDI recording 221 moving 1277, 1278 multiple positions 1277, 1386, 1387 MusicXML files 1281 number of playthroughs 1274 optional notes. See bracketed noteheads panel 347, 349 playback 627, 628 playthroughs 1274, 1275 popover 344, 347, 348 position 1276, 1277 segments 1274, 1277 selecting 361, 364–366 system breaks 1278 text 1279 types 344 vertical positions 1386 repeat jumps.
Index resetting (continued) page numbers 495 pages 406, 496 paragraph styles 543, 551 part layouts 133 percussion maps 673 playback overrides 683 playback techniques 680 playback templates 646 player names 139 playing techniques 1207 position 373, 851 rhythmic feel 634 secondary beams 778 solo states 624 staff grouping 798 staff labels 144 staff spacing 425 staves 401, 402 stemlets 781 stems 1417 swing playback 634 tempo 1421 text 551 transposition 137 trill intervals 1090 velocity 601 voice order 1526 vol
Index rhythm slashes (continued) counts 1307–1309 default settings 1302 deleting 379 designs 1302 engraving options 1302 filter 367 font style 1294, 1297, 1307 frequency 1308 hiding counts 1309 hiding rests 1304 highlights 1301 inputting 189, 347, 354 moving 1303, 1305 moving counts 1310 panel 347 parentheses 1309 pasting notes into 380 percussion kits 113, 118, 193, 1529 pitch 189, 1529 placement 1311 playback 1529 popover 346, 354 regions 1300, 1307 rests 1304 rhythm dots 1302 splitting 1305 staff positi
Index saving 57, 79 audio 72, 76 auto-save.
Index segments (continued) guitar bends 1124, 1126, 1129 lines 1222 playing technique continuation lines 1204 playthroughs 1275 repeat endings 348, 349, 1275, 1276, 1278 slurs 1345, 1346 tuplets 1488 segno 1282 font 1283 inputting 351 multiple 1283, 1284 sections 1282 size 1283 selecting 37, 360, 361, 363, 369, 374 bars 364, 365 beats 366 blue 905, 1343 changing the selection.
Index shape (continued) chord diagrams 820, 824–826, 828 frames 508 graphic slices 535 guitar bends 1124, 1126, 1129 guitar pre-bends 1128 multi-segment slurs 1347 notehead brackets 1061, 1062, 1065 noteheads 1033, 1037, 1038 rehearsal mark enclosures 1256, 1257 slurs 1330, 1332, 1345–1348, 1350, 1353, 1354 ties 1451 tuplet brackets 1491, 1493, 1494, 1496 sharing staves. See condensing. See also divisi sharps.
Index size (continued) multi-bar rests 1321 noteheads 1033, 1038, 1041, 1044, 1045 notes 853, 1049 ossia staves 1380 pages 93, 394, 700 paper 700, 701 playing techniques 1191 rastral 416 rehearsal marks 1263 repeat markers 1283 segno symbols 1284 space 416 staff labels 1359 staves 93, 397, 416–418 string indicators 955, 956 system objects 397, 417, 418 tempo marks 1429 time signatures 1463, 1464 tracks 588, 617 unit of measurement 49 video window 150 slants beams 769, 973 octave lines 844, 845 pedal line h
Index slurs (continued) height 1352 inputting 227, 308, 1340 inverting 1327, 1337, 1338 large pitch ranges 1332 length 1343 linking 370, 1343, 1344 moving 1342, 1348, 1350 multi-segment 1347 muting 624 nested 1330 nested slurs 1340 notehead brackets 1063 ornaments 1081 overlapping 1331, 1332 panel 155 placement 851, 1326, 1327, 1329, 1330, 1337, 1338 playback 227, 579, 622, 1355 position 851, 1325, 1326, 1328–1330, 1337 pull-offs 308, 1134, 1135 ranges 1332 rotating 1350 segments.
Index spacing (continued) articulations 722 barlines 738 bracketed noteheads 1057 caesuras 284 chord diagrams 821 clefs 834 condensing 414, 437 cross-staff beams 774 cues 562, 854 frame fullness 424 frets 120 galley view 38 grace notes 562 gradual dynamics 902 guitar bends 1121 key signatures 987 layout options 93 lyrics 563, 564, 1015, 1017, 1018, 1020 notes.
Index staff labels (continued) percussion 113, 1367, 1505, 1515 player labels 454 project templates 59 resetting 144 showing 1360, 1361 size 1359 systems 1361 tokens 521 transposing instruments 1357, 1362–1364 uppercase 1367 staff lines erasing 458, 931, 942, 954, 1235 number 403, 404, 1505, 1506 ossia staves 1381 slurs 1328 stem direction 1414 string indicators 954 tablature 120, 1404 thickness 1372 ties 1440 staff position cues 854, 856 lines 1100, 1221, 1224, 1226 note input 196 percussion 1507, 1508, 1
Index starting (continued) timecode values 1271 workspaces 40 status bar 36 selection tools 37 view types 38 status display 36 staves 14, 1371 adding 404, 405, 1373, 1375 adding ossias 1379 arranging tools 378 articulations 725 bar numbers 749, 751, 752 bar rests. See bar rests barlines 467, 739, 741, 1383 beaming 773–775 blank.
Index stem direction 1412 beam groups 1414 beam placement 768, 775 centered beams 772 changing 383, 867, 1302, 1415, 1416 chords 1413 condensing 439, 449, 451 cues 867 default settings 1414 drum sets 116 filters 367 grace notes 968, 969, 973 guitar pre-bends 1123 middle line 1412, 1414 multiple-voice contexts 1412 notes crossed to other staves 773, 1527 notes on middle line of staff 1412, 1414 percussion kits 113, 116, 163, 197, 1516, 1518 pitch crossing 439, 449 resetting 769, 1417 rhythm slashes 1302, 14
Index string shift indicators 951 angles 951 direction 952, 1054 thickness 951 strings adding 120 bends. See guitar bends changing 1054, 1407 changing pitch 120 chord diagrams 821, 826, 828 deleting 120 fingering 939, 1054. See also string indicators fretted instruments 86, 108, 120 hammer-ons. See hammer-ons harmonics 1067 indicators. See string indicators notes out of range 1055, 1407 numbers. See string indicators pull-offs. See hammer-ons resetting 1407 slurs. See hammer-ons tapping.
Index swing playback 629, 630 custom rhythmic feel 633 disabling 633 editing 634 enabling 248, 631, 632 popover 248 ratios 630 resetting 634 rhythmic feel 633, 634 tempo 634 triplets 630 units 634 switches 659, 667 creating 669, 670 switching flows 375, 376 frame handles 509 graphic slice handles 536 handles 475 layouts 28, 40 note spacing handles 569 notes to percussion instruments 1503 staff spacing handles 423 tabs 43 syllables dynamics 895 lyrics 1010 position 1015 tempo marks 1434 types 1010 symbols a
Index system track 364 deleting music 728 hiding 365, 373 inputting bars 258 inputting beats 258 selecting music 365, 366 systemic barlines 737 braces 787, 793 brackets 787, 793 hiding 737 secondary brackets 790, 792 showing 737 sub-brackets 790, 792 sub-sub-brackets 792 text alignment 543, 553 systems bar numbers 744, 752, 753 barlines 737 breaks. See system breaks casting off 427, 428 changing indents 1389 chord symbols 816 coda gap 1287 condensed staves. See condensing dividers.
Index tambourine. See unpitched percussion. See also playing technique-specific noteheads tanto.
Index tenuto. See articulations terminal lines 1216, 1239, 1246 terminology British vs. American English 14 note durations 14 text 540, 548 abbreviated tempo text 1428 alignment 329, 529, 543, 545, 548, 553 annotations 1216, 1246 backgrounds 557 borders 527, 543, 555, 556, 1234 character styles 546, 547 codes.
Index thumbs 939 fingerings 939, 945 inputting 231 popover 229, 231 tick barlines 255, 258, 260, 733, 736 breath marks 976 tie chains 1439 articulations 721, 1439 bracketed noteheads 1059 clefs 834 deleting 1450 glissando lines 1113 selecting 1439 slurs 1325–1327 splitting 1451 stem direction 1415 tablature 1439 tremolos 1479 ties 22, 1439, 1442, 1447 accidentals 1448 appearance 1442 articulations 721, 725, 1439 bracketed noteheads 1059 breaking 1451 cautionary accidentals 709, 1070 chains.
Index time signatures (continued) hiding 1473 inputting 237, 238, 241, 242 Insert mode 193 interchangeable 1459 irregular 1459 large 1463 MIDI recording 219 moving 1470–1473 multiple positions 1386, 1387 non-power of two 1459 note grouping 23, 764, 784 noteheads 1467 numerators 1457, 1459, 1465, 1466 open 1459, 1465, 1468 panel 240 parentheses 238, 241, 1465, 1468 pick-up bars 239, 243, 244, 1459, 1461, 1462 placement 1458 polymeter 241–244, 1457 popover 238 position 241, 242, 1464, 1469, 1473 rest groupin
Index tones intervals. See whole steps. See also pitch microtones. See microtones. See also quarter tones playback. See click tongue clicks. See playing techniques toolbar 28 hiding 28 transport options 28, 29 workspace options 28, 29 toolboxes 36 Engrave 465 Notations 152, 160 Notes 152, 153 Play 572, 573 tools 36 arranging. See arranging selecting 36, 37 timecodes 1270 touched pitch 1067 harmonics 1071 track names MIDI import 70 tracks 588 automation. See automation lanes chords.
Index tremolos 1477 angles 1478 appearance 1478, 1480 articulations 678 beams 1480 default settings 1478 deleting 1481 duration 1483 engraving options 1478 formatting 559, 1480 inputting 345, 347, 352, 353 measured 1477 moving strokes 1482 multi-note 345, 1477, 1480 number of strokes 1479 panel 347, 353 placement 1478 playback 622, 678–680, 1483, 1484 popover 345, 352 position 1478, 1482 single-note 345, 1477 speed 1480 strokes.
Index tuplet brackets (continued) length 1491 moving 1491 position 1485 showing 1493 tuplet numbers 1496, 1497 appearance 1497, 1498 font 1498 hiding 1497 horizontal position 1498 tuplet ratios. See tuplet numbers tuplets 1485 accidentals 199 appearance 1486, 1493, 1496, 1497 articulations 225, 720 barlines 1488 beams 778, 1491 beat units 211 brackets.
Index underlines fingerings 933 text 329, 543, 546, 548 ungrouping dynamics 904 playing techniques 1206 Unicode accidentals 1000 lines 1249, 1253 music symbols 559 noteheads 1041 playing techniques 1209 unison ranges 1396 colors 1397 unisons 1390 altered.
Index velocity lanes 591, 599, 600 changing velocity 600 hiding 600 resetting velocity 601 showing 600 verse numbers 1027 hiding 1027, 1028 lyric line numbers 1024 punctuation 1028 showing 1027, 1028 versions files 61 vertical alignment dynamics 903, 905 lines 1204 playing techniques 1204 text 528 vertical justification staves 399, 420 systems 399, 420 vertical lines. See lines.
Index videos (continued) volume 150 window 149, 150 Viennese accidental duration rule 715 view options 38, 704 background color 48 bar numbers 749 bar repeats 1293 changing 36 chord symbols 810, 815 colors 48 comments 386, 391 condensing 459 cues 871, 872 divisi 1397 exporting 704 figured bass 920 frame break signposts 431 full screen mode 45 galley view 38, 46 graphic slices 533 harp pedaling 1055 hiding 373 layouts 31, 40 mixer 638 moving music 375, 376 music area 32, 39, 46 notes 459, 1522 notes out of
Index voices (continued) rests 1312, 1314, 1323 rhythm dots 1052, 1053 rhythm slashes 189, 1302 selecting 361 showing 1304 slash regions 1304 slashes 189, 383, 1302, 1527, 1528 slurs 1329, 1337, 1339 status bar 36 stem direction 1412, 1416, 1516, 1518, 1521, 1527 swapping contents 384 swapping order 1525 switching between 187 ties 203, 1446, 1449 tremolos 1483 volta lines.
Index wiggly lines 1107, 1143, 1214 custom 1237, 1241, 1244 glissando lines 1107, 1109 hiding 1202 inputting 292–297, 326 jazz articulations 287, 290, 296, 297, 1143, 1147 playing techniques 1203 showing 1200, 1202, 1227 trills 1083, 1084 wildcards.
